[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2007040565A2 - Enhancing treatment of cancer and hif-1 mediated disoders with adenosine a3 receptor antagonists - Google Patents

Enhancing treatment of cancer and hif-1 mediated disoders with adenosine a3 receptor antagonists Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2007040565A2
WO2007040565A2 PCT/US2005/042551 US2005042551W WO2007040565A2 WO 2007040565 A2 WO2007040565 A2 WO 2007040565A2 US 2005042551 W US2005042551 W US 2005042551W WO 2007040565 A2 WO2007040565 A2 WO 2007040565A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
substituted
cancer
hif
adenosine
alkyl
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2005/042551
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2007040565A9 (en
WO2007040565A3 (en
Inventor
Pier Andrea Borea
Pier Giovani Baraldi
Stefania Merighi
Stephen Maclennan
Edward Leung
Allan Moorman
Original Assignee
King Pharmaceuticals Research & Development, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by King Pharmaceuticals Research & Development, Inc. filed Critical King Pharmaceuticals Research & Development, Inc.
Priority to EP05858564A priority Critical patent/EP1827445A2/en
Priority to CA002586420A priority patent/CA2586420A1/en
Priority to JP2007543474A priority patent/JP2008520746A/en
Priority to AU2005336924A priority patent/AU2005336924A1/en
Publication of WO2007040565A2 publication Critical patent/WO2007040565A2/en
Priority to IL183307A priority patent/IL183307A0/en
Publication of WO2007040565A9 publication Critical patent/WO2007040565A9/en
Publication of WO2007040565A3 publication Critical patent/WO2007040565A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A61K31/519—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim ortho- or peri-condensed with heterocyclic rings
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the use of adenosine receptor antagonists, preferably A 3 receptor antagonists, either alone or in combination with other agents for the treatment, prevention and/or management of diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-I ⁇ and/or increased HIF-I a activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disease).
  • adenosine receptor antagonists preferably A 3 receptor antagonists
  • the methods and compositions of the invention are particularly useful for preventing, treating, or ameliorating symptoms associated with a cancer, disease or disorder associated with hypoxia-inducible factor 1- ⁇ (HIF- l ⁇ ) using the A 3 receptor antagonists of the invention.
  • the present invention provides methods to inhibit the growth of tumors, particularly solid tumors, and more particularly hypoxic tumors.
  • Adenosine recently called a "primordial signalling molecule" (Linden, 2001, Annu. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol, Unital 41: 775-87), has the potential of influencing development, is present in and modulates physiological responses in all mammalian tissues.
  • the actions of adenosine are most prominent in tissues where oxygen demand is high and there is reduction in oxygen tension, i.e., within solid tumors, where cell proliferation is greater than the rate of blood vessel formation (Sitkovsky, 2004 Annu. Rev. Immunol. 22, 657-82; Fredholm, 2001, Pharmacol. Rev. 53, 527-552).
  • the tumor has local areas of hypoxia and adenosine accumulates to high levels (Hockel, 2001, J. Natl. Cancer Inst. 93, 266-76).
  • adenosine accumulates to high levels (Hockel, 2001, J. Natl. Cancer Inst. 93, 266-76).
  • significant levels of adenosine are present in the extracellular fluid of solid tumors (Blay, 1997, Cancer Res., 57, 2602-5), suggesting a role for this nucleoside in tumor growth.
  • Adenosine has been linked to tumor development. Increased adenosine concentration has been reported inside tumoral masses. It has been speculated that it represents the anti-tumor agent that prevents tumor growth in muscle tissue in vivo and that impairs malignant cell growth and survival in vitro. However, it is known that adenosine acts as cyto-protective agent during ischemic damage in brain and heart. Adenosine is known to be released in hypoxia. Numerous studies have shown adenosine to protect cells in the heart from ischemic damage. Adenosine has been shown to have protective roles in numerous animal models and in man (Am. J. Cardiol. 79(12A):44-48 (1997).
  • both the A 1 and A 3 receptors offer protection against ischemia (Am. J. Physiol., 273(42)H501- 505 (1997)). However, it is the A 3 receptor that offers sustained protection against ischemia (PNAS 95:6995-6999 (1998)).
  • the ability of adenosine to protect tumor cells against hypoxia has not been recognized by others prior to the instant invention.
  • Adenosine interacts with cell surface receptors that are glycoproteins coupled to different members of G protein family.
  • a 1 , A 2A , A 2B and A 3 adenosine receptors
  • Selective antagonists for the A 3 receptor have been proposed for use as anti-inflammatory and antiischemic agents in the brain.
  • a 3 antagonists have been under development as antiasthmatic, antidepressant, anti-arrhythmic, renal protective, antiparkinson and cognitive enhancing drugs.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,646,156 to Marlene Jacobson et al. describes the inhibition of eosinophil activation by using selected A 3 antagonists.
  • adenosine A 3 receptors to be responsible for long-term protection against ischemia (Liang and Jacobson, PNAS, 1998, 95:6995-6999). While the present inventors have hypothesized that adenosine plays a protective role in other cell types, including tumor cells, in addition to myocytes, no efforts have been made to limit the protective effect of adenosine on tumor cells.
  • Hypoxia-inducible factor (HIF)-I is a transcription factor that functions as a master regulator of oxygen homeostasis (Semenza, 2001, Trends MoI. Med. 7, 345-350.
  • HIF-I is aheterodimer composed of an inducibly-expressed HIF- l ⁇ subunit and a constitutively-expressed HIF-I ⁇ subunit (Epstein, 2001,Ce//, 107, 43-54). HIF-I ⁇ and HIF-I ⁇ mRNAs are constantly expressed under normoxic and hypoxic conditions (Wiener, 1996 Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 225, 485-488). The unique feature of HIF-I is the regulation of HIF-I ⁇ expression: it increases as the cellular O 2 concentration is decreased (Cramer, 2003, Cell, 112, 645-657, Pugh, 2003, Nat. Med. 9, 677-84).
  • HIF-I ⁇ is rapidly degraded by the ubiquitin proteasome system, whereas exposure to hypoxic conditions prevents its degradation (Minchenko, 2002 J Biol. Chem., 277, 6183-6187; Semenza, 2000, J. Appl Physiol, 88, 1474-1480).
  • HIF-I contributes to tumor progression and metastasis
  • Immunohistochemical analyses have shown that HIF- l ⁇ is present in higher levels in human tumors than in normal tissues (Zhong, 2000, Cancer Res. 60, 1541-5). Tumor progression is associated with adaptation to hypoxia, and there is an inverse correlation between tumor oxygenation and clinical outcome (Pugh, 2003, Ann. Med. 35, 380-90.; Semenza, 2000 J. Appl Physiol, 88, 1474-1480).
  • HIF-I activity in cells are correlated with tumorigenicity and angiogenesis in nude mice (Chen, 2003, Am. J. Pathol. 162,1283-91).
  • Tumor cells lacking HIF-I expression are markedly impaired in their growth and vascularization (Carmeliet, 1998, Nature 394, 485-90; Jiang, 1997, Cancer Res., 57, 5328- 5335 ; Maxwell, 1997, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 94, 8104-8109; Ryan, 1998 EMBOJ. 17, 3005-3015). Therefore, since HIF-l ⁇ expression and activity appear central to tumor growth and progression, HIF-I inhibition has become an appropriate anticancer target (Kung, 2000, Nat. Med. 6, 1335-40).
  • a neoplasm, or tumor is a neoplastic mass resulting from abnormal uncontrolled cell growth which can be benign or malignant. Benign tumors generally remain localized. Malignant tumors are collectively termed cancers.
  • malignant generally means that the tumor can invade and destroy neighboring body structures and spread to distant sites to cause death (for review, see Robbins and Angell, 1976, Basic Pathology, 2d Ed., W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, pp. 68-122). Cancer can arise in many sites of the body and behave differently depending upon its origin. Cancerous cells destroy the part of the body in which they originate and then spread to other part(s) of the body where they start new growth and cause more destruction.
  • Lung and prostate cancer are the top cancer killers for men in the United States.
  • Lung and breast cancer are the top cancer killers' for women in the United States.
  • One in two men in the United States will be diagnosed with cancer at some time during his lifetime.
  • One in three women in the United States will be diagnosed with cancer at some time during her lifetime.
  • cancer therapy may involve surgery, chemotherapy, hormonal therapy and/or radiation treatment to eradicate neoplastic cells in a patient ⁇ See, for example, Stockdale, 1998, "Principles of Cancer Patient Management", in Scientific American: Medicine, vol. 3, Rubenstein and Federman, eds., Chapter 12, Section IV). Recently, cancer therapy could also involve biological therapy or immunotherapy. All of these approaches pose significant drawbacks for the patient. Surgery, for example, may be contraindicated due to the health of the patient or may be unacceptable to the patient. Additionally, surgery may not completely remove the neoplastic tissue. Radiation therapy is only effective when the neoplastic tissue exhibits a higher sensitivity to radiation than normal tissue, and radiation therapy can also often elicit serious side effects.
  • Hormonal therapy is rarely given as a single agent and although can be effective, is often used to prevent or delay recurrence of cancer after other treatments have removed the majority of the cancer cells.
  • Biological therapies/immunotherapies are limited in number and may produce side effects such as rashes or swellings, flu-like symptoms, including fever, chills and fatigue, digestive tract problems or allergic reactions.
  • chemotherapeutic agents available for treatment of cancer.
  • a significant majority of cancer chemotherapeutics act by inhibiting DNA synthesis, either directly, or indirectly by inhibiting the biosynthesis of the deoxyribonucleotide triphosphate precursors, to prevent DNA replication and concomitant cell division ⁇ See, for example, Gilmmx et al, Goodman and Gilman's: The
  • agents which include alkylating agents, such as nitrosourea, anti-metabolites, such as methotrexate and hydroxyurea, and other agents, such as etoposides, campathecins, bleomycin, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, etc., although not necessarily cell cycle specific, kill cells during S phase because of their effect on DNA replication.
  • alkylating agents such as nitrosourea
  • anti-metabolites such as methotrexate and hydroxyurea
  • agents such as etoposides, campathecins, bleomycin, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, etc.
  • Other agents specifically colchicine and the vinca alkaloids, such as vinblastine and vincristine, interfere with microtubule assembly resulting in mitotic arrest.
  • Chemotherapy protocols generally involve administration of a combination of chemotherapeutic agents to increase the efficacy of treatment.
  • chemotherapy has many drawbacks (See, for example, Stockdale, 1998, "Principles Of Cancer Patient Management” in Scientific American Medicine, vol. 3, Rubenstein and Federman, eds., ch. 12, sect. 10).
  • Almost all chemotherapeutic agents are toxic, and chemotherapy causes significant, and often dangerous, side effects, including severe nausea, bone marrow depression, immunosuppression, etc.
  • many tumor cells are resistant or develop resistance to the chemotherapeutic agents.
  • those cells resistant to the particular chemotherapeutic agents used in the treatment protocol often prove to be resistant to other drugs, even those agents that act by mechanisms different from the mechanisms of action of the drugs used in the specific treatment; this phenomenon is termed pleiotropic drug or multidrug resistance.
  • drug resistance many cancers prove refractory to standard chemotherapeutic treatment protocols.
  • paclitaxel or docetaxel both taxane family medicaments
  • docetaxel administered at 100 mg/m 2 causes acute hypersensitivity reaction in 13% of patients, and severe hypersensitivity reaction in 1.2%. Due to these reactions, patients are normally premedicated with oral corticosteroids.
  • vincristine has been reported to be dose limited due to neurotoxicity.
  • An enhancing agent providing a neuro-protective effect is therefore desirable.
  • Chemotherapeutic agents are also costly to produce and provide to patients. If the agents can be used at reduced dosages, both the cost and the extent of undesirable side effects can be similarly reduced.
  • Another often-encountered challenge with chemotherapeutic treatment is limitations in effectiveness due to the cancerous growth or cells developing multidrug-resistance (MDR). As most cancer cells are genetically unstable they are prone to mutations likely to produce drug resistant cells.
  • MDR multidrug-resistance
  • Multi-drug resistance is the name given to the circumstance when a disease does not respond to a treatment drug or drugs.
  • MDR can be either intrinsic, which means the disease has never been responsive to the drug or drugs, or it can be acquired, which means the disease ceases responding to a drug or drugs that the disease had previously been responsive to MDR is characterized by cross-resistance of a disease to more than one functionally and/or structurally unrelated drugs.
  • MDR in the field of cancer is discussed in greater detail in “Detoxification Mechanisms and Tumor Cell Resistance to Anticancer Drugs,” by Kuzmich and Tew, particularly section VII "The Multidrug-Resistant Phenotype (MDR),” Medical Research Reviews, Vol. 11, No. 2, 185-217, (Section VII is at pp. 208- 213) (1991); and in “Multidrug Resistance and Chemosensitization: Therapeutic
  • MDR multi-drug resistance
  • P-gp pleitotropic-glycoprotein
  • MDR-I gene Endicott JA, Annu Rev Biochem 1989.
  • P-glycoprotein has been shown to play a major role in the intrinsic and acquired resistance of a number of human tumors.
  • Drugs that act as substrates for and are consequently detoxified by P-gp include the vinca alkaloids (vincristine and vinblastine), anthracyclines (Adriamycin), and epipodophyllotoxins (etoposide).
  • MDR-I gene has been identified as an additional risk factor in advanced ovarian cancer.
  • patients with phase III ovarian cancer were screened for MDR-I .
  • Ovarian cancer patients with high levels of MDR-I survived an average of 9.8 months.
  • the patients having low or no MDR-I expression survived an average of 30 months or more.
  • MRP multidrug resistance-associated protein
  • MDR has been reported that is neither P-gp nor MRP related. (Kellen editor, Alternative Mechanisms of Multidrug Resistance in Cancer, Birkhauser, 1995). The results obtained by inventors are consistent for using adenosine A 3 antagonists for countering P-gp or MRP multi-drug resistance, but not other forms of MDR.
  • ⁇ -[3-[[2-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)ethyl]methylamino]propyl]-3,4-dimethoxy- ⁇ -(l-methylethyl)benzeneacetonitrile (Verapamil) has been utilized as a medicament to counter the effect of P-gp associated MDR.
  • Verapamil blocks L-type calcium channels and is used as a potent vasodilator of coronary and peripheral vessels and decreases myocardial oxygen consumption. Due to the Verapamil physiological effects, MDR use of Verapamil must be limited to patients not having low blood pressure, congestive heart failure, sinoatrial (SA) or atrioventricular (AV) node conduction disturbances, digitalis toxicity, Wolff-Parkinson- White syndrome, and further not being medicated with beta-blockers or Quinidine.
  • SA sinoatrial
  • AV atrioventricular
  • U.S. Patent No. 6,210,917 to Carson et al. discloses the use of L-alanosine and other adenosine kinase inhibitors for countering MDR.
  • U.S. Patent No. 6,391,884 identifies ATP-depleting agents including 2-deoxyglucose, cyanine, oligomycin, valinomycin and azide, as well as salts and derivatives thereof. Approaches relying upon ATP depletion or inhibition in countering MDR have yet to receive clinical success.
  • chemotherapeutic agent enhancers and compounds that prevent or counter MDR either alone or with ATP depleting agents in cancer treatment but without the limitations imposed by Verapamil.
  • the use of a combination of therapeutic agents is common in the treatment of neoplastic diseases.
  • paclitaxel TaxolTM
  • U.S. Patent No. 5,908,835 to Bissery et al. claims synergy of using paclitaxel or docetaxel in combination with an anthracycline antibiotic such as daunorubicin or doxorubicin.
  • U.S. Patent No. 5,728,687 to Bissery et al. claims synergy of using paclitaxel or docetaxel in combination with an alkylating agent, epidophyllotoxin, antimetabolite, or vinca alkaloid.
  • adenosine receptor antagonists and in particular A 3 receptor antagonists. It is therefore an object of the present invention to provide compositions and methods of enhancing the treatment of neoplastic cells by minimizing or eliminating the protective effect of adenosine on cells with the use of adenosine A 3 receptor antagonists.
  • compositions and methods suitable for countering P-gp and/or MRP associated multi-drug resistance It is further an object of the present invention to provide compositions and methods that reduce side effects of other currently used anti-cancer agents and/or therapies, in particular taxane induced hypersensitivity.
  • the present invention is based, in part, on the surprising discovery by the inventors that adenosine, a purine nucleoside present within hypoxic regions of solid tumors, modulates hypoxia-inducible factor 1 (HIF-I) expression.
  • HIF-I hypoxia-inducible factor 1
  • adenosine a purine nucleoside present within hypoxic regions of solid tumors, modulates hypoxia-inducible factor 1 (HIF-I) expression.
  • HIF-I a heterodimeric transcription factor composed of HIF-I a and HIF- l ⁇ subunits
  • angiogenesis for reviews see, e.g., Semenza 2000, Nature, 3: 721-32
  • the inventors have found that in the human A375 melanoma cell line adenosine up-regulates HIF- l ⁇ protein expression in response to hypoxia in a dose- and time-dependent manner.
  • the response to adenosine was not blocked by A 1 , A 2A or A 2B receptor antagonists, while it was abolished by A 3 receptor antagonists.
  • the inventors have found that Cl-IB-MECA, an adenosine analogue binding with high affinity to A 3 receptors, mimicked adenosine effect in hypoxic cells. Furthermore, A 3 receptor antagonists prevented HIF- l ⁇ protein accumulation in response to A 3 receptor stimulation.
  • the response to adenosine is generated at the cell surface since the inhibition of A 3 receptor expression, by using small interfering RNA, abolished the nucleoside effects.
  • the main intracellular signaling pathways sustained by A 3 receptor stimulation in hypoxia involve p44/p42 mitogen-activated protein kinase (MAPK) and p38 MAPK activation.
  • MAPK mitogen-activated protein kinase
  • the inventors have thus found for the first time that adenosine plays a critical role in HIF- l ⁇ regulation in hypoxia.
  • the inventors have found that compounds which are antagonists of the adenosine receptors, preferably the A 3 receptor, inhibit the protective effect of adenosine on growing tumor cells when such cells are starved of oxygen (/. e. , before an adequate vasculature is developed, or when anti-angiogenesis agents are administered.
  • the antagonists of the invention can bind in the same site as adenosine, or can be allosteric antagonists (i.e., bind at a site different from where adenosine binds, but adversely affect the ability of adenosine to bind to the site or adversely affect the ability of adenosine, once bound to the adenosine receptors, particularly A 3 receptors, to protect growing tumor cells).
  • the present invention relates to methods for the treatment, prevention, and/or management of diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF- l ⁇ and/or increased HIF- l ⁇ activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) by using adenosine receptor antagonists, particularly A 3 receptor antagonists alone or in combination with A 1 , A 2 A, A 2 B receptor antagonists.
  • adenosine receptor antagonists particularly A 3 receptor antagonists alone or in combination with A 1 , A 2 A, A 2 B receptor antagonists.
  • the A 1 , A 2A and A 2 B receptor antagonists may act through different pathways than the A 3 receptor antagonist, the combination of these antagonists with A 3 receptor antagonist may be beneficial in the treatment, prevention, and/or management of diseases or disorders, e.g., cancer.
  • the methods of the invention relate to treatment, prevention, and/or management of diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-I ⁇ and/or increased HIF-I ⁇ activity by using adenosine receptor antagonists, particularly A 3 receptor antagonists alone.
  • adenosine receptor antagonists particularly A 3 receptor antagonists alone.
  • administration of antagonists for the adenosine receptors, particularly A 3 receptor antagonists antagonizes the protective effects against hypoxia and renders those cells susceptible to destruction due to hypoxia. Since the adenosine receptors, in particular, the A 3 receptor, are responsible for sustained cellular protection against ischemia, antagonists for the adenosine receptors, particularly A 3 receptors are particularly effective in enhancing the activity of anti-tumor agents.
  • the methods and compositions of the invention comprising A 3 receptor antagonists are particularly useful when the levels of HIF-I ⁇ expression and/or activity are elevated above the standard or background level, as determined using methods known to those skilled in the art and disclosed herein.
  • "elevation" of a measured level of HIF-I ⁇ relative to a standard level means that the amount or concentration of HIF- l ⁇ in a sample or subject is greater in a subject or sample relative to the standard as detected by any method now known in the art or to be developed in the future for measuring HIF-l ⁇ levels.
  • elevation of the measured level relative to a standard level may be any statistically significant detectable elevation.
  • Such an elevation in HIF- 1 ⁇ expression and/or activity may include, but is not limited to about a 10%, about a 20%, about a 40%, about an 80%, about a 2-fold, about a 4-fold, about an 10-fold, about a 20- fold, about a 50-fold, about a 100-fold, about a 2 to 20 fold, 2 to 50 fold, 2 to 100 fold, 20 to 50 fold, 20 to 100 fold, elevation, relative to the standard.
  • the therapeutic methods of the invention comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of an A 3 receptor antagonist of the invention improve the therapeutic efficacy of treatment for diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-l ⁇ and/or increased HIF-l ⁇ activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) relative to the traditional modes of such therapies.
  • the methods of the invention reduce the HIF-I ⁇ level to the background level within one day, one week, 1 month, or 2 months, of the commencement of the therapeutic regime.
  • the methods of the invention result in a reduction of HIF-l ⁇ level to the background level.
  • the invention encompasses reduction of the HIF- l ⁇ level to a level which is within about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50% of the background level; about a 2-fold, about a 4-fold, about an 10-fold, about a 20- fold, about a 50-fold, about a 100-fold, about a 2 to 20 fold, 2 to 50 fold, 2 to 100 fold, 20 to 50 fold, 20 to 100 fold of the background level.
  • the methods of the invention reduce the level of HIF- 1 a to a particular level, that level is maintained during the treatment regimen, such that the maintained level of HIF-l ⁇ is sufficient and effective to result in regression of the disease, e.g., cancer.
  • the invention encompasses a method for treatment, prevention and/or management of diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-l ⁇ and/or increased HIF-l ⁇ activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) comprising administering a therapeutically and/or prophylactically effective amount of an A 3 receptor antagonist compound as disclosed herein alone or in combinationo with other therapeutic or prophylatic agents.
  • the invention also encompasses a method for determining the prognosis of a a disease or disorder associated with overexpression of HIF-I ⁇ and/or increased HIF-I ⁇ activity in a subject.
  • the subject is human.
  • the subject has been previously treated with a therapy regimen.
  • the invention encompasses measuring a level of HIF-I ⁇ in a subject to determine if the subject is in need of the therapeutic and or prophylactic methods of the inventon.
  • the invention encompasses measuring a level of HIF-I ⁇ in a sample obtained from the subject and comparing the level measured to a standard level, wherein elevation of the measured level of at least one HIF- 1 a relative to the standard level indicates that the subject is at an increased risk for progression of the disease or disorder, e.g., metastasis of the cancer.
  • the HIF-l ⁇ level may be measured using at least one of the methods for measuring and detecting HIF-I ⁇ such as those known to those skilled in the art and exemplified herein.
  • the invention encompasses compounds which are A 3 or A 1 receptor antagonists for use in the methods of the invention. Examples of such compounds are disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos 6,326,390; 6,407,236; 6,448,253; 6,358,964; and U.S.
  • the A 3 adenosine receptor agonist 2-Cl-IB-MECA facilitates epileptiform discharges in the CA3 area of immature rat hippocampal slices. Laudadio, Mark Anthony; Psarropoulou, Caterina. Department of Paediatrics, Ste- Justine Hospital Research Centre, Universite de Montreal, Montreal, QC, Can. Epilepsy Research (2004), 59(2-3), 83-94.
  • WO 2004051264 Al l,2,4-Triazolo[4,3-a]quinoxalin-l-one Moiety as an Attractive Scaffold To Develop New Potent and Selective Human A3 Adenosine Receptor Antagonists Synthesis, Pharmacological, and Ligand-Receptor Modeling Studies. Colotta, Vittoria; Catarzi, Daniela; Varano, Flavia; Calabri, Francesca Romana; Lenzi, Ombretta; Filacchioni, Guido; Martini, Stephan; Trincavelli, Letizia; Deflorian, Francesca; Moro, Stefano. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita degli Studi di Firenze, Sesto Fiorentino, Italy. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2004), 47(14), 3580-3590.
  • Structural determinants of efficacy at A 3 adenosine receptors modification of the ribose moiety. Gao, Zhan-Guo; Jeong, Lak Shin; Moon, Hyung Ryong; Kim, Hea Ok; Choi, Won Jun; Shin, Dae Hong; Elhalem, Eleonora; Comin, Maria J.; Melman, NeIi; Mamedova, Liaman; Gross, Ariel S.; Rodriguez, Juan B.; Jacobson, Kenneth A. National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases, Molecular Recognition Section, Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Biochemical Pharmacology (2004), 67(5).
  • Pyrazolo[4,3-e]-l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine Derivatives as Adenosine Receptor Antagonists. Influence of the N5 Substituent on the Affinity at the Human A 3 and A 2B Adenosine Receptor Subtypes: A Molecular Modeling Investigation. Pastorin, Giorgia; Da Ros, Tatiana; Spalluto, Giampiero; Deflorian, Francesca; Moro, Stefano; Cacciari, Barbara; Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Gessi, Stefania; Varani, Katia; Borea, Pier Andrea. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita degli Studi di Trieste, Trieste, Italy. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2003), 46(20), 4287-4296.
  • QSAR of adenosine receptor antagonists II Exploring physicochemical requirements for selective binding of 2-arylpyrazolo[3,4-c]quinoline derivatives with adenosine A 1 and A 3 receptor subtypes. Roy, Kunal. Drug Theoretics and Cheminformatics Lab, Division of Medicinal and Pharmaceutical Chemistry, Department of Pharmaceutical Technology, Jadavpur University, Calcutta, India. QSAR & Combinatorial Science (2003), 22(6), 614-621. Functional expression of adenosine A 2A and A 3 receptors in the mouse dendritic cell line XS-106. Dickenson, John M.; Reeder, Steve; Rees, Bob; Alexander, Steve; Kendall, Dave. School of Science, Faculty of Science and Mathematics, Department of Life Sciences, Nottingham Trent University, Nottingham, UK. European Journal of Pharmacology (2003), 474(1), 43-51.
  • a 3 adenosine and CBl receptors activate a PKC-sensitive Cl- current in human nonpigmented ciliary epithelial cells via a G-coupled MAPK signaling pathway. Shi, Chanjuan; Szczesniak, Anna; Mao, Lucy; Jollimore, Christine; Coca-Prados, Miguel; Hung, Orlando; Kelly, Melanie E. M. Laboratory for Retina and Optic Nerve Research, Dalhousie University, Why, NS, 475-486.
  • QSAR of adenosine receptor antagonists I: Exploration of receptor interaction sites of l,2-dihydro-2-phenyl-l,2,4-triazolo[4,3-a]quinoxalin-l-one derivatives using AMI calculations. Roy, Kunal. Drug Theoretics and Cheminformatics Lab, Division of Medicinal and Pharmaceutical Chemistry, Department of Pharmaceutical Technology, Jadavpur University, India. Indian Journal of Chemistry, Section B: Organic Chemistry Including Medicinal Chemistry (2003), 42B(6), 1485-1496.
  • 9-Ethyladenine derivatives as adenosine receptor antagonists 2- and 8-substitution results in distinct selectivities.
  • Klotz Karl-Norbert; Kachler, Sonja; Lambertucci, Catia; Vittori, Sauro; Volpini, Rosaria; Cristalli, Gloria.
  • Adenosine Receptor Subtypes Mediating Coronary Vasodilation in Rat Hearts. Hinschen, Andrea K.; Rose'Meyer, Roselyn B.; Headrick, John P. Griffith University, Heart Foundation Research Center, School of Health Science, Gold Coast Campus, Southport, Australia. Journal of Cardiovascular Pharmacology (2003), 41(1), 73-80.
  • Imidazo[2,l-i]purin-5-ones and Related Tricyclic Water-Soluble Purine Derivatives Potent A 2A - and A 3 -Adenosine Receptor Antagonists. Mueller, Christa E.; Thorand, Mark; Qurishi, Ramatullah; Diekmann, Martina; Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Padgett, William L.; Daly, John W. Pharmaceutical Institute Poppelsdorf, University of Bonn, Bonn, Germany. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2002), 45(16), 3440-3450.
  • Adenosine acts through an A 3 receptor to prevent the induction of murine anti-CD3- activated killer T cells.
  • thermodynamics at the human A 3 adenosine receptor Merighi, Stefania; Varani, Katia; Gessi, Stefania; Klotz, Karl-Norbert; Leung, Edward; Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Borea, Pier Andrea. Pharmacology Unit, Department of Clinical and Experimental Medicine, Centro Nazionale di Eccellenza per Io Sviluppo di Metodologie Innovative per Io Studio ed il Trattamento delle Patologie Infiammatorie, University of Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Biochemical Pharmacology (2002), 63(2), 157-161.
  • [3H]-8-Ethyl-4-methyl-2-phenyl-(8R)-4,5,7 5 8-tetrahydro-lH-imidazo[2,l-i]purin-5-one [3H]PSB-11), a Novel High- Affinity Antagonist Radioligand for Human A3 Adenosine Receptors. Muller, ChristaE.; Diekmann, Martina; Thorand, Mark; Ozola, Vita. University of Bonn, Pharmaceutical Institute, Bonn, Germany. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters (2002), 12(3), 501-503.
  • Fluorosulfonyl- and bis-(ct ⁇ oroethyl)arnino-phenylamino functionalized pyrazolo[4,3- e]l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine derivatives irreversible antagonists at the human A 3 adenosine receptor and molecular modeling studies. Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Cacciari, Barbara; Moro, Stefano; Romagnoli, Romeo; Ji, Xiao-duo; Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Gessi, Stefania; Borea, Pier Andrea; Spalluto, Giampiero. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita degli Studi di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2001), 44(17), 2735-2742.
  • Receptor subtypes mediating adenosine-induced dilation of cerebral arterioles.
  • Pyrazolo[4,3-e]l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine derivatives a new pharmacological tool for the characterization of the human A 3 adenosine receptor.
  • Baraldi Pier Giovanni; Cacciari, Barbara; Romagnoli, Romeo; Spalluto, Giampiero; Varani, Katia; Gessi, Stefania; Merighi, Stefania; Borea, Pier Andrea. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita degli Studi di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Drug Development Research (2001), 52(1/2), 406-415.
  • Adenosine-enhanced ischemic preconditioning adenosine receptor involvement during ischemia and reperfusion. McCully, James D.; Toyoda, Yoshiya; Uematsu, Masahisa; Stewart, Robert D.; Levitsky, Sidney. Division of Cardiothoracic Surgery, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center and Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA, USA. American Journal of Physiology (2001), 280(2, Pt. 2), H591-H602.
  • Thiazole and thiadiazole analogs as a novel class of adenosine receptor antagonists, van Muijlwijk-Koezen, Jacqueline E.; Timmerman, Hendrik; Vollinga, Roeland C; von Kuenzel, Jacobien Frijtag; de Groote, Miriam; Visser, Sven; IJzerman, Adriaan P. Department of Pharmacochemistry Division of Medicinal Chemistry Leiden/Amsterdam Center for Drug Research, Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, Neth. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2001), 44(5), 749-762.
  • [3H]-MRE 3008-F20 the first high affinity radioligand antagonist for the human A 3 adenosine receptors. Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Cacciari, Barbara; Romagnoli, Romeo; Varani, Katia; Merighi, Stefania; Gessi, Stefania; Borea, Pier Andrea; Leung, Edward; Hickey, Sarah L.; Spalluto, Giampiero. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters (2000), 10(12), 1403.
  • Patent evaluation a novel adenosine receptor pharmacophore. Novartis AG, Expert Opinion on Therapeutic Patents (2000), 10(5), 729-732.
  • [3H]MRE 3008F20 a novel antagonist radioligand for the pharmacological and biochemical characterization of human A 3 adenosine receptors. Varani, Katia; Merighi, Stefania; Gessi, Stefania; Klotz, Karl-Norbert; Lfung, Edward; Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Cacciari, Barbara; Romagnoli, Romeo; Spalluto, Giampiero; Borfa, Pier Andrea. Department of Clinical and Experimental Medicine, Pharmacology Unit, University of Ferrara, Italy. Molecular Pharmacology (2000), 57(5), 968-975.
  • A3 adenosine receptor ligands history and perspectives. Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Cacciari, Barbara; Romagnoli, Romeo; Merighi, Stefania; Varani, Katia; Borea, Pier Andrea; Spalluto, Giampiero. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Medicinal Research Reviews (2000), 20(2), 103-128.
  • [3H]-MRE 3008-F20 the first high affinity radioligand antagonist for the human A 3 adenosine receptors. Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Cacciari, Barbara; Romagnoli, Romeo; Varani, Katia; Merighi, Stefania; Gessi, Stefania; Borea, Pier Andrea; Leung, Edward; Hickey, Sarah L.; Spalluto, Giampiero. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters (2000), 10(3), 209-211.
  • Selective A 3 Adenosine Receptor Antagonists Water-Soluble 3,5-Diacyl- 1,2,4- trialkylpyridinium Salts and Their Oxidative Generation from Dihydropyridine Precursors.
  • Xie Rongyuan; Li, An-Hu; Ji, Xiao-Duo; Melman, NeIi; Olah, Mark E.; Stiles, Gary L.; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Molecular Recognition Section Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry National Institute of Diabetes Digestive and Kidney Diseases, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (1999), 42(20), 4232-4238.
  • a 3 adenosine receptors protective vs. damaging effects identified using novel agonists and antagonists. Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Moro, Stefano; Kim, Yong-Chul; Li, An-Hu. Molecular Recognition Section, Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institute of Diabetes, Digestive and Kidney Diseases, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Drug Development Research (1998), 45(3/4), 113-124.
  • Triazoloquinazoline Adenosine Antagonist (CGS 15943) Having High Potency at the Human A 2 B and A 3 Receptor Subtypes.
  • Adenosine A 3 receptors novel ligands and paradoxical effects. Jacobson, Kenneth A. Molecular Recognition Section, Lab. Bioorganic Chem., National Inst. Diabetes, Digestive and Kidney Diseases, national Inst. Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Trends in Pharmacological Sciences (1998), 19(5), 184-191.
  • Flavonoid Derivatives as Adenosine Receptor Antagonists A Comparison of the Hypothetical Receptor Binding Site Based on a Comparative Molecular Field Analysis Model. Moro, Stefano; van Rhee, A. Michiel; Sanders, Lawrence H.; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Molecular Recognition Section Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry National Institute of Diabetes Digestive and Kidney Diseases, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (1998), 41(1), 46-52.
  • Adenosine A 3 receptor agonists inhibit murine macrophage tumor necrosis factor-d production in vitro and in vivo. Bowlin, Terry L.; Borcherding, David R.; Edwards, Carl K., Ill; McWhinney, Charlene D. Department of Immunology, Marion Merrell Dow Research Institute, Marion Merrell Dow Pharmaceuticals, Cincinnati, OH, USA. Cellular and Molecular Biology (Paris) (1997), 43(3), 345-349.
  • Adenosine receptor antagonists structures and potential therapeutic applications. Mueller, C. E.; Stein, B. Inst. Pharmazie Strukturchemie, Univ. Wuerzburg, Wuerzburg, Germany. Current Pharmaceutical Design (1996), 2(5), 501-530.
  • 6-Phenyl-l,4-Dihydropyridine Derivatives as Potent and Selective A 3 Adenosine Receptor Antagonists.
  • Triazoloquinazoline Adenosine Antagonist (CGS 15943) are Selective for the Human A 3 Receptor Subtype.
  • Activation of adenosine A 3 receptors on macrophages inhibits tumor necrosis factor-d McWhinney, Charlene D.; Dudley, Mark W.; Bowlin, Terry L.; Peet, Norton P.; Schook, Larry; Bradshaw, Marita; De, Mamata; Borcherding, David R.; Edwards, Carl K., III. Department of Immunology, Marion Merrell Dow Research Institute, Marion Merrell Dow Pharmaceuticals, Inc., 2110 East Galbraith Road, Cincinnati, USA. European Journal of Pharmacology (1996), 310(2/3), 209-216.
  • Novel adenosine antagonists A 3 receptor-selective flavonoid and dihydropyridine derivatives. Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Van Rhee, A. Michiel; Jiang, Ji-Long; Ji, Xiao-duo; Karton, Yishai; Von Lubitz, Dag K. J. E.; Olah, Mark E.; Stiles, Gary L. Laboratory Bioorganic Chemistry, NIDDK, NIH, Bethesda, MD, USA. Book of Abstracts, 212th ACS National Meeting, Orlando, FL, August 25-29 (1996), MEDI-099. Publisher: American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C.
  • the A 3 receptor antagonists of the invention are particularly useful for prevention, treatment, and/or management of cancer, for example, as a single agent therapy or in combination with other modes of therapy for cancer.
  • the invention encompasses methods of treatment, prevention, or management of cancers which are A 3 receptor expressing cancers including, but not limited to, human leukemia, melanoma, pancreatic carcinoma, ovarian carcinoma, breast carcinoma, prostrate carcinoma, colon carcinoma, lung carcinoma, malignant melanomas, histiocytic lymphoma, and some forms of astrocytoma cells.
  • the invention encompasses methods of treatment, prevention, or management which have high level of expression of HIF-I a including, but not limited to, cervical cancer (early stage), lung cancer (non-small cell lung carcinoma), breast cancer (including lymph node positive breast cancer and lymph node negative breast cancer), oligodendroglioma, orpharyngeal squamous cell carcinoma, ovarian cancer, oesophageal cancer, endometrial cancer, head and neck cancer, gastrointestinal stromal tumor of the stomach
  • the methods of the invention are particularly useful in cancer therapy for providing tissue selectivity, such that the biological effect is observed in tumoral hypoxic cells, where high adenosine concentrations has resulted in increased HIF-I ⁇ accumulation.
  • solid tumors refer to a locus of tumor cells where the majority of the cells are tumor cells or tumor-associated cells, including but not limited to laryngeal tumors, brain tumors, and other tumors of the head and neck; colon, rectal and prostate tumors; breast and thoracic solid tumors; ovarian and uterine tumors; tumors of the esophagus, stomach, pancreas and liver; bladder and gall bladder tumors; skin tumors such as melanomas.
  • the tumors encompassed within the invention can be either primary or a secondary tumor resulting from metastasis of cancer cells elsewhere in the body to the chest.
  • the invention encompasses use of the A 3 or A 1 receptor antagonist compounds of the invention in inhibiting tumor growth in a mammal, including humans.
  • the invention encompasses methods for administering an effective amount of adenosine A 1 or A 3 antagonists, preferably, A 3 antagonists sufficient to inhibit the ability of adenosine to protect tumor cells.
  • the present invention encompasses methods for treatment, prevention and/or management of cancer comprising administering a compound of the invention including A 3 and/or A 1 receptor antagonists used in combination with other therapeutic and/or prophylactic agents, e.g., cytotoxic agents.
  • adenosine A 3 receptor antagonists synergistically enhance cytotoxic treatment and counter some forms of multi-drug resistance.
  • the combination therapies of the invention will attack the tumor cell directly, inhibit growth of new blood vessels around the tumor cell, and, by virtue of the adenosine A 3 antagonists, inhibit the ability of the cell to survive without the growth of new blood vessels.
  • high affinity adenosine A 3 receptor antagonists are useful as enhancers for many chemotherapeutic treatments of adenosine A 3 receptor expressing cancers.
  • high affinity adenosine A 3 receptor antagonists also counter P-glycoprotein (P-gp) effuse pump multidrug resistance (MDR).
  • P-gp P-glycoprotein
  • MDR multidrug resistance
  • high affinity adenosine A 3 receptor antagonists are helpful in reducing or ameliorating side effects of cytoxic agents especially taxane induced hypersensitivity. For example, lower doses of taxane may be used once used in combination with an adenosine A 3 receptor antagonist of the invention.
  • the present invention encompasses the use of high affinity adenosine A 3 receptor antagonists for enhancing chemotherapeutic treatment of cancers expressing adenosine A 3 receptors and countering multi-drug resistance in cancers expressing P-glycoprotein or MRP.
  • adenosine A 3 receptor antagonists are administered before or during administration of a taxane family, vinca alkaloid, camptothecin or antibiotic compound.
  • Preferred high affinity A 3 receptor antagonists include compounds of the general formulas ILA, HB, HC and HD described herein, vide infra.
  • the present invention encompasses therapies which involve administering one or more of the compounds of the invention, to an animal, preferably a mammal, and most preferably a human, for preventing, treating, or ameliorating symptoms associated with a cancer, a disease or disorder associated with hypoxia-inducible factor 1- ⁇ (HIF- l ⁇ ).
  • the invention further provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of the invention that specifically binds an A 1 or A 3 receptor and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier
  • the pharmaceutical formulation includes an adenosine A 3 receptor antagonist and one or more excipients.
  • the formulations can also include other anti-tumor agents, including cytotoxic agents and other anti-angiogenesis agents, including adenosine A 2A antagonists, such as ZM241385 and SCH 5861, adenosine A 2B antagonists, such as MRE- 20290-F20 and AS- 16, and anti-VEGF antibodies, including humanized and chimeric antibodies.
  • the composition includes an effective amount to inhibit tumor growth of an adenosine A 3 receptor antagonist, a cytotoxic agent, and an anti- angiogenesis agent.
  • a compound is an "antagonist of an adenosine A 3 receptor" if it is able to prevent the action due to an agonist and is able to displace [ I2 I]-AB-MECA in a competitive binding assay.
  • a compound is selective for the A 3 receptor if its affinity at the A 3 receptor is greater than its affinity at the A 1 , A 2 A and A 2 B receptors.
  • the ratio OfA 1 /A 3 and A 2 /A 3 activity is greater than about 50, preferably between 50 and 100, and more preferably, greater than about 100. Since the pharmacology at the A 3 receptor varies between species, especially between rodent A 3 and human A 3 receptors, it is important to determine the selectivity of the A 3 compounds in human adenosine receptors. The same holds true for adenosine A 1 and A 2 A receptors in terms of whether they are selective.
  • Adenosine A 1 Antagonists carry their common ordinary meaning. Adenosine A 1 antagonists are well known to those of skill in the art. Some of the more well known compounds include CPX, CVT 124, FK 352, and ILF 117, the structures of which are well known.
  • Adenosine A 3 Antagonists carry their common ordinary meaning.
  • Adenosine A 3 antagonists are well known to those of skill in the art. Some of the more well known compounds include MRS 1097, MRS 1191 and MRS 1220 (commercially available from Research Biochemicals International, Natick Mass.). Other suitable antagonists include those disclosed in Jacobson et al., Neuropharmacology, 36: 1157-1165 (1997); Yao et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun., 232:317-322 (1997); Kim etal., J. Med. Chem., 39(21):4142-4148 (1996); van Rhee et al, DrugDevel.
  • elevation of a measured level of HIF-I ⁇ or A 3 receptor relative to a standard level means that the amount or concentration of HIF-I ⁇ or A 3 receptor in a sample or subject is sufficiently greater in a subject or sample relative to the standard as detected by any method now known in the art or to be developed in the future for measuring HIF- lot or A 3 receptor levels.
  • elevation of the measured level relative to a standard level may be any statistically significant elevation detectable.
  • Such an elevation in HIF-I ⁇ expression and/or activity may include, but is not limited to about a 10%, about a 20%, about a 40%, about an 80%, about a 2-fold, about a 4-fold, about an 10- fold, about a 20-fold, about a 50-fold, about a 100-fold, about a 2 to 20 fold, 2 to 50 fold, 2 to 100 fold, 20 to 50 fold, 20 to 100 fold, elevation, relative to the standard.
  • standard level refers to a baseline amount of an HIF- l ⁇ level as determined in one or more normal subjects, i.e., a subject with no known history of past or current diseases, disorders or cancer.
  • the measurement of HIF-l ⁇ level may be carried out using an HIF-l ⁇ probe or a HIF- l ⁇ activity assay (see Section 6).
  • enhancement refers to a synergistic effect as determined from measurement of the enhancement factor, as defined below.
  • an enhancement factor of greater than one is considered synergistic. For example, if one of the compounds has little individual chemotherapeutic effect, an enhancement factor greater than one indicates a synergistic effect is occurring.
  • cancer refers to a neoplasm or tumor resulting from abnormal uncontrolled growth of cells. As used herein, cancer explicitly includes, leukemias and lymphomas.
  • cancer refers to a disease involving cells that have the potential to metastasize to distal sites and exhibit phenotypic traits that differ from those of non-cancer cells, for example, formation of colonies in a three-dimensional substrate such as soft agar or the formation of tubular networks or weblike matrices in a three- dimensional basement membrane or extracellular matrix preparation.
  • Non-cancer cells do not form colonies in soft agar and form distinct sphere-like structures in three-dimensional basement membrane or extracellular matrix preparations. Cancer cells acquire a characteristic set of functional capabilities during their development, albeit through various mechanisms.
  • cancer cell is meant to encompass both pre-malignant and malignant cancer cells.
  • cancer refers to a benign tumor, which has remained localized.
  • cancer refers to a malignant tumor, which has invaded and destroyed neighboring body structures and spread to distant sites.
  • the cancer is associated with a specific cancer antigen.
  • a 3 expressing cancers refers to human cancers that express the adenosine A3 receptor or that otherwise comprise elevated concentrations of adenosine A 3 receptors. Elevated concentration is determined by comparison to normal, non-cancerous tissues of a similar cell type. Examples of A 3 expressing cancers include, without limitation, human leukemia, melanoma, pancreatic carcinoma, breast carcinoma, prostrate carcinoma, colon carcinoma, lung carcinomamalignant melanomas, histiocytic lymphoma, and some forms of astrocytoma cells.
  • HIF- 1 ⁇ expressing cancers refers to human cancer that express HIF- l ⁇ or that otherwise comprise elevated concentrations of HIF-I ⁇ .
  • Elevated concentration is determined by comparison to normal, non-cancerous tissues of a similar cell type.
  • HIF-I ⁇ expressing cancers include without limitation cervical cancer (early stage), melanoma, lung cancer (non-small cell lung carcinoma), breast cancer (including lymph node positive breast cancer and lymph node negative breast cancer), oligodendroglioma, orpharyngeal squamous cell carcinoma, ovarian cancer, oesophageal cancer, endometrial cancer, head and neck cancer, gastrointestinal stromal tumor of the stomach.
  • hypoxia refers to any condition whereby the physiology of the tissue is compromised and/or blood supply in one or more tissues is compromised. These two terms may be used interchangeably.
  • the condition also encompasses any reduction in partial pressure of O 2 in one or more tissues.
  • hypooxia or “ischemia” encompasses any condition in which a cell, tissue or organ experiences a lack of oxygen or reduced blood flow.
  • the terms “treat,” “treating” and “treatment” refer to the eradication, removal, modification, or control of primary, regional, or metastatic cancer tissue that results from the administration of one or more therapeutic agents.
  • such terms refer to the minimizing or delaying the spread of cancer resulting from the administration of one or more therapeutic agents to a subject with such a disease.
  • the term also refers to the eradication, reduction or amelioration of a symptom or disorder related to aberrant levels of HIF-I ⁇ level and/or activity.
  • a "therapeutically effective amount” refers to that amount of the therapeutic agent sufficient to delay or minimize the spread of cancer.
  • a therapeutically effective amount may also refer to the amount of the therapeutic agent that provides a therapeutic benefit in the treatment or management of a disease or disorder.
  • a therapeutically effective amount with respect to a therapeutic agent of the invention means that amount of therapeutic agent alone, or in combination with other therapies, that provides a therapeutic benefit in the treatment or management of a disease or disorder. Used in connection with an amount of a compound of the invention, the term can encompass an amount that improves overall therapy, reduces or avoids unwanted effects, or enhances the therapeutic efficacy of or synergizes with another therapeutic agent.
  • prophylactic agent and “prophylactic agents” refer to any agent(s) which can be used in the prevention of a disorder, or prevention of recurrence or spread of a disorder.
  • a prophylactically effective amount may refer to the amount of prophylactic agent sufficient to prevent the recurrence or spread of hyperproliferative disease, particularly cancer, or the occurrence of such in a patient, including but not limited to those predisposed to hyperproliferative disease, for example those genetically predisposed to cancer or previously exposed to carcinogens.
  • a prophylactically effective amount may also refer to the amount of the prophylactic agent that provides a prophylactic benefit in the prevention of disease.
  • a prophylactically effective amount with respect to a prophylactic agent of the invention means that amount of prophylactic agent alone, or in combination with other agents, that provides a prophylactic benefit in the prevention of disease.
  • the term can encompass an amount that improves overall prophylaxis or enhances the prophylactic efficacy of or synergizes with another prophylactic agent, such as but not limited to a therapeutic antibody.
  • the terms “manage,” “managing” and “management” refer to the beneficial effects that a subject derives from administration of a prophylactic or therapeutic agent, which does not result in a cure of the disease or diseases.
  • a subject is administered one or more prophylactic or therapeutic agents to "manage” a disease so as to prevent the progression or worsening of the disease or diseases.
  • the terms “prevent”, “preventing” and “prevention” refer to the methods to avert or avoid a disease or disorder or delay the recurrence or onset of one or more symptoms of a disorder in a subject resulting from the administration of a prophylactic agent.
  • the term “in combination” refers to the use of more than one prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents.
  • the use of the term “in combination” does not restrict the order in which prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents are administered to a subject with a disorder, e.g., hyperproliferative cell disorder, especially cancer.
  • a first prophylactic or therapeutic agent can be administered prior to (e.g., 1 minute, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 4 weeks, 5 weeks, 6 weeks, 8 weeks, or 12 weeks before), concomitantly with, or subsequent to (e.g., 1 minute, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 4 weeks, 5 weeks, 6 weeks, 8 weeks, or 12 weeks after) the administration of a second prophylactic or therapeutic agent to a subject which had, has, or is susceptible to a disorder.
  • the prophylactic or therapeutic agents are administered to a subject in a sequence and within a time interval such that the agent of the invention can act together with the other agent to provide an increased benefit than if they were administered otherwise.
  • Any additional prophylactic or therapeutic agent can be administered in any order with the other additional prophylactic or therapeutic agents.
  • alkyl refers to a monovalent straight, branched or cyclic saturated hydrocarbon group preferably having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms (“lower alkyl”) and most preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • alkylene and “lower alkylene” refer to divalent radicals of the corresponding alkane.
  • other moieties having names derived from alkanes such as alkoxyl, alkanoyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, etc. when modified by "lower,” have carbon chains often or less carbon atoms.
  • substituted alkyl refers to an alkyl group, preferably of from 1 to 10 carbon atoms ("substituted lower alkyl”), having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, — SO-alkyl, —
  • alkyl refers to an alkyl group with an aryl substituent. Binding is through the alkyl group.
  • Alkaryl refers to an aryl group with an alkyl substituent, where binding is through the aryl group.
  • alkoxy refers to the group “alkyl-0 — ", where alkyl is as defined above. Preferred alkoxy groups include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, iso-propoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, 1,2-dimethylbutoxy, and the like.
  • alkenyl refers to an unsaturated, straight or branched hydrocarbon group preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-2 double bonds.
  • alkynyl refers to an unsaturated, straight or branched hydrocarbon group preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-2 triple bonds.
  • acyl refers to the groups alkyl-C(O) — , substituted alkyl-C(O)— , cycloalkyl-C(O)— , substituted cycloalkyl-C(O)— , aryl-C(O)— , substituted aryl-C(O) — , heteroaryl-C(O) — and heterocyclic-C(O) — where alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • aminoacyl refers to the group — C(O)NR 33 R 33 where each R 33 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • acylamino refers to the group R 34 — C(O) — N(R 33 ) — where each R 34 is independently alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • R 33 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • acyloxy refers to the group R 34 — C(O) — where each R 34 is independently alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • amino acid means an alpha amino acid selected from those amino acids which naturally occur in proteins but without regard for specific stereochemical properties.
  • protected amino acid means an amino acid of which the alpha amino group has been converted to a less reactive moiety, but a moiety which can be converted back to the amino group with relative ease.
  • amino acid residue and “amino acid moiety” are used synonymously herein.
  • aryl refers to an unsaturated aromatic carbocyclic group of from 6 to 14 carbon atoms having a single ring ⁇ e.g., phenyl) or multiple condensed (fused) rings ⁇ e.g., naphthyl or anthryl).
  • Preferred aryls include phenyl, naphthyl and the like.
  • such aryl groups can optionally be substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents and preferably 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, acyloxy, acylamino, alkaryl, aralkyl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, alkylthio, — SO-alkyl, — SO-substitute
  • cycloalkyl refers to cyclic alkyl groups of from 3 to 12 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings.
  • Such cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl, and the like, or multiple ring structures such as adamantyl, and the like.
  • halo or halogen refer to fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo and preferably is either fluoro or chloro.
  • heteroaryl refers to an aromatic carbocyclic group of from 1 to 15 carbon atoms and 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur within at least one ring (if there is more than one ring).
  • heteroaryl groups can be optionally substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents and preferably 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, acyloxy, acylamino, alkaryl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, tbioheteroaryloxy, — SO-alkyl, — SO-substituted alkyl, — SO-aryl,
  • Preferred substituents include alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, and thioalkoxy.
  • Such heteroaryl groups can have a single ring (e.g., pyridyl or furyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., indolizinyl or benzothienyl).
  • Heterocycle or “heterocyclic” refers to a monovalent saturated or unsaturated carbocyclic group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, from 1 to 15 carbon atoms and from 1 to 4 hetero atoms selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur and oxygen within the ring.
  • heterocyclic groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, trihalomethyl, and the like.
  • substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, trihalomethyl, and the like.
  • Such heterocyclic groups can have a single ring or multiple condensed rings.
  • any of the above groups that contain one or more substituents it is understood, of course, that such groups do not contain any substitution or substitution patterns which are sterically impractical and/
  • carboxylic acid derivatives and “sulfonic acid derivatives” refer to -C(X)R 31 , — C(X)- N(R 31 ) 2 , -C(X)OR 31 , -C(X)SR 31 , — SO b R 31 , — SO b OR 31 , — SO b SR 31 , or SO b - N(R 31 ) 2 , where X is 0, S or NR 31 , where R 31 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl or aryl, and activated derivatives thereof, such as anhydrides, esters, and halides such as chlorides, bromides and iodides.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salts” refers to pharmaceutically acceptable salts of a compound of Formulas HA, HB, HC and HD which salts are derived from a variety of organic and inorganic counter ions well known in the art and include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like; and when the molecule contains a basic functionality, salts of organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate and the like can be used as the pharmaceutically acceptable salt.
  • FIGS. IA through IH illustrate the saturation of [ 3 H]-MRE 3008-F20 binding to A 3 adenosine receptors in human cancers.
  • K D and B max values are reported in Table 8. Values are the means and S. E. of the mean of three separate experiments performed in triplicate. In the inset the Scatchard plot of the same data is shown.
  • Figure 2 illustrates colony formation assay of A375 cells.
  • Cells were treated with different drugs and colonies were counted after 7 days. The values represent the mean ⁇ SEM of four independent experiments.
  • Figure 3 A through 3D illustrate typical dose response curves of A375 cells exposed to increasing concentrations of cytotoxic agents vindesine (Figure 3A, Figure 3B) and TaxolTM brand paclitaxel (Figure 3C, Figure 3D).
  • the curves with open symbols represent the cytotoxic agent alone.
  • the curves with closed symbols represent the cytotoxic agent in the presence of 10 ⁇ M MRE 3008F2010.
  • Figure 3A and Figure 3C illustrate G 2 /M phases arrest calculated as percentage of untreated cells (control).
  • Figure 3B and Figure 3D illustrate the accumulation (percentage of total living cells) of the SUb-G 1 (apoptosis) population. Cells were fixed in 70% ethanol, stained with PI, and analysed by flow cytometry.
  • Figure 4A through 4F illustrate induction of G 2 /M phases arrest by MRE 3008F20 on exponentially growing A375 cells treated with paclitaxel or with vindesine.
  • A375 cells are treated for 24 hours with drug- vehicle as control (Figure 4A, Figure 4D); with 1 nM vindesine (Figure 4B), with 25 ng/ml paclitaxel ( Figure 4E); with 1 nM vindesine plus 10 ⁇ M MRE 3008F20 ( Figure 4C); or with 25 ng/ml paclitaxel plus 10 ⁇ M MRE 3008F20 ( Figure 4F).
  • Cells were fixed in 70% ethanol, stained with PI, and analysed by flow cytometry. The percentage of cells at Gi, S and G 2 /M phases was quantified.
  • FIG. 5 A illustrates dose-response curve for G 2 /M phases arrest of A375 cells exposed to increasing concentrations OfA 3 adenosine receptor antagonists in the presence of 1 nM vindesine. Cells were fixed in 70% ethanol, stained with PI, and analysed by flow cytometry.
  • Figure 6 A through 6D illustrate flow chromatogram for Rhodamine 123 (Rh 123) accumulation by A375 cells and HeL023 cells.
  • Figure 6A illustrates the accumulation by A375 cells.
  • Figure 6B illustrates the accumulation by A375 cells in the presence of 10 ⁇ M MRE 3008F20.
  • Figure 6C illustrates the accumulation by HeL023 cells.
  • Figure 6D illustrates the accumulation by HeL023 cells in the presence of 10 ⁇ M MRE 3008F20.
  • F MAX represents the maximum load of Rh 123 (gray filled area).
  • F RES shows residual Rh 123 fluorescence after the P-gp mediated drug efflux was allowed for 3 hours (black filled area). Rh 123 unstained cell chromatogram is reported as unfilled area.
  • Figure 7A illustrates the effect of inhibitors of MEK- (PD98059), ERK 1/2- (UO 126) and p38 MAPK ⁇ (SB203580) -signalling on the G 2 M phases arrest induced by paclitaxel (filled bars) and by vindesine (empty bars).
  • the residual G 2 /M phases arrest is reported as the percentage of control cells (cells treated with paclitaxel plus MRE 3008F20 for TU, TS, TP or with vindesine plus MRE 3008F20, for VU, VS, VP.
  • Figure 7B illustrates the effect of inhibitors of MEK- (PD98059), ERK 1/2- (U0126) and p38MAPK- (SB203580) -signalling on apoptosis induced by paclitaxel.
  • T paclitaxel (25 ng/ml)
  • V vindesine 1 ⁇ M
  • U U0126 30 ⁇ M
  • P PD9805920 ⁇ M
  • S SB203580 1 ⁇ M
  • M MRE 3008F20 10 ⁇ M
  • C cells treated with metabolic inhibitor vehicle (DMSO) (control).
  • DMSO metabolic inhibitor vehicle
  • Apoptotic cells (Apo) with sub-diploid DNA content are reported.
  • FIG. 9 Induction of HIF-I expression by hypoxia. A375 cells were cultured in normoxia for 4 hours (lane normoxia) or under hypoxic conditions for 2, 3, 4, 8, 16 and 24 hours (lanes 2-7). Whole cellular protein extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF-l ⁇ monoclonal antibody. The blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF-l ⁇ expression using an anti-HIF-l ⁇ monoclonal antibody. Tubulin shows equal loading protein.
  • FIG. 10 Iinduction of HIF-I ⁇ expression by adenosine.
  • A A375 cells were cultured in normoxia for 4 hours (lane normoxia). A375 cells were treated without (lane 1) or with adenosine 10 nM (lane 2), 100 nM (lane 3), 1 ⁇ M (lane 4), 10 ⁇ M (lane 5) and 100 ⁇ M (lane 6) in hypoxia for 4 hours. Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF-l ⁇ monoclonal antibody. The blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF-I ⁇ expression using an anti-HIF-l ⁇ monoclonal antibody. Tubulin shows equal loading protein.
  • A375 cells were treated without (lane 1, control) or with adenosine 100 ⁇ M (lanes 2-6) and exposed to the A 1 receptor antagonist DPCPX 100 nM (lane 3), or A 2A receptor antagonist SCH 58261 100 nM (lane 4), or A 2B receptor antagonist MRE 2029F20 100 nM (lane 5), or A 3 receptor antagonist MRE 3008F20 100 nM (lane 6) in hypoxia for 4 hours.
  • Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti- HIF-l ⁇ monoclonal antibody. The blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF- l ⁇ expression using an anti-HIF-l ⁇ monoclonal antibody.
  • Tubulin shows equal loading protein.
  • FIG. 11 Induction of HIF-I expression by A 3 receptor stimulation: time course.
  • A A375 cells were cultured in normoxia for 4 hours (lane normoxia) or under hypoxic conditions in the absence (-) or in the presence (+) of the A 3 receptor agonist Cl-IB- MECA (100 nM) for 2, 4, 8, 16 and 24 hours.
  • Whole cellular protein extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF-l ⁇ monoclonal antibody. The blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF- l ⁇ expression using an anti-HIF- l ⁇ monoclonal antibody.
  • Tubulin shows equal loading protein.
  • FIG. 12 Induction of HIF-I ⁇ expression by A 3 receptor stimulation: dose response.
  • A A375 cells were treated without (lane 1) or with Cl-IB-MECA 0.1 nM (lane 2), 1 nM (lane 3), 10 nM (lane 4) 100 nM (lane 5) and 1 ⁇ M (lane 6) in normoxia and in hypoxia for 4 hours.
  • Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF-l ⁇ monoclonal antibody. The blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF- l ⁇ expression using an anti-HIF-l ⁇ monoclonal antibody.
  • B Typical dose response curve of A375 cells exposed to adenosine in hypoxia is shown.
  • the immunoblot signals were quantified using molecular analyst /PC densitometry software (Bio-Rad).
  • FIG. 13 Effect of A 3 receptor antagonist MRE 3008F20.
  • A375 cells were treated in hypoxia for 4 hours without (-) or with (+) Cl-IB-MECA 10 nM, MRE 3008F20 10 nM (lanes 3, 4) and MRE 3008F20 100 nM (lanes 5, 6).
  • Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF-l ⁇ monoclonal antibody. The blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF- l ⁇ expression using an anti-HIF- l ⁇ monoclonal antibody.
  • B The immunoblot signals were quantified using molecular analyst /PC densitometry software (Bio-Rad).
  • blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF-I ⁇ expression using an anti-HIF-l ⁇ monoclonal antibody.
  • D Typical dose response curve of A375 cells exposed to MRE 3008F20 in hypoxia is shown.
  • the immunoblot signals were quantified using molecular analyst /PC densitometry software (Bio-Rad).
  • FIG. 14 A 3 receptor expression silencing by siRNA transfection.
  • A Analysis of siRNA transfection efficiency in A375 cells. Representative flow chromatograms of siRN A-FITC accumulation (gray filled area) in A375 cells transfected with siRNA-FITC. Unfilled area shows A375 cells transfected with RNAiFectTM Transfection reagent without S ⁇ RNA A3 . Fluorescence was quantified by flow cytometry 5 hours post-transfection.
  • (B) Relative A 3 receptor mRNA quantification, related to ⁇ -actin mRNA, by Real-Time RT-PCR. A375 cells were transfected by RNAiFectTM Transfection reagent or S1RNA A3 and cultured for 24, 48 and 72 hours.
  • C Western blot analysis using an anti-A 3 receptor polyclonal antibody of protein extracts from A375 cells treated by RNAiFectTM Transfection reagent (control) or SiRNA A3 and cultured for 24, 48 and 72 hours in normoxia. Tubulin shows equal loading protein.
  • Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF- l ⁇ monoclonal antibody. The blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF- 1 ⁇ expression using an anti-HIF- 1 ⁇ monoclonal antibody.
  • FIG. 16 A 3 receptor stimulation induces HIF- lot accumulation through a transcription-independent pathway.
  • A375 cells were pretreated with actinoniycin D (10 ⁇ g/ml) for 30 minutes and then exposed to hypoxia.
  • HIF-I ⁇ accumulation was induced by the exposure of A375 cells to Cl-IB-MECA 100 nM (+) for 4 hours in hypoxia in the absence (lane 2) or in the presence (lane 4) of actinomycin D.
  • Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF-l ⁇ monoclonal antibody. Tubulin shows equal loading protein.
  • B The immunoblot signals were quantified using molecular analyst/PC densitometry software (Bio-Rad).
  • FIG. 1 Induction of HIF-I ⁇ accumulation by A 3 receptor stimulation in normoxia.
  • A375 cells were exposed to 100 ⁇ M CoCl 2 alone (lane 1) or in the presence of Cl-IB-MECA 1 nM (lane 2), 10 nM (lane 3), 100 nM (lane 4), 1 ⁇ M (lane 5) and 10 ⁇ M (lane 6) in normoxia for 4 hours.
  • Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF- l ⁇ monoclonal antibody. The blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF- l ⁇ expression using an anti-HIF-l ⁇ monoclonal antibody.
  • A375 cells were exposed to 100 ⁇ M CoCl 2 for 4 hours in normoxia.
  • HIF-l ⁇ accumulation was induced by the exposure of A375 cells to Cl-IB-MECA 100 nM (+) for 4 (lanes 1 and 4) or 6 hours (lanes 5 and 6) in the absence (lanes 1 and 2) or in the presence (lanes 3-6) of cycloheximide (1 ⁇ M).
  • Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF- l ⁇ monoclonal antibody. Tubulin shows equal loading protein.
  • Figure 18. A 3 receptor activation does not affect HIF- l ⁇ degradation in normoxia.
  • A375 cells were incubated in hypoxia in the absence (lanes 1 to 4) or in the presence of Cl-IB-MECA 100 nM (lanes 5 to 8). After 4 hours, melanoma cells were exposed to normoxia and a time-course of HIF-l ⁇ disappearance was performed at 0, 5, 10 and 15 minutes. Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF-l ⁇ monoclonal antibody. Tubulin shows equal loading protein.
  • B The immunoblot signals were quantified using molecular analyst /PC densitometry software (Bio-Rad).
  • the present invention is based, in part, on the surprising discovery by the inventors that adenosine, a purine nucleoside present within hypoxic regions of solid tumors, modulates hypoxia-inducible factor 1 (HIF-I) expression.
  • HIF-I hypoxia-inducible factor 1
  • the inventors have found that in the human A375 melanoma cell line adenosine up-regulates HIF- l ⁇ protein expression in response to hypoxia in a dose- and time-dependent manner.
  • the response to adenosine was not blocked by A 1 , A 2A or A 2 B receptor antagonists, while it was abolished by A 3 receptor antagonists.
  • the inventors have found that Cl-IB-MECA, an adenosine analogue binding with high affinity to A 3 receptors, mimicked adenosine effect in hypoxic cells. Furthermore, A 3 receptor antagonists prevented HIF- l ⁇ protein accumulation in response to A 3 receptor stimulation.
  • the response to adenosine is generated at the cell surface since the inhibition of A 3 receptor expression, by using small interfering RNA, abolished the nucleoside effects.
  • the main intracellular signaling pathways sustained by A 3 receptor stimulation in hypoxia involve p44/p42 mitogen- activated protein kinase (MAPK) and p38 MAPK activation.
  • MAPK mitogen- activated protein kinase
  • the inventors have thus found for the first time that adenosine plays a critical role in HIF- l ⁇ regulation in hypoxia.
  • the inventors have found that compounds which are antagonists of the adenosine receptors, preferably the A 3 receptor, inhibit the protective effect of adenosine on growing tumor cells when such cells are starved of oxygen (/. e. , before an adequate vasculature is developed, or when anti-angiogenesis agents are administered.
  • the antagonists of the invention can bind in the same site as adenosine, or can be allosteric antagonists (i.e., bind at a site different from where adenosine binds, but adversely affect the ability of adenosine to bind to the site or adversely affect the ability of adenosine, once bound to the adenosine receptors particularly A 3 receptors, to protect growing tumor cells).
  • the present invention relates to methods for the treatment, prevention, and/or management of diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-I ⁇ and/or increased HIF- l ⁇ activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) by using adenosine receptor antagonists, particularly A 3 receptor antagonists, alone or in combination with A 1 receptor antagonists.
  • adenosine receptor antagonists particularly A 3 receptor antagonists
  • administration of antagonists for the adenosine receptors antagonizes the protective effects against hypoxia and renders those cells susceptible to destruction due to hypoxia.
  • adenosine receptors in particular, the A 3 receptors
  • antagonists for the adenosine receptors, particularly A 3 receptors are particularly effective in enhancing the activity of anti-tumor agents.
  • the methods and compositions of the invention comprising A 3 receptor antagonists are particularly useful when the levels of HIF-I ⁇ expression and/or activity are elevated above the standard or background level, as determined using methods known to those skilled in the art and dislosed herein.
  • "elevation" of a measured level of HIF-I ⁇ relative to a standard level means that the amount or concentration of HIF-I ⁇ in a sample or subject is sufficiently greater in a subject or sample relative to the standard as detected by any method now known in the art or to be developed in the future for measuring HIF- l ⁇ levels.
  • elevation of the measured level relative to a standard level may be any statistically significant elevation detectable.
  • Such an elevation in HIF-I ⁇ expression and/or activity may include, but is not limited to about a 10%, about a 20%, about a 40%, about an 80%, about a 2-fold, about a 4-fold, about an 10-fold, about a 20- fold, about a 50-fold, about a 100-fold, about a 2 to 20 fold, 2 to 50 fold, 2 to 100 fold, 20 to 50 fold, 20 to 100 fold, elevation, relative to the standard.
  • standard level refers to a baseline amount of HIF-I ⁇ level as determined in one or more normal subjects, i.e., a subject with no known history of past or current diseases, disorders or cancer.
  • the measurement of HIF-I ⁇ level may be carried out using an HIF-l ⁇ probe or a HIF-l ⁇ activity assay (see Section 5.4.4).
  • HIF-l ⁇ activity assay see Section 5.4.4.
  • reference to measuring a level of HIF-l ⁇ in a method of the invention relates to any proxy for HIF-l ⁇ levels.
  • levels may include, but are not limited to, the abundance of HIF-l ⁇ nucleic acid or amino acid sequences in a sample from a subject.
  • a level of HIF-I ⁇ may correspond to the abundance of full-length HIF- l ⁇ protein.
  • a level of HIF-I ⁇ may correspond to abundance of a fragment, analog or derivative of HIF-I ⁇ protein.
  • a level of HIF-I ⁇ can be determined by measuring the abundance of nucleic acids (or sequences complementary thereto) that corresponds to all or fragments of HIF-I ⁇ .
  • the abundance of niRNA encoding HIF- l ⁇ is measured.
  • a probe with which the amount or concentration of HIF- l ⁇ can be determined includes but is not limited to an antibody, an antigen, a nucleic acid, a protein, or a small molecule.
  • the probe is the HIF-l ⁇ protein or a fragment thereof .
  • the probe is an antibody that immunospecifically binds to HIF-l ⁇ , such as e.g., a monoclonal antibody or a binding fragment thereof.
  • measuring a level of HIF-I ⁇ comprises testing at least one aliquot of the sample, said step of testing comprising: (a) contacting the aliquot with an antibody or a fragment thereof that is immunospecific for HIF-I ⁇ , and (b) detecting whether and how much binding has occurred between the antibody or a fragment thereof and at least one species of HIF-I ⁇ in the aliquot.
  • measuring a level of HIF-I ⁇ comprises testing at least one aliquot, said step of testing comprising: (a) contacting the aliquot with a nucleic acid probe that is hybridizable to HIF- l ⁇ mRNA, and (b) detecting whether and how much hybridization has occurred between the nucleic acid probe and at least one species of HIF-I ⁇ mRNA in the aliquot.
  • measuring a level of HIF-I ⁇ involves quantitating the amount of complex formation. For example the amount of complex formation between the antibody or a fragment thereof and at least one species of HIF- 1 ⁇ in the aliquot would correlate with the amount of at least one species of HIF-I ⁇ in the aliquot of the sample.
  • the antibody or other probe is labeled with a detectable marker.
  • the detectable marker is a chemiluminescent, enzymatic, fluorescent, or radioactive label.
  • the therapeutic methods of the invention comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of an A 3 receptor antagonist of the invention improve the therapeutic efficacy of treatment for diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-l ⁇ and/or increased HIF-l ⁇ activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) relative to the traditional modes of such therapies.
  • the methods of the invention reduce the HIF-l ⁇ level to the background level within within one day, one week, 1 month, or 2 months of the commencement of the therapeutic regime.
  • the methods of the invention reduce the level of HIF- l ⁇ to a particular level, that level is maintained during the treatment regimen, such that the maintained level of HIF-I ⁇ is sufficient and effective to result in regression of the disease, e.g., cancer.
  • the methods of the invention result in a reduction of HIF-I ⁇ level to the background level.
  • the invention encompasses reduction of the HIF-I ⁇ level to a level which is within about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50% of the background level.
  • the invention encompasses a method for treatment, prevention and/or management of diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-l ⁇ and/or increased HIF-l ⁇ activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) comprising administering a therapeutically and/or prophylactically effective amount of an A 3 receptor antagonist compound as disclosed herein.
  • the invention also encompasses a method for determining the prognosis of a a disease or disorder associated with overexpression of HIF-I ⁇ and/or increased HIF- l ⁇ activity in a subject.
  • the subject is human, hi some embodiments, the subject has been previously treated with a therapy regimen.
  • the invention encompasses measuring at least a level of HIF-I ⁇ in a subject to determine if the subject is in need of the therapeutic and or prophylcatic methods of the inventon.
  • the invention encompasses measuring a level of at least one HIF-I ⁇ in a sample obtained from the subject and comparing the level measured to a standard level, wherein elevation of the measured level of at least one HIF-I ⁇ relative to the standard level indicates that the subject is at an increased risk for progression of the disease or disorder, e.g., metastasis of the cancer.
  • the invention encompasses compounds which are adenosine receptor antagonists particularly A 3 antagonists for use in the methods of the invention. Examples of such compounds are disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos 6,326,390; 6,407,236; 6,448,253;
  • a 3 receptor antagonists of the invention are particularly useful for prevention, treatment, and/or management of cancer, for example, as a single agent therapy or in combination with other modes of therapy for cancer.
  • the invention encompasses methods of treatment, prevention, or management of cancers which are A 3 expressing cancers including, but not limited to, human leukemia, melanoma, pancreatic carcinoma, ovarian carcinoma, breast carcinoma, prostrate carcinoma, colon carcinoma, lung carcinoma, malignant melanomas, histiocytic lymphoma, and some forms of astrocytoma cells.
  • cancers which are A 3 expressing cancers including, but not limited to, human leukemia, melanoma, pancreatic carcinoma, ovarian carcinoma, breast carcinoma, prostrate carcinoma, colon carcinoma, lung carcinoma, malignant melanomas, histiocytic lymphoma, and some forms of astrocytoma cells.
  • the invention encompasses methods of treatment, prevention, or management which have high level of expression of HIF-I ⁇ including, but not limited to, cervical cancer (early stage), lung cancer (non-small cell lung carcinoma), breast cancer (including lymph node positive breast cancer and lymph node negative breast cancer), oligodendroglioma, orpharyngeal squamous cell carcinoma, ovarian cancer, oesophageal cancer, endometrial cancer, head and neck cancer, gastrointestinal stromal tumor of the stomach
  • the methods of the invention are particularly useful in cancer therapy for providing tissue selectivity, such that the biological effect is observed in tumoral hypoxic cells, where high adenosine concentrations has resulted in increased HIF- l ⁇ accumulation.
  • solid tumors refer to a locus of tumor cells where the majority of the cells are tumor cells or tumor-associated cells, including but not limited to laryngeal tumors, brain tumors, and other tumors of the head and neck; colon, rectal and prostate tumors; breast and thoracic solid tumors; ovarian and uterine tumors; tumors of the esophagus, stomach, pancreas and liver; bladder and gall bladder tumors; testicular cancer; skin tumors such as melanomas.
  • the tumors encompassed within the invention can be either primary or a secondary tumor resulting from metastasis of cancer cells elsewhere in the body to the chest.
  • the invention encompasses use of the adenosine receptor antagonists of the invention, particulalry A 3 receptor antagonists in inhibiting tumor growth in a mammal, including humans.
  • the invention encompasses methods for administering an effective amount of an adenosine receptor antagonists, preferably A3 receptor antagonists to inhibit the ability of adenosine to protect tumor cells.
  • the present invention encompasses methods for treatment, prevention and/or management of cancer comprising administering an adenosine receptor antagonist, particularly an A 3 receptor antagonist combination with other therapeutic and/or prophylactic agents, e.g., cytotoxic agents.
  • an adenosine receptor antagonist particularly an A 3 receptor antagonist combination with other therapeutic and/or prophylactic agents, e.g., cytotoxic agents.
  • cytotoxic agents e.g., cytotoxic agents.
  • the inventors have surprisingly found that adenosine A 3 receptor antagonists synergistically enhance cytotoxic treatment and counter some forms of multi-drug resistance.
  • the combination therapies of the invention will attack the tumor cell directly, inhibit growth of new blood vessels around the tumor cell, and, by virtue of the adenosine A 3 antagonists, inhibit the ability of the cell to survive without the growth of new blood vessels.
  • high affinity adenosine A 3 receptor antagonists are useful as enhancers for many chemotherapeutic treatments of adenosine A 3 receptor expressing cancers.
  • high affinity adenosine A 3 receptor antagonists also counter P-glycoprotein (P-gp) effuse pump multidrug resistance (MDR).
  • P-gp P-glycoprotein
  • MDR multidrug resistance
  • the present invention encompasses the use of high affinity adenosine A 3 receptor antagonists for enhancing chemotherapeutic treatment of cancers expressing adenosine A 3 receptors and countering multi-drug resistance in cancers expressing P-glycoprotein or MRP.
  • adenosine A 3 receptor antagonists are administered before or during administration of a taxane family, vinca alkaloid, camptothecin or antibiotic compound.
  • Preferred high affinity A 3 receptor antagonists include compounds of the general formulas HA, HB, HC and IID described herein, vide infra.
  • the present invention encompasses therapies which involve administering one or more of the compounds of the invention, to an animal, preferably a mammal, and most preferably a human, for preventing, treating, or ameliorating symptoms associated with a cancer, a disease or disorder associated with hypoxia-inducible factor 1 -a (HIF- 1 ⁇ ).
  • the invention further provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of the invention that specifically binds an A 1 or A 3 receptor and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier
  • the pharmaceutical formulation includes an A 3 receptor antagonist and one or more excipients.
  • the formulations can also include other anti-tumor agents, including cytotoxic agents and other anti-angiogenesis agents, including adenosine A 2A antagonists, such as ZM241385 and SCH 5861, adenosine A 2B antagonists, such as MRE-20290-F20 and AS-16, and anti-VEGF antibodies, including humanized and chimeric antibodies.
  • the composition includes an effective amount to inhibit tumor growth of an adenosine A 3 receptor antagonist, a cytotoxic agent, and an anti-angiogenesis agent.
  • the invention provides methods for treating a disease or disorder associated with HIF- l ⁇ in a patient, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound having the following general formulas HA and HB:
  • A is imidazole, pyrazole, or triazole
  • R is -C(X)R 1 , -C(X)-N(R 1 );., -C(X)OR 1 , -C(X)SR 1 , -SO b R 1 , — SO b OR 1 , — SO b SR 1 , or SO b - N(R ⁇ 2 ;
  • R 1 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, lower alkenyl, lower alkanoyl, or, if linked to a nitrogen atom, then taken together with the nitrogen atom, forms an azetidine ring or a 5-6 membered heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatoms such as N, O, S;
  • R 2 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, aralkyl, substituted aralkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 3 is furan, pyrrole, thiophene, benzofuran, indole, benzothiophene, optionally substituted with one or more substituents as described herein for substituted heteroaryl rings;
  • X is O, S, or NR 1 ; b is 1 or 2.
  • R 1 is hydrogen; C 1 to C 8 alkyl; C 2 to C 7 alkenyl, C 2 to C 7 alkynyl; C 3 to C 7 cycloalkyl; C 1 to C 5 alkyl substituted with one or more halogen atoms, hydroxy groups, C 1 to C 4 alkoxy, C 3 to C 7 cycloalkyl or groups of formula — NR 32 R 32 , — C(O)NR 32 R 32 ; aryl, substituted aryl wherein the substitution is selected from the group consisting of C 1 to C 4 alkoxy, C 1 to C 4 alkyl, nitro, amino, cyano, C 1 to C 4 haloalkyl, Ci to C 4 haloalkoxy, carboxy, carboxyamido; C 7 to C 10 aralkyl in which the aryl moiety can be substituted with one or more of the substituents indicated above for the aryl group; a group of formula — (CH 2 ) m
  • C 1 to C 8 alkyl groups are methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl and isopentyl.
  • Examples of C 3 to C 7 cycloalkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, and cyclohexyl.
  • Examples of C 1 to C 5 alkyl groups substituted with C 3 to C 7 cycloalkyl groups include cyclohexylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl, and 2-cyclopentylethyl.
  • substituted C 1 to C 5 alkyl groups include 2-hydroxyethyl, 2-methoxyethyl, trifluoromethyl, 2-fluoroethyl, 2-chloroethyl, 3-aminopropyl, 2-(4-methyl-l-piperazine)ethyl, 2-(4-morpholinyl)ethyl, 2- aminocarbonylethyl, 2-dimethylaminoethyl, 3-dimethylaminopropyl.
  • Aryl is preferably phenyl, optionally substituted with Br, Cl, F, methoxy, nitro, cyano, methyl, trifluoromethyl, difluoromethoxy groups.
  • Examples of 5 to 6 membered ring heterocyclic groups containing N, O and/or S include piperazinyl, morpholinyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridyl, furyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl.
  • Examples of C 7 to C 1O aralkyl groups comprise benzyl or phenethyl optionally substituted by one or more substituents selected from Cl, F, methoxy, nitro, cyano, methyl, trifluoromethyl, and difluoromethoxy.
  • R 1 is hydrogen, C 1 to C 8 alkyl, aryl or C 7 to C 10 aralkyl, optionally substituted, preferably with halogen atoms.
  • X is O
  • R 2 is C 2 -C 3 alkyl or substituted alkyl and R 3 is furan. In a specific embodiment R 2 is alkyl.
  • R is a phenethyl group in which the phenyl ring is substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of chlorine, fluorine atoms, methoxy, nitro, cyano, methyl, trifluoromethyl, and difluoromethoxy groups.
  • substituents selected from the group consisting of chlorine, fluorine atoms, methoxy, nitro, cyano, methyl, trifluoromethyl, and difluoromethoxy groups.
  • the invention provides methods for treating a disease or disorder associated with HIF- l ⁇ in a patient, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound having the general formula HA: wherein:
  • A is imidazole, pyrazole, or triazole;
  • R is -C(X)R 1 , -C(X)-N(R 1 );,, -C(X)OR 1 , -C(X)SR 1 , -SO n R 1 , -SO n SR 1 , or — SO n N(R 1 );,;
  • R 1 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, lower alkenyl, lower alkanoyl, or, if linked to a nitrogen atom, then taken together with the nitrogen atom, forms an azetidine ring or a 5-6 membered heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatoms;
  • R 2 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, aralkyl, substituted aralkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl or aryl;
  • R 3 is furan, pyrrole, thiophene, benzofuran, benzypyrrole, benzothiophene, optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, acyloxy, acylamino, alkaryl, aryl, substituted aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, aminoacyloxy, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO- heteroaryl, -SO 2 -
  • the method is conducted using the compound of the general formula IIA, wherein A is a triazolo ring. In another specific embodiment of the invention the method is conducted using the compound of the general formula IIA, wherein A is a pyrazolo ring.
  • the method uses as high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonist the "phenyl-carbamoyl-amino" compounds of the general formula HC and pharmaceutical salts thereof:
  • A is imidazole, pyrazole, or triazole
  • R 2 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, aralkyl, substituted aralkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl or aryl;
  • R 3 is furan; and R 6 is aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycle or substituted heterocycle.
  • Non-limiting examples of the compounds of the general formula HA and HC include compounds listed below in Tables 2 and 3.
  • N 1 - ⁇ 4-[(4-methylpiperazin-l -yl)sulfonyl] -phenyl ⁇ urea 106d N-[2-(2-furyl)-8-methyl-8H-pyrazolo[4,3-e][l,2,4]triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidin-5-yl]-N'- pyridin-4-yl urea 107d N-[2-(2-furyl)-8-methyl-8H-pyrazolo[4,3-e][l,2,4]triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidin-5-yl]-N'- pyridin-4-ylurea hydrochloride
  • the invention provides methods for treating a disease or disorder associated with HIF-I ⁇ in a patient, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound having the following general formula HD:
  • R is -C(X)R 1 , -C(X)-N(R 1 K -C(X)OR 1 , -C(X)SR 1 , -SO b R 1 , — SO b OR 1 , —
  • R 1 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, lower alkenyl, lower alkanoyl, or, if linked to a nitrogen atom, then taken together with the nitrogen atom, forms an azetidine ring or a 5-6 membered heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatoms such as N, O, S;
  • R 2 is hydrogen, halogen, preferably chloro, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, aralkyl, substituted aralkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 3 is furan, pyrrole, thiophene, benzofuran, indole, benzothiophene, optionally substituted with one or more substituents as described herein for substituted heteroaryl rings;
  • X iS O 5 S 5 Or NR 1 ; and b is 1 or 2.
  • the compound is of the formula IID as described above, with the proviso that R 2 is not halogen when R is — C(X)R 1 .
  • a preferred R group is — C(X)- N(R 1 ⁇ 5 where X is O.
  • R 1 is hydrogen; C 1-8 alkyl; C 2-7 alkenyl, C 2-7 alkynyl; C 3-7 cycloalkyl; Ci .5 alkyl substituted with one or more halogen atoms, hydroxy groups, C 1-4 alkoxy, C 3-7 cycloalkyl or groups of formula — NR 32 , — C(O)NR 32 ; aryl, substituted aryl wherein the substitution is selected from the group consisting of C M alkoxy, C 1-4 alkyl, nitro, amino, cyano, C 1-4 haloalkyl, C 1-4 haloalkoxy, carboxy, carboxyamido; C 7-10 aralkyl in which the aryl moiety can be substituted with one or more of the substituents indicated above for the aryl group; a group of formula —
  • Het is a 5-6 membered aromatic or non aromatic heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of N, O, and S and m is an integer from 1 to 5;
  • Ci -8 alkyl groups are methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl and isopentyl.
  • Examples OfC 3-7 cycloalkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, and cyclohexyl.
  • Examples Of Ci -5 alkyl groups substituted with C 3-7 cycloalkyl groups include cyclohexylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl, and 2- cyclopentylethyl.
  • substituted C 1-5 alkyl groups include 2-hydroxyethyl, 2- methoxyethyl, trifluoromethyl, 2-fluoroethyl, 2-chloroethyl, 3-aminopropyl, 2-(4methyl-l- piperazine)ethyl, 2-(4-morpholinyl)ethyl, 2-aminocarbonyIethyl, 2-dimethylaminoethyl, 3- dimethylaminopropyl.
  • Aryl is preferably phenyl, optionally substituted with Cl, F, methoxy, nitro, cyano, methyl, trifluoromethyl, difluoromethoxy groups.
  • Examples of 5 to 6 membered ring heterocyclic groups containing N, O and/or S include piperazinyl, morpholinyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridyl, furyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl.
  • Examples of C 7- io aralkyl groups comprise benzyl or phenethyl optionally substituted by one or more substituents selected from Cl, F, methoxy, nitro, cyano, methyl, trifluoromethyl, and difluoromethoxy.
  • R 1 is hydrogen, Ci -8 alkyl, aryl or C 7- io aralkyl, optionally substituted, preferably with halogen atoms.
  • X is O
  • R 2 is chloro
  • Particularly preferred compounds are those in which R is a phenethyl group in which the phenyl ring is substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of chlorine, fluorine atoms, methoxy, nitro, cyano, methyl, trifluoromethyl, and difluoromethoxy groups.
  • Non-limiting examples of compounds of the formula HD include compounds listed below in Table.
  • Compounds of the general formulas HA, IIB and HC can be prepared, for example, as described in U.S. Patent No.'s 6,407,236; 6,448,253 and U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 10/134,219, filed April 26, 2002; the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • Compounds of the general formula HD can be prepared, for example, as described in U.S. Patent No. 6,358,964; the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • certain synthetic intermediates used to prepare compounds used in the invention may contain reactive moeities.
  • reactive and fragile functional groups often must be protected prior to a particular reaction, or sequence of reactions, and then restored to their original forms after the last reaction is completed.
  • groups are protected by converting them to a relatively stable derivative. For example, a hydroxyl group may be converted to an ether group and an amine group converted to an amide or carbamate.
  • the present invention relates to methods for the treatment, prevention, and/or management of diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-I ⁇ and/or increased HIF-I ⁇ activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) by using A 3 receptor antagonists alone or in combination with Ai receptor antagonists.
  • diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-I ⁇ and/or increased HIF-I ⁇ activity e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders
  • compositions of the invention comprising A 3 receptor antagonists are particularly useful when the levels of HIF-I ⁇ expression and/or activity are elevated above the standard or background level, as determined using methods known to those skilled in the art and dislosed herein.
  • elevation of the measured level relative to a standard level may be any statistically significant detectable elevation.
  • Such an elevation of HIF-I ⁇ expression and/or activity may include, but is not limited to about a 10%, about a 20%, about a 40%, about an 80%, about a 2-fold, about a 4-fold, about a 10- fold, about a 20-fold, about a 50-fold, about a 100-fold, about a 2 to 20 fold, 2 to 50 fold, 2 to 100 fold, 20 to 50 fold, 20 to 100 fold, elevation, relative to the standard.
  • the term "about” as used herein, refers to levels of elevation of the standard numerical value plus or minus 10% of the numerical value.
  • the therapeutic methods of the invention comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of an A 3 receptor antagonist of the invention improve the therapeutic efficacy of treatment for diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF- l ⁇ and/or increased HIF- l ⁇ activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) relative to the traditional modes of such therapies.
  • the methods of the invention reduce the HIF- l ⁇ level to the background level within 1 day, 1 week, 1 month, at least 2 months of the commencement of the therapeutic regime.
  • the methods of the invention result in a reduction of an HIF-I ⁇ level to the background level.
  • the invention encompasses reduction of the HIF- l ⁇ level to a level which is within about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50% of the background level.
  • the invention encompasses a method for treatment, prevention and/or management of diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-I ⁇ and/or increased HIF- l ⁇ activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) comprising administering a therapeutically and/or prophylactically effective amount of an A3 receptor antagonist compound as disclosed herein.
  • Compounds of the present invention that function as prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents of a disease or disorder can be administered to an animal, preferably a mammal, and most preferably a human, to treat, prevent or ameliorate one or more symptoms associated with the disease or disorder.
  • the subject is preferably a mammal such as non-primate (e.g., cows, pigs, horses, cats, dogs, rats, etc.) and a primate (e.g., monkey, such as a cynomolgous monkey and a human).
  • the subject is a human.
  • Compounds of the invention can be administered in combination with one or more other prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents useful in the treatment, prevention or management of a HIF-I ⁇ -mediated disorders, which are improved or ameliorated by modulation of HIF-I expression or activities.
  • the amount of the compounds of the invention (including adenosine A 1 and/or A 3 antagonists) required to be effective will, of course, vary with the individual mammal being treated and is ultimately at the discretion of the medical or veterinary practitioner.
  • the factors to be considered include the condition being treated, the route of administration, the nature of the formulation, the mammal's body weight, surface area, age and general condition, and the particular compound to be administered.
  • a suitable effective dose is in the range of about 0.1 ⁇ g/kg to about 100 mg/kg, about 0.1 ⁇ g/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 0.1 ⁇ g/kg to about lg/kg, about 100 ug/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 100 ug/kg to aboutlg/kg, about 1 mg/kg to about 100 mg/kg, about 1 mg/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 1 mg/kg to about lg/kg of the patient's body weight.
  • the total daily dose may be given as a single dose, multiple doses, e.g., two to six times per day, or by intravenous infusion for a selected duration. Dosages above or below the range cited above are within the scope of the present invention and may be administered to the individual patient if desired and necessary.
  • compositions of the invention comprise the administration of one or more compounds of the invention to subjects/patients suffering from or expected to suffer from a disease or disorder.
  • the invention encompasses combination therapies by administration of one or more compounds of the invention in combination with administration of one or more other therapies that are traditionally used for the treatment and/or prevention of the particular disease or disorder being treated or prevented.
  • the A 3 and/or A 1 receptor antagonists of the invention may be administered in combination with one or more cancer therapies such as, but not limited to, chemotherapies, radiation therapies, hormonal therapies, and/or biological therapies/immunotherapies.
  • Prophylactic and therapeutic compounds that may be used in the methods and compositions of the invention include, but are not limited to, proteinaceous molecules, including, but not limited to, peptides, polypeptides, proteins, including post-translationally modified proteins, antibodies, etc.; small molecules (less than 1000 daltons), inorganic or organic compounds; nucleic acid molecules including, but not limited to, double-stranded or single-stranded DNA, double-stranded or single-stranded RNA, as well as triple helix nucleic acid molecules.
  • Prophylactic and therapeutic compounds can be derived from any known organism (including, but not limited to, animals, plants, bacteria, fungi, and protista, or viruses) or from a library of synthetic molecules, hi certain embodiments, one or more compounds of the invention are administered to a mammal, preferably a human, concurrently with one or more other therapeutic agents useful for the treatment of cancer or a disorder.
  • the term "concurrently” is not limited to the administration of prophylactic or therapeutic agents at exactly the same time, but rather it is meant that compounds of the invention and the other agent are administered to a subject in a sequence and within a time interval such that the compounds of the invention can act together with the other agent to provide an increased benefit than if they were administered otherwise.
  • each prophylactic or therapeutic agent may be administered at the same time or sequentially in any order at different points in time; however, if not administered at the same time, they should be administered sufficiently close in time so as to provide the desired therapeutic or prophylactic effect.
  • Each therapeutic agent can be administered separately, in any appropriate form and by any suitable route.
  • the prophylactic or therapeutic agents are administered less than 1 hour apart, at about 1 hour apart, at about 1 hour to about 2 hours apart, at about 2 hours to about 3 hours apart, at about 3 hours to about 4 hours apart, at about 4 hours to about 5 hours apart, at about 5 hours to about 6 hours apart, at about 6 hours to about 7 hours apart, at about 7 hours to about 8 hours apart, at about 8 hours to about 9 hours apart, at about 9 hours to about 10 hours apart, at about 10 hours to about 11 hours apart, at about 11 hours to about 12 hours apart, no more than 24 hours apart or no more than 48 hours apart, hi preferred embodiments, two or more components are administered within the same patient visit.
  • the dosage amounts and frequencies of administration provided herein are encompassed by the terms therapeutically effective and prophylactically effective.
  • the dosage and frequency further will typically vary according to factors specific for each patient depending on the specific therapeutic or prophylactic agents administered, the severity and type of cancer, the route of administration, as well as age, body weight, response, and the past medical history of the patient. Suitable regimens can be selected by one skilled in the art by considering such factors and by following, for example, dosages reported in the literature and recommended in the Physician 's Desk Reference (58 th ed.,
  • Compounds of the invention can be used alone or in combination with other anti-cancer agents, e.g., therapeutic antibodies known in the art to prevent, inhibit or reduce the growth of primary tumors or metastasis of cancerous cells.
  • a compound of the invention when administered alone or in combination with an anti-cancer agent, inhibits or reduces the growth of primary tumor or metastasis of cancerous cells by at least 99%, at least 95%, at least 90%, at least 85%, at least 80%, at least 75%, at least 70%, at least 60%, at least 50%, at least 45%, at least 40%, at least 45%, at least 35%, at least 30%, at least 25%, at least 20%, or at least 10% relative to the growth of primary tumor or metastasis in absence of said compound of the invention.
  • compounds of the invention particularly the A 1 and A 3 receptor antagonists in combination with an anti-cancer agent inhibit or reduce the growth of primary tumor or metastasis of cancer by at least 99%, at least 95%, at least 90%, at least 85%, at least 80%, at least 75%, at least 70%, at least 60%, at least 50%, at least 45%, at least 40%, at least 45%, at least 35%, at least 30%, at least 25%, at least 20%, or at least 10% relative to the growth or metastasis in absence of said compounds.
  • the methods of the invention are particularly useful for the treatment of solid tumors, hypoxic tumors, A 3 expressing tumors and HIF- l ⁇ expressing tumors.
  • the compounds of the invention particularly the A 1 and A 3 receptor antagonists can be used to treat solid tumors.
  • Solid tumors which can be treated in accordance with the methods of the invention include without limitation fibrodysplasia ossificans progressiva, prostate cancer, benign prostatic hyperplasia, recessive dystrophic epidermolysis bullosa (RDEB), Lewis lung carcinoma, breast cancer, and brain tumors.
  • RDEB recessive dystrophic epidermolysis bullosa
  • a 3 expressing cancers refers to human cancers that express the adenosine A 3 receptor or that otherwise comprise elevated concentrations of adenosine A 3 receptors. Elevated concentration is determined by comparison to normal, non-cancerous tissues of a similar cell type.
  • a 3 expressing cancers include, without limitation, human leukemia, melanoma, pancreatic carcinoma, breast carcinoma, prostrate carcinoma, colon carcinoma, lung carcinomamalignant melanomas, histiocytic lymphoma, and some forms of astrocytoma cells.
  • HIF- l ⁇ expressing cancers refers to human cancer that express HIF-I ⁇ or that otherwise comprise elevated concentrations of HIF-I ⁇ . Elevated concentration is determined by comparison to normal, non-cancerous tissues of a similar cell type.
  • HIF-I ⁇ expressing cancers include without limitation cervical cancer (early stage), lung cancer (non-small cell lung carcinoma), breast cancer (including lymph node positive breast cancer and lymph node negative breast cancer), oligodendroglioma, orpharyngeal squamous cell carcinoma, ovarian cancer, oesophageal cancer, endometrial cancer, head and neck cancer, gastrointestinal stromal tumor of the stomach.
  • the methods and compositions of the invention comprise the administration of one or more A 3 receptor antagonist compounds of the invention (alone or in combination with other anti-cancer agents) to subjects/patients suffering from or expected to suffer from cancer, e.g., have a genetic predisposition for a particular type of cancer, have been exposed to a carcinogen, or are in remission from a particular cancer.
  • the methods and compositions of the invention may be used as a first line or second line cancer treatment. Included in the invention is also the treatment of patients undergoing other cancer therapies and the methods and compositions of the invention can be used before any adverse effects or intolerance of these other cancer therapies occurs.
  • the invention also encompasses methods for administering one or more A 3 receptor antagonist compounds of the invention to treat or ameliorate symptoms in refractory patients.
  • that a cancer is refractory to a therapy means that at least some significant portion of the cancer cells are not killed or their cell division arrested.
  • the determination of whether the cancer cells are refractory can be made either in vivo or in vitro by any method known in the art for assaying the effectiveness of treatment on cancer cells, using the art-accepted meanings of "refractory" in such a context.
  • a cancer is refractory where the number of cancer cells has not been significantly reduced, or has increased.
  • the invention also encompasses methods for administering one or more A 3 receptor antagonist compounds of the invention to prevent the onset or recurrence of cancer in patients predisposed to having cancer.
  • the A 3 receptor antagonists of the invention are administered to reverse resistance or reduced sensitivity of cancer cells to certain hormonal, radiation and chemotherapeutic agents thereby resensitizing the cancer cells to one or more of these agents, which can then be administered (or continue to be administered) to treat or manage cancer, including to prevent metastasis.
  • the invention provides methods for treating cancer in a subject by administering one or more A 3 receptor antagonists of the invention in combination with any other treatment or to patients who have proven refractory to other treatments but are no longer on these treatments.
  • the patients being treated by the methods of the invention are patients already being treated with chemotherapy, radiation therapy, hormonal therapy, or biological therapy/immunotherapy.
  • these patients are refractory patients and those with cancer despite treatment with existing cancer therapies, hi other embodiments, the patients have been treated and have no disease activity and one or more A 3 receptor antagonist compounds of the invention are administered to prevent the recurrence of cancer.
  • the invention also provides methods of treatment of cancer as an alternative to chemotherapy, radiation therapy, hormonal therapy, and/or biological therapy/immunotherapy where the therapy has proven or may prove too toxic, i.e., results in unacceptable or unbearable side effects, for the subject being treated.
  • the subject being treated with the methods of the invention may, optionally, be treated with other cancer treatments such as surgery, chemotherapy, radiation therapy, hormonal therapy or biological therapy, depending on which treatment was found to be unacceptable or unbearable.
  • the invention provides administration of one or more A 3 receptor antagonist compounds of the invention without any other cancer therapies for the treatment of cancer, but who have proved refractory to such treatments.
  • patients refractory to other cancer therapies are administered one or more A 3 receptor antagonist compounds in the absence of cancer therapies.
  • a high affinity adenosine A 3 receptor antagonist and a chemotherapeutic cancer agent are administered to the patient.
  • the combination therapy enhances the effect of the chemotherapeutic cancer agent and prevents multi-drug resistance from developing.
  • the chemotherapeutic cancer agents showing desirable response to the present invention are typical of agents noted for developing P-gp or MRP class multi-drug resistance, including, without limitation, taxane compounds, vinca alkaloids, camptothecins and antibiotics useful as chemotherapeutic agents.
  • the invention encompasses combination therapies for treating cancers that have already developed multi-drug resistance.
  • the high affinity adenosine A 3 receptor antagonist counters the existing MDR while further enhancing the effect of the chemotherapeutic cancer agent.
  • the present invention is not effective for all forms of MDR cancers.
  • the MDR cancers showing desirable response to the present invention are in the P-gp and MRP classes.
  • the high affinity adenosine A 3 receptor antagonist is preferably administered either before or during administration of the taxane compound.
  • this is done to reduce the incidence of hypersensitivity to the taxane agent.
  • Commercially available compounds of the taxane family are paclitaxel (commercially available under the tradename TAXOL from Bristol-Myers Squibb Company, Princeton, NY and as a generic drug from IVAX Corp, Miami, FL) and docetaxel (commercially available under the tradename TAXOTERE from Aventis Pharmaceuticals, Collegeville, PA), which are encompassed in the instant invention.
  • the composition comprises an effective amount of an adenosine A 3 receptor antagonist and a chemotherapeutic agent that is a taxane family compound, for example paclitaxel or docetaxel to inhibit tumor growth.
  • a chemotherapeutic agent that is a taxane family compound, for example paclitaxel or docetaxel to inhibit tumor growth.
  • Paclitaxel is commercially available under the tradename TAXOL from Bristol-Myers Squibb Company, Princeton, NY and as a generic drug from IVAX Corp, Miami, FL.
  • Docetaxel is commercially available under the tradename TAXOTERE from Aventis Pharmaceuticals, Collegeville, PA.
  • the A 3 antagonist may reduce the growth rate of cancerous cells, interfere with adenosine protective effects against hypoxia, enhance the chemotherapeutic effect of the taxane, reduce hypersensitivity reactions in the patient and counter development of multi- drug resistance.
  • Cancers and related disorders that can be treated or prevented by methods and compositions comprising A 1 and/or A 3 receptor antagonists of the present invention include, but are not limited to, the following: Leukemias including, but not limited to, acute leukemia, acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute myelocytic leukemias such as myeloblasts, promyelocyte, myelomonocytic, monocytic, erythroleukemia leukemias and myelodysplastic syndrome, chronic leukemias such as but not limited to, chronic myelocytic (granulocytic) leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, hairy cell leukemia; polycythemia vera; lymphomas such as but not limited to Hodgkin's disease, non-Hodgkin's disease; multiple myelomas such as but not limited to smoldering multiple myeloma, nonsecretory myeloma, osteosclerotic myelom
  • cancers include myxosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, mesothelioma, synovioma, hemangioblastoma, epithelial carcinoma, cystadenocarcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma and papillary adenocarcinomas (for a review of such disorders, see Fishman et ah, 1985, Medicine, 2d Ed., J.B. Lippincott Co., Philadelphia and Murphy et al, 1997, Informed Decisions: The Complete Book of Cancer Diagnosis, Treatment, and Recovery, Viking Penguin, Penguin Books U.S.A., Inc., United States of America).
  • carcinoma including that of the bladder, breast, colon, kidney, liver, lung, ovary, pancreas, stomach, cervix, thyroid and skin; including squamous cell carcinoma; hematopoietic tumors of lymphoid lineage, including leukemia, acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute lymphoblastic leukemia, B-cell lymphoma, T-cell lymphoma, Berketts lymphoma; hematopoietic tumors of myeloid lineage, including acute and chronic myelogenous leukemias and promyelocytic leukemia; tumors of mesenchymal origin, including fibrosarcoma and rhabdomyoscarcoma; other tumors, including melanoma, seminoma, tetratocarcinoma, neuroblastom
  • cancers caused by aberrations in apoptosis would also be treated by the methods and compositions of the invention.
  • Such cancers may include but not be limited to follicular lymphomas, carcinomas with p53 mutations, hormone dependent tumors of the breast, prostate and ovary, and precancerous lesions such as familial adenomatous polyposis, and myelodysplastic syndromes.
  • malignancy or dysproliferative changes (such as metaplasias and dysplasias), or hyperproliferative disorders, are treated or prevented by the methods and compositions of the invention in the ovary, bladder, breast, colon, lung, skin, pancreas, or uterus.
  • sarcoma, melanoma, or leukemia is treated or prevented by the methods and compositions of the invention.
  • Cancers associated with the cancer antigens may be treated or prevented by administration of the A 3 receptor antagonists of the invention in combination with an antibody that binds the cancer antigen and is cytotoxic.
  • the A 3 receptor antagonists of the invention enhance the antibody mediated cytotoxic effect of the antibody directed at the particular cancer antigen.
  • cancers associated with the following cancer antigen may be treated or prevented by the methods and compositions of the invention.
  • KS 1/4 pan-carcinoma antigen Perez and Walker, 1990, J. Immunol. 142:32-37; Bumal, 1988, Hybridoma 7(4):407-415
  • ovarian carcinoma antigen CA125
  • prostatic acid phosphate (Tailor et al , 1990, Nucl. Acids Res. 18(1):4928), prostate specific antigen (Henttu and Vihko, 1989, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 10(2):903-910; Israeli et al, 1993, Cancer Res. 53:227-230), melanoma-associated antigen p97 (Estin et al, 1989, J Natl. Cancer Instil 81(6):445-44), melanoma antigen gp75 (Vijayasardahl et al, 1990, J. Exp. Med.
  • HMW-MAA high molecular weight melanoma antigen
  • CEA carcinoembryonic antigen
  • CEA polymorphic epithelial mucin antigen
  • human milk fat globule antigen Colorectal tumor-associated antigens such as: CEA, TAG-72 (Yokata et al, 1992, Cancer Res.
  • melanoma specific antigens such as ganglioside GD2 (Saleh et al, 1993, J.Immunol., 151, 3390-3398), ganglioside GD3 (Shitara et al,
  • ganglioside GM3 Hoon et ⁇ /., 1993, Cancer Res. 53:5244-5250
  • tumor-specific transplantation type of cell-surface antigen TSTA
  • virally-induced tumor antigens including T-antigen DNA tumor viruses and envelope antigens of RNA tumor viruses
  • oncofetal antigen-alpha-fetoprotein such as CEA of colon
  • bladder tumor oncofetal antigen Hellstrom et al, 1985, Cancer. Res. 45:2210-2188
  • differentiation antigen such as human lung carcinoma antigen L6, L20 (Hellstrom et al, 1986, Cancer Res.
  • antigens of fibrosarcoma human leukemia T cell antigen-Gp37 (Bhattacharya-Chatterjee et ⁇ /., 1988, J oflmmun. 141:1398-1403), neoglycoprotein, sphingolipids, breast cancer antigen such as EGFR (Epidermal growth factor receptor), HER2 antigen (pi 85 ⁇ 112 ), polymorphic epithelial mucin (PEM) (Hilkens et al, 1992, Trends in Bio. Chem. Sci.
  • PEM polymorphic epithelial mucin
  • malignant human lymphocyte antigen-APO-1 (Bernhard et al, 1989, Science 245:301-304), differentiation antigen (Feizi, 1985, Nature 314:53-57) such as I antigen found in fetal erthrocytes and primary endoderm, I(Ma) found in gastric adencarcinomas, M 18 and M39 found in breast epithelium, SSEA-I found in myeloid cells, VEP8, VEP9, MyI, VIM-D5,and D 2 56-22 found in colorectal cancer, TRA-I- 85 (blood group H), C14 found in colonic adenocarcinoma, F3 found in lung adenocarcinoma, AH6 found in gastric cancer, Y hapten, Le y found in embryonal carcinoma cells, TL5 (blood group A), EGF receptor found in A431 cells , E 1 series (blood group B) found in pancreatic cancer, FCl 0.2 found in embryonal carcinoma cells
  • the high affinity adenosine A 3 receptor antagonists of the invention can be administered alone or in combination with other therapeutic and/or prophylactic agents.
  • the methods of the invention encompass the administration of one or more chemotherapeutic cancer agents.
  • Chemotherapeutic cancer agents are defined as agents that attack and kill cancer cells.
  • Chemotherapeutic agents that may be used inthe methods of the invention include taxane compounds and derivatives thereof, paclitaxel and its derivatives or docetaxel and its derivatives. Additional taxane derivatives and methods of synthesis are disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 6,191,287 to Holton et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,705,508 to Ojima et al, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,688,977 and 5,750,737 to Sisti et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,248,796 to Chen et al, U.S. Patent No. 6,020,507 to Gibson et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,908,835 to Bissery, all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
  • chemotherapeutic cancer agents include topoisomerase I inhibitors, such as camptothecin compounds.
  • camptothecin compounds include CamptosarTM (irinotecan HCL), HycamtinTM (topotecan HCL) and other compounds derived from camptothecin and its analogues.
  • chemotherapeutic cancer agents that may be used in the methods and compositions of the invention are podophyllotoxin derivatives, such as etoposide, teniposide and mitopodozide.
  • the invention further encompasses other chemotherapeutic cancer agents known as alkylating agents, which alkylate the genetic material in tumor cells. These include without limitation cisplatin, cyclophosphamide, nitrogen mustard, trimethylene thiophosphoramide, carmustine, busulfan, chlorambucil, belustine, uracil mustard, chlornaphazin, and dacarbazine.
  • the invention encompasses antimetabolites as chemotherapeutic agents.
  • chemotherapeutic cancer agents examples include cytosine arabinoside, fluorouracil, methotrexate, mercaptopurine, azathioprime, and procarbazine.
  • An additional category of chemotherapeutic cancer agents that may be used in the methods and compositions of the invention include antibiotics. Examples include without limitation doxorubicin, bleomycin, dactinomycin, daunorubicin, mithrarnycin, mitomycin, mytomycin C, and daunomycin. There are numerous liposomal formulations commercially available for these compounds.
  • the invention further encompasses other chemotherapeutic cancer agents including without limitation anti-tumor antibodies, dacarbazine, azacytidine, amsacrine, melphalan, ifosfamide and mitoxantrone.
  • chemotherapeutic cancer agents including without limitation anti-tumor antibodies, dacarbazine, azacytidine, amsacrine, melphalan, ifosfamide and mitoxantrone.
  • the A 3 antagonists can be administered alone or in combination with other anti-tumor agents, including cytotoxic/antineoplastic agents and anti-angiogenic agents. Cytotoxic/anti-neoplastic agents are defined as agents which attack and kill cancer cells.
  • cytotoxic/anti-neoplastic agents are alkylating agents, which alkylate the genetic material in tumor cells, e.g., cis-platin, cyclophosphamide, nitrogen mustard, trimethylene thiophosphoramide, carmustine, busulfan, chlorambucil, belustine, uracil mustard, chlornaphazin, and dacabazine.
  • Other cytotoxic/anti-neoplastic agents are antimetabolites for tumor cells, e.g., cytosine arabinoside, fluorouracil, methotrexate, mercaptopuirine, azathioprime, and procarbazine.
  • cytotoxic/anti-neoplastic agents are antibiotics, e.g., doxorubicin, bleomycin, dactinomycin, daunorubicin, mithramycin, mitomycin, mytomycin C, and daunomycin. There are numerous liposomal formulations commercially available for these compounds. Still other cytotoxic/anti-neoplastic agents are mitotic inhibitors (vinca alkaloids). These include vincristine, vinblastine and etoposide.
  • Miscellaneous cytotoxic/anti-neoplastic agents include taxol and its derivatives, L-asparaginase, anti-tumor antibodies, dacarbazine, azacytidine, amsacrine, melphalan, VM-26, ifosfamide, mitoxantrone, and vindesine.
  • Anti-angiogenic agents are well known to those of skill in the art. Suitable anti-angiogenic agents for use in the methods and compositions of the invention include anti-VEGF antibodies, including humanized and chimeric antibodies, anti-VEGF aptamers and antisense oligonucleotides. Other known inhibitors of angiogenesis include angiostatin, endostatin, interferons, interleukin 1 (including ⁇ and ⁇ ) interleukin 12, retinoic acid, and tissue inhibitors of metalloproteinase-1 and -2. (TIMP-I and -T). Small molecules, including topoisomerases such as razoxane, a topoisomerase II inhibitor with anti- angiogenic activity, can also be used.
  • the anti-angiogenesis compound is an adenosine A 2a antagonist.
  • a 2a antagonists are well known to those of skill in the art. Examples of these compounds include SCH 58261 from Schering Plough, ZM241385 (Palmer et al., MoI. Pharmacol., 48:970-974 (1995), the tricyclic non-xanthine antagonists and the triazoloquinazolines, including CP 66,713, disclosed inNikodijevic et al., J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther., 259:286-294 (1991), as well as the compounds disclosed in von Lubitz et al., Eur. J. Pharmacol, 287:295-302 (1995). The contents of each of the references above are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • Anti-cancer agents that can be used in combination with A 3 receptor antagonists of the invention in the various embodiments of the invention, including pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms and kits of the invention, include, but are not limited to: acivicin; aclarubicin; acodazole hydrochloride; acronine; adozelesin; aldesleukin; altretamine; ambomycin; ametantrone acetate; aminoglutethimide; amsacrine; anastrozole; anthramycin; asparaginase; asperlin; azacitidine; azetepa; azotomycin; batimastat; benzodepa; bicalutamide; bisantrene hydrochloride; bisnafide dimesylate; bizelesin; bleomycin sulfate; brequinar sodium; bropirimine; busulfan; cactinomycin; calusterone; caracemide; carbetimer
  • anti-cancer drugs include, but are not limited to: 20-epi-l,25 dihydroxyvitamin D3; 5-etbynyluracil; abiraterone; aclarubicin; acylfulvene; adecypenol; adozelesin; aldesleukin; ALL-TK antagonists; altretamine; ambamustine; amidox; amifostine; aminolevulinic acid; amrubicin; amsacrine; anagrelide; anastrozole; andrographolide; angiogenesis inhibitors; antagonist D; antagonist G; antarelix; anti-dorsalizing morphogenetic protein- 1 ; antiandrogen, prostatic carcinoma; antiestrogen; antineoplaston; antisense oligonucleotides; aphidicolin glycinate; apoptosis gene modulators; apoptosis regulators; apurinic acid; ara-CDP-DL-
  • B betulinic acid; bFGF inhibitor; bicalutamide; bisantrene; bisaziridinylspermine; bisnafide; bistratene A; bizelesin; breflate; bropirimine; budotitane; buthionine sulfoximine; calcipotriol; calphostin C; camptothecin derivatives; canarypox IL-2; capecitabine; carboxamide-amino-triazole; carboxyamidotriazole; CaRest M3; CARN 700; cartilage derived inhibitor; carzelesin; casein kinase inhibitors (ICOS); castanospermine; cecropin B; cetrorelix; chlorlns; chloroquinoxaline sulfonamide; cicaprost; cis-porphyrin; cladribine; clomifene analogues; clotrimazole; collismycin A;
  • Preferred additional anti-cancer drugs are 5-fluorouracil and leucovorin.
  • therapeutic antibodies that can be used in methods of the invention include but are not limited to HERCEPTIN® (Trastuzumab) (Genentech, CA) which is a humanized anti-HER2 monoclonal antibody for the treatment of patients with metastatic breast cancer; REOPRO® (abciximab) (Centocor) which is an anti-glycoprotein Ilb/IIIa receptor on the platelets for the prevention of clot formation; ZENAP AX® (daclizumab) (Roche Pharmaceuticals, Switzerland) which is an immunosuppressive, humanized anti-CD25 monoclonal antibody for the prevention of acute renal allograft rejection; PANOREXTM which is a murine anti-17-IA cell surface antigen IgG2a antibody (Glaxo Wellcome/Centocor); BEC2 which is a murine anti-idiotype (GD3 epitope) IgG antibody (I
  • MAb-VEGF NSCLC metastatic VEGF
  • IDEC Zevahn (Rituxan + yttrium-90) low grade of follicular, CD 20 relapsed or refractory, CD20-positive, B-cell NHL and Rituximab- refractory NHL
  • Cetuximab + cisplatin head & neck cancer EGF receptor extendensive incurable local-regional disease & distant metasteses
  • IMC-ICl 1 colorectal cancer with VEGF-receptor liver metasteses
  • CEA-Cide metastatic solid tumors CEA
  • CEA-Scan Tc-99m-labeled colorectal cancer CEA arcitumomab (radioimaging)
  • CEA-Scan Tc-99m-labeled Breast cancer CEA arcitumomab (radioimaging)
  • CEA-Scan Tc-99m-labeled lung cancer CEA arcitumomab (radioimaging)
  • CEA-Scan Tc-99m-labeled intraoperative tumors CEA arcitumomab (radio imaging) Company Product Disease Target
  • LymphoScan Tc-99m-labeled lymphomas CD22 (radioimaging)
  • CTLA-4 Medarex MDX-101 (CTLA-4) Prostate and other CTLA-4 cancers
  • NeoRx CD20-streptavidin (+ biotin-yttrium Non-Hodgkins CD20 90) lymphoma
  • MAb lung/kidney cancer lung & kidney cancer NA nacolomab tafenatox (C242 + colon & pancreatic NA staphylococcal enterotoxin) cancer
  • the A 3 receptor antagonists of the invention may be used in combination with one or more ATP depleting agents for enhancing the therapeutic efficacy of treating a disease or disorder as disclosed herein, i.e., cancer.
  • the A 3 receptor antagonists of the invention may be used with verapamil for enhancing the therapeutic efficacy of conventional modes of treating a disease or disorder as discussed herein, i.e., cancer.
  • Compounds of the invention can be used alone or in combination with other therapeutic and/or prophylactic agents to prevent, treat or manage respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders (COPD).
  • COPD obstructive pulmonary disorders
  • the methods and compositions comprising A 1 and/or A 3 receptor antagonists of the invention are effective for treatment, prevention, and/or management of asthma.
  • the therapeutic and prophylactic methods of the invention for asthma may be used in combination with other methods known in the art for the treatment, prevention and/or management of asthma including but not limited to inhaled beta 2 agonists, inhaled corticosteroids, retinoic acid, anti-IgE antibodies, phosphodiesterase inhibitors, leukotriene antagonists, anti IL-9 antibody, and/or anti-mucin therapies (e.g., anti hCLCAl therapy such as LomucinTM).
  • ⁇ -adrenergic drugs e.g.
  • epinephrine and isoproterenol theophylline, anticholinergic drugs (e.g., atropine and ipratorpium bromide), and corticosteroids, adrenergic stimulants (e.g., catecholamines (e.g., epinephrine, isoproterenol, and isoetharine), resorcinols (e.g., metaproterenol, terbutaline, and fenoterol), and saligenins (e.g., salbutamol), other steroids, immunosuppressant agents (e.g., methotrexate and gold salts), mast cell modulators (e.g., cromolyn sodium (INTALTM) and nedocromil sodium (TILADETM)), and mucolytic agents (e.g., acetylcysteine)).
  • adrenergic stimulants e.g., catecholamines
  • the therapeutic and prophylactic methods of the invention may be used in combination with other therapeutic methods known in the art for the treatment, prevention and/or management of COPD including but not limited tiotropium and/or ipratropium
  • respiratory disorders that may be treated, prevented or managed using the methods and compositions of the invention include without limitation lung fibrosis, bronchial hyper responsiveness. 6.4 COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS OF ADMINISTERING
  • the invention provides methods and pharmaceutical compositions comprising compounds of the invention.
  • the invention also provides methods of treatment, prophylaxis, and amelioration of one or more symptoms associated with a disease, disorder or cancer by administering to a subject an effective amount of compound of the invention.
  • the subject is an animal, preferably a mammal such as non- primate (e.g., cows, pigs, horses, cats, dogs, rats etc.) and a primate (e.g., monkey such as, a cynomolgous monkey and a human).
  • the subject is a human.
  • compositions of the invention include bulk drug compositions useful in the manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions (e.g., impure or non-sterile compositions) and pharmaceutical compositions (i.e., compositions that are suitable for administration to a subject or patient) which can be used in the preparation of unit dosage forms.
  • Such compositions comprise a prophylactically or therapeutically effective amount of a prophylactic and/or therapeutic agent disclosed herein or a combination of those agents and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • compositions of the invention comprise a prophylactically or therapeutically effective amount of compounds of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of an A 3 or A 1 receptor antagonist and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • said pharmaceutical composition further comprises one or more anti-cancer agents.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable means approved by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or listed in the U.S. Pharmacopeia or other generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in animals, and more particularly in humans.
  • carrier refers to a diluent, adjuvant (e.g., Freund's adjuvant (complete and incomplete), excipient, or vehicle with which the therapeutic is administered.
  • Such pharmaceutical carriers can be sterile liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like. Water is a preferred carrier when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously. Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions can also be employed as liquid carriers, particularly for injectable solutions. Suitable pharmaceutical excipients include starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, ethanol and the like.
  • compositions can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH buffering agents.
  • These compositions can take the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsion, tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained-release formulations and the like.
  • the ingredients of compositions of the invention are supplied either separately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, as a dry lyophilized powder or water free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent.
  • the composition is to be administered by infusion, it can be dispensed with an infusion bottle containing sterile pharmaceutical grade water or saline.
  • an ampoule of sterile water for injection or saline can be provided so that the ingredients may be mixed prior to administration.
  • compositions of the invention can be formulated as neutral or salt forms.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to those formed with anions such as those derived from hydrochloric, phosphoric, acetic, oxalic, tartaric acids, etc., and those formed with captions such as those derived from sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, ferric hydroxides, isopropylamine, triethylamine, 2-ethylamino ethanol, histidine, procaine, etc.
  • the compounds described above are preferably administered in formulations including an active compound, i.e., an adenosine Aj and/or A 3 receptor antagonist, together with an acceptable carrier for the mode of administration.
  • suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are known to those of skill in the art.
  • the compositions can optionally include other therapeutically active agents, including anti-angiogenic and anti-cancer agents.
  • Other optional ingredients include antivirals, antibacterials, antiinflammatories, analgesics, and immunosuppresants.
  • the carrier must be pharmaceutically acceptable in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not deleterious to the recipient thereof.
  • the compounds of the invention can be administered in a physiologically acceptable diluent in a pharmaceutical carrier, such as a sterile liquid or mixture of liquids, including water, saline, aqueous dextrose and related sugar solutions, an alcohol ⁇ e.g., ethanol, isopropanol, or hexadecyl alcohol), glycols ⁇ e.g., propylene glycol or polyethylene glycol), glycerol ketals, ⁇ e.g., 2,2- dimethyll,3-dioxolane-4-methanol), ethers, ⁇ e.g., poly(ethyleneglycol) 400), an oil, a fatty acid, a fatty acid ester or glyceride, or an acetylated fatty acid glyceride with or without the addition of a pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant (e.g., a soap or a detergent),
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant e.g., a soap or
  • Formulations suitable for parenteral administration conveniently include sterile aqueous preparation of the active compound which is preferably isotonic with the blood of the recipient.
  • Such formulations may conveniently contain distilled water, 5% dextrose in distilled water or saline.
  • Useful formulations also include concentrated solutions or solids containing the compounds which upon dilution with an appropriate solvent give a solution suitable for parental administration above.
  • Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include but are not limited to aqueous and non-aqueous solutions, isotonic sterile injection solutions, which may comprise anti-oxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, and solutes that render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient, and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions that may comprise suspending agents, solubilizers, thickening agents, stabilizers, and preservatives.
  • the parenteral formulations will typically contain from about 0.5 to about
  • compositions may contain one or more nonionic surfactants having a hydrophile-lipophile balance (HLB) of from about 12 to about 17.
  • HLB hydrophile-lipophile balance
  • Suitable surfactants include polyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters, such as sorbitan monooleate and the high molecular weight adducts of ethylene oxide with a hydrophobic base, formed by the condensation of propylene oxide with propylene glycol.
  • parenteral formulations can be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, such as ampules and vials, and can be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilized) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example, water, for injections, immediately prior to use.
  • sterile liquid carrier for example, water
  • Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions can be prepared from sterile powders, granules, and tablets of the kind previously described.
  • the compounds of the inventione, e.g., high affinity adenosine A 3 receptor antagonists may be made into injectable formulations.
  • the requirements for effective pharmaceutical carriers for injectable compositions are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. See Pharmaceutics and Pharmacy Practice, J. B.
  • the compound can be incorporated into an inert carrier in discrete units such as capsules, cachets, tablets or lozenges, each containing a predetermined amount of the active compound; as a powder or granules; or a suspension or solution in an aqueous liquid or non-aqueous liquid, e.g., a. syrup, an elixir, an emulsion or a draught.
  • Suitable carriers may be starches or sugars and include lubricants, flavorings, binders, and other materials of the same nature.
  • Formulations suitable for oral administration can consist of (a) liquid solutions, such as an effective amount of the compound dissolved in diluents, such as water, saline, or orange juice; (b) capsules, sachets, tablets, lozenges, and troches, each containing a predetermined amount of the active ingredient, as solids or granules; (c) powders; (d) suspensions in an appropriate liquid; and (e) suitable emulsions.
  • Liquid formulations may include diluents, such as water and alcohols, for example, ethanol, benzyl alcohol, and the polyethylene alcohols, either with or without the addition of a pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant, suspending agent, or emulsifying agent.
  • Capsule forms can be of the ordinary hard- or soft-shelled gelatin type containing, for example, surfactants, lubricants, and inert fillers, such as lactose, sucrose, calcium phosphate, and cornstarch.
  • Tablet forms can include one or more of lactose, sucrose, mannitol, corn starch, potato starch, alginic acid, microcrystalline cellulose, acacia, gelatin, guar gum, colloidal silicon dioxide, croscarmellose sodium, talc, magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, zinc stearate, stearic acid, and other excipients, colorants, diluents, buffering agents, disintegrating agents, moistening agents, preservatives, flavoring agents, and pharmacologically compatible carriers.
  • Lozenge forms can comprise the active ingredient in a flavor, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth, as well as pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia, emulsions, gels, and the like containing, in addition to the active ingredient, such carriers as are known in the art.
  • a tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients.
  • Compressed tablets may be prepared by compressing in a suitable in a machine the active compound in a free-flowing form, e.g., a powder or granules, optionally mixed with accessory ingredients, e.g., binders, lubricants, inert diluents, surface active or dispersing agents. Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine, a mixture of the powdered active compound with any suitable carrier.
  • a syrup or suspension may be made by adding the active compound to a concentrated, aqueous solution of a sugar, e.g., sucrose, to which may also be added any accessory ingredients.
  • Such accessory ingredients may include flavoring, an agent to retard crystallization of the sugar or an agent to increase the solubility of any other ingredient, e.g., as a polyhydric alcohol, for example, glycerol or sorbitol.
  • the compounds can also be administered locally by topical application of a solution, ointment, cream, gel, lotion or polymeric material (for example, a PluronicTM, BASF), which may be prepared by conventional methods known in the art of pharmacy.
  • a solution, ointment, cream, gel, lotion or polymeric material for example, a PluronicTM, BASF
  • topical formulations may also contain preservatives, perfumes, and additional active pharmaceutical agents.
  • Topical formulations for high affinity adenosine A 3 receptor antagonists include ointments, creams, gels and lotions that may be prepared by conventional methods known in the art of pharmacy.
  • Such topical formulation may also furhter comprise preservatives, perfumes, and additional active pharmaceutical agents.
  • Preferred additional pharmaceutical agents include the chemotherapeutic agents for cancer treatments noted to be enhanced or benefited by the A 3 receptor antagonist (for example by preventing MDR).
  • An example of a preferred topical formulation includes a high affinity adenosine A 3 receptor antagonist and a taxane family compound.
  • Oils, which can be used in parenteral formulations include petroleum, animal, vegetable, and synthetic oils. Specific examples of oils include peanut, soybean, sesame, cottonseed, corn, olive, petrolatum, and mineral.
  • Suitable fatty acids for use in parenteral formulations include oleic acid, stearic acid, and isostearic acid. Ethyl oleate and isopropyl myristate are examples of suitable fatty acid esters.
  • Suitable soaps for use in parenteral formulations include fatty alkali metal, ammonium, and triethanolamine salts
  • suitable detergents include (a) cationic detergents such as, for example, dimethyl dialkyl ammonium halides, and alkyl pyridinium halides, (b) anionic detergents such as, for example, alkyl, aryl, and olefin sulfonates, alkyl, olefin, ether, and monoglyceride sulfates, and sulfosuccinates, (c) nonionic detergents such as, for example, fatty amine oxides, fatty acid alkanolamides, and polyoxyethylenepolypropylene copolymers, (d) amphoteric detergents such as, for example, alkyl-beta-aminopropionates, and 2-alkyl-imidazoline quaternary ammonium salts, and (e) mixtures thereof.
  • the compounds of the invention may be made into suppositories by mixing with a variety of bases, such as emulsifying bases or water-soluble bases.
  • bases such as emulsifying bases or water-soluble bases.
  • Formulations suitable for vaginal administration may be presented as pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams, or spray formulas containing, in addition to the active ingredient, such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
  • Formulations for rectal administration may be presented as a suppository with a conventional carrier, e.g., cocoa butter or Witepsol S55 (trademark of Dynamite Nobel Chemical, Germany), for a suppository base.
  • the formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy. All methods include the step of bringing the active compound into association with a carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing the active compound into association with a liquid carrier or a finely divided solid carrier and then, if necessary, shaping the product into desired unit dosage form.
  • the formulations of this invention may further include one or more cytotoxic agent as well as one or more optional accessory ingredient(s) utilized in the art of pharmaceutical formulations, e.g., diluents, buffers, flavoring agents, binders, surface active agents, thickeners, lubricants, suspending agents, preservatives (including antioxidants) and the like.
  • cytotoxic agent e.g., diluents, buffers, flavoring agents, binders, surface active agents, thickeners, lubricants, suspending agents, preservatives (including antioxidants) and the like.
  • Various delivery systems are known and can be used to administer a composition comprising compounds of the invention, e.g., encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, microcapsules.
  • the compounds of the invention are formulated in liposomes for targeted delivery of the compounds of the invention.
  • Liposomes are vesicles comprised of concentrically ordered phopsholipid bilayers which encapsulate an aqueous phase. Liposomes typically comprise various types of lipids, phospholipids, and/or surfactants. The components of liposomes are arranged in a bilayer configuration, similar to the lipid arrangement of biological membranes. Liposomes are particularly preferred delivery vehicles due, in part, to their biocompatibility, low immunogenicity, and low toxicity. Methods for preparation of liposomes are known in the art and are encompassed within the invention, see, e.g., Epstein et al, 1985, Proc.
  • the invention also encompasses methods of preparing liposomes with a prolonged serum half-life, i.e., enhanced circulation time, such as those disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,013,556.
  • Preferred liposomes used in the methods of the invention are not rapidly cleared from circulation, i.e., are not taken up into the mononuclear phagocyte system (MPS).
  • MPS mononuclear phagocyte system
  • sterically stabilized liposomes which are prepared using common methods known to one skilled in the art.
  • sterically stabilized liposomes contain lipid components with bulky and highly flexible hydrophilic moieties, which reduces the unwanted reaction of liposomes with serum proteins, reduces oposonization with serum components and reduces recognition by MPS.
  • Sterically stabilized liposomes are preferably prepared using polyethylene glycol.
  • the invention also encompasses liposomes that are adapted for specific organ targeting, see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 4,544,545.
  • Particularly useful liposomes for use in the compositions and methods of the invention can be generated by reverse phase evaporation method with a lipid composition comprising phosphatidylcholine, cholesterol, and PEG derivatized phosphatidylethanolamine (PEG-PE). Liposomes are extruded through filters of defined pore size to yield liposomes with the desired diameter.
  • a fragment of an antibody of the invention may be conjugated to the liposomes using previously described methods, see, e.g., Martin et al, 1982, J Biol. Chem. 257: 286-288, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • Microspheres formed of polymers or proteins are well known to those skilled in the art, and can be tailored for passage through the gastrointestinal tract directly into the blood stream. Alternatively, the compound can be incorporated and the microspheres, or composite of microspheres, implanted for slow release over a period of time ranging from days to months. See, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,906,474, 4,925,673 and 3,625,214, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • Preferred microparticles are those prepared from biodegradable polymers, such as polyglycolide, polylactide and copolymers thereof.
  • biodegradable polymers such as polyglycolide, polylactide and copolymers thereof.
  • the compositions can be delivered in a vesicle, in particular a liposome (See Langer, Science 249:1527-1533 (1990); Treat et al, in Liposomes in the Therapy of Infectious Disease and Cancer. Lopez-Berestein and Fidler (eds.), Liss, New York, pp. 353- 365 (1989); Lopez-Berestein, ibid., pp. 3 17-327; see generally ibid.).
  • compositions can be delivered in a controlled release or sustained release system. Any technique known to one of skill in the art can be used to produce sustained release formulations comprising one or more A3 receptor antagonists of the invention. See, e.g., U.S. Patent No.
  • a pump may be used in a controlled release system (See Langer, supra; Sefton, 1987, CRC CrU. Ref. Biomed. Eng. 14:20; Buchwald et al, 1980, Surgery 88:507; and Saudek etal, 1989, N. Engl. J. Med. 321:574).
  • polymeric materials can be used to achieve controlled release of A3 receptor antagonists (see e.g., Medical Applications of Controlled Release, Langer and Wise (eds.), CRC Pres., Boca Raton, Florida (1974); Controlled Drug Bioavailability, Drug Product Design and Performance, Smolen and Ball (eds.), Wiley, New York (1984); Ranger and Peppas, 1983, J., Macromol. ScL Rev. Macromol. Chem. 23:61; See also Levy et al, 1985, Science 228:190; During et al, 1989, Ann. Neurol. 25:351; Howard et al, 1989, J. Neurosurg. 1 1:105); U.S. Patent No.
  • polymers used in sustained release formulations include, but are not limited to, poly(2-hydroxy ethyl methacrylate), poly(methyl methacrylate), poly(acrylic acid), poly(ethylene-co-vinyl acetate), poly(methacrylic acid), polyglycolides (PLG), polyanhydrides, poly(N-vinyl pyrrolidone), poly(vinyl alcohol), polyacrylamide, poly(ethylene glycol), polylactides (PLA), poly(lactide-co-glycolides) (PLGA), and polyorthoesters.
  • a controlled release system can be placed in proximity of the therapeutic target (e.g., the lungs), thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in Medical Applications of Controlled Release, supra, vol. 2, pp. 115-138 (1984)).
  • polymeric compositions useful as controlled release implants are used according to Dunn et al (See U.S. 5,945,155). This particular method is based upon the therapeutic effect of the in situ controlled release of the bioactive material from the polymer system.
  • the implantation can generally occur anywhere within the body of the patient in need of therapeutic treatment, hi another embodiment, a non-polymeric sustained delivery system is used, whereby a non-polymeric implant in the body of the subject is used as a drug delivery system.
  • the organic solvent of the implant Upon implantation in the body, the organic solvent of the implant will dissipate, disperse, or leach from the composition into surrounding tissue fluid, and the non-polymeric material will gradually coagulate or precipitate to form a solid, microporous matrix (See U.S. 5,888,533). Controlled release systems are discussed in the review by Langer (1990, Science 249:1527-1533). Any technique known to one of skill in the art can be used to produce sustained release formulations comprising one or more therapeutic agents of the invention.
  • Methods of administering a compound of the invention include, but are not limited to, parenteral administration (e.g., intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intravenous and subcutaneous), epidural, and mucosal (e.g., intranasal and oral routes).
  • parenteral administration e.g., intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intravenous and subcutaneous
  • epidural e.g., intranasal and oral routes
  • mucosal e.g., intranasal and oral routes
  • the compounds of the invention are administered intramuscularly, intravenously, or subcutaneously.
  • the compositions may be administered by any convenient route, for example, by infusion or bolus injection, by absorption through epithelial or mucocutaneous linings (e.g., oral mucosa, rectal and intestinal mucosa, etc.) and may be administered together with other biologically active agents. Administration can be systemic or local.
  • pulmonary administration can also be employed, e.g., by use of an inhaler or nebulizer, and formulation with an aerosolizing agent.
  • an inhaler or nebulizer e.g., a pressurized device, a pressurized device, and a pressurized device.
  • the compounds are administered intravenously in a liposome or microparticle with a size such that the particle can be delivered intraveneously, but gets trapped in a capillary bed around a growing tumor.
  • Suitable particle sizes for this embodiment are those currently used, for example, in liposomes sold under the name DaunoXome.TM., which are believed to be between about 200 and 500 um.
  • the compounds are then released locally, over time, at the location of the tumor. This can be effective in limiting systemic effects of the administration of cytotoxic agents, and also targets the adenosine antagonist and any other anti-angio genie agents directly to the site at which blood vessel growth is to be inhibited.
  • the compounds are administered in a tissue coating, preferably a polymeric tissue coating, more preferably, a biodegradable tissue coating, which is applied to the site at which a tumor is surgically removed.
  • a tissue coating preferably a polymeric tissue coating, more preferably, a biodegradable tissue coating, which is applied to the site at which a tumor is surgically removed.
  • Suitable polymeric materials are disclosed, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,410,016 to Hubbell et al., the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • the polymeric barrier in combination with the adenosine A3 antagonists, and optionally in combination with other anti-angiogenic agents and/or cytotoxic agents, provides a physical barrier as well as a chemical barrier to further tumor growth and vasculation around the tumor.
  • the two embodiments described above can be particularly useful when cytotoxic agents with pronounced systemic side effects are used. By targeting the administration of these compounds to a specific site, and locally delivering the compounds, systemic effects can be minimized.
  • anti-VEGF antibodies can be covalently coupled to microparticles or liposomes including the compounds. The antibodies can be used to not only target the delivery of the compounds, but also to assist in inhibiting tumor growth by inhibiting angiogenesis.
  • the amount of the composition of the invention which will be effective in the treatment, prevention or amelioration of one or more symptoms associated with a disorder can be determined by standard clinical techniques.
  • the precise dose to be employed in the formulation will also depend on the route of administration, and the seriousness of the condition, and should be decided according to the judgment of the practitioner and each patient's circumstances. Effective doses may be extrapolated from dose-response curves derived from in vitro or animal model test systems.
  • compositions of the invention may be desirable to administer locally to the area in need of treatment; this may be achieved by, for example, and not by way of limitation, local infusion, by injection, or by means of an implant, said implant being of a porous, non-porous, or gelatinous material, including membranes, such as sialastic membranes, or fibers.
  • Treatment of a subject with a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of compounds of the invention can include a single treatment or, preferably, can include a series of treatments.
  • a subject is treated with compounds of the invention in the range of between about 0.1 ⁇ g/kg to about 100 mg/kg, about 0.1 ⁇ g/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 0.1 ⁇ g/kg to about lg/kg, about 100 ug/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 100 ug/kg to aboutlg/kg, about 1 mg/kg to about 100 mg/kg, about 1 mg/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 1 mg/kg to about lg/kg of the patient's body weight, one time per week for between about 1 to 10 weeks, preferably between 2 to 8 weeks, more preferably between about 3 to 7 weeks, and even more preferably for about 4, 5, or 6 weeks.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention are administered once a day, twice a day, or three times a day. In other embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions are administered once a week, twice a week, once every two weeks, once a month, once every six weeks, once every two months, twice a year or once per year. It will also be appreciated that the effective dosage of the compounds used for treatment may increase or decrease over the course of a particular treatment.
  • the amount of a compound required to be effective as an antagonist of adenosine A 3 receptors will, of course, vary with the active moiety selected, the individual mammal being treated and is ultimately at the discretion of the medical or veterinary practitioner. The factors to be considered include the binding affinity of the active, the route of administration, the nature of the formulation, the mammal's body weight, surface area, age and general condition, and the particular compound to be administered.
  • the total daily dose may be given as a single dose, multiple doses, e.g., two to six times per day, or by intravenous infusion for a selected duration. Dosages above or below the range cited above are within the scope of the present invention and may be administered to the individual patient if desired and necessary. For example, for a 75 kg mammal, a dose range would be about 75 ug to about 50 mg per day, and a typical dose would be about 50 mg per day. If discrete multiple doses are indicated, treatment might typically be 50 mg of a compound of the present invention given 3 times per day.
  • the invention also provides that the compounds of the invention are packaged in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of antibody.
  • the compounds of the invention are supplied as a dry sterilized lyophilized powder or water free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container and can be reconstituted, e.g., with water or saline to the appropriate concentration for administration to a subject.
  • the compounds of the invention are supplied as a dry sterile lyophilized powder in a hermetically sealed container at a unit dosage of at least 5 mg, more preferably at least 10 mg, at least 15 mg, at least 25 mg, at least 35 mg, at least 45 mg, at least 50 mg, at least 75 mg, at least 100 mg, at least 200 mg, at least 500 mg or at least 1 gram..
  • the lyophilized compounds of the invention should be stored at between 2 and 8°C in their original container and the compounds should be administered within 12 hours, preferably within 6 hours, within 5 hours, within 3 hours, or within 1 hour after being reconstituted.
  • compounds of the invention are supplied in liquid form in a hermetically sealed container indicating the quantity and concentration of the compound.
  • the liquid form of the compounds are supplied in a hermetically sealed container at least 1 mg/ml, more preferably at least 2.5 mg/ml, at least 5 mg/ml, at least 8 mg/ml, at least 10 mg/ml, at least 15 mg/kg, at least 25 mg/ml, at least 50 mg/ml, at least 100 mg/ml, at least 150 mg/ml, at least 200 mg/ml of the compounds.
  • the formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy. All methods include the step of bringing the active compound into association with a carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing the active compound into association with a liquid carrier or a finely divided solid carrier and then, if necessary, shaping the product into desired unit dosage form.
  • the formulations may further include one or more optional accessory ingredient(s) utilized in the art of pharmaceutical formulations, e.g., diluents, buffers, flavoring agents, binders, surface active agents, thickeners, lubricants, suspending agents, preservatives (including antioxidants) and the like.
  • optional accessory ingredient(s) utilized in the art of pharmaceutical formulations, e.g., diluents, buffers, flavoring agents, binders, surface active agents, thickeners, lubricants, suspending agents, preservatives (including antioxidants) and the like.
  • the formulations include, but are not limited to, those suitable for oral, rectal, topical or parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular and intravenous) administration. Preferred are those suitable for oral or parenteral administration.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carriers described herein for example, vehicles, adjuvants, excipients, or diluents, are well known to those who are skilled in the art and are readily available to the public. It is preferred that the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier be one which is chemically inert to the active compounds and one which has no detrimental side effects or toxicity under the conditions of use.
  • compositions of the present invention there are a wide variety of suitable formulations of the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention.
  • suitable formulations for oral, aerosol, parenteral, subcutaneous, intravenous, intraarterial, intramuscular, interperitoneal, intrathecal, rectal, and vaginal administration are merely exemplary and are in no way limiting.
  • the compounds of the invention e.g., high affinity adenosine A 3 receptor antagonist, alone or in combination with other suitable components, can be made into aerosol formulations to be administered via inhalation.
  • aerosol formulations can be placed into pressurized acceptable propellants, such as dichlorodifluoromethane, propane, nitrogen, and the like. They also may be formulated as pharmaceuticals for non-pressured preparations, such as in a nebulizer or an atomizer.
  • compositions, prophylactic or therapeutic agents of the invention are preferably tested in vitro, e.g., in a cell culture system, and then in vivo, e.g., in an animal model organism, such as a rodent animal model system, for the desired therapeutic activity prior to use in humans.
  • assays which can be used to determine whether administration of a specific pharmaceutical composition is indicated include cell culture assays in which a patient tissue sample is grown in culture, and exposed to or otherwise contacted with a pharmaceutical composition, and the effect of such composition upon the tissue sample is observed, e.g., inhibition of or decrease in growth and/or colony formation in soft agar or tubular network formation in three-dimensional basement membrane or extracellular matrix preparation.
  • the tissue sample can be obtained by biopsy from the patient. This test allows the identification of the therapeutically most effective prophylactic or therapeutic molecule(s) for each individual patient.
  • therapeutic agents and methods may be screened using cells of a tumor or malignant cell line.
  • in vitro assays can be carried out with representative cells of cell types involved in an autoimmune or inflammatory disorder (e.g., T cells), to determine if a pharmaceutical composition of the invention has a desired effect upon such cell types.
  • cell proliferation can be assayed by measuring 3 H-thymidine incorporation, by direct cell count, by detecting changes in transcriptional activity of known genes such as proto-oncogenes (e.g., fos, myc) or cell cycle markers; cell viability can be assessed by trypan blue staining, differentiation can be assessed visually based on changes in morphology, decreased growth and/or colony formation in soft agar or tubular network formation in three-dimensional basement membrane or extracellular matrix preparation. Combinations of prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents can be tested in suitable animal model systems prior to use in humans.
  • Such animal model systems include, but are not limited to, rats, mice, chicken, cows, monkeys, pigs, dogs, rabbits, etc. Any animal system well-known in the art may be used. In a specific embodiment of the invention, combinations of prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents are tested in a mouse model system. Such model systems are widely used and well-known to the skilled artisan. - Prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents can be administered repeatedly. Several aspects of the procedure may vary such as the temporal regime of administering the prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents, and whether such agents are administered separately or as an admixture.
  • the prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents of the invention can be tested in clinical trials to establish their efficacy. Establishing clinical trials will be done in accordance with common methodologies known to one skilled in the art, and the optimal dosages and routes of administration as well as toxicity profiles of the compositions of the invention can be established using routine experimentation. Toxicity and efficacy of the prophylactic and/or therapeutic protocols of the instant invention can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD 50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED 50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population). The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50.
  • Prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents that exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred. While prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents that exhibit toxic side effects may be used, care should be taken to design a delivery system that targets such agents to the site of affected tissue in order to minimize potential damage to uninfected cells and, thereby, reduce side effects.
  • the data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage of the prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents for use in humans.
  • the dosage of such agents lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED5 0 with little or no toxicity. The dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized.
  • the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays.
  • a dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC 50 (i.e., the concentration of the test compound that achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture.
  • IC 50 i.e., the concentration of the test compound that achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms
  • levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.
  • the anti-cancer activity of the therapies used in accordance with the present invention also can be determined by using various experimental animal models for the study of cancer such as the SCID mouse model or transgenic mice or nude mice with human xenografts, animal models, such as hamsters, rabbits, etc. known in the art and described in Relevance of Tumor Models for Anticancer Drug Development (1999, eds. Fiebig and Burger); Contributions to Oncology (1999, Karger); The Nude Mouse in Oncology Research (1991, eds. Boven and Winograd); and Anticancer Drug Development Guide (1997 ed. Teicher), herein incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • SCID mouse model or transgenic mice or nude mice with human xenografts animal models, such as hamsters, rabbits, etc. known in the art and described in Relevance of Tumor Models for Anticancer Drug Development (1999, eds. Fiebig and Burger); Contributions to Oncology (1999, Karger);
  • the protocols and compositions of the invention are preferably tested in vitro, and then in vivo, for the desired therapeutic or prophylactic activity, prior to use in humans.
  • Therapeutic agents and methods may be screened using cells of a tumor or malignant cell line. Many assays standard in the art can be used to assess such survival and/or growth; for example, cell proliferation can be assayed by measuring 3 H-thymidine incorporation, by direct cell count, by detecting changes in transcriptional activity of known genes such as proto-oncogenes (e.g., fos, myc) or cell cycle markers; cell viability can be assessed by trypan blue staining, differentiation can be assessed visually based on changes in morphology, decreased growth and/or colony formation in soft agar or tubular network formation in three-dimensional basement membrane or extracellular matrix preparation, etc.
  • proto-oncogenes e.g., fos, myc
  • cell cycle markers e.g., cell cycle markers
  • cell viability can be assessed by trypan blue stain
  • Compounds for use in therapy can be tested in suitable animal model systems prior to testing in humans, including but not limited to in rats, mice, chicken, cows, monkeys, rabbits, hamsters, etc., for example, the animal models described above. The compounds can then be used in the appropriate clinical trials. 6.5.1 ANTI-PROLIFERATIVE ASSAYS
  • the antiproliferative activity of compounds of the invention can be readily determined using no more than routine experimentation using cell growth inhibitory assays. Selection of cell lines for such assays is based upon desired future pharmaceutical use. Numerous cell lines are available for study from American Type Culture Collection, Manassas, VA. Cell lines suitable for assays include, but are not limited to, HL-60 human leukemia, A375 human melanoma, SKMES human lung carcinoma, HT29 human colon carcinoma and Panc-1 human pancreatic carcinoma.
  • Cell lines can be maintained in RPMI- 1640 medium supplemented with 100 units/ml penicillin G sodium, 100 ⁇ g/ml streptomycin sulfate, 0.25 ⁇ g/ml amphotericin B (fungizone), 2 mM glutamine, 10 mM HEPES, 25 ⁇ g/ml gentamycin, and 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum.
  • Such maintained cells can be cultured in a T25 Falcon Tissue Culture flask in a humidified incubator at 37°C with 5% CO 2 -95% air.
  • such maintained cells can be sub-cultured twice a week with approximate doubling times of 22 hours for A375 human melanoma, 46 hours for SKMES human lung carcinoma, 48 hours for HT29 human colon carcinoma and 60 hours for Panc-1 human pancreatic carcinoma.
  • MTT assay One of the growth inhibitory assays that can be used in accordance with the methods of the invention is the MTT assay.
  • An exemplary assay may comprise the following steps: Cells (1000-1500 cells/well) are seeded in a 96-well micro culture plate in a total volume of 100 ⁇ l/well. After overnight incubation in a humidified incubator at 37°C with 5% CO 2 - 95% air, chemotherapeutic drug solutions diluted with culture medium at various concentrations are added in the amount of 100 ⁇ l to each well. The plates are placed in a humidified incubator at 37 0 C with 5% CO 2 - 95% air for 7-10 days. The plates are then centrifuged briefly and 100 ⁇ l of the growth medium is removed.
  • MTT [3-(4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl)-2,5-diphenyl-tetrazolium bromide] reagent (1 mg/ml in Dulbecco's phosphate-buffered saline) for 4 hr at 37°C.
  • the resultant purple formazan precipitate is solubilized with 200 ⁇ l of 0.04 N HCl in isopropanol.
  • Absorbance is measured at a wavelength of 595 nm and at a reference wavelength of 655 nm using a Bio-Rad Model 3550 Microplate Reader. Preferably, all tests are run in duplicate for each dose level.
  • Bio-Rad brands Microplate Readers when properly equipped, transmit measured test results to a personal computer for interpretation via computer programs such as the EZED50 program.
  • the EZED50 computer program estimates the concentration of agent that inhibits cell growth by 50% as compared to the control cells. This is termed the IC 50 and is determined by curve fitting test data using the following four logistic equation.
  • a max is the absorbance of the control cells
  • a m j n is the absorbance of the cells in the presence of the highest agent concentration
  • Y is the observed absorbance
  • X is the agent concentration
  • IC 50 is the concentration of agent that inhibits the cell growth by 50% compared to the control cells
  • n is the slope of the curve. If testing concentrations are properly selected (i.e., no or little growth inhibition at low concentrations and complete inhibition at high concentrations), EZED50 program fits the data extremely well and estimates the IC 50 value accurately.
  • EZED50 cannot estimate the IC50 value accurately (as indicated by an erroneously fitted Amax value). In these instances, the data could be re-analyzed by fixing the Amax value.
  • EZED50 will overestimate the potency of the testing agent (the fitted ICsovalue is lower than the "actual" IC 50 value). In this case, the IC 5O could be estimated more accurately if both the A max and A m j n values are fixed.
  • the best way to determine the IC50 accurately is to decrease or increase the concentrations of the test agent and repeat the test.
  • Inhibitory assay testing is also used to determine enhanced therapeutic effects from combining A 3 receptor antagonists with other tumor inhibiting agents.
  • the inhibitory cell growth assays are run with and without selected concentrations of A 3 receptor antagonists.
  • An enhanced therapeutic effect is present when the IC 50 of the tumor inhibiting agent is lower with the A 3 receptor antagonist.
  • the enhancement factor (EF) is calculated by dividing the IC5 0 value of the tumor inhibiting agent for a tumor cell line by the IC 50 value of the agent with A 3 receptor antagonist for the same cell line:
  • EF Enhanced Factor
  • any EF above 1.0 is synergistic if the A 3 receptor antagonist concentration is below the threshold of cell growth inhibition.
  • the activity and selectivity of the compounds of the invention as adenosine A 3 antagonists can be readily determined using no more than routine experimentation using any of the assays disclosed herein or known to one skilled in the art. Since the A 1 and A 2a receptors express similar pharmacology between humans and rodents, endogenous receptors from the rat can be used for the A 1 and A 2a binding assays.
  • An exemplary rat A 1 and A 2 A Adenosine receptor binding assay may comprise the following steps.
  • Membrane preparations Male Wistar rats (200-250 g) can be decapitated and the whole brain (minug brainstem, striatum and cerebellum) dissected on ice. The brain tissues can be disrupted in a Polytron (setting 5) in 20 vols of 50 mM Tris HCl, pH 7.4. The homogenate can then be centrifuged at 48,000 g for 10 min and the pellet resuspended in Tris-HCL containing 2 IU/ml adenosine deaminase, type VI (Sigma Chemical Company, St. Louis, Mo., USA).
  • the membranes can be centrifuged and the pellets stored at -70 0 C.
  • Striatal tissues can be homogenized with a Polytron in 25 vol of 50 mM Tris HCl buffer containing 10 mM MgCl 2 pH 7.4. The homogenate can then be centrifuged at 48,000 g for 10 min at 4 0 C. and resuspended in Tris HCl buffer containing 2 IU/ml adenosine deaminase. After 30 min incubation at 37 0 C 5 membranes can be centrifuged and the pellet stored at -70 0 C.
  • the radioligand binding assays may comprise the following: Binding of [ 3 H]-DPCPX (1,3- dipropyl-8-cyclopentylxanthine) to rat brain membranes can be performed essentially according to the method previously described by Bruns et ah, 1980, Proc. Natl. Acad. Set. 11, 5547-5551, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Displacement experiments can be performed in 0.25 ml of buffer containing 1 nM [ 3 H]-DPCPX, 100 ul of diluted membranes of rat brain (100 ⁇ g of protein/assay) and at least 6-8 different concentrations of examined compounds. Non specific binding can be determined in the presence of 10 uM of CHA (N6 cyclohexyladenosine) and this is always ⁇ 10% of the total binding. Incubation times are typically 120 min at 25 0 C.
  • Radioligand binding assays may comprise the following: Binding of [ 3 H]- SCH 58261 (5-amino-7-(2- ⁇ henylethyl)-2-(2-furyl)-pyrazolo[4,3-e]-l,2,4-triazolo[l,5- c]pyrimidine) to rat striatal membranes (100 ug of protein/assay) can be performed according to methods described in Zocchi et ah, 1996, J. Pharm. andExper. Ther. 276:398- 404, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In competition studies, at least 6-8 different concentrations of examined compounds should be used.
  • Non specific binding can be determined in the presence of 50 uM of NECA (5'-(N- ethylcarboxamido)adenosine). Incubation time is typically 60 min at 25 0 C. Bound and free radioactivity can be separated by filtering the assay mixture through Whatman GF/B glass-fiber filters using a Brandel cell harvester (Gaithersburg, Md., USA). The incubation mixture can be diluted with 3 ml of ice-cold incubation buffer, rapidly vacuum filtered and the filter can be washed three times with 3 ml of incubation buffer. The filter bound radioactivity can be measured, for example, by liquid scintillation spectrometry. The protein concentration can be determined, for example, according to a Bio-Rad method (Bradford, 1976, Anal. Biochem. 72:248, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety) with bovine albumin as reference standard.
  • NECA 5'-(N- ethylcarboxa
  • An exemplary assay for human cloned A 3 Adenosine Receptor Binding Assay may comprise the following: Binding assays can be carried out according to methods described in Salvatore et al, 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sd. 90:10365-10369; which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In saturation studies, an aliquot of membranes (8 mg protein/ml) from HEK-293 cells transfected with the human recombinant A 3 adenosine receptor (Research Biochemical International, Natick, Mass., USA) can be incubated with 10-12 different concentrations of [ 125 1]AB-MECA ranging from 0.1 to 5 nM.
  • Competition experiments can be carried out in duplicate in a final volume of 100 ul in test tubes containing 0.3 nM [ 125 1]AB-MECA, 50 mM Tris HCl buffer, 10 mM MgCl 2 , pH 7.4 and 20 ul of diluted membranes (12.4 mg protein/ml) and at least 6-8 different concentrations of examined ligands. Incubation time was 60 min at 37 0 C, according to the results of previous time-course experiments. Bound and free radioactivity were separated by filtering the assay mixture through Whatman GF/B glass-fiber filters using a Brandel cell harvester. Non-specific binding was defined as binding in the presence of 50 uM R-PIA and was about 30% of total binding.
  • the incubation mixture was diluted with 3 ml of ice- cold incubation buffer, rapidly vacuum filtered and the filter was washed three times with 3 ml of incubation buffer.
  • the filter bound radioactivity was counted in a Beckman gamma 5500B gamma counter.
  • the protein concentration can be determined according to a Bio- Rad method with bovine albumin as reference standard.
  • Ki Inhibitory binding constant
  • the efficacy of the compounds can be tested in animal models.
  • the efficacy of the adenosine A 3 antagonists alone or in combination with conventional anti-tumor agents such as cytotoxic/anti-neoplastic agents and anti- angiogenic agents can be compared to the conventional agents alone.
  • conventional anti-tumor agents such as cytotoxic/anti-neoplastic agents and anti- angiogenic agents
  • a tumor of a given size is present in a rat or mouse.
  • the mouse is treated with the agent and the size of the tumor is measured over time.
  • the mean survival time of the animals can also be measured.
  • the adenosine A 3 antagonists which are used must actively bind the adenosine A 3 receptor in the animal which is to be tested.
  • Xenografts can be implanted into the animal to test the ability of species specific cytotoxic compounds. However, the effect of the anti- angiogenic therapy depends on how well the anti-angiogenetic compounds work on inhibiting the specific animal's vasculation.
  • Assay methods that have demonstrated the efficacy of endostatin and angiostatin in suppressing tumor growth can be applied to A 1 , A 2a , and A 3 antagonists.
  • Lewis lung carcinoma, T241 fibrosarcoma or Bl 6F10 melanoma can be grafted to mice (Boehm et al, 1977, Nature, 390:404-407; which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
  • tumors such as PC-3 human prostate carcinoma, the CCLl 88 human colon carcinoma and the UBC urinary bladder carcinoma have been shown to release angiogenic agents (Chen et al, 1996, Cancer Res., 55:4230-4322; which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety), these tumors can also be grafted in mice for the evaluation of anti-tumor activities of adenosine antagonists.
  • Adenosine antagonists can be administered to mice by the methods disclosed herein. This therapy can be used alone or in conjunction with anti-angiogenic therapy or conventional chemotherapy.
  • the invention encompasses methods to assess quantitative and qualitative aspects of HIF-I ⁇ expression.
  • the increased expression of an HIF- lot gene or gene product indicates a predisposition for the development of cancer or a disease or disorder associated with enhanced HIF- l ⁇ expression.
  • enhanced expression levels of an HIF-I ⁇ gene or gene product can indicate the presence of cancer in a subject or the risk of metastasis of said cancer in said subject.
  • Techniques well known in the art e.g., quantitative or semi-quantitative RT PCR or Northern blot, can be used to measure expression levels of HIF-I ⁇ . Methods that describe both qualitative and quantitative aspects of HIF-I ⁇ gene or gene product expression are described in detail in the examples infra.
  • the measurement of HIF-l ⁇ gene expression levels can include measuring naturally occurring HIF- l ⁇ transcripts and variants thereof as well as non-naturally occurring variants thereof, however for the diagnosis and/or prognosis of diseases or disorders in a subject the HIF-l ⁇ gene product is preferably a naturally occurring HIF-l ⁇ gene product or variant thereof.
  • the invention relates to methods of measuring the expression of the HIF- 1 ⁇ gene or gene product in a subj ect.
  • any method known in the art for detecting and/or quantitating an HIF- l ⁇ level may be used in the methods and kits of the invention, a number of which are exemplified herein. Particularly preferred are methods known in the art for detecting and/or quantitating an HIF-l ⁇ activity or an HIF-l ⁇ related activity, e.g., phosphorylation of downstream effector molecules in the HIF-l ⁇ pathway.
  • the invention encompasses measuring an HIF- l ⁇ activity or an HIF- l ⁇ related activity including but not limited to, measuring an activity of one or more downstream effectors of an HIF-l ⁇ signaling cascade. Measuring an HIF-l ⁇ activity or an HIF-l ⁇ related activity can be done using any of the methods disclosed herein or any standard method known to one skilled in the art.
  • the invention encompasses quantitation of a nucleic acid encoding HIF- lot in a sample obtained from a subject using methods disclosed herein or any standard method known in the art.
  • the invention encompasses quantitation of HIF-I ⁇ protein in a sample obtained from a subject with a disease or disorder, e.g., cancer. Any method known in the art for the detection and quantitation of a HIF- l ⁇ protein is encompassed within the present invention.
  • the methods and kits of the invention encompass detection and/or quantitation of a nucleic acid sequence encoding HIF- l ⁇ in a sample obtained from a subject.
  • the invention provides methods for amplifying a specific HIF- l ⁇ nucleic acid sequence in a sample obtained from a subject with cancer, and detecting and/or quantitating the same.
  • Nucleic acids encoding HIF- l ⁇ are well known in the art. See, for example, Wang et al, 1995, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA, 92: 5510-4; and WO 96/39426 each of which is incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
  • kits of the invention may use any nucleic acid amplification or detection method known to one skilled in the art, such as those described in U.S. Patent No.'s 5,525,462; 6,528,632; 6,344,317; 6,114,117; 6,127,120; 6,448,001; all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
  • the nucleic acid encoding an HIF-I ⁇ is amplified by PCR amplification using methodologies known to one skilled in the art.
  • amplification of target sequences i.e., nucleic acid sequences encoding HIF- l ⁇
  • LCR ligase chain reaction
  • QP-replicase amplification amplification of target sequences in a sample obtained from a subject with cancer
  • transcription amplification amplification of transcription amplification
  • self-sustained sequence replication each of which provides sufficient amplification.
  • the PCR process is well known in the art and is thus not described in detail herein.
  • PCR methods and protocols see, e.g., Innis et ah, eds., PCR Protocols, A Guide to Methods and Application. Academic Press,
  • the invention encompasses methods to determine quantitative and/or qualitative levels of expression of HIF-I ⁇ . Any technique known in the art for measuring the expression of an HIF-I ⁇ is within the scope of the invention, including but not limited, to quantitative and/or semi-quantitative RT PCR and Northern blot analysis.
  • the invention encompasses detecting and/or quantitating an HIF- l ⁇ nucleic acid using fluorescence in situ hybridization (FISH) in a sample, preferably a tissue sample, obtained from a subject with cancer in accordance with the methods of the invention.
  • FISH fluorescence in situ hybridization
  • a sample preferably a tissue sample
  • FISH fluorescence in situ hybridization
  • the invention encompasses measuring naturally occurring HIF- 1 ⁇ transcripts and variants thereof as well as non-naturally occurring variants thereof.
  • the HIF-I ⁇ transcript is preferably a naturally occurring HIF- l ⁇ transcript.
  • the invention relates to methods of prognosis of a cancer in a subject by measuring the expression of an HIF- 1 ⁇ transcript in a subject.
  • the increased level of mRNA encoding an HIF- l ⁇ as compared to a standard, e.g., a non-cancerous sample, would indicate the increased risk of developing cancer in said subject.
  • the increased level of mRNA encoding an HIF- l ⁇ as compared to a standard would indicate the risk of metastasis of the cancer in said subject or the likelihood of a poor prognosis in said subject.
  • the invention encompasses isolating RNA from a sample obtained from a subject with cancer, and testing the RNA utilizing hybridization or PCR techniques as described above for determining the level of an HIF-I ⁇ .
  • the invention encompasses synthesizing cDNA from the isolated RNA by reverse transcription. All or part of the resulting cDNA is then used as the template for a nucleic acid amplification reaction, such as a PCR or the like.
  • the nucleic acid reagents used as synthesis initiation reagents ⁇ e.g., primers) in the reverse transcription and nucleic acid amplification steps of this method are chosen from among the HIF- l ⁇ nucleic acid reagents described below.
  • the preferred lengths of such nucleic acid reagents are at least 9- 30 nucleotides.
  • the nucleic acid amplification may be performed using radioactively or non-radioactively labeled nucleotides.
  • enough amplified product may be made such that the product may be visualized by standard ethidium bromide staining or by utilizing any other suitable nucleic acid staining method.
  • standard Northern analysis techniques known to one skilled in the art can be performed on a sample obtained from a subject with cancer.
  • the preferred length of a probe used in Northern analysis is 9-50 nucleotides. Utilizing such techniques, quantitative as well as size related differences among HIF- l ⁇ transcripts can also be detected.
  • the invention encompasses gene expression assays in situ, i.e., directly upon tissue sections (fixed and/or frozen) of patient tissue obtained from biopsies or resections, such that no nucleic acid purification is necessary.
  • Nucleic acid reagents such as those described below may be used as probes and/or primers for such in situ procedures (see, e.g., Nuovo, GJ., 1992, PCR In Situ Hybridization: Protocols And Applications. Raven Press, NY, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
  • the target HIF- l ⁇ nucleic acids of the invention can also be detected using other standard techniques well known to those of skill in the art. Although the detection step is typically preceded by an amplification step, amplification is not necessarily required in the methods of the invention.
  • the HIF-I ⁇ nucleic acids can be identified by size fractionation (e.g., gel electrophoresis). The presence of different or additional bands in the sample as compared to the control is an indication of the presence of target nucleic acids of the invention.
  • the target HIF-I ⁇ nucleic acids can be identified by sequencing according to well known techniques.
  • oligonucleotide probes specific to the target HIF- l ⁇ nucleic acids can be used to detect the presence of specific fragments.
  • Sequence-specific probe hybridization is a well known method of detecting desired nucleic acids in a sample comprising a biological fluid or tissue sample and is within the scope of the present invention. Briefly, under sufficiently stringent hybridization conditions, the probes hybridize specifically only to substantially complementary sequences. The stringency of the hybridization conditions can be relaxed to tolerate varying amounts of sequence mismatch. If the target is first amplified, detection of the amplified product utilizes this sequence-specific hybridization to insure detection of only the correct amplified target, thereby decreasing the chance of a false positive caused by the presence of homologous sequences from related organisms or other contaminating sequences.
  • hybridization formats well known in the art including but not limited to solution phase, solid phase, mixed phase, or in situ hybridization assays are encompassed within the nucleic acid detection methods of the invention.
  • solution phase hybridizations both the target nucleic acid and the probe or primer are free to interact in the reaction mixture.
  • solid phase hybridization assays either the target or probes are linked to a solid support where they are available for hybridization with complementary nucleic acids in solution.
  • Exemplary solid phase formats include Southern hybridizations, dot blots, and the like.
  • the invention encompasses homogenous based hybridization assays as well as heterogeneous based assays for detection and/or quantitation of HIF-I ⁇ nucleic acid sequences in accordance with the methods of the invention.
  • Heterogeneous based assays depend on the ability to separate hybridized from non-hybridized nucleic acids.
  • One such assay involves immobilization of either the target or probe nucleic acid on a solid support so that non-hybridized nucleic acids which remain in the liquid phase can be easily separated after completion of the hybridization reaction ⁇ see, e.g., Southern, 1975, J. MoI Biol. 98: 503-517; which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
  • homogeneous assays depend on other means for distinguishing between hybridized and non-hybridized nucleic acids. Because homogeneous assays do not require a separation step, they are generally considered to be more desirable.
  • One such homogeneous assay relies on the use of a label attached to a probe nucleic acid that is only capable of generating a signal when the target is hybridized to the probe ⁇ see, e.g., Nelson, et al, 1992, Nonisotopic DNA Probe Techniques. Academic Press, New York, N.Y., pages 274-310; which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
  • the invention encompasses any method known in the art for enhancing the sensitivity of the detectable signal in such assays, including but not limited to the use of cyclic probe technology (Bakkaoui et al, 1996, BioTeckniques 20: 240-8, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety); and the use of branched probes (Urdea et al, 1993, Clin. Chem. 39: 725-6; which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
  • nucleic acid probes capable of specifically hybridizing to a target can be labeled by any one of several methods typically used to detect the presence of hybridized nucleic acids.
  • One common method of detection is the use of autoradiography, using probes labeled with 3 H, 125 1, 35 S, 14 C, or 32 P, or the like.
  • the choice of radioactive isotope depends on research preferences due to ease of synthesis, stability, and half lives of the selected isotopes.
  • Other labels include compounds ⁇ e.g., biotin and digoxigenin), that bind to anti- ligands or antibodies labeled with fluorophores, chemiluminescent agents, or enzymes.
  • probes can be conjugated directly to labels such as fluorophores, chemiluminescent agents or enzymes.
  • labels such as fluorophores, chemiluminescent agents or enzymes.
  • the choice of label depends on sensitivity required, ease of conjugation with the probe, stability requirements, and available instrumentation.
  • the probes and primers of the invention can be synthesized and labeled using techniques known to one skilled in the art. Oligonucleotides for use as probes and primers may be chemically synthesized according to the solid phase phosphoramidite triester method described by Beaucage, S. L. and Caruthers, M. H., 1981, Tetrahedron Lett. 22(20): 1859-1862, using an automated synthesizer, as described inNeedham-VanDevanter, D. R., et al.
  • oligonucleotides can be by either native acrylamide gel electrophoresis or by anion-exchange HPLC, as described in Pearson, J. D. and Regnier, F. E., 1983, J. Chrom. 255:137-149. All of the references cited supra are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
  • the methods and kits of the invention encompass detection and/or quantitation of HIF-I ⁇ in a sample obtained from a subject. Any method known to one skilled in the art for the detection and quantitation of an HIF-I ⁇ protein is encompassed within the present invention.
  • HIF- l ⁇ protein sequences useful in the methods and kits of the invention are well known in the art. See, for example, Wang et al, 1995, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA, 92: 5510-4; Merighi et al, HIF-l ⁇ Expression in Cancer Cells in up- regulated by adeerrozine A 3 receptors, paper submitted to Nature, 2004; and WO 96/39426 each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entireties.
  • HIF- l ⁇ proteins and anti- HIF- l ⁇ antibodies and immunospecific fragments thereof are suitable in the assays of the invention.
  • Detection and quantitation of an HIF- l ⁇ gene product encompasses the detection of proteins exemplified herein.
  • Detection of elevated levels of an HIF-l ⁇ gene product in a sample obtained from a subject in accordance with the methods of the invention is generally compared to a standard sample.
  • antibodies directed against naturally occurring HIF- l ⁇ proteins may be used in the methods of the invention.
  • the invention encompasses the use of any standard immunoassay method known to one skilled in the art, including but not limited to Western blot, ELISA, and FACS .
  • the invention encompasses use of an immunoassay comprising contacting a sample from a subject with an anti- HIF- l ⁇ antibody or an immunospecific fragment thereof under conditions such that immunospecific binding to the HIF- l ⁇ receptor in the sample can occur, thereby forming an immune complex, and detecting and/or measuring the amount of complex formed.
  • an antibody to an HIF-l ⁇ is used to assay a sample for the presence of the HIF-l ⁇ , wherein an increased level of the HIF-l ⁇ is detected relative to a standard sample.
  • the biological sample may be brought in contact with and immobilized onto a solid phase support or a carrier such as nitrocellulose or other solid support capable of immobilizing cells, cell particles or soluble proteins.
  • a solid phase support or a carrier such as nitrocellulose or other solid support capable of immobilizing cells, cell particles or soluble proteins.
  • the support can be washed with suitable buffers followed by treatment with the antibody that selectively or specifically binds to an HIF- l ⁇ protein.
  • the solid phase support can then be washed with buffer to remove unbound antibody.
  • the amount of antibody bound to the solid support can then be detected by conventional means.
  • Solid phase support or carrier refers to any support capable of binding an antigen or an antibody.
  • Well-known supports or carriers include glass, polystyrene, polypropylene, polyethylene, dextran, nylon, amylases, natural and modified celluloses, polyacrylamides, gabbros, and magnetite.
  • the nature of the carrier can be either soluble to some extent or insoluble for the purposes of the present invention.
  • the support material may have virtually any possible structural configuration so long as the coupled molecule is capable of binding to an antigen or antibody.
  • the support configuration may be spherical, as in a bead, or cylindrical, as in the inside surface of a test tube, or the external surface of a rod.
  • the surface may be flat such as a sheet, test strip, etc.
  • Preferred supports include polystyrene beads. Those skilled in the art will know many other suitable carriers for binding antibody or antigen, or will be able to ascertain the same by use of routine experimentation.
  • the anti- HIF-I ⁇ antibody or an immunospecific fragment thereof can be detectably labeled by linking the same to an enzyme and using the labeled antibody in an enzyme immunoassay (EIA) (Voller, A., "The 1 Enzyme Linked Immunosorbent Assay (ELISA)", 1978, Diagnostic Horizons 2:1, Microbiological Associates Quarterly Publication, Walkersville, MD; Voller, A. et al, 1978, J Clin. Pathol. 31:507-520; Butler, J.E., 1981, Meth. Enzymol. 73:482; Maggio, E. ed., 1980, Enzyme Immunoassay, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL,; Ishikawa, E. et ah, eds., 1981, Enzyme
  • the enzyme bound to the antibody will react with an appropriate substrate, preferably a chromogenic substrate, in such a manner as to produce a chemical moiety which can be detected, for example, by spectrophotometric, fluorimetric or visual means.
  • Enzymes that can be used to detectably label the antibody include but are not limited to malate dehydrogenase, staphylococcal nuclease, delta-5-steroid isomerase, yeast alcohol dehydrogenase, alpha-glycerophosphate, dehydrogenase, triose phosphate isomerase, horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, asparaginase, glucose oxidase, beta- galactosidase, ribonuclease, urease, catalase, glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase, glucoamylase and acetylcholinesterase, among others.
  • the detection can be accomplished by colorimetric methods that employ a chromogenic substrate for the enzyme. Detection can also be accomplished by visual comparison of the extent of enzymatic reaction of a substrate in comparison with similarly prepared standards.
  • Detection can also be accomplished using any other method known to one skilled in the art.
  • a radioimmunoassay RIA
  • the radioactive isotope can be detected by such means as the use of a gamma counter or a scintillation counter, or by autoradiography.
  • the invention encompasses labeling the antibody with a fluorescent compound.
  • fluorescent labeling compounds include fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, phycoerythrin, phycocyanin, allophycocyanin, o-phthaldehyde and fluorescamine.
  • the antibody can also be detectably labeled using fluorescence emitting metals such as 152 Eu, or others of the lanthanide series.
  • metals can be attached to the antibody using such metal chelating groups as diethylenetriaminepentacetic acid (DTPA) or ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA).
  • DTPA diethylenetriaminepentacetic acid
  • EDTA ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid
  • the invention further encompasses detectably labeling the antibody by coupling it to a cheniiluminescent compound.
  • the presence of the chemiluminescent- tagged antibody is then determined by detecting the presence of luminescence that arises during the course of a chemical reaction.
  • particularly useful chemiluminescent labeling compounds are luminol, isoluminol, theromatic acridinium ester, imidazole, acridinium salt and oxalate ester.
  • a bioluminescent compound can be used to label the antibody of the present invention.
  • Bioluminescence is a type of chemiluminescence found in biological systems in which a catalytic protein increases the efficiency of the chemiluminescent reaction. The presence of a bioluminescent protein is determined by detecting the presence of luminescence.
  • Bioluminescent compounds for purposes of labeling include, e.g., luciferin, luciferase and aequorin.
  • the invention also encompasses methods for indirect detection of HIF-I ⁇ .
  • the invention encompasses use of an immunoassay comprising contacting a sample derived from a subject with cancer with an anti- HIF- l ⁇ antibody (primary antibody) or an immunospecific fragment thereof under conditions such that immunospecific binding to the HIF- l ⁇ protein in the sample can occur, thereby forming an immune complex, adding a secondary antibody that is labeled under conditions such that immunospecific binding to the primary antibody occurs and detecting and/or quantitating the amount of complex formed indirectly.
  • Anti- HIF- l ⁇ antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof may be used quantitatively or qualitatively to detect an HIF- l ⁇ in a sample.
  • the anti- HIF- l ⁇ antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof may be used histologically, e.g., immunofluorescence or microscopic studies, using common techniques known to one skilled in the art, for in situ detection of an HIF-I ⁇ receptor.
  • In situ detection may be accomplished by preparing a histological specimen from a subject, such as a paraffin embedded section of tissue, e.g., breast tissues, and applying thereto a labeled antibody of the present invention.
  • the antibody (or fragment) is preferably applied by overlaying the labeled antibody (or fragment) onto the biological sample.
  • the methods of the invention may use any nucleic acid encoding HIF- l ⁇ , an analog, fragment or derivative thereof, as a proxy for determining a HIF-I a level.
  • a nucleic acid is intended to include DNA molecules (e.g., cDNA, genomic DNA), RNA molecules (e.g., hnRNA, pre-mRNA, mRNA) and DNA or RNA analogs (e.g., peptide nucleic acids) generated using techniques known to one skilled in the art.
  • the nucleic acid measured as a proxy for a HIF-I ⁇ level can be single-stranded or double stranded.
  • nucleotide sequences for use in the methods and kits of the invention may include all or a portion of any of the following: nucleotide sequences disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 6,455,674 (issued to Einat et al); 6,652,799 (issued to Semenza); 6,222,018(issued to Semenza); Wang et al. , 1995 PNAS USA, 92: 5510-4; and WO 96/39426.
  • the invention encompasses all or a portion of the nucleotide sequence of human HIF-l ⁇ with GENBANK Accession Nos. NM_OO153O and NM_181054.
  • any HIF-I ⁇ nucleic acid known in the art may be useful in the methods and kits of the invention.
  • Such nucleic acids generally encode at least a portion of HIF-I ⁇ , or have a sequence that hybridizes to a HIF- l ⁇ , -encoding nucleic acid under hybridizing conditions, as described herein.
  • the methods of the invention may use a coding sequence or a 5' or 3' untranslated region of a nucleic acid encoding HIF- l ⁇ or a fragment thereof as a probe, including naturally occurring and non-naturally occurring variants.
  • a non- naturally occurring variant is one that is engineered by man (e.g., a peptide nucleic acid probe).
  • HIF-l ⁇ , or an mRNA encoding HIF- l ⁇ in a sample from a subject is detected or measured, naturally occurring gene products are detected, including but not limited to wild-type gene products as well as mutants, allelic variants, splice variants, polymorphic variants, etc.
  • variants will be highly homologous to the wild-type gene product encoding HIF-I ⁇ , e.g., having at least 90%, 95%, 98% or 99% amino acid sequence identity (as determined by standard algorithms known in the art, see, e.g., Altschul, 1990 Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 87: 2264-2268; Altschul, 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL U.S.A. 90: 5873-5877; Altschul et al, 1990 J. MoI. Biol. 215: 403-410).
  • HIF-I ⁇ variants to be used as probes may be encoded by a nucleic acid which is hybridizable under stringent conditions to a nucleic acid encoding HIF-l ⁇ .
  • Nucleic acid hybridization methods are well known in the art (see, e.g., Sambrook et al, 2001 Molecular Cloning. A Laboratory Manual. 3 rd ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, New York; Ausubel et al, eds., 1994-1997, in the Current Protocols in Molecular Biology: Series of laboratory technique manuals, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.; Shilo and Weinberg, 1981, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.
  • stringent conditions refers to the ability of a first polynucleotide molecule to hybridize, and remain bound to a second filter-bound polynucleotide molecule in 0.5 M NaHPO 4 , 7% sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), 1 mM EDTA at 65°C, followed by washing in 0.2X SSC/0.1% SDS at 42°C ⁇ see Ausubel et al. (eds.), 1989, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol.
  • the variants being detected or measured comprise (or, if nucleic acids, encode) not more than 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15 or 20 point mutations (substitutions) relative the wild-type sequence.
  • An isolated nucleic acid probe encoding HIF- 1 a or a portion thereof can be obtained by any method known in the art, e.g., from a deposited plasmid, by PCR amplification using synthetic primers hybridizable to the 3' and 5' ends of the sequence, and/or by cloning from a cDNA or genomic library using standard screening techniques, or by polynucleotide synthesis.
  • Use of such probes for detection and quantitation of specific sequences is well known in the art. See e.g., Erlich, e.d, 1989, PCR Technology Principles and Applications for DNA Amplification. Macmillan Publishers Ltd., England; Sambrook et al, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 3 rd ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY, 2001.
  • the methods of the invention may use a gene coding sequence, e.g., cDNA, of HIF-I ⁇ , which preferably hybridizes under stringent conditions as described above to at least about 6, preferably about 12, most preferably about 18 or more consecutive nucleotides of the gene coding sequence of HIF-I ⁇ protein, useful for the detection of an HIF-I ⁇ protein
  • nucleic acid sequence encoding HIF- l ⁇ protein such as those exemplified herein as a hybridization probe
  • full length nucleic acid molecules encoding HIF-I ⁇ protein can be quantitated using standard hybridization techniques (see, e.g., Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 3 rd ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY 5 2001) for use in the methods of the invention, i.e., as a proxy for HIF- l ⁇ level.
  • the HIF-l ⁇ sequences used in the methods of the invention are preferably human sequences.
  • homologs of the human HIF-I a isolated from other animals can also be used in the methods of the invention as a proxy for HIF- l ⁇ level, particularly where the subject is a non-human animal.
  • the invention also includes the use of HIF- l ⁇ homologs identified from non-human animals such as non-human primates, rats, mice, farm animals including but not limited to cattle, horses, goats, sheep, pigs, etc., household pets including but not limited to cats, dogs, etc. , in the methods of the invention.
  • the methods of the invention may use fragments of any of the nucleic acids disclosed herein in any of the methods of the invention.
  • a fragment preferably comprises at least 10, 20, 50, 100, or 200 contiguous nucleotides of a sequence described herein.
  • Standard recombinant DNA techniques known in the art may be used to provide a HIF- l ⁇ protein or a nucleic acid encoding an HIF-I ⁇ protein, or a fragment thereof, for use in the methods and kits of the invention.
  • the corresponding nucleotide sequence encoding HIF- l ⁇ protein of interest can be cloned.
  • HIF-I ⁇ proteins or fragments thereof, for the generation of antibodies for methods of the invention.
  • HIF- l ⁇ polypeptides and fragments can also be used as protein abundance or activity standards in the methods of the invention.
  • the invention encompasses amino acid sequences of HIF-l ⁇ as dislcosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 6,455,674 (issued to Einat et al); 6,652,799 (issued to Semenza); 6,222,018(issued to Semenza); Wang et al, 1995 PNAS USA, 92: 5510-4; 6,436,654 (issued to Berkenstam); WO 96/39426.
  • the amino acid sequences cited in the above-identified references are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
  • the invention encompasses the amino acid sequences of human HIF-Ia with GENBANK Accession No.s NP_001521 andNP_851397 each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • the HIF-I ⁇ protein comprises an amino acid sequence that exhibits at least about 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99% sequence similarity to the amino acid sequence of any of HIF-I ⁇ proteins known in the art.
  • proteins are provided consisting of or comprising a fragment of HIF-I ⁇ protein consisting of at least ten contiguous amino acids.
  • the fragment consists of or comprises at least 20, 30, 40, or 50 contiguous amino acids from a HIF- l ⁇ protein for use, for example, in raising antibodies.
  • Such fragments can also be useful, for example, as standards or controls in the methods and kits of the invention.
  • host-expression vector systems may be utilized to express HIF- l ⁇ proteins or fragments for use in the methods of the invention. Such host-expression systems are well known and provide the necessary means by which a protein of interest may be produced and subsequently purified. Examples of host-expression vector systems that may be used in accordance with the invention are: bacterial cells ⁇ e.g., E. coli, B.
  • subtilis transformed with recombinant bacteriophage DNA, plasmid DNA or cosmid DNA expression vectors containing a HIF-l ⁇ nucleic acid coding sequence, yeast cells ⁇ e.g., Saccharomyces, Pichia) transformed with a recombinant yeast expression vector containing the HIF-l ⁇ coding sequence; insect cells infected with a recombinant virus expression vector ⁇ e.g., baculovirus) containing the HIF-l ⁇ coding sequence; plant cells infected with a recombinant virus expression vector ⁇ e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or transformed with a recombinant plasmid expression vector ⁇ e.g., Ti plasmid) containing the HIF- l ⁇ coding sequence; or mammalian cells ⁇ e.g., COS, CHO, BHK, 293, 3T3) harboring recombinant expression constructs containing promoters derived from
  • a number of expression vectors may be advantageously selected depending upon the use intended for the HIF-I ⁇ being expressed.
  • vectors that direct the expression of high levels of protein products that are readily purified may be desirable.
  • Such vectors include but are not limited to the E. coli expression vector pUR278 (Ruther et al, 1983, EMBO J. 2:1791), in which the HIF-l ⁇ coding sequence can be ligated into the vector in-frame with the lac Z coding region so that a fusion protein is produced; pIN vectors (Inouye & Inouye, 1985, Nucleic Acids Res.
  • pGEX vectors can also be used to express foreign polypeptides as fusion proteins with glutathione S-transferase (GST).
  • GST glutathione S-transferase
  • fusion proteins are soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsorption and binding to a column comprising of glutathione-agarose beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione.
  • the pGEX vectors are designed to include, e.g., thrombin or factor Xa protease cleavage sites so that the cloned target gene product can be released from the GST moiety.
  • Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) can be used as a vector to express foreign genes.
  • the virus grows in Spodoptera frugiper da cells.
  • the HIF- l ⁇ coding sequence can be cloned individually into nonessential regions (for example the polyhedrin gene) of the virus and placed under control of an AcNPV promoter (for example the polyhedrin promoter).
  • Successful insertion of a HIF- l ⁇ coding sequence will result in inactivation of the polyhedrin gene and production of non-occluded recombinant virus (i.e., virus lacking the proteinaceous coat coded for by the polyhedrin gene).
  • These recombinant viruses can be used to infect Spodoptera frugiper da cells in which the inserted gene is expressed (e.g., see Smith et at, 1983, J. Virol. 46:584; Smith, U.S. Patent No. 4,215,051).
  • the HIF- l ⁇ coding sequence of interest may be ligated to an adenovirus transcription/translation control complex, e.g., the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. This chimeric gene may then be inserted in the adenovirus genome by in vitro or in vivo recombination.
  • Insertion in a non-essential region of the viral genome will result in a recombinant virus that is viable and capable of expressing HIF- l ⁇ in infected hosts (see, e.g., Logan & Shenk, 1984, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA 81:3655).
  • Specific initiation signals may also be required for efficient translation of inserted HIF- l ⁇ coding sequences. These signals include the ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. In cases where an entire HIF-I ⁇ gene, including its own initiation codon and adjacent sequences, is inserted into the appropriate expression vector, no additional translational control signals may be needed.
  • exogenous translational control signals including, if necessary, the ATG initiation codon
  • exogenous translational control signals and initiation codons can be of a variety of origins, both natural and synthetic.
  • the initiation codon must be in phase with the reading frame of the desired coding sequence to ensure correct translation of the entire insert.
  • the efficiency of expression may be enhanced by the inclusion of appropriate transcription enhancer elements, transcription terminators, etc. ⁇ see Bittner ⁇ t al, 1987. Methods in Enzvmol. 153: 516).
  • a host cell strain may be chosen that modulates the expression of the inserted sequences, or modifies and processes the gene product in the specific fashion desired. Such modifications ⁇ e.g., glycosylation) and processing ⁇ e.g., cleavage) of protein products may be important for the function of the protein.
  • Different host cells have characteristic and specific mechanisms for the post-translational processing and modification of proteins and gene products. Appropriate cell lines or host systems can be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the foreign protein expressed.
  • eukaryotic host cells that possess the cellular machinery for proper processing of the primary transcript, glycosylation, and phosphorylation of the gene product can be used.
  • Such mammalian host cells include but are not limited to CHO 5 VERO, BHK, HeLa, COS, MDCK, 293, 3T3, WI38, and in particular, breast cancer cell lines such as, for example, BT483, Hs578T, HTB26, BT20 and T47D, and normal mammary gland cell lines such as, for example, CRL7030 and Hs578Bst.
  • HIF- l ⁇ gene product For long-term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins, stable expression is preferred.
  • cell lines that stably express the HIF- l ⁇ gene product can be engineered.
  • host cells can be transformed with DNA controlled by appropriate expression control elements ⁇ e.g., promoter, enhancer, sequences, transcription terminators, polyadenylation sites, etc.), and a selectable marker.
  • engineered cells can be allowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched media, and then can be switched to a selective media.
  • a selectable marker in a recombinant construct such as a plasmid, can confer resistance to the selective media, allow cells to stably integrate the plasmid into their chromosomes, and grow to form foci which, in turn, can be cloned and expanded into cell lines.
  • This method can advantageously be used to engineer cell lines that stably express the HIF- l ⁇ gene product.
  • Such engineered cell lines can be particularly useful in screening and evaluating compounds that affect the endogenous activity of the HIF- 1 ⁇ gene product.
  • a number of selection systems including but not limited to the herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase (Wigler etal, 1977, Cell 11: 223), hypoxanthine-guanine phosphoribosyltransferase (Szybalska & Szybalski, 1962, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA 48: 2026), and adenine phosphoribosyltransferase (Lowy et ah, 1980, Cell 22: 817) genes can be employed in tk " , hgprf or aprt " cells, respectively.
  • anti-metabolite resistance can be used as the basis of selection for the following genes: dhfr, which confers resistance to methotrexate (Wigler et al, 1980, Proc Natl. Acad. ScL USA 77: 3567; O'Hare et al, 1981, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA 78:1527); gpt, which confers resistance to mycophenolic acid (Mulligan & Berg, 1981, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA 78:2072); neo, which confers resistance to the aminoglycoside G-418 (Colberre-Garapin et al, 1981, J. MoI. Biol. 150: 1); and hygro, which confers resistance to hygromycin (Santerre et al., 1984, Gene 30: 147).
  • the methods and kits of the invention encompass use of anti- HIF- l ⁇ antibodies or fragments thereof that specifically recognize one or more epitopes of a HIF- l ⁇ protein. Accordingly, any HIF-I ⁇ protein, derivative, or fragment can be used as an immunogen to generate antibodies that immunospecifally bind a HIF- l ⁇ protein. Such antibodies and fragments can be used in the detection and quantitation of a HIF- l ⁇ in a sample to carry out any of the methods of the invention as disclosed herein.
  • Such antibodies can include but are not limited to polyclonal antibodies, monoclonal antibodies (mAbs), humanized or chimeric antibodies, single chain antibodies, Fab fragments, F(ab') 2 fragments, Fv fragments, fragments produced by a Fab expression library, anti-idiotypic (anti-Id) antibodies, and epitope-binding fragments of any of the above.
  • mAbs monoclonal antibodies
  • humanized or chimeric antibodies single chain antibodies
  • Fab fragments F(ab') 2 fragments, Fv fragments, fragments produced by a Fab expression library
  • anti-idiotypic (anti-Id) antibodies anti-idiotypic antibodies
  • epitope-binding fragments of any of the above In a specific embodiment, antibodies to human HIF- l ⁇ protein are used. Described herein are general methods for the production of antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof. Any of such antibodies or fragments can be produced by standard immunological methods or by recombinant expression of nucleic acid molecules
  • any of various host animals can be immunized by injection with a HIF- l ⁇ gene product, or a portion thereof.
  • host animals can include but are not limited to rabbits, mice, and rats.
  • Various adjuvants can be used to increase the immunological response depending on the host species, including but not limited to Freund's (complete or incomplete), mineral gels such as aluminum hydroxide, surface active substances such as lysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions, peptides, oil emulsions, keyhole limpet hemocyanin, dinitrophenol or potentially useful human adjuvants such as BCG (bacille Calmette-Guerin) and Corynebacterium parvum.
  • BCG Bacille Calmette-Guerin
  • Anti- HIF- l ⁇ monoclonal antibodies are preferred for use in the methods and kits of the invention.
  • Monoclonal antibodies can be obtained by any technique that provides for the production of antibody molecules by continuous cell lines in culture. These include but are not limited to the hybridoma technique of Kohler and Milstein, (1975, Nature 256: 495; and U.S. Patent No. 4,376,110), the human B-cell hybridoma technique (Kosbor et al, 1983, Immunology Today 4: 72; Cole et al, 1983, Proa Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 80: 2026), and the EBV-hybridoma technique (Cole et al. , 1985, Monoclonal Antibodies And Cancer Therapy, Alan R.
  • Such antibodies can be of any immunoglobulin class, including IgG, IgM, IgE, IgA, IgD, and any subclass thereof.
  • the hybridoma producing the mAb of this invention can be cultivated in vitro or in vivo.
  • chimeric antibodies By splicing the genes from a mouse antibody molecule of appropriate antigen specificity together with genes from a human antibody molecule of appropriate biological activity can be used in preparing antibodies useful in the present invention.
  • a chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions are derived from different animal species, such as those having a variable region derived from a murine mAb and a human immunoglobulin constant region.
  • the invention thus contemplates chimeric antibodies that are specific or selective for a HIF- l ⁇ protein. While often designed to be therapeutic, such chimeric antibodies can be useful to quantitate a HIF- l ⁇ level according to the methods of the invention.
  • humanized antibodies can be used in the methods and kits of the invention.
  • humanized antibodies are antibody molecules from non-human species having one or more hypervariable regions or complementarity determining regions (CDRs) from the non-human species and framework regions from a human immunoglobulin molecule.
  • CDRs complementarity determining regions
  • the extent of the framework region and Cars have been precisely defined (see, "Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest", Kabat, E. et al, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (1983)).
  • Examples of techniques that have been developed for the production of humanized antibodies are known in the art and useful within the scope of the present invention. (See, e.g., Queen, U.S. Patent No. 5,585,089 and Winter, U.S. Patent No.
  • Humanized antibodies are typically developed as therapeutic agents. However, such antibodies can also be used in the methods and kits of the present invention, as they can be used to quantitate a HIF- l ⁇ level in accordance with the instant invention.
  • Phage display technology can be used to increase the affinity of an antibody to a HIF- l ⁇ gene product. This technique can be useful in obtaining higher affinity antibodies to an HIF- l ⁇ gene product, which could be used for the diagnosis and prognosis of a subject with cancer according to the present invention.
  • affinity maturation employs mutagenesis or CDR walking and re-selection using the HIF- l ⁇ gene product antigen to identify antibodies that bind with higher affinity to the antigen when compared with the initial or parental antibody (see, e.g.,G ⁇ ase ⁇ et ⁇ l., 1992, J. Immunology 149:3903). Mutagenizing entire codons rather than single nucleotides results in a semi-randomized repertoire of amino acid mutations. Libraries can be constructed consisting of a pool of variant clones, each of which differs by a single amino acid alteration in a single CDR, and contain variants representing each possible amino acid substitution for each CDR residue.
  • Mutants with increased binding affinity for the antigen can be screened by contacting the immobilized mutants with labeled antigen. Any screening method known in the art can be used to identify mutant antibodies having increased avidity to the antigen (e.g., ELISA) (see ' ⁇ u et ⁇ l, 1998, Proc N ⁇ tl. Ac ⁇ d ScL USA 95:6037; Y ⁇ Xon et ⁇ l, 1995, J Immunology 155:1994). CDR walking that randomizes the light chain may also be useful (see Schier et ⁇ l, 1996, J. MoI Bio. 263:551).
  • ELISA ELISA
  • single chain antibodies can be adapted to produce single chain antibodies against HIF- l ⁇ gene products.
  • Single chain antibodies are formed by linking the heavy and light chain fragments of the Fv region via an amino acid bridge, resulting in a single chain polypeptide.
  • Techniques for the assembly of functional Fv fragments in E. coli can also be used (Skerra et al, 1988, Science 242: 1038).
  • Antibody fragments that recognize specific epitopes can be generated by known techniques. Such fragments can be used for quantitating a HIF- l ⁇ gene product according to any available method known in the art.
  • fragments include but are not limited to: F(ab') 2 fragments, which can be produced by pepsin digestion of the antibody molecule; and Fab fragments, which can be generated by reducing the disulfide bridges of the F(ab') 2 fragments; Fab fragments, which can be generated by treating the antibody molecule with papain and a reducing agent; and Fv fragments.
  • Fab expression libraries can be constructed (Huse et al, 1989, Science 246:1275-1281) to allow rapid and easy identification of monoclonal Fab fragments having the desired specificity.
  • a molecular clone of an antibody to an antigen of interest can be prepared by techniques known to one skilled in the art. Recombinant DNA methodology ⁇ see e.g., Maniatis et al., 1982, Molecular Cloning. A Laboratory Manual. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, New York) can be used to construct nucleic acid sequences that encode a monoclonal antibody molecule, or an immunospecific fragment thereof.
  • Antibody molecules can be purified by well-known techniques, e.g., immunoabsorption or immunoaffinity chromatography, chromatographic methods such as HPLC (high performance liquid chromatography), or a combination thereof.
  • screening for the desired antibody can be accomplished by techniques known in the art, e.g. , ELISA (enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay).
  • ELISA enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay
  • generated hybridomas can be assayed for a product that binds to a HIF- l ⁇ fragment containing such domain.
  • the foregoing antibodies can be used to quantify a HIF- l ⁇ protein, e.g., to measure levels thereof in appropriate samples, in the methods and kits of the invention.
  • HIF-I ⁇ Any antibody directed to one or more epitopes of an HIF-I ⁇ can be used in the methods and kits of the invention.
  • Commercially available HIF-l ⁇ antibodies can be used in accordance with the instant invention, for example those available from Novus Biologicals, Inc. (Littleton, CO); Affinity BioReagents, (Golden, CO). 6.9 KITS
  • the invention provides a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more containers filled with compounds of the invention. Additionally, one or more other prophylactic or therapeutic agents useful for the treatment of a disease can also be included in the pharmaceutical pack or kit.
  • the invention also provides a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more containers filled with one or more of the ingredients of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention.
  • Optionally associated with such container(s) can be a notice in the form prescribed by a governmental agency regulating the manufacture, use or sale of pharmaceuticals or biological products, which notice reflects approval by the agency of manufacture, use or sale for human administration.
  • the present invention provides kits that can be used in the above methods. In one embodiment, a kit comprises one or more compounds of the invention.
  • kits further comprises one or more other prophylactic or therapeutic agents useful for the treatment of cancer, in one or more containers.
  • a kit further comprises one or more anti-cancer agents that bind one or more cancer antigens associated with cancer.
  • the other prophylactic or therapeutic agent is a chemotherapeutic.
  • the prophylactic or therapeutic agent is a biological or hormonal therapeutic.
  • MRE 3046F20 5-N-(4-methylphenyl- carbamoyl)amino-8-methyl-2(2-furyl)-pyrazolo-[4,3e]-l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine; IL-10 salt, 5-N-(4-diethylamino-phenyl-carbamoyl)amino-8-methyl-(2(2furyl)-pyrazolo- ⁇ ejl ⁇ -triazolotl ⁇ -clpyrimidine); MRE 3008F20, 5-N-(4-methoxyphenyl- carbamoyl)amino-8-propyl-2(2furyl)-pyrazolo-[4,3e] 1 ,2,4-triazolo[ 1 ,5-c]pyrirnidine, MRE 3055F20, 5-N- (4-phenylcarbamoyl)amino- 8-propyl- 2 (2furyl) -pyr
  • RNAse was purchased from Boehringer.
  • Cell Culture For chemotherapeutic enhancement testing, the human melanoma A375, human lung carcinoma SKMES, colon carcinoma HT29, and pancreatic cancer Panc-1 cell lines were originally obtained from the ATCC (American Type Culture Collection) and have been maintained at PRC.
  • Cell lines are maintained in RPMI-1640 medium supplemented with 100 units/ml penicillin G sodium, 100 ⁇ g/ml streptomycin sulfate, 0.25 ⁇ g/ml amphotericin B (fungizone), 2 mM glutamine, 10 mM HEPES, 25 ⁇ g/ml gentamycin, and 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum.
  • the cells are cultured in a T25 Falcon Tissue Culture flask in a humidified incubator at 37°C with 5% CO 2 -95% air. The cells are sub-cultured twice a week.
  • the doubling times of A375, SKMES 3 HT29, and Panc-1 cultures are approximately 22, 45, 48, and 60 hr, respectively.
  • A375 andNCTC2544 cells are grown adherently and maintained in DMEM and EMEM medium, respectively, containing 10% fetal calf serum, penicillin (100 U/ml), streptomycin (100 ⁇ g/ml), L-glutamine (2 mM) at 37°C in 5% CO 2 /95% air.
  • HeL023 and Jurkat were grown in RPMI-1640 medium, containing 10% fetal calf serum, penicillin (100 U/ml), streptomycin (100 ⁇ g/ml), L- glutamine (2 mM) at 37°C in 5% CO 2 /95% air.
  • Cells are passaged two or three times weekly at a ratio between 1 :5 and 1:10.
  • Lymphocytes were isolated from buffy coats kindly provided by the Blood Bank of the University Hospital of Ferrara. Blood donated by healthy volunteers, after informed consent for research was obtained. Lymphocytes were isolated by density gradient centrifugation (Ficoll/Histopaque 1.077 g/ml). The cells are stimulated with purified phytohemoagglutinin (1 ⁇ g/ml) and expanded in RPMI medium added of interleukin 2 (20 Units/ml) and 10% fetal calf serum.
  • Colony Formation Assay Exponentially growing A375 cells were seeded at 300 cells per well in six- well plates with 2 ml of fresh medium and treated with paclitaxel, vindesine and adenosine receptor agonists and antagonists dissolved in DMSO solution. Control plates received the same volume of DMSO alone. After 7 days of growth at 37°C in humidified atmosphere containing 5% CO 2, the cells were fixed with absolute methanol for 5' and stained with 1/10 Giemsa/phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) staining solution for 10 minutes. Staining solution was removed and colonies of greater than 30 cells were scored as survivors. For each treatment, six individual wells were scored.
  • PBS Giemsa/phosphate-buffered saline
  • A375 and NCTC2544 adherent cells were trypsinized, mixed with floating cells, washed with PBS and permeabilised in 70% (vol/vol) ethanol/PBS solution at 4 0 C for at least 24 hours.
  • Jurkat, HeL023 and PBMC cells were centrifuged for 10 minutes at 1000 x g. The cell pellet was then resuspended and permeabllised in 70% (vol/vol) ethanol/PBS solution at 4°C for at least 24 hours.
  • the cells were washed with PBS and the DNA was stained with a PBS solution, containing 20 ⁇ g/ml of propidium iodide and 100 ⁇ g/ml of RNAse, at room temperature for 30 minutes.
  • Cells were analysed by FACScan (Becton-Dickinson) and the content of DNA was evaluated by the CeIl-LISYS program (Becton-Dickinson). Cell distribution among cell cycle phases and apoptotic cells was evaluated as previously described (Secchiero et al., 2001). Briefly, the cell cycle distribution is shown as the percentage of cells containing 2n (G 1 phase), 4n (G 2 and M phases), 4n>x>2n. DNA amount (S phase) judged by propidium iodide staining. The apoptotic population is the percentage of cells with DNA content lower than 2n.
  • Rhodamine 123 Efflux Assay 5x10 s cells from each subline were loaded with 50 ng/ml of rhodamine 123 for 30 minutes at 37C in medium. The cells were washed and resuspended in dye-staining agent free medium for 3 hours at 37 C. to allow rhodamine 123 efflux. The cells were then washed twice and the fluorescence of intracellular rhodamine 123 were analysed with Flow cytometer (residual fluorescence FRES). The fluorescence was compared with loaded cells maintained at 4 C. to prevent drug export (maximal fluorescence FMAX).
  • the cells were treated with adenosine receptor antagonists to evaluate the ability of adenosine receptors to interfere with P-gp drug efflux activity. Cells from each subline that were not being exposed to rhodamine 123 were used as negative controls.
  • Metabolic Inhibitors Cells were treated for 30 minutes with metabolic inhibitors or with drug vehicle (DMSO) prior to being challenged with adenosine receptor antagonists and paclitaxel or vindesine. After 24 hours, cells were collected for flow cytometry analysis.
  • PD 98059 was used at 20 uM as an inhibitor of MEK to prevent MEK- 1 activation.
  • UOl 26 was used at 10 uM as inhibitor of MEK-I and MEK-2 to prevent extracellular signal-regulated kinase ERK-I and ERK-2 activation.
  • SB 203580 was used at 1 uM as an inhibitor of p38MAP kinase (p38MAPK).
  • Inventors have verified the concentration of adenosine A 3 receptors in human cancer cells that is elevated in the cancerous tumors compared to non-cancerous tumors or normal tissue.
  • Table 8 and FIG. 1 indicate elevated levels of adenosine A 3 receptors found by the inventors in human A375 (human melanoma), Panc-1 (human pancreatic carcinoma), MX-I (human breast carcinoma), PC-I (human prostate carcinoma), HT29 (human colon carcinoma), and SKMES (human lung carcinoma) and A2780AD10 (human ovarian carcinoma).
  • a 3 receptor antagonists Three A 3 receptor antagonists have been tested for their Degree of Growth Inhibitory activity and enhancement of inhibitory growth function of known anti-neoplastic agents.
  • Table 6 indicates receptor binding assay results for three A 3 receptor antagonist compounds. Structures of the three compounds are as follow:
  • MRE3008F20 5-[[(4-Methoxyphenyl)amino]carbonyl]amino-8-propyl-2-(2-furyl)- pyrazolo[4,3-e] 1 ,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine
  • IL- 10 N- l-(4-diethylamino-phenyl)-N'-S-[8-methyl-2-(2-furyl)-pyrazolo[4,3-e] l,2,4-triazolo[ l,5-c]pyrimidine]-urea H
  • IL- 11 N-l-(4-dimethylamino-phenyl)-N'-5-[8-methyl-2-(2-&ryl)-pyrazolo[4,3-e] ,2,4 -triazolofl ,5-c]pyrimidine]-urea
  • Table 6 shows MRE3008F20, IL-IO and IL-11 to be potent, selective antagonists for the human adenosine A 3 receptor.
  • Irinotecan HCl (Camptosar®; 20 mg/ml) was obtained from Pharmacia & Upjohn Co.
  • Paclitaxel (Taxol®, 6 mg/ml) was obtained from Bristol-Myers Squibb, Co.
  • Docetaxel (Taxotere®) was obtained from Rhone-Poulenc Rorer.
  • Vinblastine sulfate salt was obtained from Sigma Chemical Co., (V1377).
  • Irinotecan was diluted with culture medium. All other agents were dissolved in 100% DMSO at appropriate concentrations.
  • DMSO stock solutions were diluted 100-fold with growth medium so that the final DMSO concentration was 1%.
  • MTT (3 -[4,5- Dimethylthiazol-2-yl]2,5-diphenyltetrazolium bromide) was obtained from Sigma Chemical Co.
  • RPMI-1640 medium antibiotic antimycotic 100 X consisting of 10,000 units/ml penicillin G sodium, 10,000 ⁇ g/ml streptomycin sulfate, 25 ⁇ g/ml Amphotericin B (fungizone), glutamine (20OmM), HEPES buffer (1 M), gentamicin (50 mg/ml), sodium bicarbonate (7.5%), and fetal bovine serum were obtained from GibcoBRL. The complement in fetal bovine serum was inactivated at 56°C for 30 min.
  • the human melanoma A375, human lung carcinoma SKMES, colon carcinoma HT29, and pancreatic cancer Panc-1 cell lines were originally obtained from the ATCC (American Type Culture Collection) and have been maintained in RPMI-1640 medium supplemented with 100 units/ml penicillin G sodium, 100 ⁇ g/ml streptomycin sulfate, 0.25 ⁇ g/ml amphotericin B (fungizone), 2 mM glutamine, 10 mM HEPES, 25 ⁇ g/ml gentamycin, and 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum.
  • HT29 is approximately 30-fold more refractory than the A375 cell line to doxorubicin (IC 50 value of 0.211 vs. 0.0064 ⁇ g/ml) and mitoxantrone (IC 50 value of 0.1 vs. 0.0032 ⁇ g/ml), respectively.
  • the HT29 cell line has an altered form of topoisomerase II, and is therefore more refractory to doxorubicin and mitoxantrone, which mediate their growth inhibitory activity by trapping topoisomerase II, DNA, and drug in ternary complexes.
  • Inventors verified the concentration of adenosine A 3 receptors in human cancer cells that is elevated in the cancerous tumors compared to non-cancerous tumors or normal tissue.
  • Table 8 and Figure 1 indicate elevated levels of adenosine A 3 receptors found by the inventors in human A375 (human melanoma), Panc-1 (human pancreatic carcinoma), MX-I (human breast carcinoma), PC-I (human prostate carcinoma), HT29 (human colon carcinoma), and SKMES (human lung carcinoma).
  • the growth inhibitory activity of paclitaxel against the human melanoma A375 cell line was determined in the absence or in the presence of 10 ⁇ g/ml of MRE3008F20 or 5 ⁇ g/ml each of IL-10 and IL-Il (Table 9). At these sub-cytotoxic concentrations, MRE3008F20, IL-10, and IL-Il (approximately 30-45% growth inhibition in the presence of A 3 antagonists alone), enhanced the growth inhibitory activity of paclitaxel by 8-12-fold; IC 50 values decreased from 0.0046 ⁇ g/ml (paclitaxel alone) to 0.0004-0.00054 ⁇ g/ml (paclitaxel plus MRE3008F20, IL-10, and IL-11).
  • IL-10 and IL-11 enhance the growth inhibitory activity of paclitaxel in a concentration-dependent manner.
  • Results of further testing of the enhancement effects with taxane family compounds is given in Table 10. Both of the common taxane compounds paclitaxel (taxolTM) and docetaxel (taxotereTM) are included.
  • Table 10 illustrates concentration-dependencies for concentrations of 1, 3, and 10 ⁇ g/ml for MRE3008F20 and for concentrations of 0.5, 1.5, and 5 ⁇ g/ml for compounds IL- 10 and IL- 11.
  • IL-10 and IL-11 enhanced the growth inhibitory activity of paclitaxel in a concentration-dependent manner. This testing also indicated that compounds MRE3008F20, IL-10 and IL-Il have enhancement factors with docetaxel that are indicative of a synergistic effect.
  • Table 11 Growth Inhibitory Activity of A 3 Antagonists and Anti-Neoplastic Agents used Jointly with SKMES Cells
  • the growth inhibitory activity of paclitaxel and docetaxel against the human colon carcinoma HT29 cell line was determined in the absence or in the presence of 1 ⁇ g/ml of MRE3008F20 or 0.5 ⁇ g/ml each of IL-10 and IL-Il (Table 12). It was found that A 3 antagonists enhance the growth inhibitory activity of paclitaxel, docetaxel, doxorubicin and irinotecan.
  • Table 12 Growth Inhibitory Activity of A 3 Antagonists and Taxan Compounds Used Jointly With HT29 Cells
  • chemotherapeutic cancer agents can be selected for A 3 antagonist enhancement from the form of MDR they are associated with, the inventors have further established that high affinity A 3 adenosine receptor antagonists can be used to counter P-gp and MRP associated multi-drug resistance.
  • inventors evaluated whether A 3 adenosine receptor could protect the cell by the toxic effect of conventional chemotherapeutic drug. Colony formation assay experiments were performed on A375 melanoma cells treated with increasing concentration of paclitaxel (0.25-75 ⁇ g/ml). A 3 stimulation is achieved with the selective agonist CI-IB- MECA while A 3 blockade is obtained with the selective antagonist MRE 3008F20.
  • Colony formation of A375 cells is increased of about 30% when the adenosine A 3 agonist CI-IB-MECA (10 ⁇ M) is applied. This is seen in the "C" bar of Figure 2 being 130% of the DMSO control bar "D" Figure 2 further shows that increased colony formation occurs when CI-IB-MECA is combined with the taxane family compound paclitaxel (0.75 ⁇ g/ml). When paclitaxel alone is added ("T" bar of Figure 2), colony formation is 64% of the control. Colony formation is increased 32% to 85% of control when the CI-IB-MECA is combined ("TC" bar of Figure 2).
  • a 3 receptors trigger a pro-survival signal, not able to restore colony formation ability of A375 cells treated with the taxane paclitaxel, while the blockage of As increased paclitaxel mediated deleterious effects (p ⁇ 0.01, "TM" bar versus "T” bar of Figure 2).
  • the inventors also analysed the ability of A 3 adenosine receptor antagonists to enhance chemotherapeutic effects by performing an acute treatment of A375 cells with the taxane family compound paclitaxel and the vinca alkaloid vindesine.
  • Cell proliferation and apoptosis are quantified by flow cytometer analysis after propidium-iodide (PI) DNA staining.
  • PI propidium-iodide
  • EC 50 concentration exerting the 50% of the G 2 /M accumulation (EC 50 ).
  • EC 50 concentration exerting the 50% of the G 2 /M accumulation (EC 50 ).
  • EC 50 are 16.60+2.00 ng/ml and 1.90+0.20 nM for paclitaxel and vindesine, respectively (means of four experiments).
  • Analyses further show that EC50 of paclitaxel and vindesine for decrease of Gi population are not significantly changed respect to EC 50 of G 2 M. arrest.
  • the S-phase population, representative of replicating DNA, is not appreciably changed.
  • FIG. 3A and 3C show that MRE 3008F20 (10 ⁇ M) improved vindesine and paclitaxel ability to alter cell proliferation: MRE 3008F20 reduced paclitaxel and vindesine EC 50 of 1.9 and 4.0 fold, respectively. Similar results were obtained analysing EC 50 values calculated for the G 1 population.
  • MRE 3008F20 (10 ⁇ M) reduced EC MAX of 2.0 and 2.1 fold, for paclitaxel and vindesine, respectively (Figure 3B and 3D).
  • Representative flow cytometry profiles of DNA content in A375 cells (Apo (sub diploid cells), G 1 , S and G 2 /M phases) are shown in Figure 4.
  • Figure 4C shows that, under both treatments (A 3 antagonist MRE3008F20 plus vinca alkaloid vindesine), vindesine response increased as cells progressed from G 1 to G 2 /M phases respect to vindesine-treated cells alone (Figure 4B). Similar results were obtained with the taxane compound paclitaxel (Figure 4E-F).
  • A375 cells were treated with vindesine (1 nM) with increasing concentrations of adenosine receptor antagonists (MRE3055F20, MRE3062F20, MRE3046F20, MRE3008F20, IL-IO, CGS 15943, ZM 241385).
  • MRE3055F20 highest
  • MRE3062F20 MRE 3046F20
  • MRE3008F20 MRE3008F20
  • IL-10 adenosine receptor antagonists
  • Table 14 Adenosine receptor antagonist parameters of enhancing activity to vindesine and binding affinity to A 3 adenosine receptor in A375 cells.
  • SEC 50 adenosine receptor antagonist dose that induces 50% of the enhancing activity to vindesine (1 nM), calculated on G 2 /M accumulation dose response curve. Ki equilibrium constant of binding affinity at human A 3 adenosine receptor. Data represents the mean of four independent experiments.
  • HeLa23 cell line has the lowest sensitivity to paclitaxel and vindesine alone. Interestingly, HeLa23 cells also show the greatest amount of enhancement by MRE3008F20 co-treatment.
  • MRE3008F20 is 10 ⁇ M.
  • EC 50 values were obtained by analysing G 2 /M accumulation dose response curve.
  • EC MAX values were obtained by analysing SUb-G 1 accumulation dose response curve.
  • Paclitaxel values have units of ng/ml.
  • Vindesine values have units of nM. nd: not done.
  • the greater relative enhancement in the HeL023 cell line may be related to a factor absent in other cell lines or related to the intracellular concentration of actives that is modulated by P-glycoprotein drug expulsion activity.
  • Rhodamine 123 (Rhl23) retention a P-gp functional assay, was studied in all cell lines. This assay was performed by incubating cells with RhI 23 and determining Rhl23 accumulation by measuring its fluorescence. The maximum load of Rhl23 (F MA X) was quantified at the end of treatment harvesting the cells and storing them at 4°C to prevent any active Rhl23 efflux. The P-gp drug efflux was allowed incubating Rhl23- loaded cells in fresh new medium Rhl23-free for 3 hours at 37°C. After this incubation, residual fluorescence (F R E S ) was measured and compared to FM AX -
  • Figure 6A shows the flow chromatogram for RhI 23 accumulation by A375 cells when the adenosine A 3 antagonist is not present.
  • Two cell populations are found, characterised by an F RES having a mean fluorescence intensity lower than F MAX .
  • Figure 6B shows the A375 cellular accumulation of Rhl23 in the presence of MRE3008F20 (10 ⁇ M).
  • the response yielded a F RES chromatogram comparable to FMAX, consistent with a completely blockade of P-gp mediated Rh 123 transport.
  • the Jurkat and NCTC2544 cells studied did not appear to have a significant change of Rhl23 fluorescence after 3 hours of incubation at 37°C (F RES was similar to F MAX ) consistent with the absence or not detectable P-pg drug pumping activity in these cells.
  • the high affinity adenosine A 3 antagonists IL-IO, MRE3008F20, MRE3055F20, MRE3062F20 and MRE3046F20 are strong inhibitors of P-gp activity.
  • the low affinity antagonists, ZM241385 and CGS15943 had much lower effect on P-gp activity. This may be due to the higher A 3 affinity or due to the existence of a structure-activity relationship for the inhibition of P-gp drug expulsion activity mediated by adenosine receptor antagonists.
  • Table 16 data represents the mean of four independent experiments.
  • MAPK mitogen-activated protein kinase
  • PD98059 a selective inhibitor of MEK1/2 (dudley dt, PNAS 92:7686, 1995), was used to inhibit the MEK pathways.
  • UO 126 an agent approximately 100-fold more potent than PD98059, was used as inhibitor of ERK activation.
  • SB203580 selectively inhibits p38 MAPK activity (Young PR JBC 272:12116 1997).
  • A375 cells were pretreated with PD98059 (20 ⁇ M), U0126 (30 ⁇ M), SB203580 (1 ⁇ M] or with DMSO (as control) and 20 then challenged with vindesine (1 nM) or with paclitaxel (15 ng/ml). At 24 hours post treatment, cells were harvested and apoptosis and cell cycle were analysed.
  • U0126 prevented MRE3008F20-induced accumulation in G 2 /M by 23 ⁇ 5% and by 48 ⁇ 5% in presence of paclitaxel (bar "TU” of Figure 7A) and vindesine (bar “VU” 30 of Figure 7A), respectively. This infers that the molecular mediator of enhancement activity was ERK.
  • the A 3 adenosine receptor antagonists reduce EC5 0 doses of chemotherapeutic drugs (quantified by analysing G 2 /M accumulation rate) to 12.3, 1.9, 1.2-fold for paclitaxel and 36.3, 4.0, 2.5-fold for vindesine when challenged on HeL023, A375 and Jurkat cell lines, respectively.
  • This enhancement activity was confirmed also when the apoptotic degree was evaluated: EC MAX dose of chemotherapeutic drugs are reduced to 10.5, 2.0, 1.5-fold for paclitaxel on HeL023, A375 and Jurkat cells, respectively, and 31.5, 2.0-fold for vindesine on HeL023 and A375 cells, respectively.
  • variable degree of EC50 (and ECMA X ) value observed in different cell types suggest a cell type specific participation in drug-induced enhancement.
  • the prerequisite of the drug activity is its delivery to the target site.
  • efficiency of drug is limited by appearing resistance, i.e., lack of cell sensitivity to the administered drug.
  • the tumor cells with multidrug resistance (MDR) phenotype are characterised by lowered intracellular accumulation of the compounds they are resistant to.
  • P-gp membrane associated P-glycoprotein
  • MRP and not P-gp transporter is expressed in Jurkat leukemia cells (T lymphocytic cell line). This is consistent with the results as HeL023 and A375 cells produced a P-gp efflux-activity whereas in Jurkat cells had low rhodamine 123 efflux. It is shown that adenosine A 3 antagonists are useful for enhancement in both P-gp expressing and MRP expressing cell lines.
  • CGS 15943 and ZM241385 correlates with the lower adenosine A 3 affinity of these compounds.
  • the high affinity A 3 antagonist compounds tested have greater potency in both enhancement and inhibiting P- gp and MRP drug resistance. This may be due to the higher affinity or to the molecular structure of such compounds.
  • the tested high affinity compounds have a phenyl-carbarnoyl-amino derivative in the N5 position of a 2-furylpyrazolo-triazolo- pyrimidine structure.
  • CGS 15943 and ZM241385 in addition to having much lower A 3 affinity also have very different molecular structures.
  • the silicone fluid and active compound are mixed together and the colloidal silicone dioxide is added to increase viscosity.
  • the material is then dosed into a subsequent heat sealed polymeric laminate comprised of the following: polyester release liner, skin contact adhesive composed of silicone or acrylic polymers, a control membrane which is a polyolefin, and an impermeable backing membrane made of a polyester multilaminate.
  • the resulting laminated sheet is than cut into 10 sq. cm patches.
  • the active compound and the starch are granulated with water and dried. Magnesium stearate is added to the dried granules and the mixture is thoroughly blended. The blended mixture is compressed into tablets.
  • the active compound and buffering agents are dissolved in the propylene glycol at about 50°)C.
  • the water for injection is then added with stirring and the resulting solution is filtered, filled into ampules, sealed and sterilized by autoclaving.
  • Active compound 1Og Buffering Agents q.s. Water for injection q.s. 100OmL
  • U2OS osteosarcoma U87MG glioblastoma human cells were obtained from American Tissue Culture Collection (ATCC). Tissue culture media and growth supplements were obtained from BioWhittaker. GasPak PouchTM System was obtained from Becton Dickinson. Unless otherwise noted, all other chemicals were purchased from Sigma.
  • Anti- HIF- 1 ⁇ and anti-HIF 1 ⁇ antibodies mAb were obtained from Transduction Laboratories (BD, Milano, Italy).
  • U0126 inhibitor of MEK-I and MEK-2
  • SB202190 inhibitor of p38 MAP kinase
  • Anti-ACTIVE ® MAPK and anti-ERK 1/2 pAb
  • Phospho-p38 and p38 MAP Kinase antibodies were from Cell Signaling Technology.
  • Anti- Adenosine A 3 receptor (polyAb) was from Aviva Antibody Corporation.
  • Cell culture and hypoxia treatment Cells were maintained in DMEM
  • [ 3 Hl -Thymidine incorporation cell proliferation test: Cells were seeded in fresh medium with 1 uCi/ml of [ 3 H]-Thymidine in DMEM containing 10% fetal calf serum, penicillin (100 U/ml), streptomycin (100 ug/ml), L-glutamine (2 mM). After 24 hours of labelling, cells were trypsinised, dispensed in 4 wells of a 96 well plate, and filtered through Whatman GF/C glass-fiber filters using a Micro-Mate 196 cell harvester (Packard Instrument Company). The filter bound radioactivity was counted on Top Count Microplate Scintillation Counter (efficiency 57%) with Micro-Scint 20.
  • A375 adherent cells were trypsinized, mixed with floating cells, washed with PBS and permeabilized in 70% (vol/vol) ethanol/PBS solution at 4 0 C for at least 24 hours. The cells were washed with PBS and the DNA was stained with a PBS solution, containing 20 ug/ml of propidium iodide and 100 ug/ml of RNAse, at room temperature for 30 minutes. Cells were analysed with an EPICS XL flow cytometer
  • the apoptotic population is the percentage of cells with DNA content lower than 2n.
  • Small interfering RNA (siRNA) design To generate a small interfering RNA that targets A 3 receptor mRNA (S ⁇ RNAA3), eight oligonucleotides consisting of ribonucleosides, except for the presence of 2'-deoxyribonucleosides at the 3' end, were synthesized and annealed, according to the recommendations of Elbashir (ref), to the manufacturer's instructions (SilencerTM siRNA Construction Kit, Ambion) and as previously described (Mirandola, 2004).
  • SiRNA Small interfering RNA
  • oligo-1 sense sequence: 5'-GCU UAC CGU CAG AUA CAA GUU-3' (SEQ ID NO:1) and antisense 5'-CUU GUA UCU GAC GGU AAG CUU-3' (SEQ ID NO:2).
  • sense sequence 5'-GAC GGC UAA GUC CUU GUU UUU-3' (SEQ ID NO:3) and antisense 5'-AAA CAA GGA CUU AGC CGU CUU-3' (SEQ ID NO:4).
  • oligo-3 sense sequence: 5'-ACA CUU GAG GGC CUG UAU GUU-3' (SEQ ID NO:5) and antisense 5'-CAU ACA GGC CCU CAA GUG UUU-3' (SEQ ID NO:6).
  • sense sequence 5'-CCU GCU CUC GGA GGA UGC CUU- 3' SEQ ID NO:7
  • antisense 5'-GGC AUC CUC CGA GAG CAG GUU-3' SEQ ID NO:8.
  • Target sequences were aligned to the human genome database in a BLAST search to ensure sequences without significant homology to other genes.
  • the target sequences for oligo-1, oligo-2, oligo-3 and oligo-4 are localized at position 337, 679, 1009 and 1356 bases downstream of the start codon of A 3 receptor mRNA sequence (L20463), respectively.
  • A375 cells were plated in six- well plates and grown to 50-70% confluence before transfection. Transfection of siRNA was performed at a concentration of 100 nM using RNAiFectTM Transfection Kit (Qiagen). Cells were cultured in complete media and at 24, 48 and 72 hours total RNA was isolated for Real- Time RT-PCR analysis of A 3 receptor mRNA and for Western blot analysis of A 3 receptor protein. At 48 hours from the transfection, A375 cells were serum starved for another 24 hours and then exposed to increasing concentrations of the A 3 adenosine receptor agonist Cl-IB-MECA for 4 hours in hypoxia. Total protein were then harvested for Western blot analysis.
  • RNAiFectTM Transfection reagent without SiRNAA 3 .
  • siRNA-FITC labelled Qiagen. After 24 hours of transfection, cells were tripsinized and resuspended in PBS for flow cytometry analysis. Fluorescence obtained from FITC-siRNA transfected cells was compared to autofluorescence generated by untransfected control.
  • primer and probe sequences were used for real-time RT-PCR: A 3 forward primer, 5'-ATG CCT TTG GCC ATT GTT G-3' (SEQ ID NO:9); A 3 reverse primer, 5'-ACA ATC CAC TTC TAC AGC TGC CT-3' (SEQ ID NO: 10); A 3 MGB probe, 5'-FAM-TCA GCC TGG GCA TC-TAMRA-3' (SEQ ID NO:11); for the real-time RT-PCR of the HIF-l ⁇ gene the assays-on-demandTM Gene expression Product Accession No. NM 019058 was used (Applied Biosystems, Monza, Italy).
  • the fluorescent reporter FAM and the quencher TAMRA are 6-carboxy fluorescein and 6-carboxy-N,N,N',N'-tetramethylrhodamme, respectively.
  • the endogenous control human ⁇ -actin kit was used, and the probe was fluorescent-labeled with VICTM (Applied Biosystems, Monza, Italy).
  • Metabolic inhibitors Cells were treated for 30 minutes with metabolic inhibitors or with drug vehicle (DMSO) prior to being challenged with adenosine or adenosine analogues.
  • U0126 was used at 10 and 30 uM as inhibitor of MEK-I and MEK-2 to prevent p44 and p42 MAPK activation.
  • SB202190 was used at 1 and 10 uM as inhibitor of p38 MAPK.
  • Adenosine induces HIF- l ⁇ protein accumulation in hypoxia.
  • adenosine receptors The family of adenosine receptors consists of four subtypes of G protein- coupled receptors, designed A 1 , A 2A , A 2B and A 3 . We have previously demonstrated that all four adenosine receptors are expressed in human melanoma A375 cells. To evaluate the functional role of adenosine receptor subtypes on HIF- 1 ⁇ protein expression under hypoxic conditions, we tested the effect of adenosine in combination with DPCPX (an Ai receptor antagonist), SCH 58261 (a selective A 2A receptor antagonist), MRE 2029F20 (a selective A 2B receptor antagonist), and MRE 3008F20 (a selective A 3 receptor antagonist) (Baraldi 2004; Merighi 2001; Varani 2000).
  • DPCPX an Ai receptor antagonist
  • SCH 58261 a selective A 2A receptor antagonist
  • MRE 2029F20 a selective A 2B receptor antagonist
  • MRE 3008F20 a selective A 3 receptor antagonist
  • a 3 receptor antagonist MRE 3008F20 abrogated the adenosine-induced increase of HIF-l ⁇ protein expression (Fig. lOC-D). Furthermore, HIF-I ⁇ expression was unaffected by adenosine or by synthetic adenosine receptor antagonists. These results indicate that adenosine may increase HIF-l ⁇ protein expression via A 3 receptors. A 3 adenosine receptor induces HIF-l ⁇ protein accumulation in hypoxia.
  • a 3 receptor stimulation did not affect the expression of HIF-I ⁇ protein, either in normoxia or in hypoxia.
  • HIF- l ⁇ protein increase induced by 10 nM Cl-IB-MECA
  • MRE 3008F20 0.3-30 nM
  • IC 50 0.90 ⁇ 0.08 nM
  • A375 cells were mock transfected or transfected with small interfering RNAs that target A 3 receptor mRNA (siRNA A3 ) for degradation.
  • A375 cells were also transfected with a siRNA control labeled with fluorescein. By flow cytometry we devisved a transfection efficiency of 85 ⁇ 5% (Fig. 7A). After transfection, the cells were cultured in complete media and at 24, 48 and 72 hours total RNA was isolated for Real-Time RT-PCR analysis ofA 3 receptor mRNA and for Western blot analysis of A 3 receptor protein. As expected, A 3 receptor mRNA levels were significantly reduced in cells transfected with SIRNA A3 (Fig. 14B). Furthermore, A 3 receptor protein expression was strongly reduced in siRNA ⁇ -treated cells (Fig. 14C-D). Neither mock transfection nor transfection with an siRNA targeted to an irrelevant mRNA inhibited A 3 receptor mRNA or protein expression.
  • A375 cells were exposed to increasing concentrations of the A 3 adenosine receptor agonist Cl-IB-MECA (1-100 nM) for 4 hours in hypoxia. Total protein were then harvested for Western blot analysis. As control, A375 cells were exposed to RNAiFectTM Transfection reagent without SIRNA A3 . We found that the inhibition of A 3 receptor expression is sufficient to block Cl-IB-MECA-induced HIF-l ⁇ accumulation (Fig. 14E).
  • A375 cells were pretreated with 10 ⁇ g/ml actinomycin D (Act-D) to inhibit de novo gene transcription. Then, A375 cells were cultured for 4 hours in hypoxia in the presence of increasing concentrations of Cl-IB-MECA (100 nM). We found that A 3 receptor stimulation was able to increase HIF-l ⁇ protein expression also in the presence of Act-D (Fig. 16). HIF- l ⁇ has been shown to be degraded through the proteasome pathway during normoxia. The enzymatic hydroxylation of proline 564 of HIF-I ⁇ controls the turnover of the protein by tagging it for interaction with the von Hippel Lindau protein (Ivan 2001; Jaakkola, 2001; Yu 2001; Maxwell 1999).
  • A375 cells were cultured in normoxia for 4 hours in the presence of 100 ⁇ M CoCl 2 , preventing oxygen-dependent HIF-I ⁇ protein degradation, and then A375 cells were treated with 100 nM Cl-IB-MECA in the presence or absence of CHX (1 ⁇ M). In cells exposed to CHX 5 Cl-IB-MECA failed to increase HIF-I ⁇ levels within 6 hours, as observed in the absence of CHX (Fig. 17B). Together, these results suggest that A 3 receptor activation increases HIF- l ⁇ protein levels through a translation-dependent pathway. After return of hypoxic A375 cultures to normoxia the levels of HIF-l ⁇ protein decreased very rapidly and were abrogated after 15 minutes (Fig. 18A).
  • phosphorylation of p44 and p42 was induced in response to nanomolar concentrations of Cl-IB-MECA and the induction of p44/p42 kinases phosphorylation status was maximum by the treatment of A 3 receptor agonist 100 nM (Fig. 19C). Furthermore, we have monitored the activation levels of p38 MAPK upon A 3 receptor stimulation by the detection of its phosphorylated form on Western blot. As can be seen in Fig. 19D, a strong increase in the phosphorylation of p38 MAPK was observed after 4 hours of A 3 receptor stimulation in hypoxia.
  • Hypoxia represents one of the first events in the growth of the cancer; this process creates conditions that, on one hand, are conducive to the accumulation of extracellular adenosine and, on the other hand, stabilize hypoxia-inducible factors, such as HIF-l ⁇ (Winn, 1981; Decking 1997; Ledoux 2003).
  • results of the present study indicate a new way by which hypoxia may contribute to cancer development, based on the natural pathways of adenosine receptor- mediated signaling.
  • adenosine is able to increase HIF- l ⁇ protein expression in response to hypoxia in a dose- and time-dependent manner in A375 human melanoma cells, whereas HIF-I ⁇ protein levels are not affected.
  • a 3 receptor inhibition at the mRNA and protein level is sufficient to block A 3 receptor-induced HIF- loc protein accumulation. Therefore, our results indicate that the cell surface A 3 adenosine receptor transduces extracellular hypoxic signals into the cell interior.
  • a 3 receptors are present in melanoma cells and their expression appears to be a bridge between the hypoxic insult and HIF- l ⁇ accumulation, regulating the cellular response to hypoxia, like an oxygen-sensing receptor. The extent to which A 3 receptor influences the ability of tumor cells to respond to hypoxia will require further investigation.
  • a 3 adenosine receptor stimulation had no effect on HIF- l ⁇ mRNA accumulation, as observed by Real-Time RT-PCR experiments. Accordingly, Act-D experiments indicate that A 3 receptor does not regulate HIF- l ⁇ protein expression through a transcription-dependent mechanism.
  • the lack of adenosine effect on HIF-I ⁇ at transcriptional level is not surprising in view of the fact that hypoxic regulation of HIF-I ⁇ is primarily determined by stabilization of HIF-l ⁇ protein (Huang, 1998).
  • a 3 adenosine receptors does not increase the half-life of HIF-l ⁇ protein while may increase the rate of HIF-l ⁇ protein synthesis, in a manner similar to the effect of various growth factors (Zhong 2000; Fukuda, 2002). Nevertheless, we cannot exclude the possibility that A 3 adenosine receptor regulates the translation of a protein, which inhibits HIF- l ⁇ degradation. Phosphorylation and dephosphorylation activities have been suggested to be critical in the signaling pathway leading to HIF-I activation.
  • hypoxia induces the phosphorylation of HIF-I ⁇ by p44/p42 and p38 MAPKs, which increases both HIF- l ⁇ nuclear localization and transcriptional activity
  • adenosine has been shown to directly enhance MAPK activity in A375 human melanoma cells (Merighi et al., 2002) but also in non human cell lines stably transfected with the human A 3 receptor (Hammarberg 2004; Schulte 2000-2002-2003).
  • HIF- l ⁇ is overexpressed in tumors as a result of hypoxia and is involved in key aspects of tumor biology, such as angiogenesis, invasion and altered energy metabolism (Ratcliffe 2000). It is recognized that the inhibition of HIF-I activity represents a novel therapeutic approach to cancer therapy, especially in combination with angiogenesis inhibitors, which would further increase intratumoral hypoxia and thus provide an even greater therapeutic window for use of an HIF-inhibitor. Recent studies indicate that pharmacologic inhibition of HIF-l ⁇ and particularly of HIF -regulated genes that are important for cancer cell survival may be more advantageous than HIF-gene inactivation therapeutic approaches (Mabjeesh et al., 2003). Many normal tissues function at p ⁇ 2 values sufficient to activate HIF, and the system has important functions under normal physiological conditions (Hopfl, 2004). This will need to be considered in the development of pharmacological inhibitors for clinical use.
  • a 3 adenosine receptor antagonists may be useful in cancer therapy.
  • a 3 receptor antagonists can block the survival of hypoxic solid tumors.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Measuring Or Testing Involving Enzymes Or Micro-Organisms (AREA)
  • Nitrogen Condensed Heterocyclic Rings (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to the use of adenosine receptor antagonists, preferably A3 receptor antagonists, either alone or in combination with other agents for the treatment, prevention and/or management of diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-lα and/or increased HIF-1 α activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disease). The methods and compositions of the invention are particularly useful for preventing, treating, or ameliorating symptoms associated with a cancer, disease or disorder associated with hypoxia-inducible factor 1-α (HIF-lα) using the A3 receptor antagonists of the invention. The present invention provides methods to inhibit the growth of tumors, particularly solid tumors and more particularly hypoxic tumors.

Description

ENHANCING TREATMENT OF CANCER AND HIF-I MEDIATED DISORDERS WITH ADENOSINE A3 RECEPTOR ANTAGONISTS
1. CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
This application claims the benefit of United States Provisional Application No. 60/630,557, filed November 22, 2004, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
2. FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to the use of adenosine receptor antagonists, preferably A3 receptor antagonists, either alone or in combination with other agents for the treatment, prevention and/or management of diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-I α and/or increased HIF-I a activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disease). The methods and compositions of the invention are particularly useful for preventing, treating, or ameliorating symptoms associated with a cancer, disease or disorder associated with hypoxia-inducible factor 1-α (HIF- lα) using the A3 receptor antagonists of the invention. The present invention provides methods to inhibit the growth of tumors, particularly solid tumors, and more particularly hypoxic tumors.
3. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 3.1 ADENOSINE
Adenosine, recently called a "primordial signalling molecule" (Linden, 2001, Annu. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol, Unital 41: 775-87), has the potential of influencing development, is present in and modulates physiological responses in all mammalian tissues. The actions of adenosine are most prominent in tissues where oxygen demand is high and there is reduction in oxygen tension, i.e., within solid tumors, where cell proliferation is greater than the rate of blood vessel formation (Sitkovsky, 2004 Annu. Rev. Immunol. 22, 657-82; Fredholm, 2001, Pharmacol. Rev. 53, 527-552). As a result, the tumor has local areas of hypoxia and adenosine accumulates to high levels (Hockel, 2001, J. Natl. Cancer Inst. 93, 266-76). In particular, it is recognized that significant levels of adenosine are present in the extracellular fluid of solid tumors (Blay, 1997, Cancer Res., 57, 2602-5), suggesting a role for this nucleoside in tumor growth.
Adenosine has been linked to tumor development. Increased adenosine concentration has been reported inside tumoral masses. It has been speculated that it represents the anti-tumor agent that prevents tumor growth in muscle tissue in vivo and that impairs malignant cell growth and survival in vitro. However, it is known that adenosine acts as cyto-protective agent during ischemic damage in brain and heart. Adenosine is known to be released in hypoxia. Numerous studies have shown adenosine to protect cells in the heart from ischemic damage. Adenosine has been shown to have protective roles in numerous animal models and in man (Am. J. Cardiol. 79(12A):44-48 (1997). For example, in the heart, both the A1 and A3 receptors offer protection against ischemia (Am. J. Physiol., 273(42)H501- 505 (1997)). However, it is the A3 receptor that offers sustained protection against ischemia (PNAS 95:6995-6999 (1998)). The ability of adenosine to protect tumor cells against hypoxia has not been recognized by others prior to the instant invention.
Adenosine interacts with cell surface receptors that are glycoproteins coupled to different members of G protein family. By now four adenosine receptors have been cloned and characterised: A1, A2A, A2B and A3. Selective antagonists for the A3 receptor have been proposed for use as anti-inflammatory and antiischemic agents in the brain. Recently, A3 antagonists have been under development as antiasthmatic, antidepressant, anti-arrhythmic, renal protective, antiparkinson and cognitive enhancing drugs. For example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,646,156 to Marlene Jacobson et al. describes the inhibition of eosinophil activation by using selected A3 antagonists.
Recent studies in myocytes have shown the adenosine A3 receptors to be responsible for long-term protection against ischemia (Liang and Jacobson, PNAS, 1998, 95:6995-6999). While the present inventors have hypothesized that adenosine plays a protective role in other cell types, including tumor cells, in addition to myocytes, no efforts have been made to limit the protective effect of adenosine on tumor cells.
3.2 HIF-I BIOLOGY
Hypoxia-inducible factor (HIF)-I is a transcription factor that functions as a master regulator of oxygen homeostasis (Semenza, 2001, Trends MoI. Med. 7, 345-350.
HIF-I is aheterodimer composed of an inducibly-expressed HIF- lα subunit and a constitutively-expressed HIF-I β subunit (Epstein, 2001,Ce//, 107, 43-54). HIF-I α and HIF-I β mRNAs are constantly expressed under normoxic and hypoxic conditions (Wiener, 1996 Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 225, 485-488). The unique feature of HIF-I is the regulation of HIF-I α expression: it increases as the cellular O2 concentration is decreased (Cramer, 2003, Cell, 112, 645-657, Pugh, 2003, Nat. Med. 9, 677-84). During normoxia, HIF-I α is rapidly degraded by the ubiquitin proteasome system, whereas exposure to hypoxic conditions prevents its degradation (Minchenko, 2002 J Biol. Chem., 277, 6183-6187; Semenza, 2000, J. Appl Physiol, 88, 1474-1480).
A growing body of evidence indicates that HIF-I contributes to tumor progression and metastasis (Hopfl, 2004, Am. J. Physiol. Regul. Integr. Comp. Physiol. 286, R608-23; Welsh, 2003, Curr. Cancer Drug Targets. 3, 391-405). Immunohistochemical analyses have shown that HIF- lα is present in higher levels in human tumors than in normal tissues (Zhong, 2000, Cancer Res. 60, 1541-5). Tumor progression is associated with adaptation to hypoxia, and there is an inverse correlation between tumor oxygenation and clinical outcome (Pugh, 2003, Ann. Med. 35, 380-90.; Semenza, 2000 J. Appl Physiol, 88, 1474-1480). hi particular, the levels of HIF-I activity in cells are correlated with tumorigenicity and angiogenesis in nude mice (Chen, 2003, Am. J. Pathol. 162,1283-91). Tumor cells lacking HIF-I expression are markedly impaired in their growth and vascularization (Carmeliet, 1998, Nature 394, 485-90; Jiang, 1997, Cancer Res., 57, 5328- 5335 ; Maxwell, 1997, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 94, 8104-8109; Ryan, 1998 EMBOJ. 17, 3005-3015). Therefore, since HIF-lα expression and activity appear central to tumor growth and progression, HIF-I inhibition has become an appropriate anticancer target (Kung, 2000, Nat. Med. 6, 1335-40).
3.3 DISEASES OF RELEVANCE 3.3.1 CANCER A neoplasm, or tumor, is a neoplastic mass resulting from abnormal uncontrolled cell growth which can be benign or malignant. Benign tumors generally remain localized. Malignant tumors are collectively termed cancers. The term "malignant" generally means that the tumor can invade and destroy neighboring body structures and spread to distant sites to cause death (for review, see Robbins and Angell, 1976, Basic Pathology, 2d Ed., W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, pp. 68-122). Cancer can arise in many sites of the body and behave differently depending upon its origin. Cancerous cells destroy the part of the body in which they originate and then spread to other part(s) of the body where they start new growth and cause more destruction.
More than 1.2 million Americans develop cancer each year. Cancer is the second leading case of death in the United States and if current trends continue, cancer is expected to be the leading cause of death by the year 2010. Lung and prostate cancer are the top cancer killers for men in the United States. Lung and breast cancer are the top cancer killers' for women in the United States. One in two men in the United States will be diagnosed with cancer at some time during his lifetime. One in three women in the United States will be diagnosed with cancer at some time during her lifetime.
A cure for cancer has yet to be found. Current treatment options, such as surgery, chemotherapy and radiation treatment, are oftentimes either ineffective or present serious side effects.
Currently, cancer therapy may involve surgery, chemotherapy, hormonal therapy and/or radiation treatment to eradicate neoplastic cells in a patient {See, for example, Stockdale, 1998, "Principles of Cancer Patient Management", in Scientific American: Medicine, vol. 3, Rubenstein and Federman, eds., Chapter 12, Section IV). Recently, cancer therapy could also involve biological therapy or immunotherapy. All of these approaches pose significant drawbacks for the patient. Surgery, for example, may be contraindicated due to the health of the patient or may be unacceptable to the patient. Additionally, surgery may not completely remove the neoplastic tissue. Radiation therapy is only effective when the neoplastic tissue exhibits a higher sensitivity to radiation than normal tissue, and radiation therapy can also often elicit serious side effects. Hormonal therapy is rarely given as a single agent and although can be effective, is often used to prevent or delay recurrence of cancer after other treatments have removed the majority of the cancer cells. Biological therapies/immunotherapies are limited in number and may produce side effects such as rashes or swellings, flu-like symptoms, including fever, chills and fatigue, digestive tract problems or allergic reactions.
With respect to chemotherapy, there are a variety of chemotherapeutic agents available for treatment of cancer. A significant majority of cancer chemotherapeutics act by inhibiting DNA synthesis, either directly, or indirectly by inhibiting the biosynthesis of the deoxyribonucleotide triphosphate precursors, to prevent DNA replication and concomitant cell division {See, for example, Gilmmx et al, Goodman and Gilman's: The
Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, Eighth Ed. (Pergamom Press, New York, 2001, 10th ed.)). These agents, which include alkylating agents, such as nitrosourea, anti-metabolites, such as methotrexate and hydroxyurea, and other agents, such as etoposides, campathecins, bleomycin, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, etc., although not necessarily cell cycle specific, kill cells during S phase because of their effect on DNA replication. Other agents, specifically colchicine and the vinca alkaloids, such as vinblastine and vincristine, interfere with microtubule assembly resulting in mitotic arrest. Chemotherapy protocols generally involve administration of a combination of chemotherapeutic agents to increase the efficacy of treatment. Despite the availability of a variety of chemotherapeutic agents, chemotherapy has many drawbacks (See, for example, Stockdale, 1998, "Principles Of Cancer Patient Management" in Scientific American Medicine, vol. 3, Rubenstein and Federman, eds., ch. 12, sect. 10). Almost all chemotherapeutic agents are toxic, and chemotherapy causes significant, and often dangerous, side effects, including severe nausea, bone marrow depression, immunosuppression, etc. Additionally, even with administration of combinations of chemotherapeutic agents, many tumor cells are resistant or develop resistance to the chemotherapeutic agents. In fact, those cells resistant to the particular chemotherapeutic agents used in the treatment protocol often prove to be resistant to other drugs, even those agents that act by mechanisms different from the mechanisms of action of the drugs used in the specific treatment; this phenomenon is termed pleiotropic drug or multidrug resistance. Thus, because of drug resistance, many cancers prove refractory to standard chemotherapeutic treatment protocols.
There is a significant need for alternative cancer treatments, particularly for treatment of cancer that has proved refractory to standard cancer treatments, such as surgery, radiation therapy, chemotherapy, and hormonal therapy. A promising alternative is immunotherapy, in which cancer cells are specifically targeted by cancer antigen-specific antibodies. Major efforts have been directed at harnessing the specificity of the immune response, for example, hybridoma technology has enabled the development of tumor selective monoclonal antibodies (See Green M.C. et al, 2000 Cancer Treat Rev., 26: 269- 286; Weiner LM, 1999 Semin Oncol. 26(suppl. 14):43-51), and in the past few years, the Food and Drug Administration has approved the first MAbs for cancer therapy: However, there is still an unmet need for the treatment of cancers.
In the current chemotherapeutic treatment of human cancer, side effects associated with the chemotherapeutic agent are often severe. The use of paclitaxel or docetaxel (both taxane family medicaments) for the treatment of neoplastic diseases is limited by acute hypersensitivity reactions experienced in many patients. For example, docetaxel administered at 100 mg/m2 causes acute hypersensitivity reaction in 13% of patients, and severe hypersensitivity reaction in 1.2%. Due to these reactions, patients are normally premedicated with oral corticosteroids.
Similarly, side effects associated with the use of vinca alkaloids often limit the useful dosages. For example, vincristine has been reported to be dose limited due to neurotoxicity. An enhancing agent providing a neuro-protective effect is therefore desirable. Chemotherapeutic agents are also costly to produce and provide to patients. If the agents can be used at reduced dosages, both the cost and the extent of undesirable side effects can be similarly reduced. Another often-encountered challenge with chemotherapeutic treatment is limitations in effectiveness due to the cancerous growth or cells developing multidrug-resistance (MDR). As most cancer cells are genetically unstable they are prone to mutations likely to produce drug resistant cells.
Multi-drug resistance is the name given to the circumstance when a disease does not respond to a treatment drug or drugs. MDR can be either intrinsic, which means the disease has never been responsive to the drug or drugs, or it can be acquired, which means the disease ceases responding to a drug or drugs that the disease had previously been responsive to MDR is characterized by cross-resistance of a disease to more than one functionally and/or structurally unrelated drugs. MDR in the field of cancer, is discussed in greater detail in "Detoxification Mechanisms and Tumor Cell Resistance to Anticancer Drugs," by Kuzmich and Tew, particularly section VII "The Multidrug-Resistant Phenotype (MDR)," Medical Research Reviews, Vol. 11, No. 2, 185-217, (Section VII is at pp. 208- 213) (1991); and in "Multidrug Resistance and Chemosensitization: Therapeutic
Implications for Cancer Chemotherapy," by Georges, Sharom and Ling, Advances in Pharmacology, Vol. 21, 185-220 (1990).
Different MDR mechanisms have been reported. One form of multi-drug resistance (MDR) is mediated by a membrane bound 170-180 kD energy-dependent efflux pump designated as pleitotropic-glycoprotein or P-glycoprotein (P-gp) that is codified by MDR-I gene (Endicott JA, Annu Rev Biochem 1989). P-glycoprotein has been shown to play a major role in the intrinsic and acquired resistance of a number of human tumors. Drugs that act as substrates for and are consequently detoxified by P-gp include the vinca alkaloids (vincristine and vinblastine), anthracyclines (Adriamycin), and epipodophyllotoxins (etoposide).
Recently, MDR-I gene has been identified as an additional risk factor in advanced ovarian cancer. In the study by D.S. Alberts et ah, patients with phase III ovarian cancer were screened for MDR-I . Ovarian cancer patients with high levels of MDR-I survived an average of 9.8 months. The patients having low or no MDR-I expression survived an average of 30 months or more.
While P-gp associated MDR is a major factor in tumor cell resistance to chemotherapeutic agents, it is clear that the phenomenon of MDR is multifactorial and involves a number of different mechanisms. One such alternative pathway for resistance to anthracyclines involves the emergence of a 190 kD protein (pi 90) that is not P-gp. See, T. McGrath, et al, Biochemical Pharmacolology, 38:3611 (1989). The protein pl90 is not found exclusively on the plasma membrane but rather appears to be localized predominantly in the endoplasmic reticulum. See, e.g., Marquardt, 1992 .Cancer Research, 52:3157.
The work of Cole and Deeley isolated a single open reading frame encoding a protein of 1531 amino acids designated as multidrug resistance-associated protein (MRP). As reported by Fan et al., the MRP protein is thought to be the same as the 190 kD protein. MRP has been observed in breast cancer, human leukemia, small cell lung cancer, human large cell lung cancer, fibrosarcoma, adenocarcinoma, thyroid cancer, and cervical cancer. Chen reports that MRP is associated with multi-drug resistance to camptothecin and its analogs.
Other MDR has been reported that is neither P-gp nor MRP related. (Kellen editor, Alternative Mechanisms of Multidrug Resistance in Cancer, Birkhauser, 1995). The results obtained by inventors are consistent for using adenosine A3 antagonists for countering P-gp or MRP multi-drug resistance, but not other forms of MDR. α-[3-[[2-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)ethyl]methylamino]propyl]-3,4-dimethoxy- α -(l-methylethyl)benzeneacetonitrile (Verapamil) has been utilized as a medicament to counter the effect of P-gp associated MDR. Verapamil blocks L-type calcium channels and is used as a potent vasodilator of coronary and peripheral vessels and decreases myocardial oxygen consumption. Due to the Verapamil physiological effects, MDR use of Verapamil must be limited to patients not having low blood pressure, congestive heart failure, sinoatrial (SA) or atrioventricular (AV) node conduction disturbances, digitalis toxicity, Wolff-Parkinson- White syndrome, and further not being medicated with beta-blockers or Quinidine.
Recognizing that P-gp is also adenosine-5'-triphosphate (ATP) dependent, another proposed method of countering MDR is to inhibit ATP synthesis in the cancerous cells. U.S. Patent No. 6,210,917 to Carson et al. discloses the use of L-alanosine and other adenosine kinase inhibitors for countering MDR. In addition U.S. Patent No. 6,391,884 identifies ATP-depleting agents including 2-deoxyglucose, cyanine, oligomycin, valinomycin and azide, as well as salts and derivatives thereof. Approaches relying upon ATP depletion or inhibition in countering MDR have yet to receive clinical success. As a result, it is seen that there is a need for chemotherapeutic agent enhancers and compounds that prevent or counter MDR either alone or with ATP depleting agents in cancer treatment but without the limitations imposed by Verapamil. The use of a combination of therapeutic agents is common in the treatment of neoplastic diseases. For example, paclitaxel (Taxol™) has been approved by the U.S. FDA for use with cisplatin in the treatment of ovarian carcinoma. U.S. Patent No. 5,908,835 to Bissery et al. claims synergy of using paclitaxel or docetaxel in combination with an anthracycline antibiotic such as daunorubicin or doxorubicin. Similarly, U.S. Patent No. 5,728,687 to Bissery et al. claims synergy of using paclitaxel or docetaxel in combination with an alkylating agent, epidophyllotoxin, antimetabolite, or vinca alkaloid. However, such combinations heretofore have not included the use of adenosine receptor antagonists and in particular A3 receptor antagonists. It is therefore an object of the present invention to provide compositions and methods of enhancing the treatment of neoplastic cells by minimizing or eliminating the protective effect of adenosine on cells with the use of adenosine A3 receptor antagonists. It is a further object of the present invention to provide compositions and methods suitable for countering P-gp and/or MRP associated multi-drug resistance. It is further an object of the present invention to provide compositions and methods that reduce side effects of other currently used anti-cancer agents and/or therapies, in particular taxane induced hypersensitivity.
4. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention is based, in part, on the surprising discovery by the inventors that adenosine, a purine nucleoside present within hypoxic regions of solid tumors, modulates hypoxia-inducible factor 1 (HIF-I) expression. HIF-I, a heterodimeric transcription factor composed of HIF-I a and HIF- lβ subunits, is involved in tumor growth and angiogenesis (for reviews see, e.g., Semenza 2000, Nature, 3: 721-32). The inventors have found that in the human A375 melanoma cell line adenosine up-regulates HIF- lα protein expression in response to hypoxia in a dose- and time-dependent manner. The response to adenosine was not blocked by A1, A2A or A2B receptor antagonists, while it was abolished by A3 receptor antagonists. The inventors have found that Cl-IB-MECA, an adenosine analogue binding with high affinity to A3 receptors, mimicked adenosine effect in hypoxic cells. Furthermore, A3 receptor antagonists prevented HIF- lα protein accumulation in response to A3 receptor stimulation. Although not intending to be bound by a particular mechanism of action, the response to adenosine is generated at the cell surface since the inhibition of A3 receptor expression, by using small interfering RNA, abolished the nucleoside effects. The main intracellular signaling pathways sustained by A3 receptor stimulation in hypoxia involve p44/p42 mitogen-activated protein kinase (MAPK) and p38 MAPK activation. The inventors have thus found for the first time that adenosine plays a critical role in HIF- lα regulation in hypoxia.
The inventors have found that compounds which are antagonists of the adenosine receptors, preferably the A3 receptor, inhibit the protective effect of adenosine on growing tumor cells when such cells are starved of oxygen (/. e. , before an adequate vasculature is developed, or when anti-angiogenesis agents are administered. Although not intending to be bound by a particular mechanism of action, the antagonists of the invention can bind in the same site as adenosine, or can be allosteric antagonists (i.e., bind at a site different from where adenosine binds, but adversely affect the ability of adenosine to bind to the site or adversely affect the ability of adenosine, once bound to the adenosine receptors, particularly A3 receptors, to protect growing tumor cells).
Accordingly, the present invention relates to methods for the treatment, prevention, and/or management of diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF- lα and/or increased HIF- lα activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) by using adenosine receptor antagonists, particularly A3 receptor antagonists alone or in combination with A1, A2A, A2B receptor antagonists. Although the A1, A2A and A2B receptor antagonists may act through different pathways than the A3 receptor antagonist, the combination of these antagonists with A3 receptor antagonist may be beneficial in the treatment, prevention, and/or management of diseases or disorders, e.g., cancer.
In most preferred embodiments, the methods of the invention relate to treatment, prevention, and/or management of diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-I α and/or increased HIF-I α activity by using adenosine receptor antagonists, particularly A3 receptor antagonists alone. Without being bound to a particular mechanism of action, administration of antagonists for the adenosine receptors, particularly A3 receptor antagonists, antagonizes the protective effects against hypoxia and renders those cells susceptible to destruction due to hypoxia. Since the adenosine receptors, in particular, the A3 receptor, are responsible for sustained cellular protection against ischemia, antagonists for the adenosine receptors, particularly A3 receptors are particularly effective in enhancing the activity of anti-tumor agents.
The methods and compositions of the invention comprising A3 receptor antagonists are particularly useful when the levels of HIF-I α expression and/or activity are elevated above the standard or background level, as determined using methods known to those skilled in the art and disclosed herein. As used herein, "elevation" of a measured level of HIF-I α relative to a standard level means that the amount or concentration of HIF- lα in a sample or subject is greater in a subject or sample relative to the standard as detected by any method now known in the art or to be developed in the future for measuring HIF-lα levels. For example, elevation of the measured level relative to a standard level may be any statistically significant detectable elevation. Such an elevation in HIF- 1 α expression and/or activity may include, but is not limited to about a 10%, about a 20%, about a 40%, about an 80%, about a 2-fold, about a 4-fold, about an 10-fold, about a 20- fold, about a 50-fold, about a 100-fold, about a 2 to 20 fold, 2 to 50 fold, 2 to 100 fold, 20 to 50 fold, 20 to 100 fold, elevation, relative to the standard. The term "about" as used herein, refers to levels of elevation of the standard numerical value plus or minus 10% of the numerical value.
The therapeutic methods of the invention comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of an A3 receptor antagonist of the invention improve the therapeutic efficacy of treatment for diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-lα and/or increased HIF-lα activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) relative to the traditional modes of such therapies. Preferably the methods of the invention reduce the HIF-I α level to the background level within one day, one week, 1 month, or 2 months, of the commencement of the therapeutic regime. In a most preferred embodiment, the methods of the invention result in a reduction of HIF-lα level to the background level. The invention encompasses reduction of the HIF- lα level to a level which is within about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50% of the background level; about a 2-fold, about a 4-fold, about an 10-fold, about a 20- fold, about a 50-fold, about a 100-fold, about a 2 to 20 fold, 2 to 50 fold, 2 to 100 fold, 20 to 50 fold, 20 to 100 fold of the background level. Preferably, once the methods of the invention reduce the level of HIF- 1 a to a particular level, that level is maintained during the treatment regimen, such that the maintained level of HIF-lα is sufficient and effective to result in regression of the disease, e.g., cancer.
In a preferred specific embodiment, the invention encompasses a method for treatment, prevention and/or management of diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-lα and/or increased HIF-lα activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) comprising administering a therapeutically and/or prophylactically effective amount of an A3 receptor antagonist compound as disclosed herein alone or in combinationo with other therapeutic or prophylatic agents. The invention also encompasses a method for determining the prognosis of a a disease or disorder associated with overexpression of HIF-I α and/or increased HIF-I α activity in a subject. Preferably, the subject is human. In yet another embodiment, the subject has been previously treated with a therapy regimen. The invention encompasses measuring a level of HIF-I α in a subject to determine if the subject is in need of the therapeutic and or prophylactic methods of the inventon. The invention encompasses measuring a level of HIF-I α in a sample obtained from the subject and comparing the level measured to a standard level, wherein elevation of the measured level of at least one HIF- 1 a relative to the standard level indicates that the subject is at an increased risk for progression of the disease or disorder, e.g., metastasis of the cancer. The HIF-lα level may be measured using at least one of the methods for measuring and detecting HIF-I α such as those known to those skilled in the art and exemplified herein.
The invention encompasses compounds which are A3 or A1 receptor antagonists for use in the methods of the invention. Examples of such compounds are disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos 6,326,390; 6,407,236; 6,448,253; 6,358,964; and U.S.
Publication Nos. 2003/0144266 and 2004/0067932; all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. Furthermore, additional examples of such compounds are disclosed in the list of references in Table 1, the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties. Table 1. A3 Receptor Antagonists
The A3 adenosine receptor agonist 2-Cl-IB-MECA facilitates epileptiform discharges in the CA3 area of immature rat hippocampal slices. Laudadio, Mark Anthony; Psarropoulou, Caterina. Department of Paediatrics, Ste- Justine Hospital Research Centre, Universite de Montreal, Montreal, QC, Can. Epilepsy Research (2004), 59(2-3), 83-94.
Structure-activity relationships of adenosine A3 receptor ligands: new potential therapy for the treatment of glaucoma. Okamura, Takashi; Kurogi, Yasuhisa; Hashimoto, Kinji; Sato, Seiji; Nishikawa, Hiroshi; Kiryu, Kimio; Nagao, Yoshimitsu. Pharmaceutical Technology Institute, Otsuka Pharmaceutical Factory, Inc., Naruto, Tokushima, Japan. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters (2004), 14(14), 3775-3779.
QSAR of adenosine receptor antagonists. Part 3: exploring physicochemical requirements for selective binding of l,2,4-triazolo[5,l-i]purine derivatives with human adenosine A3 receptor subtype. Roy, Kunal; Leonard, J. Thomas; Sengupta, Chandana. Drug Theoretics and Cheminformatics Laboratory, Division of Medicinal and Pharmaceutical Chemistry, Department of Pharmaceutical Technology, Jadavpur University, Kolkata, India. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters (2004), 14(14), 3705-3709.
WO 2004051264 Al l,2,4-Triazolo[4,3-a]quinoxalin-l-one Moiety as an Attractive Scaffold To Develop New Potent and Selective Human A3 Adenosine Receptor Antagonists: Synthesis, Pharmacological, and Ligand-Receptor Modeling Studies. Colotta, Vittoria; Catarzi, Daniela; Varano, Flavia; Calabri, Francesca Romana; Lenzi, Ombretta; Filacchioni, Guido; Martini, Claudia; Trincavelli, Letizia; Deflorian, Francesca; Moro, Stefano. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita degli Studi di Firenze, Sesto Fiorentino, Italy. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2004), 47(14), 3580-3590.
WO 2004046146 Al
Facile synthesis of fused l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine derivatives as human adenosine A3 receptor ligands. Okamura, Takashi; Kurogi, Yasuhisa; Hashimoto, Kinji; Nishikawa, Hiroshi; Nagao, Yoshimitsu. Pharmaceutical Technology Institute, Otsuka Pharmaceutical Factory, Inc., Naruto, Tokushima, Japan. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters (2004), 14(10), 2443-2446.
New highly potent and selective adenosine A3 receptor antagonists. Press, Neil J.; Keller, Thomas H.; Tranter, Pamela; Beer, David; Jones, Ken; Faessler, Alexander; Heng, Richard; Lewis, Christine; Howe, Trevor; Gedeck, Peter; Mazzoni, Lazzaro; Fozard, John R. Respiratory Disease Area, Novartis Horsham Research Center, West Sussex, UK. Current Topics in Medicinal Chemistry (Sharjah, United Arab Emirates) (2004), 4(8), 863-870.
Role of direct RhoA-phospholipase D interaction in mediating adenosine-induced protection from cardiac ischemia. Mozzicato, Susan; Joshi, Bhalchandra V.; Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Liang, Bruce T. Dep. of Cardiol., Univ. of Connecticut Health Cent., Farmington, CT, USA. FASEB Journal (2004), 18(2), 406-408.
Synthesis and structure-activity relationships of 4-cycloalkylamino-l,2,4-triazolo[4,3- a]quinoxalin-l-one derivatives as A1 and A3 adenosine receptor antagonists. Colotta, Vittoria; Catarzi, Daniela; Varano, Flavia; Filacchioni, Guido; Martini, Claudia; Trincavelli, Letizia; Lucacchini, Antonio. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita' di Firenze, Florence, Italy. Archiv der Pharmazie (Weinheim, Germany) (2004), 337(1), 35-41.
Structural determinants of efficacy at A3 adenosine receptors: modification of the ribose moiety. Gao, Zhan-Guo; Jeong, Lak Shin; Moon, Hyung Ryong; Kim, Hea Ok; Choi, Won Jun; Shin, Dae Hong; Elhalem, Eleonora; Comin, Maria J.; Melman, NeIi; Mamedova, Liaman; Gross, Ariel S.; Rodriguez, Juan B.; Jacobson, Kenneth A. National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases, Molecular Recognition Section, Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Biochemical Pharmacology (2004), 67(5).
US 6,686,366
Structure-activity relationships of thiazole and thiadiazole derivatives as potent and selective human adenosine A3 receptor antagonists. Jung, Kwan- Young; Kim, Soo- Kyung; Gao, Zhan-Guo; Gross, Ariel S.; Melman, NeIi; Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Kim, Yong-Chul. Department of Life Science, Laboratory of Drug Discovery, Kwangju Institute of Science and Technology, Gwangju, S. Korea. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry (2004), 12(3), 613-623. Extracellular ATP and adenosine induce cell apoptosis of human hepatoma Li-7A cells via the A3 adenosine receptor. Wen, Long T.; Knowles, Aileen F. Department of Biology, San Diego State University, San Diego, CA, USA. British Journal of Pharmacology (2003), 140(6), 1009-1018.
Alteration of A3 adenosine receptors in human neutrophils and low frequency electromagnetic fields. Varani, Katia; Gessi, Stefania; Merighi, Stefania; Iannotta, Valeria; Cattabriga, Elena; Pancaldi, Cecilia; Cadossi, Ruggero; Borea, Pier Andrea. Pharmacology Unit, Department of Clinical and Experimental Medicine, University of Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Biochemical Pharmacology (2003), 66(10), 1897-1906.
A3 adenosine receptors. Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Tchilibon, Susanna; Joshi, Bhalchandra V.; Gao, Zhan-Guo. Molecular Recognition Section, Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institute of Diabetes, Digestive and Kidney Diseases, Bethesda, MD, USA. Annual Reports in Medicinal Chemistry (2003), 38 121-130.
Brief, repeated, oxygen-glucose deprivation episodes protect neurotransmission from a longer ischemic episode in the in vitro hippocampus: Role of adenosine receptors. Pugliese, Anna Maria; Latini, Serena; Corradetti, Renato; Pedata, Felicita. Department of Preclinical and Clinical Pharmacology, University of Florence, Florence, Italy. British Journal of Pharmacology (2003), 140(2), 305-314.
Protection from myocardial stunning by ischaemia and hypoxia with the adenosine A3 receptor agonist, IB-MECA. Maddock, Helen L.; Gardner, Neil M.; Khandoudi, Nassirah; Bril, Antoine; Broadley, Kenneth J. Welsh School of Pharmacy, Department of Pharmacology, Cardiff University, Cardiff, Cathays Park, Wales, UK. European Journal of Pharmacology (2003), 477(3), 235-245.
Hypersensitivity of pulmonary C fibers induced by adenosine in anesthetized rats. Gu, Qihai; Ruan, Ting; Hong, Ju-Lun; Burki, Nausherwan; Lee, Lu- Yuan. Department of Physiology, University of Kentucky Medical Center, Lexington, KY, USA. Journal of Applied Physiology (2003), 95(3), 1315-1324.
New strategies for the synthesis of A3 adenosine receptor antagonists. Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Bovero, Andrea; Fruttarolo, Francesca; Romagnoli, Romeo; Tabrizi, Mojgan Aghazadeh; Preti, Delia; Varani, Katia; Borea, Pier Andrea; Moorman, Allan R. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry (2003), 11(19), 4161-4169.
Pyrazolo[4,3-e]-l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine Derivatives as Adenosine Receptor Antagonists. Influence of the N5 Substituent on the Affinity at the Human A3 and A2B Adenosine Receptor Subtypes: A Molecular Modeling Investigation. Pastorin, Giorgia; Da Ros, Tatiana; Spalluto, Giampiero; Deflorian, Francesca; Moro, Stefano; Cacciari, Barbara; Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Gessi, Stefania; Varani, Katia; Borea, Pier Andrea. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita degli Studi di Trieste, Trieste, Italy. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2003), 46(20), 4287-4296.
QSAR of adenosine receptor antagonists II: Exploring physicochemical requirements for selective binding of 2-arylpyrazolo[3,4-c]quinoline derivatives with adenosine A1 and A3 receptor subtypes. Roy, Kunal. Drug Theoretics and Cheminformatics Lab, Division of Medicinal and Pharmaceutical Chemistry, Department of Pharmaceutical Technology, Jadavpur University, Calcutta, India. QSAR & Combinatorial Science (2003), 22(6), 614-621. Functional expression of adenosine A2A and A3 receptors in the mouse dendritic cell line XS-106. Dickenson, John M.; Reeder, Steve; Rees, Bob; Alexander, Steve; Kendall, Dave. School of Science, Faculty of Science and Mathematics, Department of Life Sciences, Nottingham Trent University, Nottingham, UK. European Journal of Pharmacology (2003), 474(1), 43-51.
Synthesis and structure-activity relationships of a new set of l,2,4-triazolo[4,3- a]quinoxalin-l-one derivatives as adenosine receptor antagonists. Colotta, Vittoria; Catarzi, Daniela; Varano, Flavia; Filacchioni, Guido; Martini, Claudia; Trincavelli, Letizia; Lucacchini, Antonio. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita' di Firenze, Florence, Italy. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry (2003), 11(16), 3541-3550.
A3 adenosine and CBl receptors activate a PKC-sensitive Cl- current in human nonpigmented ciliary epithelial cells via a G-coupled MAPK signaling pathway. Shi, Chanjuan; Szczesniak, Anna; Mao, Lucy; Jollimore, Christine; Coca-Prados, Miguel; Hung, Orlando; Kelly, Melanie E. M. Laboratory for Retina and Optic Nerve Research, Dalhousie University, Halifax, NS, Can. British Journal of Pharmacology (2003), 139(3), 475-486.
WO 2003053969 Al WO 2003053968 Al
Characterization of adenosine receptor(s) involved in adenosine-induced bronchoconstriction in an allergic mouse model. Fan, Ming; Qin, Weixi; Mustafa, S. Jamal. Department of Pharmacology and Toxicology, Brody School of Medicine, East Carolina University, Greenville, NC, USA. American Journal of Physiology (2003), 284(6, Pt. 1), L1012-L1019.
QSAR of adenosine receptor antagonists, I: Exploration of receptor interaction sites of l,2-dihydro-2-phenyl-l,2,4-triazolo[4,3-a]quinoxalin-l-one derivatives using AMI calculations. Roy, Kunal. Drug Theoretics and Cheminformatics Lab, Division of Medicinal and Pharmaceutical Chemistry, Department of Pharmaceutical Technology, Jadavpur University, Kolkata, India. Indian Journal of Chemistry, Section B: Organic Chemistry Including Medicinal Chemistry (2003), 42B(6), 1485-1496.
Activation of murine lung mast cells by the adenosine A3 receptor. Zhong, Hongyan; Shlykov, Sergiy G.; Molina, Jose G.; Sanborn, Barbara M.; Jacobson, Marlene A.; Tilley, Stephen L.; Blackburn, Michael R. Department of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology, University of Texas-Houston Medical School, Houston, TX, USA. Journal of Immunology (2003), 171(1), 338-345.
Modeling the response of the asthmatic airways to adenosine: Mechanisms and receptors. Fozard, John R.; Tigani, Bruno; Wolber, Cedric; Williams, Iwan; Mazzoni, Lazzaro; Harmon, Jason P. Research Department, Novartis Pharma AG., Basel, Switz. Drug Development Research (2003), 59(1), 23-29.
9-Ethyladenine derivatives as adenosine receptor antagonists: 2- and 8-substitution results in distinct selectivities. Klotz, Karl-Norbert; Kachler, Sonja; Lambertucci, Catia; Vittori, Sauro; Volpini, Rosaria; Cristalli, Gloria. Institut fuer Pharmakologie und Toxikologie, Universitaet Wuerzburg, Wuerzburg, Germany. Naunyn-Schmiedeberg's Archives of Pharmacology (2003), 367(6), 629-634.
Recent developments in the field of A3 adenosine receptor antagonists. Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Tabrizi, Mojgan Aghazadeh; Fruttarolo, Francesca; Bovero, Andrea; Avitabile, Barbara; Preti, Delia; Romagnoli, Romeo; Merighi, Stefania; Gessi, Stefania; Varani, Katia; Borea, Pier Andrea. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Drug Development Research (2003), 58(4), 315-329.
Alteration of the purinergic modulation of enteric neurotransmission in the mouse ileum during chronic intestinal inflammation. De Man, Joris G.; Seerden, Tom C; De Winter, Benedicte Y.; Van Marck, Eric A.; Herman, Arnold G.; Pelckmans, Paul A. Division of Gastroenterology, Faculty of Medicine, University of Antwerp (UIA), Antwerp, BeIg. British Journal of Pharmacology (2003), 139(1), 172-184.
WO 2003048120 A2
Improved, efficient synthesis for multigram-scale production of PSB-IO, a potent antagonist at human A3 adenosine receptors. Burbiel, Joachim; Thorand, Mark; Muller, Christa E. Pharmazeutisches Institut, Rheinische Friedrich-Wilhelms-Universitat Bonn, Bonn, Germany. Heterocycles (2003), 60(6), 1425-1432.
US 6,586,413 US 6,211,165
Recent developments in the field OfA2A and A3 adenosine receptor antagonists. Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Tabrizi, Mojgan Aghazadeh; Bovero, Andrea; Avitabile, Barbara; Preti, Delia; Fruttarolo, Francesca; Romagnoli, Romeo; Varani, Katia; Borea, Pier Andrea. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. European Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2003), 38(4), 367-382.
US 6,673,802
*Allosteric modulation of A3 adenosine receptors. Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Kim, Soo- Kyung; Ijzerman, Adriaan P.; Gao, Zhan-Guo. Molecular Recognition Section, NIDDK, NIH, Bethesda, MD, USA. Abstracts of Papers, 225th ACS National Meeting, New Orleans, LA, United States, March 23-27, 2003 (2003), MEDI-316. Publisher: American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C.
Design, Synthesis, and Biological Evaluation of C9- and C2-Substituted Pyrazolo[4,3-e]- l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidines as New A2A and A3 Adenosine Receptor Antagonists. Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Fruttarolo, Francesca; Tabrizi, Mojgan Aghazadeh; Preti, Delia; Romagnoli, Romeo; El-Kashef, Hussein; Moorman, Allan; Varani, Katia; Gessi, Stefania; Merighi, Stefania; Borea, Pier Andrea. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche and Dipartimento di Medicina Clinica e Sperimentale-Sezione di Farmacologia, Universita di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2003), 46(7), 1229-1241.
Differential allosteric modulation by amiloride analogues of agonist and antagonist binding at Al and A3 adenosine receptors. Gao, Zhan-Guo; Melman, NeIi; Erdmann, Andreas; Kim, Seong Gon; Muller, Christa E.; IJzerman, Adriaan P.; Jacobson, Kenneth A. NIDDK, Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, Molecular Recognition Section, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Biochemical Pharmacology (2003), 65(4), 525-534.
Adenosine Receptor Subtypes Mediating Coronary Vasodilation in Rat Hearts. Hinschen, Andrea K.; Rose'Meyer, Roselyn B.; Headrick, John P. Griffith University, Heart Foundation Research Center, School of Health Science, Gold Coast Campus, Southport, Australia. Journal of Cardiovascular Pharmacology (2003), 41(1), 73-80.
Contractile responses to adenosine, R-PIA and ovalbumen in passively sensitized guinea- pig isolated airways. Martin, Timothy J.; Broadley, Kenneth J. Department of Pharmacology, Welsh School of Pharmacy, Cardiff University, Cardiff, UK. British Journal of Pharmacology (2002), 137(6), 729-738.
US 2002165197 US 2002115635
WO 2002079204 Al
Structural Determinants of A3 Adenosine Receptor Activation: Nucleoside Ligands at the Agonist/Antagonist Boundary. Gao, Zhan-Guo; Kim, Soo-Kyung; Biadatti, Thibaud; Chen, Wangzhong; Lee, Kyeong; Barak, Dov; Kim, Seong Gon; Johnson, Carl R.; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, Molecular Recognition Section, National Institutes of Health, National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases, Bethesda, MD, USA. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2002), 45(20), 4471-4484.
New highly potent and selective adenosine A3 receptor antagonists. Press, Neil J.; Fozard, John R.; Beer, David; Heng, Richard; di Padova, Franco; Tranter, Pamela; Trifilieff, Alexandre; Walker, Christoph; Keller, Thomas H. Dept. of Chemistry, Novartis Horsham Research Centre, West Sussex, UK. Abstracts of Papers, 224th ACS National Meeting, Boston, MA, United States, August 18-22, 2002 (2002), MEDI-419. Publisher: American Chemical Society, Washington, D. C
US 6,680,322 US 6,664,252
Synthesis, Biological Properties, and Molecular Modeling Investigation of the First Potent, Selective, and Water-Soluble Human A3 Adenosine Receptor Antagonist. Maconi, Anna; Pastorin, Giorgia; Da Ros, Tatiana; Spalluto, Giampiero; Gao, Zhan-guo; Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Cacciari, Barbara; Varani, Katia; Moro, Stefano; Borea, Pier Andrea. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita degli Studi di Trieste, Trieste, Italy. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2002), 45(17), 3579- 3582. l,2,4-Triazolo[5,l-i]purine Derivatives as Highly Potent and Selective Human Adenosine A3 Receptor Ligands. Okamura, Takashi; Kurogi, Yasuhisa; Nishikawa, Hiroshi; Hashimoto, Kinji; Fujiwara, Hiroshi; Nagao, Yoshimitsu. Nutrition Research Institute, Otsuka Pharmaceutical Factory, Inc., Tateiwa, Muya-cho, Naruto, Tokushima, Japan. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2002), 45(17), 3703-3708.
* Selective allosteric enhancement of agonist binding and function at human A3 adenosine receptors by a series of imidazoquinoline derivatives. Gao, Zhan-Guo; Kim, Seong Gon; Soltysiak, Kelly A.; Melman, NeIi; Ijzerman, Adriaan P.; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Molecular Recognition Section, Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Molecular Pharmacology (2002), 62(1), 81-89.
Imidazo[2,l-i]purin-5-ones and Related Tricyclic Water-Soluble Purine Derivatives: Potent A2A- and A3-Adenosine Receptor Antagonists. Mueller, Christa E.; Thorand, Mark; Qurishi, Ramatullah; Diekmann, Martina; Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Padgett, William L.; Daly, John W. Pharmaceutical Institute Poppelsdorf, University of Bonn, Bonn, Germany. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2002), 45(16), 3440-3450.
(2-(4-bromophenyl)-7, 8-dihydro-4-propyl- 1 H-imidazo [2, 1 -i]purin-5 (4H)- onedihydrochloride), a new potent and selective adenosine A3 receptor antagonist. Saki, Mayumi; Tsumuki, Hiroshi; Nonaka, Hiromi; Shimada, Junichi; Ichimura, Michio. Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd., Pharmaceutical Research Institute, Sunto-gun, Shizuoka, Nagaizumi-cho, Japan. European Journal of Pharmacology (2002), 444(3), 133-141.
2-Chloro-N6-cyclopentyladenosine, adenosine Al receptor agonist, antagonizes the adenosine A3 receptor. Gao, Zhan-guo; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, Molecular Recognition Section, National Institutes of Health, National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases, Bethesda, MD, USA. European Journal of Pharmacology (2002), 443(1-3), 39-42.
US 6,680,322 US 6,387,913
Adenosine acts through an A3 receptor to prevent the induction of murine anti-CD3- activated killer T cells. Hoskin, David W.; Butler, Jared J.; Drapeau, Dennis; Haeryfar, S. M. Mansour; Blay, Jonathan. Department of Microbiology and Immunology, Faculty of Medicine, Department of Pathology, Dalhousie University, Halifax, NS, Can. International Journal of Cancer (2002), 99(3), 386-395.
Binding thermodynamics at the human A3 adenosine receptor. Merighi, Stefania; Varani, Katia; Gessi, Stefania; Klotz, Karl-Norbert; Leung, Edward; Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Borea, Pier Andrea. Pharmacology Unit, Department of Clinical and Experimental Medicine, Centro Nazionale di Eccellenza per Io Sviluppo di Metodologie Innovative per Io Studio ed il Trattamento delle Patologie Infiammatorie, University of Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Biochemical Pharmacology (2002), 63(2), 157-161.
[3H]-8-Ethyl-4-methyl-2-phenyl-(8R)-4,5,758-tetrahydro-lH-imidazo[2,l-i]purin-5-one ([3H]PSB-11), a Novel High- Affinity Antagonist Radioligand for Human A3 Adenosine Receptors. Muller, ChristaE.; Diekmann, Martina; Thorand, Mark; Ozola, Vita. University of Bonn, Pharmaceutical Institute, Bonn, Germany. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters (2002), 12(3), 501-503.
International union of pharmacology. XXV. Nomenclature and classification of adenosine receptors. Fredholm, Bertil B.; Ijzerman, Adriaan P.; Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Klotz, Karl-Norbert; Linden, Joel. Department of Physiology and Pharmacology, Section of Molecular Neuropharmacology, Karolinska Institutet, Stockholm, Swed. Pharmacological Reviews (2001), 53(4), 527-552.
Synthesis, Biological Activity, and Molecular Modeling Investigation of New Pyrazolo[4,3-e]-l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine Derivatives as Human A3 Adenosine Receptor Antagonists. Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Cacciari, Barbara; Moro, Stefano; Spalluto, Giampiero; Pastorin, Giorgia; Da Ros, Tatiana; Klotz, Karl-Norbert; Varani, Katia; Gessi, Stefania; Borea, Pier Andrea. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche and Dipartimento di Medicina Clinica e Sperimentale-Sezione di Farmacologia, Universita degli Studi di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2002), 45(4), 770- 780.
Pharmacological and biochemical characterization of adenosine receptors in the human malignant melanoma A375 cell line. Merighi, Stefania; Varani, Katia; Gessi, Stefania; Cattabriga, Elena; Iannotta, Valeria; Ulouglu, Canan; Leung, Edward; Borea, Pier Andrea. Department of Clinical and Experimental Medicine, Pharmacology Unit, Centra Nazionale Di Eccellenza Per Lo Sviluppo Di Metodologie Innovative Per Lo Studio Ed II Trattamento Delle Patologie Infiammatorie, University of Ferrara, Italy. British Journal of Pharmacology (2001), 134(6), 1215-1226.
7-Substituted 5-Amino-2-(2-furyl)pyrazolo[4,3-e]-l,2,4-triazolo[l55-c]pyrimidines as A2A Adenosine Receptor Antagonists: A Study on the Importance of Modifications at the Side Chain on the Activity and Solubility. Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Cacciari, Barbara; Romagnoli, Romeo; Spalluto, Giampiero; Monopoli, Angela; Ongini, Ennio; Varani, Katia; Borea, Pier Andrea. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita degli Studi di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2002), 45(1), 115-126.
*A3 adenosine receptor antagonists. Muller, C. E. Pharmaceutical Institute, University of Bonn, Bonn, Germany. Mini-Reviews in Medicinal Chemistry (2001), 1(4), 417-427. CODENr MMCIAE ISSN: 1389-5575. Journal; General Review written in English.
US 6,303,619
Recent advances in adenosine receptor antagonist research. Hess, Sonja. Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institute of Diabetes, and Digestive and Kidney Diseases, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Expert Opinion on Therapeutic Patents (2001), 11(10), 1533-1561.
Pharmacological characterization of adenosine receptors in PGT mouse pineal gland tumour cells. Suh, Byung-Chang; Kim, Tae-Don; Lee, Jung-Uek; Seong, Je-Kyung; Kim, Kyong-Tai. Department of Life Science, Division of Molecular and Life Science, Pohang University of Science and Technology, Pohang, S. Korea. British Journal of Pharmacology (2001), 134(1), 132-142.
Pharmacological and biochemical characterization of A3 adenosine receptors in Jurkat T cells. Gessi, Stefania; Varani, Katia; Merighi, Stefania; Morelli, Anna; Ferrari, Davide; Leung, Edward; Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Spalluto, Giampiero; Borea, Pier Andrea. Department of Clinical and Experimental Medicine, Pharmacology Unit, University of Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. British Journal of Pharmacology (2001), 134(1), 116-126.
Introduction of alkynyl chains on C-8 of adenosine led to very selective antagonists of the A3 adenosine receptor. Volpini, R.; Costanzi, S.; Lambertucci, C; Vittori, S.; Klotz, K.- N.; Lorenzen, A.; Cristalli, G. Dipartimento di Scienze Chimiche, Universita di Camerino, Camerino, Italy. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters (2001), 11(14), 1931-1934.
Fluorosulfonyl- and bis-(ctøoroethyl)arnino-phenylamino functionalized pyrazolo[4,3- e]l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine derivatives: irreversible antagonists at the human A3 adenosine receptor and molecular modeling studies. Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Cacciari, Barbara; Moro, Stefano; Romagnoli, Romeo; Ji, Xiao-duo; Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Gessi, Stefania; Borea, Pier Andrea; Spalluto, Giampiero. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita degli Studi di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2001), 44(17), 2735-2742.
US 6,686,366
Involvement of A3 receptors in the potentiation by adenosine of the inhibitory effect of theophylline on human eosinophil degranulation: possible novel mechanism of the anti- inflammatory action of theophylline. Ezeamuzie, C. I. Faculty of Medicine, Department of Pharmacology and Toxicology, Kuwait University, Safat, Kuwait. Biochemical Pharmacology (2001), 61(12), 1551-1559.
Receptor subtypes mediating adenosine-induced dilation of cerebral arterioles. Ngai, Al C; Coyne, Ellicia F.; Meno, Joseph R.; West, G. Alexander; Winn, H. Richard. Department of Neurological Surgery, School of Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA, USA. American Journal of Physiology (2001), 280(5, Pt. 2), H2329- H2335.
Pyrazolo[4,3-e]l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine derivatives: a new pharmacological tool for the characterization of the human A3 adenosine receptor. Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Cacciari, Barbara; Romagnoli, Romeo; Spalluto, Giampiero; Varani, Katia; Gessi, Stefania; Merighi, Stefania; Borea, Pier Andrea. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita degli Studi di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Drug Development Research (2001), 52(1/2), 406-415.
Adenosine-enhanced ischemic preconditioning: adenosine receptor involvement during ischemia and reperfusion. McCully, James D.; Toyoda, Yoshiya; Uematsu, Masahisa; Stewart, Robert D.; Levitsky, Sidney. Division of Cardiothoracic Surgery, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center and Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA, USA. American Journal of Physiology (2001), 280(2, Pt. 2), H591-H602.
The adenosine A3 receptor and its ligands. Van Muijlwijk-Koezen, Jacqueline E.; Timmerman, Henk; Ijzerman, Adriaan P. Leiden/ Amsterdam Center for Drug Research, Division of Medicinal Chemistry, Department of Pharmacochemistry, Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, Neth. Progress in Medicinal Chemistry (2001), 38 61-113.
WO 2001019360 A2
Cardioprotective effects of adenosine A1 and A3 receptor activation during hypoxia in isolated rat cardiac myocytes. Safran, Noam; Shneyvays, Vladimir; Balas, Nissim; Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Nawrath, Hermann; Shainberg, Asher. Gonda (Goldschmied) Medical Diagnostic Research Center, Faculty of Life Sciences, Bar-Ilan University, Ramat-Gan, Israel. Molecular and Cellular Biochemistry (2001), 217(1&2), 143-152.
Thiazole and thiadiazole analogs as a novel class of adenosine receptor antagonists, van Muijlwijk-Koezen, Jacqueline E.; Timmerman, Hendrik; Vollinga, Roeland C; von Kuenzel, Jacobien Frijtag; de Groote, Miriam; Visser, Sven; IJzerman, Adriaan P. Department of Pharmacochemistry Division of Medicinal Chemistry Leiden/Amsterdam Center for Drug Research, Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, Neth. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2001), 44(5), 749-762.
New potent and selective human adenosine A3 receptor antagonists. Baraldi, P. G.; Borea, P. A. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita degli Studi di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Trends in Pharmacological Sciences (2000), 21(12), 456-459.
Pyrazolo[4,3-e]l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine Derivatives as Highly Potent and Selective Human A3 Adenosine Receptor Antagonists: Influence of the Chain at the N8 Pyrazole Nitrogen. Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Cacciari, Barbara; Romagnoli, Romeo; Spalluto, Giampiero; Moro, Stefano; Klotz, Karl-Norbert; Leung, Edward; Varani, Katia; Gessi, Stefania; Merighi, Stefania; Borea, Pier Andrea. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche and Dipartimento di Medicina Clinica e Sperimentale-Sezione di Farmacologia, Universita degli Studi di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2000), 43(25), 4768-4780.
Pyran template approach to the design of G protein-coupled receptor antagonists. Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Li, An-Hu; Kim, Hak Sung; Ji, Xiao-duo. Molecular Recognition Section, Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institute of Diabetes, Digestive and Kidney Disease, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Abstracts of Papers, 220th ACS National Meeting, Washington, DC, United States, August 20-24, 2000 (2000), MEDI-263.
7-Deazaadenines Bearing Polar Substituents: Structure- Activity Relationships of New Al and A3 Adenosine Receptor Antagonists. Hess, Sonja; Mueller, Christa E.; Frobenius, Wolfram; Reith, Ulrike; Klotz, Karl-Norbert; Eger, Kurt. Pharmaceutical Chemistry Institute of Pharmacy, University of Leipzig, Leipzig, Germany. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2000), 43(24), 4636-4646.
WO 2000064894 Al
Insights into adenosine A1 and A3 receptors function: cardiotoxicity and cardioprotection. Shneyvays, Vladimir; Safran, Noam; Halili-Rutman, Mt; Shainberg, Asher. Faculty of Life Sciences, Bar-Ilan University, Ramat-Gan, Israel. Drug Development Research (2000), 50(3/4), 324-337.
WO 2000044756 Al
Synthesis and structure-activity relationships of a new set of 2-arylpyrazolo[3,4- c]quinoline derivatives as adenosine receptor antagonists. Colotta, Vittoria; Catarzi, Daniela; Varano, Flavia; Cecchi, Lucia; Filacchioni, Guido; Martini, Claudia; Trincavelli, Letizia; Lucacchini, Antonio. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita1 di Firenze, Florence, Italy. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2000), 43(16), 3118-3124.
Synthesis and preliminary biological evaluation of [3H]-MRE 3008-F20: the first high affinity radioligand antagonist for the human A3 adenosine receptors. Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Cacciari, Barbara; Romagnoli, Romeo; Varani, Katia; Merighi, Stefania; Gessi, Stefania; Borea, Pier Andrea; Leung, Edward; Hickey, Sarah L.; Spalluto, Giampiero. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters (2000), 10(12), 1403.
Patent evaluation: a novel adenosine receptor pharmacophore. Novartis AG, Expert Opinion on Therapeutic Patents (2000), 10(5), 729-732.
Development of a selective adenosine Ai receptor antagonist: Use of yeast functional assays. Witter, David J.; McKibben, Bryan; Sherman, Dan; Werner, Doug; Zhang, Hesheng; Castelhano, Arlindo L. Chemistry Department, OSI Pharmaceuticals, Tarrytown, NY, USA. Book of Abstracts, 219th ACS National Meeting, San Francisco, CA, March 26-30, 2000 (2000), MEDI-217. Publisher: American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C.
Isoquinoline and Quinazoline Urea Analogues as Antagonists for the Human Adenosine A3 Receptor. Van Muijlwijk-Koezen, Jacqueline E.; Timmerman, Henk; Van der Goot, Henk; Menge, Wiro M. P. B.; Von Kuenzel, Jacobien Frijtag; De Groote, Miriam; IJzerman, Adriaan P. Leiden/Amsterdam Center for Drug Research Division of Medicinal Chemistry Department of Pharmacochemistry, Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, Neth. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2000), 43(11), 2227-2238. [3H]MRE 3008F20: a novel antagonist radioligand for the pharmacological and biochemical characterization of human A3 adenosine receptors. Varani, Katia; Merighi, Stefania; Gessi, Stefania; Klotz, Karl-Norbert; Lfung, Edward; Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Cacciari, Barbara; Romagnoli, Romeo; Spalluto, Giampiero; Borfa, Pier Andrea. Department of Clinical and Experimental Medicine, Pharmacology Unit, University of Ferrara, Italy. Molecular Pharmacology (2000), 57(5), 968-975.
A3 adenosine receptor ligands: history and perspectives. Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Cacciari, Barbara; Romagnoli, Romeo; Merighi, Stefania; Varani, Katia; Borea, Pier Andrea; Spalluto, Giampiero. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Medicinal Research Reviews (2000), 20(2), 103-128.
Pyran template approach to the design of novel A3 adenosine receptor antagonists. Li, An-Hu; Ji, Xiao-Duo; Kim, Hak Sung; Melman, NeIi; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Molecular Recognition Section, Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institute of Diabetes, Digestive and Kidney Diseases, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Drug Development Research (1999), 48(4), 171-177.
Synthesis and preliminary biological evaluation of [3H]-MRE 3008-F20: the first high affinity radioligand antagonist for the human A3 adenosine receptors. Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Cacciari, Barbara; Romagnoli, Romeo; Varani, Katia; Merighi, Stefania; Gessi, Stefania; Borea, Pier Andrea; Leung, Edward; Hickey, Sarah L.; Spalluto, Giampiero. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters (2000), 10(3), 209-211. l,2,4-Triazolo[4,3-a]quinoxalin-l-one: A Versatile Tool for the Synthesis of Potent and Selective Adenosine Receptor Antagonists. Colotta, Vittoria; Catarzi, Daniela; Varano, Flavia; Cecchi, Lucia; Filacchioni, Guido; Martini, Claudia; Trincavelli, Letizia; Lucacchini, Antonio. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche, Universita' di Firenze, Florence, Italy. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (2000), 43(6), 1158-1164.
US 6,528,516 US 6,376,521
Pyrazolo[4,3-e]-l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine derivatives as highly potent and selective human A3 adenosine receptor antagonists. Baraldi, Pier Giovanni; Cacciari, Barbara; Romagnoli, Romeo; Spalluto, Giampiero; Klotz, Karl-Norbert; Leung, Edward; Varani, Katia; Gessi, Stefania; Merighi, Stefania; Borea, Pier Andrea. Dipartimento di Scienze Farmaceutiche and Dipartimento di Medicina Clinica e Sperimentale-Sezione di Farmacologia, Universita degli Studi di Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (1999), 42(22), 4473-4478.
Selective A3 Adenosine Receptor Antagonists: Water-Soluble 3,5-Diacyl- 1,2,4- trialkylpyridinium Salts and Their Oxidative Generation from Dihydropyridine Precursors. Xie, Rongyuan; Li, An-Hu; Ji, Xiao-Duo; Melman, NeIi; Olah, Mark E.; Stiles, Gary L.; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Molecular Recognition Section Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry National Institute of Diabetes Digestive and Kidney Diseases, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (1999), 42(20), 4232-4238.
Chiral Resolution and Stereospecificity of 6-Phenyl-4-phenylethynyl-l,4- dihydropyridines as Selective A3 Adenosine Receptor Antagonists. Jiang, Ji-long; Li, An-Hu; Jang, Soo-Yeon; Chang, Louis; Melman, NeIi; Moro, Stefano; Ji, Xiao-duo; Lobkovsky, Emil B.; Clardy, Jon C; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Molecular Recognition Section Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institute of Diabetes Digestive and Kidney Diseases National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (1999), 42(16), 3055-3065.
JP 11158073 A2
Functionalized Congeners of 1,4-Dihydropyridines as Antagonist Molecular Probes for A3 Adenosine Receptors. Li, An-Hu; Chang, Louis; Ji, Xiao-duo; Melman, NeIi; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Molecular Recognition Section Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institute of Diabetes Digestive and Kidney Diseases National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Bioconjugate Chemistry (1999), 10(4), 667- 677.
WO 9921555 A2
A3 adenosine receptors regulate Cl- channels of nonpigmented ciliary epithelial cells. Mitchell, Claire H.; Peterson- Yantorno, Kim; Carre, David A.; McGlinn, Alice M.; Coca- Prados, Miguel; Stone, Richard A.; Civan, Mortimer M. Departments of Physiology, Ophthalmology, and Medicine, University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine, Philadelphia, PA, USA. American Journal of Physiology (1999), 276(3, Pt. 1), C659- C666. CODENr AJPHAP ISSN: 0002-9513.
Medicinal chemistry of the human adenosine A3 receptor. Van Tilburg, Erica W.; Van Muijlwijk-Koezen, Jacqueline E.; Ilzerman, Adriaan P. Leiden/ Amsterdam Center for Drug Research, Division of Medicinal Chemistry, Gorlaeus Laboratories, Rijksuniversiteit Leiden, Leiden, Neth. Drug Development Research (1998), 45(3/4), 182-189.
Characterization of potent ligands at human recombinant adenosine receptors. Cristalli, Gloria; Camaioni, Emidio; Costanzi, Stefano; Vittori, Sauro; Volpini, Rosaria; Klotz, Karl-Norbert. Dipartimento di Scienze Chimiche, Universita di Camerino, Camerino, Italy. Drug Development Research (1998), 45(3/4), 176-181.
A3 adenosine receptors: protective vs. damaging effects identified using novel agonists and antagonists. Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Moro, Stefano; Kim, Yong-Chul; Li, An-Hu. Molecular Recognition Section, Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institute of Diabetes, Digestive and Kidney Diseases, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Drug Development Research (1998), 45(3/4), 113-124.
Synthesis, CoMFA Analysis, and Receptor Docking of 3,5-Diacyl-2,4-Dialkylpyridine Derivatives as Selective A3 Adenosine Receptor Antagonists. Li, An-Hu; Moro, Stefano; Forsyth, Nancy; Melman, NeIi; Ji, Xiao-duo; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Molecular Recognition Section Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institute of Diabetes Digestive and Kidney Diseases, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (1999), 42(4), 706-721.
Molecular Modeling Studies of Human A3 Adenosine Antagonists: Structural Homology and Receptor Docking. Moro, Stefano; Li, An-Hu; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Molecular Recognition Section Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry National Institute of Diabetes Digestive and Kidney Diseases, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Journal of Chemical Information and Computer Sciences (1998), 38(6), 1239-1248.
A novel class of adenosine A3 receptor ligands. 1. 3-(2-Pyridinyl)isoquinoline derivatives, van Muijlwijk-Koezen, Jacqueline E.; Timmerman, Henk; Link, Regina; van der Goot, Henk; IJzerman, Adriaan P. Division of Medicinal Chemistry Leiden/Amsterdam Center for Drug Research, Department of Pharmacochemistry Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, Neth. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (1998), 41(21), 3987- 3993.
Molecular modeling studies of human A3 adenosine antagonists: Structure similarity and receptor docking. Moro, Stefano; Li, An-Hu; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Lab. Bioorganic Chem., NIDDK5NIH, Bethesda, MD, USA. Book of Abstracts, 216th ACS National Meeting, Boston, August 23-27 (1998), MEDI-094. Publisher: American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C.
Further pharmacological characterization of the adenosine receptor subtype mediating inhibition of oxidative burst in human isolated neutrophils. Harmon, J. P.; Bray-French, K. M.; Phillips, R. M.; Fozard, J. R. Novartis Pharma Ltd., Basel, Switz. Drug Development Research (1998), 43(4), 214-224.
Structure-Activity Relationships and Molecular Modeling of 3,5-Diacyl-2,4- dialkylpyridine Derivatives as Selective A3 Adenosine Receptor Antagonists. Li, An- Hu; Moro, Stefano; Melman, NeIi; Ji, Xiao-duo; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Molecular Recognition Section, Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institute of Diabetes Digestive and Kidney Diseases, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (1998), 41(17), 3186-3201.
Derivatives of the Triazoloquinazoline Adenosine Antagonist (CGS 15943) Having High Potency at the Human A2B and A3 Receptor Subtypes. Kim, Yong-Chul; de Zwart, Maarten; Chang, Louis; Moro, Stefano; von Kuenzel, Jacobien K.; Melman, NeIi; IJzerman, Ad P.; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Molecular Recognition Section, Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institute of Diabetes Digestive and Kidney Diseases, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (1998), 41(15), 2835-2845.
Binding affinity of adenosine receptor agonists and antagonists at human cloned A3 adenosine receptors. Varani, K.; Cacciari, B.; Baraldi, P. G.; Dionisotti, S.; Ongini, E.; Borea, P. A. Dip. Med. Clin. Sperimentale-Sezione Farmacologia, Univ. Studi Ferrara, Ferrara, Italy. Life Sciences (1998), 63(5), PL81-PL87.
A physiological role of the adenosine A3 receptor: sustained cardioprotection. Liang, Bruce T.; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Department of Medicine, Cardiovascular Division, University of Pennsylvania Medical Center, Philadelphia, PA, USA. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the United States of America (1998), 95(12), 6995- 6999.
Adenosine A3 receptors: novel ligands and paradoxical effects. Jacobson, Kenneth A. Molecular Recognition Section, Lab. Bioorganic Chem., National Inst. Diabetes, Digestive and Kidney Diseases, national Inst. Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Trends in Pharmacological Sciences (1998), 19(5), 184-191.
New substituted 9-alkylpurines as adenosine receptor ligands. Camaioni, Emidio; Costanzi, Stefano; Vittori, Sauro; Volpini, Rosaria; Klotz, Karl-Norbert; Cristalli, Gloria. Dipartimento di Scienze Cbimiche, Universita di Camerino, Camerino, Italy. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry (1998), 6(5), 523-533.
US 6,306,847 Novel selective non-xanthine A3 adenosine receptor antagonists. Jacobson, Marlene A. Department Pharmacology, Merck Research Labs, West Point, PA, USA. Book of Abstracts, 215th ACS National Meeting, Dallas, March 29-April 2 (1998), MEDI-095. Publisher: American Chemical Society, Washington, D. C.
Flavonoid Derivatives as Adenosine Receptor Antagonists: A Comparison of the Hypothetical Receptor Binding Site Based on a Comparative Molecular Field Analysis Model. Moro, Stefano; van Rhee, A. Michiel; Sanders, Lawrence H.; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Molecular Recognition Section Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry National Institute of Diabetes Digestive and Kidney Diseases, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (1998), 41(1), 46-52.
Ca2+ dependence of the response of three adenosine type receptors in rat hepatocytes. Guinzberg, Raquel; Diaz-Cruz, Antonio; Uribe, Salvador; Pina, Enrique. Apdo. Postal, School of Medicine, Department of Biochemistry, Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico, 04510 Mexico DF, Mex. European Journal of Pharmacology (1997), 340(2/3), 243-247.
JP 09291089 A2
Pharmacological characterization of novel A3 adenosine receptor-selective antagonists. Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Park, Kyung-Sun; Jiang, Ji-Long; Kim, Yong-Chul; Olah, Mark E.; Stiles, Gary L.; Ji, Xiao-Duo. Molecular Recognition Section, LBC, NIDDK, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Neuropharmacology (1997), 36(9), 1157-1165.
US 6,066,642
Adenosine A3 receptor agonists inhibit murine macrophage tumor necrosis factor-d production in vitro and in vivo. Bowlin, Terry L.; Borcherding, David R.; Edwards, Carl K., Ill; McWhinney, Charlene D. Department of Immunology, Marion Merrell Dow Research Institute, Marion Merrell Dow Pharmaceuticals, Cincinnati, OH, USA. Cellular and Molecular Biology (Paris) (1997), 43(3), 345-349.
Highly potent and selective human adenosine A3 receptor antagonists: Triazoloquinazoline derivatives. Kim, Y. -C; Ji, X. -D.; Olah, M. E.; Stiles, G. L.; Jacobson, K. A. Lab. Bioorg. Chem., Nat. Inst. Health, Bethesda, MD, USA. Book of Abstracts, 213th ACS National Meeting, San Francisco, April 13-17 (1997), MEDI-042. Publisher: American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C.
Adenosine receptor antagonists: structures and potential therapeutic applications. Mueller, C. E.; Stein, B. Inst. Pharmazie Lebensmittelchemie, Univ. Wuerzburg, Wuerzburg, Germany. Current Pharmaceutical Design (1996), 2(5), 501-530.
*US 6,040,296
Cloning, expression and pharmacological characterization of rabbit adenosine A1 and A3 receptors. Hill, Roger J.; Oleynek, Joseph J.; Hoth, Christopher F.; Ravi Kiron, M. A.; Weng, Weifan; Wester, Ronald T.; Tracey, W. Ross; Knight, Delvin R.; Buchholz, R. Allan; Kennedy, Scott P. Dep. Cardiovascular, Pfizer Inc., Groton, CT, USA. Journal of Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics (1997), 280(1), 122-128.
6-Phenyl-l,4-Dihydropyridine Derivatives as Potent and Selective A3 Adenosine Receptor Antagonists. Jiang, Ji-long; van Rhee, A. Michiel; Melman, NeIi; Ji, Xiao-duo; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institute of Diabetes Digestive and Kidney Diseases, Bethesda, MD3 USA. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (1996), 39(23), 4667-4675.
Derivatives of the Triazoloquinazoline Adenosine Antagonist (CGS 15943) Are Selective for the Human A3 Receptor Subtype. Kim, Yong-Chul; Ji, Xiao-duo; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institute of Diabetes Digestive and Kidney Diseases, Bethesda, MD, USA. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (1996), 39(21), 4142-4148.
Activation of adenosine A3 receptors on macrophages inhibits tumor necrosis factor-d McWhinney, Charlene D.; Dudley, Mark W.; Bowlin, Terry L.; Peet, Norton P.; Schook, Larry; Bradshaw, Marita; De, Mamata; Borcherding, David R.; Edwards, Carl K., III. Department of Immunology, Marion Merrell Dow Research Institute, Marion Merrell Dow Pharmaceuticals, Inc., 2110 East Galbraith Road, Cincinnati, USA. European Journal of Pharmacology (1996), 310(2/3), 209-216.
Novel adenosine antagonists: A3 receptor-selective flavonoid and dihydropyridine derivatives. Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Van Rhee, A. Michiel; Jiang, Ji-Long; Ji, Xiao-duo; Karton, Yishai; Von Lubitz, Dag K. J. E.; Olah, Mark E.; Stiles, Gary L. Laboratory Bioorganic Chemistry, NIDDK, NIH, Bethesda, MD, USA. Book of Abstracts, 212th ACS National Meeting, Orlando, FL, August 25-29 (1996), MEDI-099. Publisher: American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C.
Synthesis and biological activities of flavonoid derivatives as A3 adenosine receptor antagonists. Karton, Yishai; Jiang, Ji-long; Ji, Xiao-duo; Melman, NeIi; Olah, Mark E.; Stiles, Gary L.; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institute of Diabetes Digestive and Kidney Diseases, Bethesda, MD, USA. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (1996), 39(12), 2293-2301.
US 5,646,156 WO 9511681
Structure- Activity Relationships of 9-Alkyladenine and Ribose-Modified Adenosine Derivatives at Rat A3 Adenosine Receptors. Jacobson, Kenneth A.; Siddiqi, Suhaib M.; Olah, Mark E.; Ji, Xiao-duo; Melman, NeIi; Bellamkonda, Kamala; Meshulam, Yacov; Stiles, Gary L.; Kim, Hea O. Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases, Bethesda, MD, USA. Journal of Medicinal Chemistry (1995), 38(10), 1720-35.
Evidence that the adenosine A3 receptor may mediate the protection afforded by preconditioning in the isolated rabbit heart. Liu, Guang S.; Richards, Steven C; Olsson, Ray A.; Mullane, Kevin; Walsh, Robert S.; Downey, James M. Department Physiology MSB 3024, University South Alabama, Mobile, AL, USA. Cardiovascular Research (1994), 28(7), 1057-61.
Cloned adenosine A3 receptors: pharmacological properties, species differences and receptor functions. Linden, Joel. Health Sci. Cent., Univ. Virginia, Charlottesville, VA, USA. Trends in Pharmacological Sciences (1994), 15(8), 298-306.
Species differences in ligand affinity at central A3-adenosine receptors. Ji, Xiao-Duo; von Lubitz, Dag; Olah, Mark E.; Stiles, Gary L.; Jacobson, Kenneth A. Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry, National Institute of Diabetes, Digestive and Kidney Diseases, Bethesda, MD, USA. Drug Development Research (1994), 33(1), 51-9.
US 5,443,836
Molecular cloning and characterization of the human A3 adenosine receptor. Salvatore, Christopher A.; Jacobson, Marlene A.; Taylor, Heidi E.; Linden, Joel; Johnson, Robert G. Dep. Pharmacol., Merck Res. Lab., West Point, PA, USA. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the United States of America (1993), 90(21), 10365-9.
US 20040186133
US 20030087845
US 20020094974
US 6,387,913
US 6,288,070
US 5,573,772
WO 200350241 A2-A3
WO 200285308 A2-A3
WO 200283152 Al
WO 200270532 A2-A3
WO 200266020 A2-A3
WO 200257267 Al
WO 200139777 Al
WO 200051621 Al
WO 200003741 A2
WO 9962518 Al
WO 9920284 Al
WO 9421195 Al
JP 2004135657 A
The A3 receptor antagonists of the invention are particularly useful for prevention, treatment, and/or management of cancer, for example, as a single agent therapy or in combination with other modes of therapy for cancer. In preferred embodiments, the invention encompasses methods of treatment, prevention, or management of cancers which are A3 receptor expressing cancers including, but not limited to, human leukemia, melanoma, pancreatic carcinoma, ovarian carcinoma, breast carcinoma, prostrate carcinoma, colon carcinoma, lung carcinoma, malignant melanomas, histiocytic lymphoma, and some forms of astrocytoma cells. In other preferred embodiments, the invention encompasses methods of treatment, prevention, or management which have high level of expression of HIF-I a including, but not limited to, cervical cancer (early stage), lung cancer (non-small cell lung carcinoma), breast cancer (including lymph node positive breast cancer and lymph node negative breast cancer), oligodendroglioma, orpharyngeal squamous cell carcinoma, ovarian cancer, oesophageal cancer, endometrial cancer, head and neck cancer, gastrointestinal stromal tumor of the stomach The methods of the invention are particularly useful in cancer therapy for providing tissue selectivity, such that the biological effect is observed in tumoral hypoxic cells, where high adenosine concentrations has resulted in increased HIF-I α accumulation.
The methods and compositions of the invention comprising A3 receptor antagonists (or A1 receptor antagonists or a combination thereof) are particularly useful for the treatment, inhibition or regression of solid tumors. As used herein, "solid tumors" refer to a locus of tumor cells where the majority of the cells are tumor cells or tumor-associated cells, including but not limited to laryngeal tumors, brain tumors, and other tumors of the head and neck; colon, rectal and prostate tumors; breast and thoracic solid tumors; ovarian and uterine tumors; tumors of the esophagus, stomach, pancreas and liver; bladder and gall bladder tumors; skin tumors such as melanomas. Moreover, the tumors encompassed within the invention can be either primary or a secondary tumor resulting from metastasis of cancer cells elsewhere in the body to the chest.
The invention encompasses use of the A3 or A1 receptor antagonist compounds of the invention in inhibiting tumor growth in a mammal, including humans. The invention encompasses methods for administering an effective amount of adenosine A1 or A3 antagonists, preferably, A3 antagonists sufficient to inhibit the ability of adenosine to protect tumor cells.
In other embodiments, the present invention encompasses methods for treatment, prevention and/or management of cancer comprising administering a compound of the invention including A3 and/or A1 receptor antagonists used in combination with other therapeutic and/or prophylactic agents, e.g., cytotoxic agents. The inventors have surprisingly found that adenosine A3 receptor antagonists synergistically enhance cytotoxic treatment and counter some forms of multi-drug resistance. Although not intending to be bound by a particular mechanism of action, the combination therapies of the invention will attack the tumor cell directly, inhibit growth of new blood vessels around the tumor cell, and, by virtue of the adenosine A3 antagonists, inhibit the ability of the cell to survive without the growth of new blood vessels. Inventors have discovered that high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonists are useful as enhancers for many chemotherapeutic treatments of adenosine A3 receptor expressing cancers. Surprisingly, high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonists also counter P-glycoprotein (P-gp) effuse pump multidrug resistance (MDR). Finally, high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonists are helpful in reducing or ameliorating side effects of cytoxic agents especially taxane induced hypersensitivity. For example, lower doses of taxane may be used once used in combination with an adenosine A3 receptor antagonist of the invention.
In other embodiments, the present invention encompasses the use of high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonists for enhancing chemotherapeutic treatment of cancers expressing adenosine A3 receptors and countering multi-drug resistance in cancers expressing P-glycoprotein or MRP. In preferred embodiments, adenosine A3 receptor antagonists are administered before or during administration of a taxane family, vinca alkaloid, camptothecin or antibiotic compound. Preferred high affinity A3 receptor antagonists include compounds of the general formulas ILA, HB, HC and HD described herein, vide infra.
The present invention encompasses therapies which involve administering one or more of the compounds of the invention, to an animal, preferably a mammal, and most preferably a human, for preventing, treating, or ameliorating symptoms associated with a cancer, a disease or disorder associated with hypoxia-inducible factor 1-α (HIF- lα). The invention further provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of the invention that specifically binds an A1 or A3 receptor and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier
Preferably the pharmaceutical formulation includes an adenosine A3 receptor antagonist and one or more excipients. The formulations can also include other anti-tumor agents, including cytotoxic agents and other anti-angiogenesis agents, including adenosine A2A antagonists, such as ZM241385 and SCH 5861, adenosine A2B antagonists, such as MRE- 20290-F20 and AS- 16, and anti-VEGF antibodies, including humanized and chimeric antibodies. In a preferred embodiment, the composition includes an effective amount to inhibit tumor growth of an adenosine A3 receptor antagonist, a cytotoxic agent, and an anti- angiogenesis agent.
4.1 DEFINITIONS As used herein, a compound is an "antagonist of an adenosine A3 receptor" if it is able to prevent the action due to an agonist and is able to displace [I2 I]-AB-MECA in a competitive binding assay.
As used herein, a compound is selective for the A3 receptor if its affinity at the A3 receptor is greater than its affinity at the A1, A2A and A2B receptors. Preferably, the ratio OfA1 /A3 and A2 /A3 activity is greater than about 50, preferably between 50 and 100, and more preferably, greater than about 100. Since the pharmacology at the A3 receptor varies between species, especially between rodent A3 and human A3 receptors, it is important to determine the selectivity of the A3 compounds in human adenosine receptors. The same holds true for adenosine A1 and A2A receptors in terms of whether they are selective.
As used herein "Adenosine A1 Antagonists" carry their common ordinary meaning. Adenosine A1 antagonists are well known to those of skill in the art. Some of the more well known compounds include CPX, CVT 124, FK 352, and ILF 117, the structures of which are well known.
As used herein "Adenosine A3 Antagonists" carry their common ordinary meaning. Adenosine A3 antagonists are well known to those of skill in the art. Some of the more well known compounds include MRS 1097, MRS 1191 and MRS 1220 (commercially available from Research Biochemicals International, Natick Mass.). Other suitable antagonists include those disclosed in Jacobson et al., Neuropharmacology, 36: 1157-1165 (1997); Yao et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun., 232:317-322 (1997); Kim etal., J. Med. Chem., 39(21):4142-4148 (1996); van Rhee et al, DrugDevel. Res., 37:131 (1996); van Rhee et al, J. Med. Chem., 39:2980-2989 (1996); Siquidi et al, Nucleosides, Nucleotides 15:693-718 (1996); van Rhee etal, J. Med. Chem., 39:398-406 (1996); Jacobson et al, Drugs of the Future, 20:689-699 (1995); Jacobson et al, J. Med. Chem., 38:1720-1735 (1995); Karton et al., J. Med. Chem., 39:2293-2301 (1996); Kohno etal., Blood, 88:3569-3574 (1996); Timg et al., J. Med. Chem., 39:4667-4675 (1996); Yao et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 232:317-322 (1997); and Jiang et al, J. Med. Chem. 40:2596-2608 (1996), the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties. In addition, other suitable adenosine A3 antagonists are disclosed in the references listed in Table 1, the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
As used herein, "elevation" of a measured level of HIF-I α or A3 receptor relative to a standard level means that the amount or concentration of HIF-I α or A3 receptor in a sample or subject is sufficiently greater in a subject or sample relative to the standard as detected by any method now known in the art or to be developed in the future for measuring HIF- lot or A3 receptor levels. For example, elevation of the measured level relative to a standard level may be any statistically significant elevation detectable. Such an elevation in HIF-I α expression and/or activity may include, but is not limited to about a 10%, about a 20%, about a 40%, about an 80%, about a 2-fold, about a 4-fold, about an 10- fold, about a 20-fold, about a 50-fold, about a 100-fold, about a 2 to 20 fold, 2 to 50 fold, 2 to 100 fold, 20 to 50 fold, 20 to 100 fold, elevation, relative to the standard. The term "about" as used herein, refers to levels of elevation of the standard numerical value plus or minus 10% of the numerical value.
The term "standard level" or "background level" as used herein refers to a baseline amount of an HIF- lα level as determined in one or more normal subjects, i.e., a subject with no known history of past or current diseases, disorders or cancer. For example, a baseline may be obtained from at least one subject and preferably is obtained from an average of subjects (e.g., n=2 to 100 or more), wherein the subject or subjects have no prior history of diseases, disorders or cancer, especially no prior history of diseases associated with an aberrant level of expression and/or activity of HIF-I α. In the present invention, the measurement of HIF-lα level may be carried out using an HIF-lα probe or a HIF- lα activity assay (see Section 6). As used herein, "enhancement" refers to a synergistic effect as determined from measurement of the enhancement factor, as defined below. In general, an enhancement factor of greater than one is considered synergistic. For example, if one of the compounds has little individual chemotherapeutic effect, an enhancement factor greater than one indicates a synergistic effect is occurring. As used herein, the term "cancer" refers to a neoplasm or tumor resulting from abnormal uncontrolled growth of cells. As used herein, cancer explicitly includes, leukemias and lymphomas. The term "cancer" refers to a disease involving cells that have the potential to metastasize to distal sites and exhibit phenotypic traits that differ from those of non-cancer cells, for example, formation of colonies in a three-dimensional substrate such as soft agar or the formation of tubular networks or weblike matrices in a three- dimensional basement membrane or extracellular matrix preparation. Non-cancer cells do not form colonies in soft agar and form distinct sphere-like structures in three-dimensional basement membrane or extracellular matrix preparations. Cancer cells acquire a characteristic set of functional capabilities during their development, albeit through various mechanisms. Such capabilities include evading apoptosis, self-sufficiency in growth signals, insensitivity to anti-growth signals, tissue invasion/metastasis, limitless replicative potential, and sustained angiogenesis. The term "cancer cell" is meant to encompass both pre-malignant and malignant cancer cells. In some embodiments, cancer refers to a benign tumor, which has remained localized. In other embodiments, cancer refers to a malignant tumor, which has invaded and destroyed neighboring body structures and spread to distant sites. In yet other embodiments, the cancer is associated with a specific cancer antigen. As used herein, the term "A3 expressing cancers" refers to human cancers that express the adenosine A3 receptor or that otherwise comprise elevated concentrations of adenosine A3 receptors. Elevated concentration is determined by comparison to normal, non-cancerous tissues of a similar cell type. Examples of A3 expressing cancers include, without limitation, human leukemia, melanoma, pancreatic carcinoma, breast carcinoma, prostrate carcinoma, colon carcinoma, lung carcinomamalignant melanomas, histiocytic lymphoma, and some forms of astrocytoma cells. As used herein the term HIF- 1 α expressing cancers refers to human cancer that express HIF- lα or that otherwise comprise elevated concentrations of HIF-I α. Elevated concentration is determined by comparison to normal, non-cancerous tissues of a similar cell type. Examples of HIF-I α expressing cancers include without limitation cervical cancer (early stage), melanoma, lung cancer (non-small cell lung carcinoma), breast cancer (including lymph node positive breast cancer and lymph node negative breast cancer), oligodendroglioma, orpharyngeal squamous cell carcinoma, ovarian cancer, oesophageal cancer, endometrial cancer, head and neck cancer, gastrointestinal stromal tumor of the stomach.
As used herein "hypoxia" or "ischemia" refers to any condition whereby the physiology of the tissue is compromised and/or blood supply in one or more tissues is compromised. These two terms may be used interchangeably. The condition also encompasses any reduction in partial pressure of O2 in one or more tissues. The term "hypoxia" or "ischemia" encompasses any condition in which a cell, tissue or organ experiences a lack of oxygen or reduced blood flow. As used herein, the terms "treat," "treating" and "treatment" refer to the eradication, removal, modification, or control of primary, regional, or metastatic cancer tissue that results from the administration of one or more therapeutic agents. Ln certain embodiments, such terms refer to the minimizing or delaying the spread of cancer resulting from the administration of one or more therapeutic agents to a subject with such a disease. The term also refers to the eradication, reduction or amelioration of a symptom or disorder related to aberrant levels of HIF-I α level and/or activity.
As used herein, a "therapeutically effective amount" refers to that amount of the therapeutic agent sufficient to delay or minimize the spread of cancer. A therapeutically effective amount may also refer to the amount of the therapeutic agent that provides a therapeutic benefit in the treatment or management of a disease or disorder. Further, a therapeutically effective amount with respect to a therapeutic agent of the invention means that amount of therapeutic agent alone, or in combination with other therapies, that provides a therapeutic benefit in the treatment or management of a disease or disorder. Used in connection with an amount of a compound of the invention, the term can encompass an amount that improves overall therapy, reduces or avoids unwanted effects, or enhances the therapeutic efficacy of or synergizes with another therapeutic agent.
As used herein, the terms "prophylactic agent" and "prophylactic agents" refer to any agent(s) which can be used in the prevention of a disorder, or prevention of recurrence or spread of a disorder. A prophylactically effective amount may refer to the amount of prophylactic agent sufficient to prevent the recurrence or spread of hyperproliferative disease, particularly cancer, or the occurrence of such in a patient, including but not limited to those predisposed to hyperproliferative disease, for example those genetically predisposed to cancer or previously exposed to carcinogens. A prophylactically effective amount may also refer to the amount of the prophylactic agent that provides a prophylactic benefit in the prevention of disease. Further, a prophylactically effective amount with respect to a prophylactic agent of the invention means that amount of prophylactic agent alone, or in combination with other agents, that provides a prophylactic benefit in the prevention of disease. Used in connection with an amount of a compound of the invention, the term can encompass an amount that improves overall prophylaxis or enhances the prophylactic efficacy of or synergizes with another prophylactic agent, such as but not limited to a therapeutic antibody.
As used herein, the terms "manage," "managing" and "management" refer to the beneficial effects that a subject derives from administration of a prophylactic or therapeutic agent, which does not result in a cure of the disease or diseases. In certain embodiments, a subject is administered one or more prophylactic or therapeutic agents to "manage" a disease so as to prevent the progression or worsening of the disease or diseases.
As used herein, the terms "prevent", "preventing" and "prevention" refer to the methods to avert or avoid a disease or disorder or delay the recurrence or onset of one or more symptoms of a disorder in a subject resulting from the administration of a prophylactic agent.
As used herein, the term "in combination" refers to the use of more than one prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents. The use of the term "in combination" does not restrict the order in which prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents are administered to a subject with a disorder, e.g., hyperproliferative cell disorder, especially cancer. A first prophylactic or therapeutic agent can be administered prior to (e.g., 1 minute, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 4 weeks, 5 weeks, 6 weeks, 8 weeks, or 12 weeks before), concomitantly with, or subsequent to (e.g., 1 minute, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 4 weeks, 5 weeks, 6 weeks, 8 weeks, or 12 weeks after) the administration of a second prophylactic or therapeutic agent to a subject which had, has, or is susceptible to a disorder. The prophylactic or therapeutic agents are administered to a subject in a sequence and within a time interval such that the agent of the invention can act together with the other agent to provide an increased benefit than if they were administered otherwise. Any additional prophylactic or therapeutic agent can be administered in any order with the other additional prophylactic or therapeutic agents. As used herein, the term "alkyl" refers to a monovalent straight, branched or cyclic saturated hydrocarbon group preferably having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms ("lower alkyl") and most preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, -butyl, iso- butyl, n-hexyl, and the like. The terms "alkylene" and "lower alkylene" refer to divalent radicals of the corresponding alkane. Further, as used herein, other moieties having names derived from alkanes, such as alkoxyl, alkanoyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, etc. when modified by "lower," have carbon chains often or less carbon atoms. In those cases where the minimum number of carbons are greater than one, e.g., alkenyl (minimum of two carbons) and cycloalkyl, (minimum of three carbons), it is to be understood that "lower" means at least the minimum number of carbons .
As used herein, the term "substituted alkyl" refers to an alkyl group, preferably of from 1 to 10 carbon atoms ("substituted lower alkyl"), having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, — SO-alkyl, — SO-substituted alkyl, — SO-aryl, — SO- heteroaryl, — SO2-alkyl, — SO2-substituted alkyl, — SO2-aryl, — SO2-heteroaryl, and mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic. As used herein, other moieties having the prefix "substituted" are intended to include one or more of the substituents listed above.
As used herein, "aralkyl" refers to an alkyl group with an aryl substituent. Binding is through the alkyl group. "Alkaryl" refers to an aryl group with an alkyl substituent, where binding is through the aryl group. As used herein, the term "alkoxy" refers to the group "alkyl-0 — ", where alkyl is as defined above. Preferred alkoxy groups include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, iso-propoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, 1,2-dimethylbutoxy, and the like.
As used herein, the term "alkenyl" refers to an unsaturated, straight or branched hydrocarbon group preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-2 double bonds. Preferred alkenyl groups include ethenyl ( — CH=CH2), n-propenyl ( — CH2 CH=CH2), iso- propenyl ( — C(CH3)=CH2), and the like.
As used herein, the term "alkynyl" refers to an unsaturated, straight or branched hydrocarbon group preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-2 triple bonds.
As used herein, the term "acyl" refers to the groups alkyl-C(O) — , substituted alkyl-C(O)— , cycloalkyl-C(O)— , substituted cycloalkyl-C(O)— , aryl-C(O)— , substituted aryl-C(O) — , heteroaryl-C(O) — and heterocyclic-C(O) — where alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein. As used herein, the term "aminoacyl" refers to the group — C(O)NR33R33 where each R33 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein. As used herein, the term "acylamino" refers to the group R34 — C(O) — N(R33) — where each R34 is independently alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein. R33 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
As used herein, the term "acyloxy" refers to the group R34 — C(O) — where each R34 is independently alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
As used herein the term "amino acid" means an alpha amino acid selected from those amino acids which naturally occur in proteins but without regard for specific stereochemical properties. The term "protected amino acid" means an amino acid of which the alpha amino group has been converted to a less reactive moiety, but a moiety which can be converted back to the amino group with relative ease. The terms "amino acid residue" and "amino acid moiety" are used synonymously herein.
As used herein, the term "aryl" refers to an unsaturated aromatic carbocyclic group of from 6 to 14 carbon atoms having a single ring {e.g., phenyl) or multiple condensed (fused) rings {e.g., naphthyl or anthryl). Preferred aryls include phenyl, naphthyl and the like. Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the aryl substituent, such aryl groups can optionally be substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents and preferably 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, acyloxy, acylamino, alkaryl, aralkyl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, alkylthio, — SO-alkyl, — SO-substituted alkyl, — SO-aryl, — SO-heteroaryl, — SO2-alkyl, — SO2 substituted alkyl, — SO2-aryl, — SO2 -heteroaryl, trihalomethyl. Preferred substituents include alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, and thioalkoxy.
As used herein, the term "cycloalkyl" refers to cyclic alkyl groups of from 3 to 12 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings. Such cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl, and the like, or multiple ring structures such as adamantyl, and the like.
As used herein, the terms "halo" or "halogen" refer to fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo and preferably is either fluoro or chloro. As used herein, the term "heteroaryl" refers to an aromatic carbocyclic group of from 1 to 15 carbon atoms and 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur within at least one ring (if there is more than one ring).
Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the heteroaryl substituent, such heteroaryl groups can be optionally substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents and preferably 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, acyloxy, acylamino, alkaryl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, tbioheteroaryloxy, — SO-alkyl, — SO-substituted alkyl, — SO-aryl, — SO-heteroaryl, — SO2-alkyl, — SO2-substituted alkyl, — SO2-aryl, — SO2-heteroaryl, and trihalomethyl. Preferred substituents include alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, and thioalkoxy. Such heteroaryl groups can have a single ring (e.g., pyridyl or furyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., indolizinyl or benzothienyl). "Heterocycle" or "heterocyclic" refers to a monovalent saturated or unsaturated carbocyclic group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, from 1 to 15 carbon atoms and from 1 to 4 hetero atoms selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur and oxygen within the ring.
Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the heterocyclic substituent, such heterocyclic groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, trihalomethyl, and the like. Such heterocyclic groups can have a single ring or multiple condensed rings. As to any of the above groups that contain one or more substituents, it is understood, of course, that such groups do not contain any substitution or substitution patterns which are sterically impractical and/or synthetically non-feasible.
As used herein, "carboxylic acid derivatives" and "sulfonic acid derivatives" refer to -C(X)R31, — C(X)- N(R31)2, -C(X)OR31, -C(X)SR31, — SObR31, — SObOR31, — SObSR31, or SOb- N(R31)2, where X is 0, S or NR31, where R31 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl or aryl, and activated derivatives thereof, such as anhydrides, esters, and halides such as chlorides, bromides and iodides.
"Pharmaceutically acceptable salts" refers to pharmaceutically acceptable salts of a compound of Formulas HA, HB, HC and HD which salts are derived from a variety of organic and inorganic counter ions well known in the art and include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like; and when the molecule contains a basic functionality, salts of organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate and the like can be used as the pharmaceutically acceptable salt.
5. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Figures IA through IH illustrate the saturation of [3H]-MRE 3008-F20 binding to A3 adenosine receptors in human cancers. KD and Bmax values are reported in Table 8. Values are the means and S. E. of the mean of three separate experiments performed in triplicate. In the inset the Scatchard plot of the same data is shown.
Figure 2 illustrates colony formation assay of A375 cells. Cells were treated with different drugs and colonies were counted after 7 days. The values represent the mean ± SEM of four independent experiments. D = DMSO (control); T = paclitaxel, 0.75 ng/ml; M = MRE 3008F20, 10 μM; C = CI-IB-MECA, 10 μM; TM = paclitaxel plus MRE 3008F20; TC = paclitaxel plus CI-IB-MECA treated cells. *P<0.01 TM versus T. Analysis was by ANOVA followed by Dunnett's test.
Figure 3 A through 3D illustrate typical dose response curves of A375 cells exposed to increasing concentrations of cytotoxic agents vindesine (Figure 3A, Figure 3B) and Taxol™ brand paclitaxel (Figure 3C, Figure 3D). The curves with open symbols represent the cytotoxic agent alone. The curves with closed symbols represent the cytotoxic agent in the presence of 10 μM MRE 3008F2010. Figure 3A and Figure 3C illustrate G2/M phases arrest calculated as percentage of untreated cells (control). Figure 3B and Figure 3D illustrate the accumulation (percentage of total living cells) of the SUb-G1 (apoptosis) population. Cells were fixed in 70% ethanol, stained with PI, and analysed by flow cytometry.
Figure 4A through 4F illustrate induction of G2/M phases arrest by MRE 3008F20 on exponentially growing A375 cells treated with paclitaxel or with vindesine. A375 cells are treated for 24 hours with drug- vehicle as control (Figure 4A, Figure 4D); with 1 nM vindesine (Figure 4B), with 25 ng/ml paclitaxel (Figure 4E); with 1 nM vindesine plus 10 μM MRE 3008F20 (Figure 4C); or with 25 ng/ml paclitaxel plus 10 μM MRE 3008F20 (Figure 4F). Cells were fixed in 70% ethanol, stained with PI, and analysed by flow cytometry. The percentage of cells at Gi, S and G2/M phases was quantified. Apoptotic cells (Apo) were also detected. Figure 5 A illustrates dose-response curve for G2/M phases arrest of A375 cells exposed to increasing concentrations OfA3 adenosine receptor antagonists in the presence of 1 nM vindesine. Cells were fixed in 70% ethanol, stained with PI, and analysed by flow cytometry.
Figure 5B illustrates comparison between enhancing activity to vindesine by adenosine receptor antagonists (SEC50) and binding affinity to A3 adenosine receptors (Kj) in A375 cells (r = 0.96; PO.01).
Figure 6 A through 6D illustrate flow chromatogram for Rhodamine 123 (Rh 123) accumulation by A375 cells and HeL023 cells. Figure 6A illustrates the accumulation by A375 cells. Figure 6B illustrates the accumulation by A375 cells in the presence of 10 μM MRE 3008F20. Figure 6C illustrates the accumulation by HeL023 cells. Figure 6D illustrates the accumulation by HeL023 cells in the presence of 10 μM MRE 3008F20. In all cases, FMAX represents the maximum load of Rh 123 (gray filled area). FRES shows residual Rh 123 fluorescence after the P-gp mediated drug efflux was allowed for 3 hours (black filled area). Rh 123 unstained cell chromatogram is reported as unfilled area.
Figure 7A illustrates the effect of inhibitors of MEK- (PD98059), ERK 1/2- (UO 126) and p38MAPK~ (SB203580) -signalling on the G2M phases arrest induced by paclitaxel (filled bars) and by vindesine (empty bars). The residual G2/M phases arrest is reported as the percentage of control cells (cells treated with paclitaxel plus MRE 3008F20 for TU, TS, TP or with vindesine plus MRE 3008F20, for VU, VS, VP.
Figure 7B illustrates the effect of inhibitors of MEK- (PD98059), ERK 1/2- (U0126) and p38MAPK- (SB203580) -signalling on apoptosis induced by paclitaxel. T = paclitaxel (25 ng/ml), V = vindesine 1 μM, U = U0126 30 μM, P = PD9805920 μM, S = SB203580 1 μM, M = MRE 3008F20 10 μM, C = cells treated with metabolic inhibitor vehicle (DMSO) (control). Each bar represents the mean ± SE of four independent experiments performed on A375 cells. P<0.01 as follows: *TU versus internal control (paclitaxel plus MRE 3008F20); #VU versus internal control (vindesine plus MRE 3008F20); §P<0.05: 2 versus 1, 4 versus 3, 6 versus 5 and 8 versus 7. Analysis was by ANOVA followed by Dunnett's test. Figure 8. Apoptosis and cell cycle analysis of A375 cells cultured in normoxia or hypoxia for 24 hours. (A)5 Representative flow cytometric analysis of cell cycle using propidium iodide for DNA staining: shown is the pattern of A375 cells being in apoptosis and in G0ZG1 , S and G2/M phase during normoxia and hypoxia. Apoptotic cells (Apo) with sub-diploid DNA content are reported. (B), The quantitative analysis of sub- diploid and of cells in Go/Gi, S and G2/M phase is given in the graph. Plots are mean ± S .E. values (n=3). *P<0.01 compared with hypoxia.
Figure 9. Induction of HIF-I expression by hypoxia. A375 cells were cultured in normoxia for 4 hours (lane normoxia) or under hypoxic conditions for 2, 3, 4, 8, 16 and 24 hours (lanes 2-7). Whole cellular protein extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF-lα monoclonal antibody. The blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF-lβ expression using an anti-HIF-lβ monoclonal antibody. Tubulin shows equal loading protein.
Figure 10. Iinduction of HIF-I α expression by adenosine. (A), A375 cells were cultured in normoxia for 4 hours (lane normoxia). A375 cells were treated without (lane 1) or with adenosine 10 nM (lane 2), 100 nM (lane 3), 1 μM (lane 4), 10 μM (lane 5) and 100 μM (lane 6) in hypoxia for 4 hours. Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF-lα monoclonal antibody. The blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF-I β expression using an anti-HIF-lβ monoclonal antibody. Tubulin shows equal loading protein. (B), Typical dose response curve of A375 cells exposed to adenosine in hypoxia is shown. The HIF- lα immunoblot signals were quantified using molecular analyst /PC densitometry software (Bio-Rad). The mean densitometry data from 12 independent experiments (one of which is shown in Panel A) were normalized to the result obtained in cells in the absence of adenosine (control). Plots are mean ± S.E. values (n=12). (C), Effect of Ai, A2A5 A2B and A3 adenosine receptor antagonists. A375 cells were treated without (lane 1, control) or with adenosine 100 μM (lanes 2-6) and exposed to the A1 receptor antagonist DPCPX 100 nM (lane 3), or A2A receptor antagonist SCH 58261 100 nM (lane 4), or A2B receptor antagonist MRE 2029F20 100 nM (lane 5), or A3 receptor antagonist MRE 3008F20 100 nM (lane 6) in hypoxia for 4 hours. Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti- HIF-lα monoclonal antibody. The blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF- lβ expression using an anti-HIF-lβ monoclonal antibody. Tubulin shows equal loading protein. (D), The immunoblot signals were quantified using molecular analyst/PC densitometry software (Bio-Rad). The mean densitometry data from 5 independent experiments (one of which is shown in Panel C) were normalized to the result obtained in cells in the absence of adenosine (control). Plots are mean ± S.E. values (n=5). *P<0.01 compared with the control.
Figure 11. Induction of HIF-I expression by A3 receptor stimulation: time course. (A), A375 cells were cultured in normoxia for 4 hours (lane normoxia) or under hypoxic conditions in the absence (-) or in the presence (+) of the A3 receptor agonist Cl-IB- MECA (100 nM) for 2, 4, 8, 16 and 24 hours. Whole cellular protein extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF-lα monoclonal antibody. The blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF- lβ expression using an anti-HIF- lβ monoclonal antibody. Tubulin shows equal loading protein. (B), The immunoblot signals were quantified using molecular analyst/PC densitometry software (Bio-Rad). The mean densitometry data from 3 independent experiments (one of which is shown in Panel A) were normalized to the result obtained in cells in the absence of Cl-IB-MECA after 4 hours of hypoxia (control). Plots are mean ± S.E. values (n=3). *P<0.01 compared with the control.
Figure 12. Induction of HIF-I α expression by A3 receptor stimulation: dose response. (A), A375 cells were treated without (lane 1) or with Cl-IB-MECA 0.1 nM (lane 2), 1 nM (lane 3), 10 nM (lane 4) 100 nM (lane 5) and 1 μM (lane 6) in normoxia and in hypoxia for 4 hours. Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF-lα monoclonal antibody. The blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF- lβ expression using an anti-HIF-lβ monoclonal antibody. (B), Typical dose response curve of A375 cells exposed to adenosine in hypoxia is shown. The immunoblot signals were quantified using molecular analyst /PC densitometry software (Bio-Rad). The mean densitometry data from 12 independent experiments (one of which is shown in Panel A) were normalized to the result obtained in cells in the absence of Cl-IB-MECA (control). Plots are mean± S.E. values (n=12).
Figure 13. Effect of A3 receptor antagonist MRE 3008F20. (A), A375 cells were treated in hypoxia for 4 hours without (-) or with (+) Cl-IB-MECA 10 nM, MRE 3008F20 10 nM (lanes 3, 4) and MRE 3008F20 100 nM (lanes 5, 6). Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF-lα monoclonal antibody. The blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF- lβ expression using an anti-HIF- lβ monoclonal antibody. (B), The immunoblot signals were quantified using molecular analyst /PC densitometry software (Bio-Rad). The mean densitometry data from independent experiments (one of which is shown in Panel A) were normalized to the result obtained in hypoxic cells in the absence of Cl-IB-MECA (control, lane 1). Plots are mean ± S.E. values (n=3); *P<0.01 compared with the control. (C), A375 cells were treated in hypoxia for 4 hours without (lane 1) or with Cl-IB-MECA 10 nM (lanes 2-6) and MRE 3008F20 0.3 nM (lane 3), 1 nM (lane 4), 3 nM (lane 5) and 10 nM (lane 6). Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF-lα monoclonal antibody. The blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF-I β expression using an anti-HIF-lβ monoclonal antibody. (D), Typical dose response curve of A375 cells exposed to MRE 3008F20 in hypoxia is shown. The immunoblot signals were quantified using molecular analyst /PC densitometry software (Bio-Rad). The mean densitometry data from 3 independent experiments (one of which is shown in Panel C) were normalized to the result obtained in cells in the absence of Cl-IB-MECA (control). Plots are mean ± S.E. values (n=3).
Figure 14. A3 receptor expression silencing by siRNA transfection. (A), Analysis of siRNA transfection efficiency in A375 cells. Representative flow chromatograms of siRN A-FITC accumulation (gray filled area) in A375 cells transfected with siRNA-FITC. Unfilled area shows A375 cells transfected with RNAiFect™ Transfection reagent without SΪRNAA3. Fluorescence was quantified by flow cytometry 5 hours post-transfection. (B), Relative A3 receptor mRNA quantification, related to β-actin mRNA, by Real-Time RT-PCR. A375 cells were transfected by RNAiFect™ Transfection reagent or S1RNAA3 and cultured for 24, 48 and 72 hours. Plots are mean ± S.E. values (n=3); *P<0.01 compared with the control. (C), Western blot analysis using an anti-A3 receptor polyclonal antibody of protein extracts from A375 cells treated by RNAiFect™ Transfection reagent (control) or SiRNAA3 and cultured for 24, 48 and 72 hours in normoxia. Tubulin shows equal loading protein. (D), Densitometric quantification of A3 receptor Western blot; plots are mean ± S.E. values (n=5); *P<0.01 compared with the control. (E), Western blot analysis using an anti-HIF-lα monoclonal antibody of protein extracts from A375 cells treated by control-siRNA (-) or SiRNAA3 (+) for 72 hours and cultured with (+) or without (-) Cl-IB-MECA 100 nM for 4 hours in hypoxia. Tubulin shows equal loading protein. Figure 15. A3 receptor stimulation induces HIF-lα accumulation in various human cell lines under hypoxia. NCTC 2544 keratinocytes, U87MG glioblastoma, U2OS osteosarcoma human cells were treated without (-) or with (+) Cl-IB-MECA 100 nM in hypoxia for 4 hours. Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF- lα monoclonal antibody. The blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF- 1 β expression using an anti-HIF- 1 β monoclonal antibody.
Figure 16. A3 receptor stimulation induces HIF- lot accumulation through a transcription-independent pathway. (A), A375 cells were pretreated with actinoniycin D (10 μg/ml) for 30 minutes and then exposed to hypoxia. HIF-I α accumulation was induced by the exposure of A375 cells to Cl-IB-MECA 100 nM (+) for 4 hours in hypoxia in the absence (lane 2) or in the presence (lane 4) of actinomycin D. Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF-lα monoclonal antibody. Tubulin shows equal loading protein. (B), The immunoblot signals were quantified using molecular analyst/PC densitometry software (Bio-Rad). The mean densitometry data from independent experiments (one of which is shown in Panel A) were normalized to the result obtained in cells in the absence of Cl-IB-MECA after 4 hours of hypoxia (control=lane 1). Plots are mean ± S.E. values (n=3); *P<0.01 compared with the control.
Figure 17. Induction of HIF-I α accumulation by A3 receptor stimulation in normoxia. (A), A375 cells were exposed to 100 μM CoCl2 alone (lane 1) or in the presence of Cl-IB-MECA 1 nM (lane 2), 10 nM (lane 3), 100 nM (lane 4), 1 μM (lane 5) and 10 μM (lane 6) in normoxia for 4 hours. Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF- lα monoclonal antibody. The blot was then stripped and used to determine HIF- lβ expression using an anti-HIF-lβ monoclonal antibody. (B), A375 cells were exposed to 100 μM CoCl2 for 4 hours in normoxia. HIF-lα accumulation was induced by the exposure of A375 cells to Cl-IB-MECA 100 nM (+) for 4 (lanes 1 and 4) or 6 hours (lanes 5 and 6) in the absence (lanes 1 and 2) or in the presence (lanes 3-6) of cycloheximide (1 μM). Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF- lα monoclonal antibody. Tubulin shows equal loading protein. Figure 18. A3 receptor activation does not affect HIF- lα degradation in normoxia. (A), A375 cells were incubated in hypoxia in the absence (lanes 1 to 4) or in the presence of Cl-IB-MECA 100 nM (lanes 5 to 8). After 4 hours, melanoma cells were exposed to normoxia and a time-course of HIF-lα disappearance was performed at 0, 5, 10 and 15 minutes. Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF-lα monoclonal antibody. Tubulin shows equal loading protein. (B), The immunoblot signals were quantified using molecular analyst /PC densitometry software (Bio-Rad). The mean densitometry data from 3 independent experiments (one of which is shown in Panel A) were normalized to the result obtained in cells at time 0 (control). The fraction of HIF-I α remaining is indicated. Figure 19. Role of p38, p44 and p42 MAPKs in A3 signalling. (A), A375 cells were pretreated with or without SB202190 (1 and 10 μM) or U0126 (10 and 30 μM) and then exposed to Cl-IB-MECA 100 nM (+) or to drug vehicle (-) for 4 hours in hypoxia. Cellular extracts were prepared and subjected to immunoblot assay using an anti-HIF-lα monoclonal antibody. Tubulin shows equal loading protein. (B), A3 stimulation via Cl-IB- MECA induces p44/p42 activation after 4 hours hypoxia in A375 cells. Cl-IB-MECA 0 (lane C), 10 (lane 1), 100 (lane 2), 500 (lane 3) and 1000 (lane 4) nM was added to A375 cells. After 4 hours cells were harvested and subjected to immunoblot assay using antibodies specific for phosphorylated (Thr 183/Tyr 185) or total ρ44/p42 MAPKs. (C), The immunoblot signals were quantified using molecular analyst /PC densitometry software
(Bio-Rad). Densitometric analysis of p44 and p42 phosphorylated isoforms is reported. The mean densitometry data from 3 independent experiments (one of which is shown in Panel B) were normalized to the results obtained in cells in the absence of Cl-IB-MECA (lane C). Plots are mean ± S.E. values (n=3); *P<0.01 compared with the control (lane C). (D), A3 stimulation via Cl-IB-MECA induces p38 activation after 4 hours hypoxia in A375 cells. Cl-IB-MECA 0 (lane C), 10 (lane 1), 100 (lane 2), 500 (lane 3) and 1000 (lane 4) nM was added to A375 cells. After 4 hours cells were harvested and subjected to immunoblot assay using antibodies specific for phosphorylated (Thrl80/Tyrl82) or total p38 MAPKs. (E), The immunoblot signals were quantified using molecular analyst /PC densitometry software (Bio-Rad). Densitometric analysis of p38 phosphorylated isoforms is reported. The mean densitometry data from 3 independent experiments (one of which is shown in Panel D) were normalized to the result obtained in cells in the absence of Cl-IB-MECA (lane C). Plots are mean ± S.E. values (n=3); *P<0.01 compared with the control (lane C).
6. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION The present invention is based, in part, on the surprising discovery by the inventors that adenosine, a purine nucleoside present within hypoxic regions of solid tumors, modulates hypoxia-inducible factor 1 (HIF-I) expression. HIF-I, a heterodimeric transcription factor composed of HIF-I α and HIF- lβ subunits, is involved in tumor growth and angiogenesis. The inventors have found that in the human A375 melanoma cell line adenosine up-regulates HIF- lα protein expression in response to hypoxia in a dose- and time-dependent manner. The response to adenosine was not blocked by A1, A2A or A2B receptor antagonists, while it was abolished by A3 receptor antagonists. The inventors have found that Cl-IB-MECA, an adenosine analogue binding with high affinity to A3 receptors, mimicked adenosine effect in hypoxic cells. Furthermore, A3 receptor antagonists prevented HIF- lα protein accumulation in response to A3 receptor stimulation. Although not intending to be bound by a particular mechanism of action, the response to adenosine is generated at the cell surface since the inhibition of A3 receptor expression, by using small interfering RNA, abolished the nucleoside effects. The main intracellular signaling pathways sustained by A3 receptor stimulation in hypoxia involve p44/p42 mitogen- activated protein kinase (MAPK) and p38 MAPK activation. The inventors have thus found for the first time that adenosine plays a critical role in HIF- lα regulation in hypoxia.
The inventors have found that compounds which are antagonists of the adenosine receptors, preferably the A3 receptor, inhibit the protective effect of adenosine on growing tumor cells when such cells are starved of oxygen (/. e. , before an adequate vasculature is developed, or when anti-angiogenesis agents are administered. Although not intending to be bound by a particular mechanism of action, the antagonists of the invention can bind in the same site as adenosine, or can be allosteric antagonists (i.e., bind at a site different from where adenosine binds, but adversely affect the ability of adenosine to bind to the site or adversely affect the ability of adenosine, once bound to the adenosine receptors particularly A3 receptors, to protect growing tumor cells).
Accordingly, the present invention relates to methods for the treatment, prevention, and/or management of diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-I α and/or increased HIF- lα activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) by using adenosine receptor antagonists, particularly A3 receptor antagonists, alone or in combination with A1 receptor antagonists. Without being bound to a particular mechanism of action, administration of antagonists for the adenosine receptors antagonizes the protective effects against hypoxia and renders those cells susceptible to destruction due to hypoxia. Since the adenosine receptors, in particular, the A3 receptors, are responsible for sustained cellular protection against ischemia, antagonists for the adenosine receptors, particularly A3 receptors are particularly effective in enhancing the activity of anti-tumor agents.
The methods and compositions of the invention comprising A3 receptor antagonists are particularly useful when the levels of HIF-I α expression and/or activity are elevated above the standard or background level, as determined using methods known to those skilled in the art and dislosed herein. As used herein, "elevation" of a measured level of HIF-I α relative to a standard level means that the amount or concentration of HIF-I α in a sample or subject is sufficiently greater in a subject or sample relative to the standard as detected by any method now known in the art or to be developed in the future for measuring HIF- lα levels. For example, elevation of the measured level relative to a standard level may be any statistically significant elevation detectable. Such an elevation in HIF-I α expression and/or activity may include, but is not limited to about a 10%, about a 20%, about a 40%, about an 80%, about a 2-fold, about a 4-fold, about an 10-fold, about a 20- fold, about a 50-fold, about a 100-fold, about a 2 to 20 fold, 2 to 50 fold, 2 to 100 fold, 20 to 50 fold, 20 to 100 fold, elevation, relative to the standard. The term "about" as used herein, refers to levels of elevation of the standard numerical value plus or minus 10% of the numerical value.
The term "standard level" or "background level" as used herein refers to a baseline amount of HIF-I α level as determined in one or more normal subjects, i.e., a subject with no known history of past or current diseases, disorders or cancer. For example, a baseline may be obtained from at least one subject and preferably is obtained from an average of subjects (e.g., n=2 to 100 or more), wherein the subject or subjects have no prior history of diseases, disorders or cancer, especially no prior history of diseases associated with an aberrant level of expression and/or activity of HIF- 1 α.
In the present invention, the measurement of HIF-I α level may be carried out using an HIF-lα probe or a HIF-lα activity assay (see Section 5.4.4). As used herein, reference to measuring a level of HIF-lα in a method of the invention relates to any proxy for HIF-lα levels. For example, such levels may include, but are not limited to, the abundance of HIF-lα nucleic acid or amino acid sequences in a sample from a subject. A level of HIF-I α may correspond to the abundance of full-length HIF- lα protein. Alternatively, a level of HIF-I α , may correspond to abundance of a fragment, analog or derivative of HIF-I α protein. A level of HIF-I α can be determined by measuring the abundance of nucleic acids (or sequences complementary thereto) that corresponds to all or fragments of HIF-I α . In a preferred embodiment, the abundance of niRNA encoding HIF- lα is measured.
As used herein, a probe with which the amount or concentration of HIF- lα can be determined, includes but is not limited to an antibody, an antigen, a nucleic acid, a protein, or a small molecule. In a specific embodiment, the probe is the HIF-lα protein or a fragment thereof . In another embodiment, the probe is an antibody that immunospecifically binds to HIF-lα, such as e.g., a monoclonal antibody or a binding fragment thereof.
In a specific embodiment, measuring a level of HIF-I α comprises testing at least one aliquot of the sample, said step of testing comprising: (a) contacting the aliquot with an antibody or a fragment thereof that is immunospecific for HIF-I α, and (b) detecting whether and how much binding has occurred between the antibody or a fragment thereof and at least one species of HIF-I α in the aliquot. In yet another specific embodiment, measuring a level of HIF-I α comprises testing at least one aliquot, said step of testing comprising: (a) contacting the aliquot with a nucleic acid probe that is hybridizable to HIF- lα mRNA, and (b) detecting whether and how much hybridization has occurred between the nucleic acid probe and at least one species of HIF-I α mRNA in the aliquot. In both embodiments measuring a level of HIF-I α involves quantitating the amount of complex formation. For example the amount of complex formation between the antibody or a fragment thereof and at least one species of HIF- 1 α in the aliquot would correlate with the amount of at least one species of HIF-I α in the aliquot of the sample.
In a further specific embodiment, the antibody or other probe is labeled with a detectable marker. In yet another specific embodiment, the detectable marker is a chemiluminescent, enzymatic, fluorescent, or radioactive label. The therapeutic methods of the invention comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of an A3 receptor antagonist of the invention improve the therapeutic efficacy of treatment for diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-lα and/or increased HIF-lα activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) relative to the traditional modes of such therapies. Preferably the methods of the invention reduce the HIF-lα level to the background level within within one day, one week, 1 month, or 2 months of the commencement of the therapeutic regime. Preferably, once the methods of the invention reduce the level of HIF- lα to a particular level, that level is maintained during the treatment regimen, such that the maintained level of HIF-I α is sufficient and effective to result in regression of the disease, e.g., cancer.
In a most preferred embodiment, the methods of the invention result in a reduction of HIF-I α level to the background level. The invention encompasses reduction of the HIF-I α level to a level which is within about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50% of the background level. In a preferred specific embodiment, the invention encompasses a method for treatment, prevention and/or management of diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-lα and/or increased HIF-lα activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) comprising administering a therapeutically and/or prophylactically effective amount of an A3 receptor antagonist compound as disclosed herein.
The invention also encompasses a method for determining the prognosis of a a disease or disorder associated with overexpression of HIF-I α and/or increased HIF- lα activity in a subject. Preferably, the subject is human, hi some embodiments, the subject has been previously treated with a therapy regimen. The invention encompasses measuring at least a level of HIF-I α in a subject to determine if the subject is in need of the therapeutic and or prophylcatic methods of the inventon. The invention encompasses measuring a level of at least one HIF-I α in a sample obtained from the subject and comparing the level measured to a standard level, wherein elevation of the measured level of at least one HIF-I α relative to the standard level indicates that the subject is at an increased risk for progression of the disease or disorder, e.g., metastasis of the cancer.
The invention encompasses compounds which are adenosine receptor antagonists particularly A3 antagonists for use in the methods of the invention. Examples of such compounds are disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos 6,326,390; 6,407,236; 6,448,253;
6,358,964; and U.S. Publication Nos. 2003/0144266 and 2004/0067932; all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. In addition, other suitable adenosine A3 antagonists are disclosed in the references listed in Table I5 supra, the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties. The A3 receptor antagonists of the invention are particularly useful for prevention, treatment, and/or management of cancer, for example, as a single agent therapy or in combination with other modes of therapy for cancer. In preferred embodiments, the invention encompasses methods of treatment, prevention, or management of cancers which are A3 expressing cancers including, but not limited to, human leukemia, melanoma, pancreatic carcinoma, ovarian carcinoma, breast carcinoma, prostrate carcinoma, colon carcinoma, lung carcinoma, malignant melanomas, histiocytic lymphoma, and some forms of astrocytoma cells. In other preferred embodiments, the invention encompasses methods of treatment, prevention, or management which have high level of expression of HIF-I α including, but not limited to, cervical cancer (early stage), lung cancer (non-small cell lung carcinoma), breast cancer (including lymph node positive breast cancer and lymph node negative breast cancer), oligodendroglioma, orpharyngeal squamous cell carcinoma, ovarian cancer, oesophageal cancer, endometrial cancer, head and neck cancer, gastrointestinal stromal tumor of the stomach The methods of the invention are particularly useful in cancer therapy for providing tissue selectivity, such that the biological effect is observed in tumoral hypoxic cells, where high adenosine concentrations has resulted in increased HIF- lα accumulation.
The methods and compositions of the invention comprising A3 receptor antagonists (or A1 receptor antagonists or a combination thereof) are particularly useful for the treatment, inhibition or regression of solid tumors. As used herein, "solid tumors" refer to a locus of tumor cells where the majority of the cells are tumor cells or tumor-associated cells, including but not limited to laryngeal tumors, brain tumors, and other tumors of the head and neck; colon, rectal and prostate tumors; breast and thoracic solid tumors; ovarian and uterine tumors; tumors of the esophagus, stomach, pancreas and liver; bladder and gall bladder tumors; testicular cancer; skin tumors such as melanomas. Moreover, the tumors encompassed within the invention can be either primary or a secondary tumor resulting from metastasis of cancer cells elsewhere in the body to the chest.
The invention encompasses use of the adenosine receptor antagonists of the invention, particulalry A3 receptor antagonists in inhibiting tumor growth in a mammal, including humans. The invention encompasses methods for administering an effective amount of an adenosine receptor antagonists, preferably A3 receptor antagonists to inhibit the ability of adenosine to protect tumor cells.
In other embodiments, the present invention encompasses methods for treatment, prevention and/or management of cancer comprising administering an adenosine receptor antagonist, particularly an A3 receptor antagonist combination with other therapeutic and/or prophylactic agents, e.g., cytotoxic agents. The inventors have surprisingly found that adenosine A3 receptor antagonists synergistically enhance cytotoxic treatment and counter some forms of multi-drug resistance. Although not intending to be bound by a particular mechanism of action, the combination therapies of the invention will attack the tumor cell directly, inhibit growth of new blood vessels around the tumor cell, and, by virtue of the adenosine A3 antagonists, inhibit the ability of the cell to survive without the growth of new blood vessels. Inventors have discovered that high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonists are useful as enhancers for many chemotherapeutic treatments of adenosine A3 receptor expressing cancers. Surprisingly, high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonists also counter P-glycoprotein (P-gp) effuse pump multidrug resistance (MDR). Finally, high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonists are helpful in reducing or ameliorating side effects of cytotoxic agents, e.g., taxane
In other embodiments, the present invention encompasses the use of high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonists for enhancing chemotherapeutic treatment of cancers expressing adenosine A3 receptors and countering multi-drug resistance in cancers expressing P-glycoprotein or MRP. In preferred embodiments, adenosine A3 receptor antagonists are administered before or during administration of a taxane family, vinca alkaloid, camptothecin or antibiotic compound. Preferred high affinity A3 receptor antagonists include compounds of the general formulas HA, HB, HC and IID described herein, vide infra.
The present invention encompasses therapies which involve administering one or more of the compounds of the invention, to an animal, preferably a mammal, and most preferably a human, for preventing, treating, or ameliorating symptoms associated with a cancer, a disease or disorder associated with hypoxia-inducible factor 1 -a (HIF- 1 α). The invention further provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of the invention that specifically binds an A1 or A3 receptor and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier Preferably the pharmaceutical formulation includes an A3 receptor antagonist and one or more excipients. The formulations can also include other anti-tumor agents, including cytotoxic agents and other anti-angiogenesis agents, including adenosine A2A antagonists, such as ZM241385 and SCH 5861, adenosine A2B antagonists, such as MRE-20290-F20 and AS-16, and anti-VEGF antibodies, including humanized and chimeric antibodies. In a preferred embodiment, the composition includes an effective amount to inhibit tumor growth of an adenosine A3 receptor antagonist, a cytotoxic agent, and an anti-angiogenesis agent.
6.1 COMPOUNDS OF THE INVENTION
6.1.1 COMPOUNDS OF THE GENERAL FORMULA HA, HB AND IIC
In a specific embodiment, the invention provides methods for treating a disease or disorder associated with HIF- lα in a patient, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound having the following general formulas HA and HB:
Figure imgf000051_0001
Figure imgf000052_0001
wherein:
A is imidazole, pyrazole, or triazole;
R is -C(X)R1, -C(X)-N(R1);., -C(X)OR1, -C(X)SR1, -SObR1, — SObOR1, — SObSR1, or SOb- N(R^2 ;
R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, lower alkenyl, lower alkanoyl, or, if linked to a nitrogen atom, then taken together with the nitrogen atom, forms an azetidine ring or a 5-6 membered heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatoms such as N, O, S;
R2 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, aralkyl, substituted aralkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl;
R3 is furan, pyrrole, thiophene, benzofuran, indole, benzothiophene, optionally substituted with one or more substituents as described herein for substituted heteroaryl rings;
X is O, S, or NR1 ; b is 1 or 2.
Preferably, R1 is hydrogen; C1 to C8 alkyl; C2 to C7 alkenyl, C2 to C7 alkynyl; C3 to C7 cycloalkyl; C1 to C5 alkyl substituted with one or more halogen atoms, hydroxy groups, C1 to C4 alkoxy, C3 to C7 cycloalkyl or groups of formula — NR32R32, — C(O)NR32R32 ; aryl, substituted aryl wherein the substitution is selected from the group consisting of C1 to C4 alkoxy, C1 to C4 alkyl, nitro, amino, cyano, C1 to C4 haloalkyl, Ci to C4 haloalkoxy, carboxy, carboxyamido; C7 to C10 aralkyl in which the aryl moiety can be substituted with one or more of the substituents indicated above for the aryl group; a group of formula — (CH2)m-Het, wherein Het is a 5-6 membered aromatic or non aromatic heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of N, O, and S and m is an integer from O to 5, and in some embodiments from 1-5.
Preferred C1 to C8 alkyl groups are methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl and isopentyl. Examples of C3 to C7 cycloalkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, and cyclohexyl. Examples of C1 to C5 alkyl groups substituted with C3 to C7 cycloalkyl groups include cyclohexylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl, and 2-cyclopentylethyl. Examples of substituted C1 to C5 alkyl groups include 2-hydroxyethyl, 2-methoxyethyl, trifluoromethyl, 2-fluoroethyl, 2-chloroethyl, 3-aminopropyl, 2-(4-methyl-l-piperazine)ethyl, 2-(4-morpholinyl)ethyl, 2- aminocarbonylethyl, 2-dimethylaminoethyl, 3-dimethylaminopropyl. Aryl is preferably phenyl, optionally substituted with Br, Cl, F, methoxy, nitro, cyano, methyl, trifluoromethyl, difluoromethoxy groups. Examples of 5 to 6 membered ring heterocyclic groups containing N, O and/or S include piperazinyl, morpholinyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridyl, furyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl. Examples of C7 to C1O aralkyl groups comprise benzyl or phenethyl optionally substituted by one or more substituents selected from Cl, F, methoxy, nitro, cyano, methyl, trifluoromethyl, and difluoromethoxy. Preferably, R1 is hydrogen, C1 to C8 alkyl, aryl or C7 to C10 aralkyl, optionally substituted, preferably with halogen atoms. Preferably, X is O, R2 is C2-C3 alkyl or substituted alkyl and R3 is furan. In a specific embodiment R2 is alkyl.
Particularly preferred compounds are those in which R is a phenethyl group in which the phenyl ring is substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of chlorine, fluorine atoms, methoxy, nitro, cyano, methyl, trifluoromethyl, and difluoromethoxy groups. The possible meanings of A can be represented by the following structural formulae:
Figure imgf000053_0001
In a particular embodiment, the invention provides methods for treating a disease or disorder associated with HIF- lα in a patient, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound having the general formula HA: wherein:
A is imidazole, pyrazole, or triazole; R is -C(X)R1, -C(X)-N(R1);,, -C(X)OR1, -C(X)SR1, -SOnR1, -SOnSR1, or — SOnN(R1);,;
R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, lower alkenyl, lower alkanoyl, or, if linked to a nitrogen atom, then taken together with the nitrogen atom, forms an azetidine ring or a 5-6 membered heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatoms;
R2 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, aralkyl, substituted aralkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl or aryl;
R3 is furan, pyrrole, thiophene, benzofuran, benzypyrrole, benzothiophene, optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, acyloxy, acylamino, alkaryl, aryl, substituted aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, aminoacyloxy, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO- heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl, -SO2-heteroaryl, and trihalomethyl;
Figure imgf000054_0001
aIId n is 1 or 2. In a specific embodiment of the invention the method is conducted using the compound of the general formula IIA, wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl and aryl.
In another specific embodiment of the invention the method is conducted using the compound of the general formula IIA, wherein A is a triazolo ring. In another specific embodiment of the invention the method is conducted using the compound of the general formula IIA, wherein A is a pyrazolo ring.
In a specific embodiment, the method uses as high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonist the "phenyl-carbamoyl-amino" compounds of the general formula HC and pharmaceutical salts thereof:
Figure imgf000054_0002
wherein: A is imidazole, pyrazole, or triazole;
R2 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, aralkyl, substituted aralkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl or aryl;
R3 is furan; and R6 is aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycle or substituted heterocycle.
Non-limiting examples of the compounds of the general formula HA and HC include compounds listed below in Tables 2 and 3.
Table 2
# Compound
Ic 5-[[(3-CUorophenyl)arnino]carbonyl]amino-8-methyl-2-(2-furyl)-pyrazolo[4,3- e]-
1 ,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine,
2c 5-[[(4-Methoxyphenyl)amino]carbonyl]amino-8-methyl-2-(2-furyl)-pyrazolo[4,3 - e]-l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine,
3c 5 - [ [(3 -Chlorophenyl)amino]carbonyi] amino-8-ethyl-2-(2-furyl)-pyrazolo [4,3-e ] - l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine, 4c 5-[[(4-Methoxyphenyl)amino]carbonyl]amino-8-ethyl-2-(2-furyl)-pyrazolo[4,3- e]- l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine, 5c 5-[[(3-CUorophenyl)amino]carbonyl]amino-8-propyl-2-(2-furyl)-pyrazolo[4,3- e]- l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine, 6c 5-[[(4-Methoxyphenyl)amino]carbonyl]amino-8-propyl-2-(2-furyl)-pyrazolo[4,3 -e]-
1 ,2,4-triazolo[l ,5-c]pyrimidine,
7c 5- [ [(3 -Chlorophenyl)amino]carbonyl] amino-8-butyl-2-(2-furyl)-pyrazolo [4,3 -e ] - l,2,4-triazolo[l ,5-c]pyrimidine,
8c 5-[[(4-Methoxyphenyl)amino]carbonyl]amino-8-butyl-2-(2-furyl)-pyrazolo[4,3- e]-
1 ,2,4-triazolo [1,5 -c]pyrimidine, 9c 5-[[(3-Chlorophenyl)amino]carbonyl]amino-8-isopentyl-2-(2-furyl)-pyrazolo[4 ,3- e]- 1 ,2,4-triazolo [1 ,5-c]pyrimidine, 10c 5-[[(4-Methoxyphenyl)amino]carbonyl]amino-8-isopentyl-2-(2-furyl)-pyrazolo[ 4,3- e]-l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine, l ie 5-[[(3-Chlorophenyl)amino]]carbonyl]amino-8-(2-isopentenyl)-2-(2- furyl)pyrazolo [4,3 -e] 1 ,2,4-triazolo [ 1 ,5-c]pyrimidine,
12c 5-[[(4-Methoxyphenyl)amino]carbonyl]amino-8-(2-isopentenyl)-2-(2-furyl)- pyrazolo[4,3-e]-l ,2,4-triazolo[l ,5-c]pyrimidine5 13c 5-[[(3-Chlorophenyl)amino]carbonyl]amino-8-(2-phenylethyl)-2 (2-furyl)- pyrazolo[4,3-e]- 1 ,2,4-triazolo[l ,5-c]pyrimidine, 14c 5-[[(4-Methoxyphenyl)aniino]carbonylamino-8-(2-phenylethyl)-2-(2-fiiryl)- pyrazolo[4,3-e]-l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine, 15c 5-[[(3-Chlorophenyl)amino]carbonyl]amino-8-(3-phenylpropyl)-2-(2-furyl)- pyrazolo[4,3-e]-l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine, 16c 5-[[(4-Methoxyphenyl)amino]carbonyl]amino-8-(3-phenylpropyl)-2-(2-ftιryl)- pyrazolo[4,3-e]-l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine,
17c 5-[(Benzyl)carbonyl]amino-8-isopentyl-2-(2-furyl)-pyrazolo[4,3-e]-l,2,4- triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine,
18c 5-[(Benzyl)carbonyl]amino-8-(3-phenylpropyl)-2-(2-furyl)-pyrazolo[4,3-e]-l, 2,4- triazolofl ,5-c]pyrimidine. 101d N-[4-(diethylamino)phenyl]-N'-[2-(2-ftιryl)-8-methyl-8H-pyrazolo[4,3- e] [1 ,2,4]triazolo[l ,5-c]pyrimidin-5-yl]urea 102d N-[8-methyl-2-(2-furyl)-8H-pyrazolo[4,3-e][l,2,4]triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidin-5-yl]-N'-
[4-(diethylamino)phenyl]urea hydrochloride 103d N-[8-methyl-2-(2-furyl)-8H-pyrazolo[4,3-e][l,2,4]triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidin-5-yl]-N'-
[4-(dimethylamino)phenyl]urea hydrochloride
104d N-(2-(2-furyl)-8-methyl-8H-pyrazolo[4,3-e][l,2,4]triazolo[l,5-c] pyrimidin-5-yl)- N1- [4-(morpholin-4-ylsulfonyl)phenyl]urea
105d N-[2-(2-furyl)-8-methyl-8H-pyrazolo[4,3-e][l,2,4]triazolo[l,5-c] pyrimidin-5-yl]-
N1- {4-[(4-methylpiperazin-l -yl)sulfonyl] -phenyl} urea 106d N-[2-(2-furyl)-8-methyl-8H-pyrazolo[4,3-e][l,2,4]triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidin-5-yl]-N'- pyridin-4-yl urea 107d N-[2-(2-furyl)-8-methyl-8H-pyrazolo[4,3-e][l,2,4]triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidin-5-yl]-N'- pyridin-4-ylurea hydrochloride
Table 3
Figure imgf000056_0001
Compound No R^ R 61d H 4-MeO-Ph-NHCO 62d H 3-Cl-Ph-NHCO 64d t-C4H9 4-MeO-Ph-NHCO 65d t-C4H9 3-Cl-Ph-NHCO 66d CH3 Ph-NHCO 67d CH3 4-SO3H-Ph-NHCO 68d CH3 3,4-Cl2-Ph-NHCO 69d CH3 3,4-(OCH2-O)-Ph-NHCO 7Od CH3 4-(NO2)-Ph-NHCO 71d CH3 4-(CH3)-Ph-NHCO 72d CH3 Ph-(CH2)- CO 73d C2H5 Ph-NHCO 74d C2H5 4-SO3H-Ph-NHCO 75d C2H5 3,4-Cl2-Ph-NHCO 76d C2H5 3,4-(OCH2-O)-Ph-NHCO 77d C2H5 4-(NO2)-Ph-NHCO 78d C2H5 4-(CH3)-Ph-NHCO 79d C2H5 Ph-(CH2)- CO 8Od n-C3H7 Ph-NHCO 81d n-C3H7 4-SO3H-Ph-NHCO 82d n-C3H7 3,4-Cl2 -Ph-NHCO 83d n-C3H7 3,4-(OCH2-O)-Ph-NHCO 84d n-C3H7 4-(NO2)-Ph-NHCO 85d n-C3H7 4-(CH3)-Ph-NHCO 86d n-C3H7 Ph-(CH2)- CO 87d n-C4H9 Ph-NHCO 88d n-C4H9 4-SO3H-Ph-NHCO 89d n-C4H9 3,4-Cl2-Ph-NHCO 9Od n-C4H9 3,4-(OCH2-O)-Ph-NHCO 91d n-C4H9 4-(NO2)-Ph-NHCO 92d n-C4H9 4-(CH3)-Ph-NHCO 93d 2-(α-napthyl)ethyl Ph-(CH2)- CO 95d 2-(α-napthyl)ethyl 4-MeO-Ph-NHCO 96d 2-(α-napthyl)ethyl 3-Cl-Ph-NHCO 98d 2-(2,4,5-tribromo- 4-MeO-Ph-NHCO phenyl)ethyl 99d 2-(2,4,5-tribromo- 3-Cl-Ph-NHCO phenyl)ethyl lOOd 2-propen-l-yl 4-MeO-Ph-NHCO 108d n-C3H7 4-MeO-Ph-NHCO 109d C2H5 4-MeO-Ph-NHCO
6.1.2 COMPOUNDS OF THE GENERAL FORMULA HD
In another specific embodiment, the invention provides methods for treating a disease or disorder associated with HIF-I α in a patient, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound having the following general formula HD:
Figure imgf000058_0001
wherein:
R is -C(X)R1, -C(X)-N(R1K -C(X)OR1, -C(X)SR1, -SObR1, — SObOR1, —
Figure imgf000058_0002
R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, lower alkenyl, lower alkanoyl, or, if linked to a nitrogen atom, then taken together with the nitrogen atom, forms an azetidine ring or a 5-6 membered heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatoms such as N, O, S;
R2 is hydrogen, halogen, preferably chloro, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, aralkyl, substituted aralkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or substituted heteroaryl;
R3 is furan, pyrrole, thiophene, benzofuran, indole, benzothiophene, optionally substituted with one or more substituents as described herein for substituted heteroaryl rings;
X iS O5 S5 Or NR1; and b is 1 or 2. In a specific embodiment the compound is of the formula IID as described above, with the proviso that R2 is not halogen when R is — C(X)R1. A preferred R group is — C(X)- N(R1^5 where X is O.
For compounds of the general formula IID, preferably, R1 is hydrogen; C1-8 alkyl; C2-7 alkenyl, C2-7 alkynyl; C3-7 cycloalkyl; Ci .5 alkyl substituted with one or more halogen atoms, hydroxy groups, C1-4 alkoxy, C3-7 cycloalkyl or groups of formula — NR32, — C(O)NR32 ; aryl, substituted aryl wherein the substitution is selected from the group consisting of CM alkoxy, C1-4 alkyl, nitro, amino, cyano, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 haloalkoxy, carboxy, carboxyamido; C7-10 aralkyl in which the aryl moiety can be substituted with one or more of the substituents indicated above for the aryl group; a group of formula —
(CH2)m — Het, wherein Het is a 5-6 membered aromatic or non aromatic heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of N, O, and S and m is an integer from 1 to 5;
For compounds of the general formula IID, preferred Ci-8 alkyl groups are methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl and isopentyl. Examples OfC3-7 cycloalkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, and cyclohexyl. Examples Of Ci-5 alkyl groups substituted with C3-7 cycloalkyl groups include cyclohexylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl, and 2- cyclopentylethyl. Examples of substituted C1-5 alkyl groups include 2-hydroxyethyl, 2- methoxyethyl, trifluoromethyl, 2-fluoroethyl, 2-chloroethyl, 3-aminopropyl, 2-(4methyl-l- piperazine)ethyl, 2-(4-morpholinyl)ethyl, 2-aminocarbonyIethyl, 2-dimethylaminoethyl, 3- dimethylaminopropyl. Aryl is preferably phenyl, optionally substituted with Cl, F, methoxy, nitro, cyano, methyl, trifluoromethyl, difluoromethoxy groups. Examples of 5 to 6 membered ring heterocyclic groups containing N, O and/or S include piperazinyl, morpholinyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridyl, furyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl. Examples of C7-io aralkyl groups comprise benzyl or phenethyl optionally substituted by one or more substituents selected from Cl, F, methoxy, nitro, cyano, methyl, trifluoromethyl, and difluoromethoxy. Preferably, R1 is hydrogen, Ci-8 alkyl, aryl or C7-io aralkyl, optionally substituted, preferably with halogen atoms. Preferably, X is O, R2 is chloro, C2-3 alkyl or substituted alkyl and R3 is furan. Particularly preferred compounds are those in which R is a phenethyl group in which the phenyl ring is substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of chlorine, fluorine atoms, methoxy, nitro, cyano, methyl, trifluoromethyl, and difluoromethoxy groups. Non-limiting examples of compounds of the formula HD include compounds listed below in Table.
Table 4 # Compound
1 b 5- [[4-methoxyphenyl)amino] carbonyl] amino-9-chloro-2-(2-furyl)- 1 ,2,4-triazolo [1,5- bc]quinazoline 2b 5-[[3-chlorophenyl)amino]carbonyl]amino-9-chloro-2-(2-furyl)- 1 ,2,4-triazolo[l ,5- cjquinazoline
6.2 METHODS OF PREPARING THE COMPOUNDS OF THE
INVENTION
Compounds of the general formulas HA, IIB and HC can be prepared, for example, as described in U.S. Patent No.'s 6,407,236; 6,448,253 and U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 10/134,219, filed April 26, 2002; the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties. Compounds of the general formula HD can be prepared, for example, as described in U.S. Patent No. 6,358,964; the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
Where necessary, certain synthetic intermediates used to prepare compounds used in the invention may contain reactive moeities. Those skilled in the art of organic chemistry will appreciate that reactive and fragile functional groups often must be protected prior to a particular reaction, or sequence of reactions, and then restored to their original forms after the last reaction is completed. Usually groups are protected by converting them to a relatively stable derivative. For example, a hydroxyl group may be converted to an ether group and an amine group converted to an amide or carbamate. Methods of protecting and de-protecting, also known as "blocking" and "de-blocking," are well known and widely practiced in the art, e.g., see T. Green, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley, New York (1981) or Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry, Ed. J. F. W. McOmie, Plenum Press, London (1973). 6.3 PROPHYLACTIC AND THERAPEUTIC METHODS
The present invention relates to methods for the treatment, prevention, and/or management of diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-I α and/or increased HIF-I α activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) by using A3 receptor antagonists alone or in combination with Ai receptor antagonists.
The methods and compositions of the invention comprising A3 receptor antagonists are particularly useful when the levels of HIF-I α expression and/or activity are elevated above the standard or background level, as determined using methods known to those skilled in the art and dislosed herein. For example, elevation of the measured level relative to a standard level may be any statistically significant detectable elevation. Such an elevation of HIF-I α expression and/or activity may include, but is not limited to about a 10%, about a 20%, about a 40%, about an 80%, about a 2-fold, about a 4-fold, about a 10- fold, about a 20-fold, about a 50-fold, about a 100-fold, about a 2 to 20 fold, 2 to 50 fold, 2 to 100 fold, 20 to 50 fold, 20 to 100 fold, elevation, relative to the standard. The term "about" as used herein, refers to levels of elevation of the standard numerical value plus or minus 10% of the numerical value.
The therapeutic methods of the invention comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of an A3 receptor antagonist of the invention improve the therapeutic efficacy of treatment for diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF- lα and/or increased HIF- lα activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) relative to the traditional modes of such therapies. Preferably the methods of the invention reduce the HIF- lα level to the background level within 1 day, 1 week, 1 month, at least 2 months of the commencement of the therapeutic regime. In a most preferred embodiment, the methods of the invention result in a reduction of an HIF-I α level to the background level. The invention encompasses reduction of the HIF- lα level to a level which is within about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50% of the background level. In a preferred specific embodiment, the invention encompasses a method for treatment, prevention and/or management of diseases or disorders associated with overexpression of HIF-I α and/or increased HIF- lα activity (e.g., cancer, respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders) comprising administering a therapeutically and/or prophylactically effective amount of an A3 receptor antagonist compound as disclosed herein.
Compounds of the present invention that function as prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents of a disease or disorder can be administered to an animal, preferably a mammal, and most preferably a human, to treat, prevent or ameliorate one or more symptoms associated with the disease or disorder. The subject is preferably a mammal such as non-primate (e.g., cows, pigs, horses, cats, dogs, rats, etc.) and a primate (e.g., monkey, such as a cynomolgous monkey and a human). In a preferred embodiment, the subject is a human. Compounds of the invention can be administered in combination with one or more other prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents useful in the treatment, prevention or management of a HIF-I α-mediated disorders, which are improved or ameliorated by modulation of HIF-I expression or activities.
The amount of the compounds of the invention (including adenosine A1 and/or A3 antagonists) required to be effective will, of course, vary with the individual mammal being treated and is ultimately at the discretion of the medical or veterinary practitioner. The factors to be considered include the condition being treated, the route of administration, the nature of the formulation, the mammal's body weight, surface area, age and general condition, and the particular compound to be administered. However, a suitable effective dose is in the range of about 0.1 μg/kg to about 100 mg/kg, about 0.1 μg/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 0.1 μg/kg to about lg/kg, about 100 ug/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 100 ug/kg to aboutlg/kg, about 1 mg/kg to about 100 mg/kg, about 1 mg/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 1 mg/kg to about lg/kg of the patient's body weight.
The total daily dose may be given as a single dose, multiple doses, e.g., two to six times per day, or by intravenous infusion for a selected duration. Dosages above or below the range cited above are within the scope of the present invention and may be administered to the individual patient if desired and necessary.
The methods and compositions of the invention comprise the administration of one or more compounds of the invention to subjects/patients suffering from or expected to suffer from a disease or disorder.
6.3.1 COMBINATION THERAPY
The invention encompasses combination therapies by administration of one or more compounds of the invention in combination with administration of one or more other therapies that are traditionally used for the treatment and/or prevention of the particular disease or disorder being treated or prevented. For example in the case of cancer, the A3 and/or A1 receptor antagonists of the invention may be administered in combination with one or more cancer therapies such as, but not limited to, chemotherapies, radiation therapies, hormonal therapies, and/or biological therapies/immunotherapies.
Prophylactic and therapeutic compounds that may be used in the methods and compositions of the invention include, but are not limited to, proteinaceous molecules, including, but not limited to, peptides, polypeptides, proteins, including post-translationally modified proteins, antibodies, etc.; small molecules (less than 1000 daltons), inorganic or organic compounds; nucleic acid molecules including, but not limited to, double-stranded or single-stranded DNA, double-stranded or single-stranded RNA, as well as triple helix nucleic acid molecules. Prophylactic and therapeutic compounds can be derived from any known organism (including, but not limited to, animals, plants, bacteria, fungi, and protista, or viruses) or from a library of synthetic molecules, hi certain embodiments, one or more compounds of the invention are administered to a mammal, preferably a human, concurrently with one or more other therapeutic agents useful for the treatment of cancer or a disorder. The term "concurrently" is not limited to the administration of prophylactic or therapeutic agents at exactly the same time, but rather it is meant that compounds of the invention and the other agent are administered to a subject in a sequence and within a time interval such that the compounds of the invention can act together with the other agent to provide an increased benefit than if they were administered otherwise. For example, each prophylactic or therapeutic agent may be administered at the same time or sequentially in any order at different points in time; however, if not administered at the same time, they should be administered sufficiently close in time so as to provide the desired therapeutic or prophylactic effect. Each therapeutic agent can be administered separately, in any appropriate form and by any suitable route.
In various embodiments, the prophylactic or therapeutic agents are administered less than 1 hour apart, at about 1 hour apart, at about 1 hour to about 2 hours apart, at about 2 hours to about 3 hours apart, at about 3 hours to about 4 hours apart, at about 4 hours to about 5 hours apart, at about 5 hours to about 6 hours apart, at about 6 hours to about 7 hours apart, at about 7 hours to about 8 hours apart, at about 8 hours to about 9 hours apart, at about 9 hours to about 10 hours apart, at about 10 hours to about 11 hours apart, at about 11 hours to about 12 hours apart, no more than 24 hours apart or no more than 48 hours apart, hi preferred embodiments, two or more components are administered within the same patient visit.
The dosage amounts and frequencies of administration provided herein are encompassed by the terms therapeutically effective and prophylactically effective. The dosage and frequency further will typically vary according to factors specific for each patient depending on the specific therapeutic or prophylactic agents administered, the severity and type of cancer, the route of administration, as well as age, body weight, response, and the past medical history of the patient. Suitable regimens can be selected by one skilled in the art by considering such factors and by following, for example, dosages reported in the literature and recommended in the Physician 's Desk Reference (58th ed.,
2004).
6.3.2 ANTAGONIST-BASED THERAPY/PROPHYLAXIS
6.3.2.1 CANCERS
Compounds of the invention, particularly the A1 and A3 receptor antagonists, can be used alone or in combination with other anti-cancer agents, e.g., therapeutic antibodies known in the art to prevent, inhibit or reduce the growth of primary tumors or metastasis of cancerous cells. In a specific embodiment, a compound of the invention, when administered alone or in combination with an anti-cancer agent, inhibits or reduces the growth of primary tumor or metastasis of cancerous cells by at least 99%, at least 95%, at least 90%, at least 85%, at least 80%, at least 75%, at least 70%, at least 60%, at least 50%, at least 45%, at least 40%, at least 45%, at least 35%, at least 30%, at least 25%, at least 20%, or at least 10% relative to the growth of primary tumor or metastasis in absence of said compound of the invention. In a preferred embodiment, compounds of the invention particularly the A1 and A3 receptor antagonists in combination with an anti-cancer agent inhibit or reduce the growth of primary tumor or metastasis of cancer by at least 99%, at least 95%, at least 90%, at least 85%, at least 80%, at least 75%, at least 70%, at least 60%, at least 50%, at least 45%, at least 40%, at least 45%, at least 35%, at least 30%, at least 25%, at least 20%, or at least 10% relative to the growth or metastasis in absence of said compounds. The methods of the invention are particularly useful for the treatment of solid tumors, hypoxic tumors, A3 expressing tumors and HIF- lα expressing tumors.
The compounds of the invention particularly the A1 and A3 receptor antagonists can be used to treat solid tumors. Solid tumors which can be treated in accordance with the methods of the invention include without limitation fibrodysplasia ossificans progressiva, prostate cancer, benign prostatic hyperplasia, recessive dystrophic epidermolysis bullosa (RDEB), Lewis lung carcinoma, breast cancer, and brain tumors.
As used herein, the term "A3 expressing cancers" refers to human cancers that express the adenosine A3 receptor or that otherwise comprise elevated concentrations of adenosine A3 receptors. Elevated concentration is determined by comparison to normal, non-cancerous tissues of a similar cell type. Examples of A3 expressing cancers include, without limitation, human leukemia, melanoma, pancreatic carcinoma, breast carcinoma, prostrate carcinoma, colon carcinoma, lung carcinomamalignant melanomas, histiocytic lymphoma, and some forms of astrocytoma cells. As used herein the term "HIF- lα expressing cancers" refers to human cancer that express HIF-I α or that otherwise comprise elevated concentrations of HIF-I α. Elevated concentration is determined by comparison to normal, non-cancerous tissues of a similar cell type. Examples of HIF-I α expressing cancers include without limitation cervical cancer (early stage), lung cancer (non-small cell lung carcinoma), breast cancer (including lymph node positive breast cancer and lymph node negative breast cancer), oligodendroglioma, orpharyngeal squamous cell carcinoma, ovarian cancer, oesophageal cancer, endometrial cancer, head and neck cancer, gastrointestinal stromal tumor of the stomach. In particular embodiments, the methods and compositions of the invention comprise the administration of one or more A3 receptor antagonist compounds of the invention (alone or in combination with other anti-cancer agents) to subjects/patients suffering from or expected to suffer from cancer, e.g., have a genetic predisposition for a particular type of cancer, have been exposed to a carcinogen, or are in remission from a particular cancer. The methods and compositions of the invention may be used as a first line or second line cancer treatment. Included in the invention is also the treatment of patients undergoing other cancer therapies and the methods and compositions of the invention can be used before any adverse effects or intolerance of these other cancer therapies occurs. The invention also encompasses methods for administering one or more A3 receptor antagonist compounds of the invention to treat or ameliorate symptoms in refractory patients. In a certain embodiment, that a cancer is refractory to a therapy means that at least some significant portion of the cancer cells are not killed or their cell division arrested. The determination of whether the cancer cells are refractory can be made either in vivo or in vitro by any method known in the art for assaying the effectiveness of treatment on cancer cells, using the art-accepted meanings of "refractory" in such a context. In various embodiments, a cancer is refractory where the number of cancer cells has not been significantly reduced, or has increased. The invention also encompasses methods for administering one or more A3 receptor antagonist compounds of the invention to prevent the onset or recurrence of cancer in patients predisposed to having cancer. In particular embodiments, the A3 receptor antagonists of the invention are administered to reverse resistance or reduced sensitivity of cancer cells to certain hormonal, radiation and chemotherapeutic agents thereby resensitizing the cancer cells to one or more of these agents, which can then be administered (or continue to be administered) to treat or manage cancer, including to prevent metastasis. In alternate embodiments, the invention provides methods for treating cancer in a subject by administering one or more A3 receptor antagonists of the invention in combination with any other treatment or to patients who have proven refractory to other treatments but are no longer on these treatments. In certain embodiments, the patients being treated by the methods of the invention are patients already being treated with chemotherapy, radiation therapy, hormonal therapy, or biological therapy/immunotherapy. Among these patients are refractory patients and those with cancer despite treatment with existing cancer therapies, hi other embodiments, the patients have been treated and have no disease activity and one or more A3 receptor antagonist compounds of the invention are administered to prevent the recurrence of cancer.
Additionally, the invention also provides methods of treatment of cancer as an alternative to chemotherapy, radiation therapy, hormonal therapy, and/or biological therapy/immunotherapy where the therapy has proven or may prove too toxic, i.e., results in unacceptable or unbearable side effects, for the subject being treated. The subject being treated with the methods of the invention may, optionally, be treated with other cancer treatments such as surgery, chemotherapy, radiation therapy, hormonal therapy or biological therapy, depending on which treatment was found to be unacceptable or unbearable.
In other embodiments, the invention provides administration of one or more A3 receptor antagonist compounds of the invention without any other cancer therapies for the treatment of cancer, but who have proved refractory to such treatments. In specific embodiments, patients refractory to other cancer therapies are administered one or more A3 receptor antagonist compounds in the absence of cancer therapies.
In a preferred embodiment when treating A3 expressing cancers, a high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonist and a chemotherapeutic cancer agent are administered to the patient. The combination therapy enhances the effect of the chemotherapeutic cancer agent and prevents multi-drug resistance from developing. Although not intending to be bound to a particular mechanism of action, the chemotherapeutic cancer agents showing desirable response to the present invention are typical of agents noted for developing P-gp or MRP class multi-drug resistance, including, without limitation, taxane compounds, vinca alkaloids, camptothecins and antibiotics useful as chemotherapeutic agents.
The invention encompasses combination therapies for treating cancers that have already developed multi-drug resistance. In this case, the high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonist counters the existing MDR while further enhancing the effect of the chemotherapeutic cancer agent. As exemplified in the working examples, the present invention is not effective for all forms of MDR cancers. The MDR cancers showing desirable response to the present invention are in the P-gp and MRP classes.
When the chemotherapeutic cancer agents is a compound of the taxane family, the high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonist is preferably administered either before or during administration of the taxane compound. Although not intending to be bound to a particular theory, this is done to reduce the incidence of hypersensitivity to the taxane agent. Commercially available compounds of the taxane family are paclitaxel (commercially available under the tradename TAXOL from Bristol-Myers Squibb Company, Princeton, NY and as a generic drug from IVAX Corp, Miami, FL) and docetaxel (commercially available under the tradename TAXOTERE from Aventis Pharmaceuticals, Collegeville, PA), which are encompassed in the instant invention. It is noted that additional taxane family chemotherapeutic cancer agents are presently in development and testing and encompassed within the invention. In another preferred embodiment for treating existing tumors, the composition comprises an effective amount of an adenosine A3 receptor antagonist and a chemotherapeutic agent that is a taxane family compound, for example paclitaxel or docetaxel to inhibit tumor growth. Paclitaxel is commercially available under the tradename TAXOL from Bristol-Myers Squibb Company, Princeton, NY and as a generic drug from IVAX Corp, Miami, FL. Docetaxel is commercially available under the tradename TAXOTERE from Aventis Pharmaceuticals, Collegeville, PA. In this embodiment the A3 antagonist may reduce the growth rate of cancerous cells, interfere with adenosine protective effects against hypoxia, enhance the chemotherapeutic effect of the taxane, reduce hypersensitivity reactions in the patient and counter development of multi- drug resistance.
Cancers and related disorders that can be treated or prevented by methods and compositions comprising A1 and/or A3 receptor antagonists of the present invention include, but are not limited to, the following: Leukemias including, but not limited to, acute leukemia, acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute myelocytic leukemias such as myeloblasts, promyelocyte, myelomonocytic, monocytic, erythroleukemia leukemias and myelodysplastic syndrome, chronic leukemias such as but not limited to, chronic myelocytic (granulocytic) leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, hairy cell leukemia; polycythemia vera; lymphomas such as but not limited to Hodgkin's disease, non-Hodgkin's disease; multiple myelomas such as but not limited to smoldering multiple myeloma, nonsecretory myeloma, osteosclerotic myeloma, plasma cell leukemia, solitary plasmacytoma and extramedullary plasmacytoma; Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia; monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance; benign monoclonal gammopathy; heavy chain disease; bone and connective tissue sarcomas such as but not limited to bone sarcoma, osteosarcoma, chondrosarcoma, Ewing's sarcoma, malignant giant cell tumor, fibrosarcoma of bone, chordoma, periosteal sarcoma, soft-tissue sarcomas, angiosarcoma (hemangiosarcoma), fibrosarcoma, Kaposi's sarcoma, leiomyosarcoma, liposarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, neurilemmoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, synovial sarcoma; brain tumors including but not limited to, glioma, astrocytoma, brain stem glioma, ependymoma, oligodendroglioma, nonglial tumor, acoustic neurinoma, craniopharyngioma, medulloblastoma, meningioma, pineocytoma, pineoblastoma, primary brain lymphoma; breast cancer including, but not limited to, adenocarcinoma, lobular (small cell) carcinoma, intraductal carcinoma, medullary breast cancer, mucinous breast cancer, tubular breast cancer, papillary breast cancer, Paget' s disease, and inflammatory breast cancer; adrenal cancer, including but not limited to, pheochromocytom and adrenocortical carcinoma; thyroid cancer such as but not limited to papillary or follicular thyroid cancer, medullary thyroid cancer and anaplastic thyroid cancer; pancreatic cancer, including but not limited to, insulinoma, gastrinoma, glucagonoma, vipoma, somatostatin-secreting tumor, and carcinoid or islet cell tumor; pituitary cancers including but not limited to, Gushing' s disease, prolactin-secreting tumor, acromegaly, and diabetes insipius; eye cancers including but not limited to, ocular melanoma such as iris melanoma, choroidal melanoma, and cilliary body melanoma, and retinoblastoma; vaginal cancers, including but not limited to, squamous cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, and melanoma; vulvar cancer, including but not limited to, squamous cell carcinoma, melanoma, adenocarcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, sarcoma, and Paget' s disease; cervical cancers including but not limited to, squamous cell carcinoma, and adenocarcinoma; uterine cancers including but not limited to, endometrial carcinoma and uterine sarcoma; ovarian cancers including but not limited to, ovarian epithelial carcinoma, borderline tumor, germ cell tumor, and stromal tumor; esophageal cancers including but not limited to, squamous cancer, adenocarcinoma, adenoid cyctic carcinoma, mucoepidermoid carcinoma, adenosquamous carcinoma, sarcoma, melanoma, plasmacytoma, verrucous carcinoma, and oat cell (small cell) carcinoma; stomach cancers including but not limited to, adenocarcinoma, fungating (polypoid), ulcerating, superficial spreading, diffusely spreading, malignant lymphoma, liposarcoma, fibrosarcoma, and carcinosarcoma; colon cancers; rectal cancers; liver cancers including but not limited to hepatocellular carcinoma and hepatoblastoma, gallbladder cancers including but not limited to, adenocarcinoma; cholangiocarcinomas including but not limited to, pappillary, nodular, and diffuse; lung cancers including but not limited to, non-small cell lung cancer, squamous cell carcinoma (epidermoid carcinoma), adenocarcinoma, large-cell carcinoma and small-cell lung cancer; testicular cancers including but not limited to, germinal tumor, seminoma, anaplastic, classic (typical), spermatocytic, nonseminoma, embryonal carcinoma, teratoma carcinoma, choriocarcinoma (yolk-sac tumor), prostate cancers including but not limited to, adenocarcinoma, leiomyosarcoma, and rhabdomyosarcoma; penal cancers; oral cancers including but not limited to, squamous cell carcinoma; basal cancers; salivary gland cancers including but not limited to, adenocarcinoma, mucoepidermoid carcinoma, and adenoidcystic carcinoma; pharynx cancers including but not limited to, squamous cell cancer, and verrucous; skin cancers including but not limited to, basal cell carcinoma, squamous cell carcinoma and melanoma, superficial spreading melanoma, nodular melanoma, lentigo malignant melanoma, acral lentiginous melanoma; kidney cancers including but not limited to, renal cell cancer, adenocarcinoma, hypernephroma, fibrosarcoma, transitional cell cancer (renal pelvis and/ or uterer); Wilms' tumor; bladder cancers including but not limited to, transitional cell carcinoma, squamous cell cancer, adenocarcinoma, carcinosarcoma. In addition, cancers include myxosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, mesothelioma, synovioma, hemangioblastoma, epithelial carcinoma, cystadenocarcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma and papillary adenocarcinomas (for a review of such disorders, see Fishman et ah, 1985, Medicine, 2d Ed., J.B. Lippincott Co., Philadelphia and Murphy et al, 1997, Informed Decisions: The Complete Book of Cancer Diagnosis, Treatment, and Recovery, Viking Penguin, Penguin Books U.S.A., Inc., United States of America).
Accordingly, the methods and compositions of the invention are also useful in the treatment or prevention of a variety of cancers or other abnormal proliferative diseases, including (but not limited to) the following: carcinoma, including that of the bladder, breast, colon, kidney, liver, lung, ovary, pancreas, stomach, cervix, thyroid and skin; including squamous cell carcinoma; hematopoietic tumors of lymphoid lineage, including leukemia, acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute lymphoblastic leukemia, B-cell lymphoma, T-cell lymphoma, Berketts lymphoma; hematopoietic tumors of myeloid lineage, including acute and chronic myelogenous leukemias and promyelocytic leukemia; tumors of mesenchymal origin, including fibrosarcoma and rhabdomyoscarcoma; other tumors, including melanoma, seminoma, tetratocarcinoma, neuroblastoma and glioma; tumors of the central and peripheral nervous system, including astrocytoma, neuroblastoma, glioma, and schwannomas; tumors of mesenchymal origin, including fibrosafcoma, rhabdomyoscarama, and osteosarcoma; and other tumors, including melanoma, xenoderma pegmeήtosum, keratoactanthoma, seminoma, thyroid follicular cancer and teratocarcinoma. It is also contemplated that cancers caused by aberrations in apoptosis would also be treated by the methods and compositions of the invention. Such cancers may include but not be limited to follicular lymphomas, carcinomas with p53 mutations, hormone dependent tumors of the breast, prostate and ovary, and precancerous lesions such as familial adenomatous polyposis, and myelodysplastic syndromes. In specific embodiments, malignancy or dysproliferative changes (such as metaplasias and dysplasias), or hyperproliferative disorders, are treated or prevented by the methods and compositions of the invention in the ovary, bladder, breast, colon, lung, skin, pancreas, or uterus. In other specific embodiments, sarcoma, melanoma, or leukemia is treated or prevented by the methods and compositions of the invention.
Cancers associated with the cancer antigens may be treated or prevented by administration of the A3 receptor antagonists of the invention in combination with an antibody that binds the cancer antigen and is cytotoxic. In one particular embodiment, the A3 receptor antagonists of the invention enhance the antibody mediated cytotoxic effect of the antibody directed at the particular cancer antigen. For example, but not by way of limitation, cancers associated with the following cancer antigen may be treated or prevented by the methods and compositions of the invention. KS 1/4 pan-carcinoma antigen (Perez and Walker, 1990, J. Immunol. 142:32-37; Bumal, 1988, Hybridoma 7(4):407-415), ovarian carcinoma antigen (CA125) (Yu et al, 1991, Cancer Res. 51(2):48-475), prostatic acid phosphate (Tailor et al , 1990, Nucl. Acids Res. 18(1):4928), prostate specific antigen (Henttu and Vihko, 1989, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 10(2):903-910; Israeli et al, 1993, Cancer Res. 53:227-230), melanoma-associated antigen p97 (Estin et al, 1989, J Natl. Cancer Instil 81(6):445-44), melanoma antigen gp75 (Vijayasardahl et al, 1990, J. Exp. Med. 171(4):1375-1380), high molecular weight melanoma antigen (HMW-MAA) (Natali et al, 1987, Cancer 59:55-3; Mittelman et al, 1990, J. Clin. Invest. 86:2136-2144)), prostate specific membrane antigen, carcinoembryonic antigen (CEA) (Foon et al, 1994, Proc. Am. Soc. Clin. Oncol. 13:294), polymorphic epithelial mucin antigen, human milk fat globule antigen, Colorectal tumor-associated antigens such as: CEA, TAG-72 (Yokata et al, 1992, Cancer Res. 52:3402-3408), CO17-lA (Ragnhammar et al, 1993, Int. J. Cancer 53:751-758); GICA 19-9 (Eeήyn et al, 1982, J Clin. Immunol 2:135), CTA-I and LEA, Burkitt's lymphoma antigen-38.13, CD19 (Ghetie etal, 1994, Blood 83:1329-1336), human B-lymphoma antigen-CD20 (Reff et al, 1994, Blood 83:435-445), CD33 (Sgouros et al, 1993, J. Nucl Med. 34:422-430), melanoma specific antigens such as ganglioside GD2 (Saleh et al, 1993, J.Immunol., 151, 3390-3398), ganglioside GD3 (Shitara et al,
1993, Cancer Immunol. Immunother. 36:373-380), ganglioside GM2 (Livingston et al,
1994, J Clin. Oncol. 12:1036-1044), ganglioside GM3 (Hoon et α/., 1993, Cancer Res. 53:5244-5250), tumor-specific transplantation type of cell-surface antigen (TSTA) such as virally-induced tumor antigens including T-antigen DNA tumor viruses and envelope antigens of RNA tumor viruses, oncofetal antigen-alpha-fetoprotein such as CEA of colon, bladder tumor oncofetal antigen (Hellstrom et al, 1985, Cancer. Res. 45:2210-2188), differentiation antigen such as human lung carcinoma antigen L6, L20 (Hellstrom et al, 1986, Cancer Res. 46:3917-3923), antigens of fibrosarcoma, human leukemia T cell antigen-Gp37 (Bhattacharya-Chatterjee et α/., 1988, J oflmmun. 141:1398-1403), neoglycoprotein, sphingolipids, breast cancer antigen such as EGFR (Epidermal growth factor receptor), HER2 antigen (pi 85^112), polymorphic epithelial mucin (PEM) (Hilkens et al, 1992, Trends in Bio. Chem. Sci. 17:359), malignant human lymphocyte antigen-APO-1 (Bernhard et al, 1989, Science 245:301-304), differentiation antigen (Feizi, 1985, Nature 314:53-57) such as I antigen found in fetal erthrocytes and primary endoderm, I(Ma) found in gastric adencarcinomas, M 18 and M39 found in breast epithelium, SSEA-I found in myeloid cells, VEP8, VEP9, MyI, VIM-D5,and D256-22 found in colorectal cancer, TRA-I- 85 (blood group H), C14 found in colonic adenocarcinoma, F3 found in lung adenocarcinoma, AH6 found in gastric cancer, Y hapten, Ley found in embryonal carcinoma cells, TL5 (blood group A), EGF receptor found in A431 cells , E1 series (blood group B) found in pancreatic cancer, FCl 0.2 found in embryonal carcinoma cells, gastric adenocarcinoma, CO-514 (blood group Lea) found in adenocarcinoma, NS-10 found in adenocarcinomas, CO-43 (blood group Leb), G49, EGF receptor, (blood group ALeb/Ley) found in colonic adenocarcinoma, 19.9 found in colon cancer, gastric cancer mucins, T5A7 found in myeloid cells, R24 found in melanoma, 4.2, GD3, D 1.1, OFA-I, GM2, OFA-2, GD2, Ml :22:25:8 found in embryonal carcinoma cells and SSEA-3, SSEA-4 found in 4-8-cell stage embryos. In another embodiment, the antigen is a T cell receptor derived peptide from a cutaneous T cell lymphoma {see Edelson, 1998, The Cancer Journal 4:62).
6.3.2.1.1 OTHERAGENTS The high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonists of the invention can be administered alone or in combination with other therapeutic and/or prophylactic agents.
The methods of the invention encompass the administration of one or more chemotherapeutic cancer agents. Chemotherapeutic cancer agents are defined as agents that attack and kill cancer cells. Chemotherapeutic agents that may be used inthe methods of the invention include taxane compounds and derivatives thereof, paclitaxel and its derivatives or docetaxel and its derivatives. Additional taxane derivatives and methods of synthesis are disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 6,191,287 to Holton et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,705,508 to Ojima et al, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,688,977 and 5,750,737 to Sisti et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,248,796 to Chen et al, U.S. Patent No. 6,020,507 to Gibson et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,908,835 to Bissery, all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
Other chemotherapeutic cancer agents that may be used in the methods of the invention include mitotic inhibitors (vinca alkaloids). These include vincristine, vinblastine, vindesine and Navelbine™ (vinorelbine,5'-noranhydroblastine). In yet other embodiments, chemotherapeutic cancer agents include topoisomerase I inhibitors, such as camptothecin compounds. As used herein, "camptothecin compounds" include Camptosar™ (irinotecan HCL), Hycamtin™ (topotecan HCL) and other compounds derived from camptothecin and its analogues. Another category of chemotherapeutic cancer agents that may be used in the methods and compositions of the invention are podophyllotoxin derivatives, such as etoposide, teniposide and mitopodozide. The invention further encompasses other chemotherapeutic cancer agents known as alkylating agents, which alkylate the genetic material in tumor cells. These include without limitation cisplatin, cyclophosphamide, nitrogen mustard, trimethylene thiophosphoramide, carmustine, busulfan, chlorambucil, belustine, uracil mustard, chlornaphazin, and dacarbazine. The invention encompasses antimetabolites as chemotherapeutic agents. Examples of these types of agents include cytosine arabinoside, fluorouracil, methotrexate, mercaptopurine, azathioprime, and procarbazine. An additional category of chemotherapeutic cancer agents that may be used in the methods and compositions of the invention include antibiotics. Examples include without limitation doxorubicin, bleomycin, dactinomycin, daunorubicin, mithrarnycin, mitomycin, mytomycin C, and daunomycin. There are numerous liposomal formulations commercially available for these compounds. The invention further encompasses other chemotherapeutic cancer agents including without limitation anti-tumor antibodies, dacarbazine, azacytidine, amsacrine, melphalan, ifosfamide and mitoxantrone. The A3 antagonists can be administered alone or in combination with other anti-tumor agents, including cytotoxic/antineoplastic agents and anti-angiogenic agents. Cytotoxic/anti-neoplastic agents are defined as agents which attack and kill cancer cells. Some cytotoxic/anti-neoplastic agents are alkylating agents, which alkylate the genetic material in tumor cells, e.g., cis-platin, cyclophosphamide, nitrogen mustard, trimethylene thiophosphoramide, carmustine, busulfan, chlorambucil, belustine, uracil mustard, chlornaphazin, and dacabazine. Other cytotoxic/anti-neoplastic agents are antimetabolites for tumor cells, e.g., cytosine arabinoside, fluorouracil, methotrexate, mercaptopuirine, azathioprime, and procarbazine. Other cytotoxic/anti-neoplastic agents are antibiotics, e.g., doxorubicin, bleomycin, dactinomycin, daunorubicin, mithramycin, mitomycin, mytomycin C, and daunomycin. There are numerous liposomal formulations commercially available for these compounds. Still other cytotoxic/anti-neoplastic agents are mitotic inhibitors (vinca alkaloids). These include vincristine, vinblastine and etoposide. Miscellaneous cytotoxic/anti-neoplastic agents include taxol and its derivatives, L-asparaginase, anti-tumor antibodies, dacarbazine, azacytidine, amsacrine, melphalan, VM-26, ifosfamide, mitoxantrone, and vindesine.
Anti-angiogenic agents are well known to those of skill in the art. Suitable anti-angiogenic agents for use in the methods and compositions of the invention include anti-VEGF antibodies, including humanized and chimeric antibodies, anti-VEGF aptamers and antisense oligonucleotides. Other known inhibitors of angiogenesis include angiostatin, endostatin, interferons, interleukin 1 (including α and β) interleukin 12, retinoic acid, and tissue inhibitors of metalloproteinase-1 and -2. (TIMP-I and -T). Small molecules, including topoisomerases such as razoxane, a topoisomerase II inhibitor with anti- angiogenic activity, can also be used. In one embodiment, the anti-angiogenesis compound is an adenosine A2a antagonist. A2a antagonists are well known to those of skill in the art. Examples of these compounds include SCH 58261 from Schering Plough, ZM241385 (Palmer et al., MoI. Pharmacol., 48:970-974 (1995), the tricyclic non-xanthine antagonists and the triazoloquinazolines, including CP 66,713, disclosed inNikodijevic et al., J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther., 259:286-294 (1991), as well as the compounds disclosed in von Lubitz et al., Eur. J. Pharmacol, 287:295-302 (1995). The contents of each of the references above are hereby incorporated by reference.
Anti-cancer agents that can be used in combination with A3 receptor antagonists of the invention in the various embodiments of the invention, including pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms and kits of the invention, include, but are not limited to: acivicin; aclarubicin; acodazole hydrochloride; acronine; adozelesin; aldesleukin; altretamine; ambomycin; ametantrone acetate; aminoglutethimide; amsacrine; anastrozole; anthramycin; asparaginase; asperlin; azacitidine; azetepa; azotomycin; batimastat; benzodepa; bicalutamide; bisantrene hydrochloride; bisnafide dimesylate; bizelesin; bleomycin sulfate; brequinar sodium; bropirimine; busulfan; cactinomycin; calusterone; caracemide; carbetimer; carboplatin; carmustine; carubicin hydrochloride; carzelesin; cedefingol; chlorambucil; cirolemycin; cisplatin; cladribine; crisnatol mesylate; cyclophosphamide; cytarabine; dacarbazine; dactinomycin; daunorubicin hydrochloride; decitabine; dexormaplatin; dezaguanine; dezaguanine mesylate; diaziquone; docetaxel; doxorubicin; doxorubicin hydrochloride; droloxifene; droloxifene citrate; dromostanolone propionate; duazomycin; edatrexate; eflornithine hydrochloride; elsamitrucin; enloplatin; enpromate; epipropidine; epirubicin hydrochloride; erbulozole; esorubicin hydrochloride; estramustine; estramustine phosphate sodium; etanidazole; etoposide; etoposide phosphate; etoprine; fadrozole hydrochloride; fazarabine; fenretinide; floxuridine; fludarabine phosphate; fluorouracil; flurocitabine; fosquidone; fostriecin sodium; gemcitabine; gemcitabine hydrochloride; hydroxyurea; idarubicin hydrochloride; ifosfamide; ilmofosine; interleukin II (including recombinant interleukin II, or rIL2), interferon alfa-2a; interferon alfa-2b; interferon alfa-nl ; interferon alfa-n3; interferon beta-I a; interferon gamma-I b; iproplatin; irinotecan hydrochloride; lanreotide acetate; letrozole; leuprolide acetate; liarozole hydrochloride; lometrexol sodium; lomustine; losoxantrone hydrochloride; masoprocol; maytansine; mechlorethamine hydrochloride; megestrol acetate; melengestrol acetate; melphalan; menogaril; mercaptopurine; methotrexate; methotrexate sodium; metoprine; meturedepa; mitindomide; mitocarcin; mitocromin; mitogillin; mitomalcin; mitomycin; mitosper; mitotane; mitoxantrone hydrochloride; mycophenolic acid; nocodazole; nogalamycin; ormaplatin; oxisuran; paclitaxel; pegaspargase; peliomycin; pentamustine; peplomycin sulfate; perfosfamide; pipobroman; piposulfan; piroxantrone hydrochloride; plicamycin; plomestane; porfimer sodium; porfiromycin; prednimustine; procarbazine hydrochloride; puromycin; puromycin hydrochloride; pyrazofurin; riboprine; rogletimide; safingol; safingol hydrochloride; semustine; simtrazene; sparfosate sodium; sparsomycin; spirogermanium hydrochloride; spiromustine; spiroplatin; streptonigrin; streptozocin; sulofenur; talisomycin; tecogalan sodium; tegafur; teloxantrone hydrochloride; temoporfin; teniposide; teroxirone; testolactone; thiamiprine; thioguanine; thiotepa; tiazofurin; tirapazamine; toremifene citrate; trestolone acetate; triciribine phosphate; trimetrexate; trimetrexate glucuronate; triptorelin; tubulozole hydrochloride; uracil mustard; uredepa; vapreotide; verteporfin; vinblastine sulfate; vincristine sulfate; vindesine; vindesine sulfate; vinepidine sulfate; vinglycinate sulfate; vinleurosine sulfate; vinorelbine tartrate; vinrosidine sulfate; vinzolidine sulfate; vorozole; zeniplatin; zinostatin; zorubicin hydrochloride. Other anti-cancer drugs include, but are not limited to: 20-epi-l,25 dihydroxyvitamin D3; 5-etbynyluracil; abiraterone; aclarubicin; acylfulvene; adecypenol; adozelesin; aldesleukin; ALL-TK antagonists; altretamine; ambamustine; amidox; amifostine; aminolevulinic acid; amrubicin; amsacrine; anagrelide; anastrozole; andrographolide; angiogenesis inhibitors; antagonist D; antagonist G; antarelix; anti-dorsalizing morphogenetic protein- 1 ; antiandrogen, prostatic carcinoma; antiestrogen; antineoplaston; antisense oligonucleotides; aphidicolin glycinate; apoptosis gene modulators; apoptosis regulators; apurinic acid; ara-CDP-DL-PTBA; arginine deaminase; asulacrine; atamestane; atrimustine; axinastatin 1; axinastatin 2; axinastatin 3; azasetron; azatoxin; azatyrosine; baccatin III derivatives; balanol; batimastat; BCR/ABL antagonists; benzochlorins; benzoylstaurosporine; beta lactam derivatives; beta-alethine; betaclamycin
B; betulinic acid; bFGF inhibitor; bicalutamide; bisantrene; bisaziridinylspermine; bisnafide; bistratene A; bizelesin; breflate; bropirimine; budotitane; buthionine sulfoximine; calcipotriol; calphostin C; camptothecin derivatives; canarypox IL-2; capecitabine; carboxamide-amino-triazole; carboxyamidotriazole; CaRest M3; CARN 700; cartilage derived inhibitor; carzelesin; casein kinase inhibitors (ICOS); castanospermine; cecropin B; cetrorelix; chlorlns; chloroquinoxaline sulfonamide; cicaprost; cis-porphyrin; cladribine; clomifene analogues; clotrimazole; collismycin A; collismycin B; combretastatin A4; combretastatin analogue; conagenin; crambescidin 816; crisnatol; cryptophycin 8; cryptophycin A derivatives; curacin A; cyclopentanthraquinones; cycloplatam; cypemycin; cytarabine ocfosfate; cytolytic factor; cytostatin; dacliximab; decitabine; dehydrodidemnin
B; deslorelin; dexamethasone; dexifosfamide; dexrazoxane; dexverapamil; diaziquone; didemnin B; didox; diethylnorspermine; dihydro-5-azacytidine; dihydrotaxol, 9-; dioxamycin; diphenyl spiromustine; docetaxel; docosanol; dolasetron; doxifluridine; droloxifene; dronabinol; duocarmycin SA; ebselen; ecomustine; edelfosine; edrecolomab; eflornithine; elemene; emitefur; epirubicin; epristeride; estramustine analogue; estrogen agonists; estrogen antagonists; etanidazole; etoposide phosphate; exemestane; fadrozole; fazarabine; fenretinide; filgrastim; finasteride; flavopiridol; flezelastine; fluasterone; fludarabine; fiuorodaunorunicin hydrochloride; forfenimex; formestane; fostriecin; fotemustine; gadolinium texaphyrin; gallium nitrate; galocitabine; ganirelix; gelatinase inhibitors; gemcitabine; glutathione inhibitors; hepsulfam; heregulin; hexamethylene bisacetamide; hypericin; ibandronic acid; idarubicin; idoxifene; idramantone; ilmofosine; ilomastat; imidazoacridones; imiquimod; immunostimulant peptides; insulin-like growth factor- 1 receptor inhibitor; interferon agonists; interferons; interleukins; iobenguane; iododoxorubicin; ipomeanol, 4-; iroplact; irsogladine; isobengazole; isohomohalicondrin B; itasetron; jasplakinolide; kahalalide F; lamellarin-N triacetate; lanreotide; leinamycin; lenograstim; lentinan sulfate; leptolstatin; letrozole; leukemia inhibiting factor; leukocyte alpha interferon; leuprolide+estrogen+progesterone; leuprorelin; levamisole; liarozole; linear polyamine analogue; lipophilic disaccharide peptide; lipophilic platinum compounds; lissoclinamide 7; lobaplatin; lombricine; lometrexol; lonidamine; losoxantrone; lovastatin; loxoribine; lurtotecan; lutetium texaphyrin; lysofylline; lytic peptides; maitansine; mannostatin A; marimastat; masoprocol; maspin; matrilysin inhibitors; matrix metalloproteinase inhibitors; menogaril; merbarone; meterelin; methioninase; metoclopramide; MIF inhibitor; mifepristone; miltefosine; mirimostim; mismatched double stranded RNA; mitoguazone; mitolactol; mitomycin analogues; mitonafide; mitotoxin fibroblast growth factor-saporin; mitoxantrone; mofarotene; molgramostim; monoclonal antibody, human chorionic gonadotrophin; monophosphoryl lipid A+myobaeterium cell wall sk; mopidamol; multiple drug resistance gene inhibitor; multiple tumor suppressor 1 -based therapy; mustard anticancer agent; mycaperoxide B; mycobacterial cell wall extract; myriaporone; N-acetyldinaline; N-substituted benzamides; nafarelin; nagrestip; naloxone+pentazocine; napavin; naphterpin; nartograstim; nedaplatin; nemorubicin; neridronic acid; neutral endopeptidase; nilutamide; nisamycin; nitric oxide modulators; nitroxide antioxidant; nitrullyn; 06-benzylguanine; octreotide; okicenone; oligonucleotides; onapristone; ondansetron; ondansetron; oracin; oral cytokine inducer; ormaplatin; osaterone; oxaliplatin; oxaunomycin; paclitaxel; paclitaxel analogues; paclitaxel derivatives; palauamine; palmitoylrhizoxin; pamidronic acid; panaxytriol; panomifene; parabactin; pazelliptine; pegaspargase; peldesine; pentosan polysulfate sodium; pentostatin; pentrozole; perflubron; perfosfamide; perillyl alcohol; phenazinomycin; phenylacetate; phosphatase inhibitors; picibanil; pilocarpine hydrochloride; pirarubicin; piritrexim; placetin A; placetin B; plasminogen activator inhibitor; platinum complex; platinum compounds; platinum-triamine complex; porfimer sodium; porfiromycin; prednisone; propyl bis-acridone; prostaglandin J2; proteasome inhibitors; protein A-based immune modulator; protein kinase C inhibitor; protein kinase C inhibitors, microalgal; protein tyrosine phosphatase inhibitors; purine nucleoside phosphorylase inhibitors; purpurins; pyrazoloacridine; pyridoxylated hemoglobin polyoxyethylene conjugate; raf antagonists; raltitrexed; ramosetron; ras farnesyl protein transferase inhibitors; ras inhibitors; ras-GAP inhibitor; retelliptine demethylated; rhenium Re 186 etidronate; rhizoxin; ribozymes; RII retinamide; rogletimide; rohitukine; romurtide; roquinimex; rubiginone Bl; ruboxyl; safϊngol; saintopin; SarCNU; sarcophytol A; sargramostim; Sdi 1 mimetics; semustine; senescence derived inhibitor 1; sense oligonucleotides; signal transduction inhibitors; signal transduction modulators; single chain antigen binding protein; sizofiran; sobuzoxane; sodium borocaptate; sodium phenylacetate; solverol; somatomedin binding protein; sonermin; sparfosic acid; spicamycin D; spiromustine; splenopentin; spongistatin 1 ; squalamine; stem cell inhibitor; stem-cell division inhibitors; stipiamide; stromelysin inhibitors; sulfmosine; superactive vasoactive intestinal peptide antagonist; suradista; suramin; swainsonine; synthetic glycosaminoglycans; tallimustine; tamoxifen methiodide; tauromustine; tazarotene; tecogalan sodium; tegafur; tellurapyrylium; telomerase inhibitors; temoporfin; temozolomide; teniposide; tetrachlorodecaoxide; tetrazomine; thaliblastine; thiocoraline; thrombopoietin; thrombopoietin mimetic; thymalfasin; thymopoietin receptor agonist; thymotrinan; thyroid stimulating hormone; tin ethyl etiopurpurin; tirapazamine; titanocene bichloride; topsentin; toremifene; totipotent stem cell factor; translation inhibitors; tretinoin; triacetyluridine; triciribine; trimetrexate; triptorelin; tropisetron; turosteride; tyrosine kinase inhibitors; tyrphostins; UBC inhibitors; ubenimex; urogenital sinus-derived growth inhibitory factor; urokinase receptor antagonists; vapreotide; variolin B; vector system, erythrocyte gene therapy; velaresol; veramine; verdins; verteporfin; vinorelbine; vinxaltine; vitaxin; vorozole; zanoterone; zeniplatin; zilascorb; and zinostatin stimalamer. Preferred additional anti-cancer drugs are 5-fluorouracil and leucovorin. Examples of therapeutic antibodies that can be used in methods of the invention include but are not limited to HERCEPTIN® (Trastuzumab) (Genentech, CA) which is a humanized anti-HER2 monoclonal antibody for the treatment of patients with metastatic breast cancer; REOPRO® (abciximab) (Centocor) which is an anti-glycoprotein Ilb/IIIa receptor on the platelets for the prevention of clot formation; ZENAP AX® (daclizumab) (Roche Pharmaceuticals, Switzerland) which is an immunosuppressive, humanized anti-CD25 monoclonal antibody for the prevention of acute renal allograft rejection; PANOREX™ which is a murine anti-17-IA cell surface antigen IgG2a antibody (Glaxo Wellcome/Centocor); BEC2 which is a murine anti-idiotype (GD3 epitope) IgG antibody (ImClone System); EVIC-C225 which is a chimeric anti-EGFR IgG antibody (ImClone System); VITAXIN™ which is a humanized anti-αVβ3 integrin antibody (Applied Molecular Evolution/Medlπunune); Campath 1H/LDP-03 which is a humanized anti CD52 IgGl antibody (Leukosite); Smart M195 which is a humanized anti-CD33 IgG antibody (Protein Design Lab/Kanebo); RITUXAN™ which is a chimeric anti-CD20 IgGl antibody (IDEC Pharm/Genentech, Roche/Zettyaku); LYMPHOCIDE™ which is a humanized anti-CD22 IgG antibody (Immunomedics); ICM3 is a humanized anti-ICAM3 antibody (ICOS Pharm); IDEC-114 is aprimatied anti-CD80 antibody (IDEC Pharm/Mitsubishi); ZEVALIN™ is a radiolabeled murine anti-CD20 antibody (IDEC/Schering AG); IDEC-131 is a humanized anti-CD40L antibody (IDEC/Eisai); IDEC- 151 is aprimatized anti-CD4 antibody (IDEC); IDEC-152 is a primatized anti-CD23 antibody (IDEC/Seikagaku); SMART anti-CD3 is a humanized anti-CD3 IgG (Protein Design Lab); 5Gl.1 is a humanized anti-complement factor 5 (C5) antibody (Alexion Pharm); D2E7 is a humanized anti-TNF-α antibody (CAT/BASF); CDP870 is a humanized anti-TNF-α Fab fragment (Celltech); IDEC-151 is a primatized anti-CD4 IgGl antibody (IDEC Pharm/SmithKline Beecham); MDX-CD4 is a human anti-CD4 IgG antibody (Medarex/Eisai/Genmab); CDP571 is a humanized anti-TNF-α IgG4 antibody (Celltech); LDP-02 is a humanized anti-α4β7 antibody (LeukoSite/Genentech); OrthoClone 0KT4A is a humanized anti-CD4 IgG antibody (Ortho Biotech); ANTO V A™ is a humanized anti- CD40L IgG antibody (Biogen); ANTEGREN™ is a humanized anti-VLA-4 IgG antibody (Elan); and CAT-152 is a human anti-TGF-β2 antibody (Cambridge Ab Tech). Other examples of therapeutic antibodies that can be used in combination with the A3 receptor antagonists of the invention are presented in Table 5 below:
TABLE 5. MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES FOR CANCER THERAPY THAT CAN BE USED IN COMBINATION WITH THE A3 RECEPTOR ANTAGONISTS OF THE INVENTION.
Company Product Disease Target
Abgenix ABX-EGF Cancer EGF receptor
AltaRex OvaRex ovarian cancer tumor antigen CA125
BravaRex metastatic cancers tumor antigen MUCl
Antisoma ■ Theragyn (pemtumomabytrrium-90) ovarian cancer PEM antigen
Therex breast cancer PEM antigen
Boehringer Ingelheim blvatuzumab head & neck cancer CD44
Centocαr/J&J Panorex Colorectal cancer 17-1A
ReoPro PTCA gp Illb/IIIa
ReoPro Acute MI gp Illb/UIa
ReoPro Ischemic stroke gp Illb/IIIa
Corixa Bexocar NHL CD20
CRC Technology MAb, idiotypic 105AD7 colorectal cancer vaccine gp72
Crucell Anti-EpCAM cancer Ep-CAM Company Product Disease Target
Cytoclonal MAb, lung cancer non-small cell lung NA cancer
Genentecli Herceptin metastatic breast cancer HER-2
Herceptin early stage breast cancer HER-2
Rituxan Relapsed/refractory low- CD2O grade or follicular NHL
Rituxan intermediate & high- CD20 grade NHL
MAb-VEGF NSCLC, metastatic VEGF
MAb-VEGF Colorectal cancer, VEGF metastatic
AMD Fab age-related macular CD18 degeneration
E-26 (2nα gen IgE) allergic asthma & rhinitis IgE
IDEC Zevahn (Rituxan + yttrium-90) low grade of follicular, CD20 relapsed or refractory, CD20-positive, B-cell NHL and Rituximab- refractory NHL
ImCIone Cetuximab + innotecan refractory colorectal EGF receptor carcinoma
Cetuximab + oisplatin & radiation newly diagnosed or EGF receptor recurrent head & neck cancer
Cetuximab + gemcitabine newly diagnosed EGF receptor metastatic pancreatic carcinoma
Cetuximab + cisplatin + 5FU or recurrent or metastatic EGF receptor Taxol head & neck cancer
Cetuximab + carboplatm + newly diagnosed non- EGF receptor paclitaxel small cell lung carcinoma
Cetuximab + cisplatin head & neck cancer EGF receptor (extensive incurable local-regional disease & distant metasteses)
Cetuximab + radiation locally advanced head & EGF receptor neck carcinoma
BEC2 + Bacillus Calmette Gueπn small cell lung carcinoma mimics ganglioside GD3
BEC2 + Bacillus Calmette Gueπn melanoma mimics ganglioside GD3
IMC-ICl 1 colorectal cancer with VEGF-receptor liver metasteses
ImmonoGen nuC242-DMl Colorectal, gastric, and nuC242 pancreatic cancer
ImmunoMedics LymphoCide Non-Hodgkms CD22 lymphoma
LymphoCide Y-90 Non-Hodgkins CD22 lymphoma
CEA-Cide metastatic solid tumors CEA
CEA-Cide Y-90 metastatic solid tumors CEA
CEA-Scan (Tc-99m-labeled colorectal cancer CEA arcitumomab) (radioimaging)
CEA-Scan (Tc-99m-labeled Breast cancer CEA arcitumomab) (radioimaging)
CEA-Scan (Tc-99m-labeled lung cancer CEA arcitumomab) (radioimaging)
CEA-Scan (Tc-99m-labeled intraoperative tumors CEA arcitumomab) (radio imaging) Company Product Disease Target
LeukoScan (Tc-99m-Iabeled soft tissue infection CEA sulesomab) (radioimaging)
LymphoScan (Tc-99m-labeled) lymphomas CD22 (radioimaging)
AFP-Scan (Tc-99m-labeled) liver 7 gem-cell cancers AFP (radioimaging)
Intracel HumaRAD-HN (+ yttrium-90) head & neck cancer NA
HumaSPECT colorectal imaging NA
Medarex MDX-101 (CTLA-4) Prostate and other CTLA-4 cancers
MDX-210 (her-2 overexpression) Prostate cancer HER-2
MDX-210/MAK Cancer HER-2
Medliii inline Vitaxin Cancer αvβ-,
Merck KGaA MAb 425 Various cancers EGF receptor
IS-IL-2 Various cancers Ep-CAM
Millennium Campath (alemtuzumab) chronic lymphocytic CD52 leukemia
NeoRx CD20-streptavidin (+ biotin-yttrium Non-Hodgkins CD20 90) lymphoma
Avidicin (albumin + NRLU 13) metastatic cancer NA
Peregrine Oncolym (+ iodine-131) Non-Hodgkins HLA-DR 10 beta lymphoma
Cotara (+ iodine-131) unresectable malignant DNA-associated proteins glioma
Pharmacia Corporation C215 (+ staphylococcal enterotoxin) pancreatic cancer NA
MAb, lung/kidney cancer lung & kidney cancer NA nacolomab tafenatox (C242 + colon & pancreatic NA staphylococcal enterotoxin) cancer
Protein Design Labs Nuvion T cell malignancies CD3
SMART M195 AML CD33
SMART IDlO NHL HLA-DR antigen
Titan CEAVac colorectal cancer, CEA advanced
TriGem metastatic melanoma & GD2-ganglioside small cell lung cancer
TriAb metastatic breast cancer MUC-I
Trilex CEAVac colorectal cancer, CEA advanced
TriGem metastatic melanoma & GD2-ganglioside small cell lung cancer
TriAb metastatic breast cancer MUC-I
Viventia Biotech NovoMAb-G2 radiolabeled Non-Hodgkins NA lymphoma
Monopharm C colorectal & pancreatic SK-I antigen carcinoma
GHoMAb-H (+ gelonin toxin) glioma, melanoma & NA neuroblastoma
Xo ma Rituxan Relapsed/refractory low- CD20 grade or follicular NHL
Rituxan intermediate & high- CD20 grade NHL
ING-l adenomcarcinoma Ep-CAM The A3 receptor antagonists of the invention may be used in combination with one or more ATP depleting agents for enhancing the therapeutic efficacy of treating a disease or disorder as disclosed herein, i.e., cancer. Alternatively, the A3 receptor antagonists of the invention may be used with verapamil for enhancing the therapeutic efficacy of conventional modes of treating a disease or disorder as discussed herein, i.e., cancer.
6.3.2.2 RESPIRATORY DISORDERS
Compounds of the invention, particularly the A1 and A3 receptor antagonists, can be used alone or in combination with other therapeutic and/or prophylactic agents to prevent, treat or manage respiratory disorders such as asthma and obstructive pulmonary disorders (COPD).
The methods and compositions comprising A1 and/or A3 receptor antagonists of the invention are effective for treatment, prevention, and/or management of asthma. The therapeutic and prophylactic methods of the invention for asthma may be used in combination with other methods known in the art for the treatment, prevention and/or management of asthma including but not limited to inhaled beta 2 agonists, inhaled corticosteroids, retinoic acid, anti-IgE antibodies, phosphodiesterase inhibitors, leukotriene antagonists, anti IL-9 antibody, and/or anti-mucin therapies (e.g., anti hCLCAl therapy such as Lomucin™). β-adrenergic drugs (e.g. epinephrine and isoproterenol), theophylline, anticholinergic drugs (e.g., atropine and ipratorpium bromide), and corticosteroids, adrenergic stimulants (e.g., catecholamines (e.g., epinephrine, isoproterenol, and isoetharine), resorcinols (e.g., metaproterenol, terbutaline, and fenoterol), and saligenins (e.g., salbutamol), other steroids, immunosuppressant agents (e.g., methotrexate and gold salts), mast cell modulators (e.g., cromolyn sodium (INTAL™) and nedocromil sodium (TILADE™)), and mucolytic agents (e.g., acetylcysteine)). The methods and compositions comprising A1 and/or A3 receptor antagonists of the invention are effective for treatment, prevention, and/or management of COPD including fixed airways disorders, chronic bronchitis and emphysema.
The therapeutic and prophylactic methods of the invention may be used in combination with other therapeutic methods known in the art for the treatment, prevention and/or management of COPD including but not limited tiotropium and/or ipratropium
Other respiratory disorders that may be treated, prevented or managed using the methods and compositions of the invention include without limitation lung fibrosis, bronchial hyper responsiveness. 6.4 COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS OF ADMINISTERING
The invention provides methods and pharmaceutical compositions comprising compounds of the invention. The invention also provides methods of treatment, prophylaxis, and amelioration of one or more symptoms associated with a disease, disorder or cancer by administering to a subject an effective amount of compound of the invention. In a specific embodiment, the subject is an animal, preferably a mammal such as non- primate (e.g., cows, pigs, horses, cats, dogs, rats etc.) and a primate (e.g., monkey such as, a cynomolgous monkey and a human). In a preferred embodiment, the subject is a human. The compositions of the invention include bulk drug compositions useful in the manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions (e.g., impure or non-sterile compositions) and pharmaceutical compositions (i.e., compositions that are suitable for administration to a subject or patient) which can be used in the preparation of unit dosage forms. Such compositions comprise a prophylactically or therapeutically effective amount of a prophylactic and/or therapeutic agent disclosed herein or a combination of those agents and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Preferably, compositions of the invention comprise a prophylactically or therapeutically effective amount of compounds of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
In one particular embodiment, the pharmaceutical composition comprises a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of an A3 or A1 receptor antagonist and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In another embodiment, said pharmaceutical composition further comprises one or more anti-cancer agents. hi a specific embodiment, the term "pharmaceutically acceptable" means approved by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or listed in the U.S. Pharmacopeia or other generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in animals, and more particularly in humans. The term "carrier" refers to a diluent, adjuvant (e.g., Freund's adjuvant (complete and incomplete), excipient, or vehicle with which the therapeutic is administered. Such pharmaceutical carriers can be sterile liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like. Water is a preferred carrier when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously. Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions can also be employed as liquid carriers, particularly for injectable solutions. Suitable pharmaceutical excipients include starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, ethanol and the like. The composition, if desired, can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH buffering agents. These compositions can take the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsion, tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained-release formulations and the like. Generally, the ingredients of compositions of the invention are supplied either separately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, as a dry lyophilized powder or water free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent. Where the composition is to be administered by infusion, it can be dispensed with an infusion bottle containing sterile pharmaceutical grade water or saline. Where the composition is administered by injection, an ampoule of sterile water for injection or saline can be provided so that the ingredients may be mixed prior to administration.
The compositions of the invention can be formulated as neutral or salt forms. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to those formed with anions such as those derived from hydrochloric, phosphoric, acetic, oxalic, tartaric acids, etc., and those formed with captions such as those derived from sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, ferric hydroxides, isopropylamine, triethylamine, 2-ethylamino ethanol, histidine, procaine, etc.
The compounds described above are preferably administered in formulations including an active compound, i.e., an adenosine Aj and/or A3 receptor antagonist, together with an acceptable carrier for the mode of administration. Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are known to those of skill in the art. The compositions can optionally include other therapeutically active agents, including anti-angiogenic and anti-cancer agents. Other optional ingredients include antivirals, antibacterials, antiinflammatories, analgesics, and immunosuppresants. The carrier must be pharmaceutically acceptable in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not deleterious to the recipient thereof.
The compounds of the invention, e.g., high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonists, can be administered in a physiologically acceptable diluent in a pharmaceutical carrier, such as a sterile liquid or mixture of liquids, including water, saline, aqueous dextrose and related sugar solutions, an alcohol {e.g., ethanol, isopropanol, or hexadecyl alcohol), glycols {e.g., propylene glycol or polyethylene glycol), glycerol ketals, {e.g., 2,2- dimethyll,3-dioxolane-4-methanol), ethers, {e.g., poly(ethyleneglycol) 400), an oil, a fatty acid, a fatty acid ester or glyceride, or an acetylated fatty acid glyceride with or without the addition of a pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant (e.g., a soap or a detergent), a suspending agent, such as pectin, carbomers, methylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, or carboxymethylcellulose, or emulsifying agents and other pharmaceutical excipients and adjuvants. The formulations can include carriers suitable for oral, rectal, topical or parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular and intravenous) administration. Preferred carriers are those suitable for oral or parenteral administration.
Formulations suitable for parenteral administration conveniently include sterile aqueous preparation of the active compound which is preferably isotonic with the blood of the recipient. Thus, such formulations may conveniently contain distilled water, 5% dextrose in distilled water or saline. Useful formulations also include concentrated solutions or solids containing the compounds which upon dilution with an appropriate solvent give a solution suitable for parental administration above.
Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include but are not limited to aqueous and non-aqueous solutions, isotonic sterile injection solutions, which may comprise anti-oxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, and solutes that render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient, and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions that may comprise suspending agents, solubilizers, thickening agents, stabilizers, and preservatives. The parenteral formulations will typically contain from about 0.5 to about
25% by weight of the active ingredient in solution. Suitable preservatives and buffers can be used in such formulations. In order to minimize or eliminate irritation at the site of injection, such compositions may contain one or more nonionic surfactants having a hydrophile-lipophile balance (HLB) of from about 12 to about 17. The quantity of surfactant in such formulations ranges from about 5 to about 15% by weight. Suitable surfactants include polyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters, such as sorbitan monooleate and the high molecular weight adducts of ethylene oxide with a hydrophobic base, formed by the condensation of propylene oxide with propylene glycol. The parenteral formulations can be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, such as ampules and vials, and can be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilized) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example, water, for injections, immediately prior to use. Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions can be prepared from sterile powders, granules, and tablets of the kind previously described. The compounds of the inventione, e.g., high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonists may be made into injectable formulations. The requirements for effective pharmaceutical carriers for injectable compositions are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. See Pharmaceutics and Pharmacy Practice, J. B. Lippincott Co., Philadelphia, Pa., Banker and Chalmers, eds., pages 238-250 (1982), and ASHP Handbook on Injectable Drugs, Toissel, 4th ed., pages 622-630 (1986); which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
For enteral administration, the compound can be incorporated into an inert carrier in discrete units such as capsules, cachets, tablets or lozenges, each containing a predetermined amount of the active compound; as a powder or granules; or a suspension or solution in an aqueous liquid or non-aqueous liquid, e.g., a. syrup, an elixir, an emulsion or a draught. Suitable carriers may be starches or sugars and include lubricants, flavorings, binders, and other materials of the same nature.
Formulations suitable for oral administration can consist of (a) liquid solutions, such as an effective amount of the compound dissolved in diluents, such as water, saline, or orange juice; (b) capsules, sachets, tablets, lozenges, and troches, each containing a predetermined amount of the active ingredient, as solids or granules; (c) powders; (d) suspensions in an appropriate liquid; and (e) suitable emulsions. Liquid formulations may include diluents, such as water and alcohols, for example, ethanol, benzyl alcohol, and the polyethylene alcohols, either with or without the addition of a pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant, suspending agent, or emulsifying agent. Capsule forms can be of the ordinary hard- or soft-shelled gelatin type containing, for example, surfactants, lubricants, and inert fillers, such as lactose, sucrose, calcium phosphate, and cornstarch.
Tablet forms can include one or more of lactose, sucrose, mannitol, corn starch, potato starch, alginic acid, microcrystalline cellulose, acacia, gelatin, guar gum, colloidal silicon dioxide, croscarmellose sodium, talc, magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, zinc stearate, stearic acid, and other excipients, colorants, diluents, buffering agents, disintegrating agents, moistening agents, preservatives, flavoring agents, and pharmacologically compatible carriers. Lozenge forms can comprise the active ingredient in a flavor, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth, as well as pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia, emulsions, gels, and the like containing, in addition to the active ingredient, such carriers as are known in the art. A tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared by compressing in a suitable in a machine the active compound in a free-flowing form, e.g., a powder or granules, optionally mixed with accessory ingredients, e.g., binders, lubricants, inert diluents, surface active or dispersing agents. Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine, a mixture of the powdered active compound with any suitable carrier. A syrup or suspension may be made by adding the active compound to a concentrated, aqueous solution of a sugar, e.g., sucrose, to which may also be added any accessory ingredients. Such accessory ingredients may include flavoring, an agent to retard crystallization of the sugar or an agent to increase the solubility of any other ingredient, e.g., as a polyhydric alcohol, for example, glycerol or sorbitol.
The compounds can also be administered locally by topical application of a solution, ointment, cream, gel, lotion or polymeric material (for example, a Pluronic™, BASF), which may be prepared by conventional methods known in the art of pharmacy. In addition to the solution, ointment, cream, gel, lotion or polymeric base and the active ingredient, such topical formulations may also contain preservatives, perfumes, and additional active pharmaceutical agents. Topical formulations for high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonists include ointments, creams, gels and lotions that may be prepared by conventional methods known in the art of pharmacy. Such topical formulation may also furhter comprise preservatives, perfumes, and additional active pharmaceutical agents.
Preferred additional pharmaceutical agents include the chemotherapeutic agents for cancer treatments noted to be enhanced or benefited by the A3 receptor antagonist (for example by preventing MDR). An example of a preferred topical formulation includes a high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonist and a taxane family compound. Oils, which can be used in parenteral formulations include petroleum, animal, vegetable, and synthetic oils. Specific examples of oils include peanut, soybean, sesame, cottonseed, corn, olive, petrolatum, and mineral. Suitable fatty acids for use in parenteral formulations include oleic acid, stearic acid, and isostearic acid. Ethyl oleate and isopropyl myristate are examples of suitable fatty acid esters. Suitable soaps for use in parenteral formulations include fatty alkali metal, ammonium, and triethanolamine salts, and suitable detergents include (a) cationic detergents such as, for example, dimethyl dialkyl ammonium halides, and alkyl pyridinium halides, (b) anionic detergents such as, for example, alkyl, aryl, and olefin sulfonates, alkyl, olefin, ether, and monoglyceride sulfates, and sulfosuccinates, (c) nonionic detergents such as, for example, fatty amine oxides, fatty acid alkanolamides, and polyoxyethylenepolypropylene copolymers, (d) amphoteric detergents such as, for example, alkyl-beta-aminopropionates, and 2-alkyl-imidazoline quaternary ammonium salts, and (e) mixtures thereof.
Additionally, the compounds of the invention, e.g., high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonist may be made into suppositories by mixing with a variety of bases, such as emulsifying bases or water-soluble bases. Formulations suitable for vaginal administration may be presented as pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams, or spray formulas containing, in addition to the active ingredient, such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate. Formulations for rectal administration may be presented as a suppository with a conventional carrier, e.g., cocoa butter or Witepsol S55 (trademark of Dynamite Nobel Chemical, Germany), for a suppository base.
The formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy. All methods include the step of bringing the active compound into association with a carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing the active compound into association with a liquid carrier or a finely divided solid carrier and then, if necessary, shaping the product into desired unit dosage form. In addition to the aforementioned ingredients, the formulations of this invention may further include one or more cytotoxic agent as well as one or more optional accessory ingredient(s) utilized in the art of pharmaceutical formulations, e.g., diluents, buffers, flavoring agents, binders, surface active agents, thickeners, lubricants, suspending agents, preservatives (including antioxidants) and the like. Various delivery systems are known and can be used to administer a composition comprising compounds of the invention, e.g., encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, microcapsules.
In some embodiments, the compounds of the invention are formulated in liposomes for targeted delivery of the compounds of the invention. Liposomes are vesicles comprised of concentrically ordered phopsholipid bilayers which encapsulate an aqueous phase. Liposomes typically comprise various types of lipids, phospholipids, and/or surfactants. The components of liposomes are arranged in a bilayer configuration, similar to the lipid arrangement of biological membranes. Liposomes are particularly preferred delivery vehicles due, in part, to their biocompatibility, low immunogenicity, and low toxicity. Methods for preparation of liposomes are known in the art and are encompassed within the invention, see, e.g., Epstein et al, 1985, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 82: 3688; Hwang et al, 1980 Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 77: 4030-4; U.S. Patent No.'s 4,485,045 and 4,544,545; all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. The invention also encompasses methods of preparing liposomes with a prolonged serum half-life, i.e., enhanced circulation time, such as those disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,013,556. Preferred liposomes used in the methods of the invention are not rapidly cleared from circulation, i.e., are not taken up into the mononuclear phagocyte system (MPS). The invention encompasses sterically stabilized liposomes which are prepared using common methods known to one skilled in the art. Although not intending to be bound by a particular mechanism of action, sterically stabilized liposomes contain lipid components with bulky and highly flexible hydrophilic moieties, which reduces the unwanted reaction of liposomes with serum proteins, reduces oposonization with serum components and reduces recognition by MPS. Sterically stabilized liposomes are preferably prepared using polyethylene glycol. For preparation of liposomes and sterically stabilized liposome see, e.g., Bendas et al, 2001 BioDrugs, 15(4): 215-224; Allen et al, 1987 FEBS Lett. 223: 42-6; Klibanov et al, 1990 FEBS Lett., 268: 235-7; Blum et al, 1990, Biochim. Biophys. Acta., 1029: 91-7; Torchilin .et al, 1996, J. Liposome Res. 6: 99-116; Litzinger et al, 1994, Biochim. Biophys. Acta, 1190: 99-107; Maruyama et α/., 1991, Chem. Pharm. Bull, 39: 1620-2; Klibanov et al, 1991, Biochim Biophys Acta, 1062; 142-8; Allen et al, 1994, Adv. DrugDeliv. Rev, 13: 285-309; all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. The invention also encompasses liposomes that are adapted for specific organ targeting, see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 4,544,545. Particularly useful liposomes for use in the compositions and methods of the invention can be generated by reverse phase evaporation method with a lipid composition comprising phosphatidylcholine, cholesterol, and PEG derivatized phosphatidylethanolamine (PEG-PE). Liposomes are extruded through filters of defined pore size to yield liposomes with the desired diameter. In some embodiments, a fragment of an antibody of the invention, e.g., F(ab'), may be conjugated to the liposomes using previously described methods, see, e.g., Martin et al, 1982, J Biol. Chem. 257: 286-288, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
Methods for preparing liposomes and microspheres for administration to a patient are well known to those of skill in the art. U.S. Pat. No. 4,789,734, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference, describes methods for encapsulating biological materials in liposomes, essentially, the material is dissolved in an aqueous solution, the appropriate phospholipids and lipids added, along with surfactants if required, and the material dialyzed or sonicated, as necessary. A review of known methods is provided by G. Gregoriadis, Chapter 14, "Liposomes," Drug Carriers in Biology and Medicine, pp. 287-341 (Academic Press, 1979), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Microspheres formed of polymers or proteins are well known to those skilled in the art, and can be tailored for passage through the gastrointestinal tract directly into the blood stream. Alternatively, the compound can be incorporated and the microspheres, or composite of microspheres, implanted for slow release over a period of time ranging from days to months. See, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,906,474, 4,925,673 and 3,625,214, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
Preferred microparticles are those prepared from biodegradable polymers, such as polyglycolide, polylactide and copolymers thereof. Those of skill in the art can readily determine an appropriate carrier system depending on various factors, including the desired rate of drug release and the desired dosage. In another embodiment, the compositions can be delivered in a vesicle, in particular a liposome (See Langer, Science 249:1527-1533 (1990); Treat et al, in Liposomes in the Therapy of Infectious Disease and Cancer. Lopez-Berestein and Fidler (eds.), Liss, New York, pp. 353- 365 (1989); Lopez-Berestein, ibid., pp. 3 17-327; see generally ibid.). In yet another embodiment, the compositions can be delivered in a controlled release or sustained release system. Any technique known to one of skill in the art can be used to produce sustained release formulations comprising one or more A3 receptor antagonists of the invention. See, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 4,526,938; PCT publication WO 91/05548; PCT publication WO 96/20698; Ning et al, 1996, "Intratumoral Radioimmunotheraphy of a Human Colon Cancer Xenograft Using a Sustained-Release Gel," Radiotherapy & Oncology 39:179-189, Song et al, 1995, "Antibody Mediated Lung Targeting of Long-Circulating Emulsions," PDA Journal of Pharmaceutical Science & Technology 50:372-397; Cleek et al, 1997, "Biodegradable Polymeric Carriers for a bFGF Antibody for Cardiovascular Application," Pro. Int'l. Symp. Control. ReI Bioact. Mater. 24:853-854; and Lam et al, 1997, "Microencapsulation of Recombinant Humanized
Monoclonal Antibody for Local Delivery," Proc. Int'l Symp. Control ReI. Bioact. Mater. 24:759-760, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In one embodiment, a pump may be used in a controlled release system (See Langer, supra; Sefton, 1987, CRC CrU. Ref. Biomed. Eng. 14:20; Buchwald et al, 1980, Surgery 88:507; and Saudek etal, 1989, N. Engl. J. Med. 321:574). In another embodiment, polymeric materials can be used to achieve controlled release of A3 receptor antagonists (see e.g., Medical Applications of Controlled Release, Langer and Wise (eds.), CRC Pres., Boca Raton, Florida (1974); Controlled Drug Bioavailability, Drug Product Design and Performance, Smolen and Ball (eds.), Wiley, New York (1984); Ranger and Peppas, 1983, J., Macromol. ScL Rev. Macromol. Chem. 23:61; See also Levy et al, 1985, Science 228:190; During et al, 1989, Ann. Neurol. 25:351; Howard et al, 1989, J. Neurosurg. 1 1:105); U.S. Patent No. 5,679,377; U.S. Patent No. 5,916,597; U.S. Patent No. 5,912,015; U.S. Patent No. 5,989,463; U.S. Patent No. 5,128,326; PCT Publication No. WO 99/15154; and PCT Publication No. WO 99/20253). Examples of polymers used in sustained release formulations include, but are not limited to, poly(2-hydroxy ethyl methacrylate), poly(methyl methacrylate), poly(acrylic acid), poly(ethylene-co-vinyl acetate), poly(methacrylic acid), polyglycolides (PLG), polyanhydrides, poly(N-vinyl pyrrolidone), poly(vinyl alcohol), polyacrylamide, poly(ethylene glycol), polylactides (PLA), poly(lactide-co-glycolides) (PLGA), and polyorthoesters. In yet another embodiment, a controlled release system can be placed in proximity of the therapeutic target (e.g., the lungs), thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in Medical Applications of Controlled Release, supra, vol. 2, pp. 115-138 (1984)). In another embodiment, polymeric compositions useful as controlled release implants are used according to Dunn et al (See U.S. 5,945,155). This particular method is based upon the therapeutic effect of the in situ controlled release of the bioactive material from the polymer system. The implantation can generally occur anywhere within the body of the patient in need of therapeutic treatment, hi another embodiment, a non-polymeric sustained delivery system is used, whereby a non-polymeric implant in the body of the subject is used as a drug delivery system. Upon implantation in the body, the organic solvent of the implant will dissipate, disperse, or leach from the composition into surrounding tissue fluid, and the non-polymeric material will gradually coagulate or precipitate to form a solid, microporous matrix (See U.S. 5,888,533). Controlled release systems are discussed in the review by Langer (1990, Science 249:1527-1533). Any technique known to one of skill in the art can be used to produce sustained release formulations comprising one or more therapeutic agents of the invention. See, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 4,526,938; International Publication Nos. WO 91/05548 and WO 96/20698; Ning etal, 1996, Radiotherapy & Oncology 39:179-189; Song et al, 1995, PDA Journal of Pharmaceutical Science & Technology 50:372-397; Cleek et al, 1997, Pro. Int'l Symp. Control ReI. Bioact. Mater. 24:853-854; and Lam et at, 1997, Proc. Int'l. Symp. Control ReI. Bioact. Mater. 24:759-760, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
Methods of administering a compound of the invention include, but are not limited to, parenteral administration (e.g., intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intravenous and subcutaneous), epidural, and mucosal (e.g., intranasal and oral routes). In a specific embodiment, the compounds of the invention are administered intramuscularly, intravenously, or subcutaneously. The compositions may be administered by any convenient route, for example, by infusion or bolus injection, by absorption through epithelial or mucocutaneous linings (e.g., oral mucosa, rectal and intestinal mucosa, etc.) and may be administered together with other biologically active agents. Administration can be systemic or local. In addition, pulmonary administration can also be employed, e.g., by use of an inhaler or nebulizer, and formulation with an aerosolizing agent. See, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 6,019,968; 5,985, 20; 5,985,309; 5,934,272; 5,874,064; 5,855,913; 5,290,540; and 4,880,078; and PCT Publication Nos. WO 92/19244; WO 97/32572; WO 97/44013; WO 98/31346; and WO 99/66903, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
In one embodiment, the compounds are administered intravenously in a liposome or microparticle with a size such that the particle can be delivered intraveneously, but gets trapped in a capillary bed around a growing tumor. Suitable particle sizes for this embodiment are those currently used, for example, in liposomes sold under the name DaunoXome.TM., which are believed to be between about 200 and 500 um. The compounds are then released locally, over time, at the location of the tumor. This can be effective in limiting systemic effects of the administration of cytotoxic agents, and also targets the adenosine antagonist and any other anti-angio genie agents directly to the site at which blood vessel growth is to be inhibited.
In another embodiment, the compounds are administered in a tissue coating, preferably a polymeric tissue coating, more preferably, a biodegradable tissue coating, which is applied to the site at which a tumor is surgically removed. Suitable polymeric materials are disclosed, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,410,016 to Hubbell et al., the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
The polymeric barrier, in combination with the adenosine A3 antagonists, and optionally in combination with other anti-angiogenic agents and/or cytotoxic agents, provides a physical barrier as well as a chemical barrier to further tumor growth and vasculation around the tumor. The two embodiments described above can be particularly useful when cytotoxic agents with pronounced systemic side effects are used. By targeting the administration of these compounds to a specific site, and locally delivering the compounds, systemic effects can be minimized. In yet another embodiment, anti-VEGF antibodies can be covalently coupled to microparticles or liposomes including the compounds. The antibodies can be used to not only target the delivery of the compounds, but also to assist in inhibiting tumor growth by inhibiting angiogenesis.
The amount of the composition of the invention which will be effective in the treatment, prevention or amelioration of one or more symptoms associated with a disorder can be determined by standard clinical techniques. The precise dose to be employed in the formulation will also depend on the route of administration, and the seriousness of the condition, and should be decided according to the judgment of the practitioner and each patient's circumstances. Effective doses may be extrapolated from dose-response curves derived from in vitro or animal model test systems.
In a specific embodiment, it may be desirable to administer the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention locally to the area in need of treatment; this may be achieved by, for example, and not by way of limitation, local infusion, by injection, or by means of an implant, said implant being of a porous, non-porous, or gelatinous material, including membranes, such as sialastic membranes, or fibers.
Treatment of a subject with a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of compounds of the invention can include a single treatment or, preferably, can include a series of treatments. In a preferred example, a subject is treated with compounds of the invention in the range of between about 0.1 μg/kg to about 100 mg/kg, about 0.1 μg/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 0.1 μg/kg to about lg/kg, about 100 ug/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 100 ug/kg to aboutlg/kg, about 1 mg/kg to about 100 mg/kg, about 1 mg/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 1 mg/kg to about lg/kg of the patient's body weight, one time per week for between about 1 to 10 weeks, preferably between 2 to 8 weeks, more preferably between about 3 to 7 weeks, and even more preferably for about 4, 5, or 6 weeks. In other embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention are administered once a day, twice a day, or three times a day. In other embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions are administered once a week, twice a week, once every two weeks, once a month, once every six weeks, once every two months, twice a year or once per year. It will also be appreciated that the effective dosage of the compounds used for treatment may increase or decrease over the course of a particular treatment. The amount of a compound required to be effective as an antagonist of adenosine A3 receptors will, of course, vary with the active moiety selected, the individual mammal being treated and is ultimately at the discretion of the medical or veterinary practitioner. The factors to be considered include the binding affinity of the active, the route of administration, the nature of the formulation, the mammal's body weight, surface area, age and general condition, and the particular compound to be administered.
The total daily dose may be given as a single dose, multiple doses, e.g., two to six times per day, or by intravenous infusion for a selected duration. Dosages above or below the range cited above are within the scope of the present invention and may be administered to the individual patient if desired and necessary. For example, for a 75 kg mammal, a dose range would be about 75 ug to about 50 mg per day, and a typical dose would be about 50 mg per day. If discrete multiple doses are indicated, treatment might typically be 50 mg of a compound of the present invention given 3 times per day. The invention also provides that the compounds of the invention are packaged in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of antibody. In one embodiment, the compounds of the invention are supplied as a dry sterilized lyophilized powder or water free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container and can be reconstituted, e.g., with water or saline to the appropriate concentration for administration to a subject. Preferably, the compounds of the invention are supplied as a dry sterile lyophilized powder in a hermetically sealed container at a unit dosage of at least 5 mg, more preferably at least 10 mg, at least 15 mg, at least 25 mg, at least 35 mg, at least 45 mg, at least 50 mg, at least 75 mg, at least 100 mg, at least 200 mg, at least 500 mg or at least 1 gram.. The lyophilized compounds of the invention should be stored at between 2 and 8°C in their original container and the compounds should be administered within 12 hours, preferably within 6 hours, within 5 hours, within 3 hours, or within 1 hour after being reconstituted. In an alternative embodiment, compounds of the invention are supplied in liquid form in a hermetically sealed container indicating the quantity and concentration of the compound. Preferably, the liquid form of the compounds are supplied in a hermetically sealed container at least 1 mg/ml, more preferably at least 2.5 mg/ml, at least 5 mg/ml, at least 8 mg/ml, at least 10 mg/ml, at least 15 mg/kg, at least 25 mg/ml, at least 50 mg/ml, at least 100 mg/ml, at least 150 mg/ml, at least 200 mg/ml of the compounds.
The formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy. All methods include the step of bringing the active compound into association with a carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing the active compound into association with a liquid carrier or a finely divided solid carrier and then, if necessary, shaping the product into desired unit dosage form.
In addition to the aforementioned ingredients, the formulations may further include one or more optional accessory ingredient(s) utilized in the art of pharmaceutical formulations, e.g., diluents, buffers, flavoring agents, binders, surface active agents, thickeners, lubricants, suspending agents, preservatives (including antioxidants) and the like.
The formulations include, but are not limited to, those suitable for oral, rectal, topical or parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular and intravenous) administration. Preferred are those suitable for oral or parenteral administration.
The pharmaceutically acceptable carriers described herein, for example, vehicles, adjuvants, excipients, or diluents, are well known to those who are skilled in the art and are readily available to the public. It is preferred that the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier be one which is chemically inert to the active compounds and one which has no detrimental side effects or toxicity under the conditions of use.
The choice of carrier will be determined in part by the particular active agent, as well as by the particular method used to administer the composition. Accordingly, there are a wide variety of suitable formulations of the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention. The following formulations for oral, aerosol, parenteral, subcutaneous, intravenous, intraarterial, intramuscular, interperitoneal, intrathecal, rectal, and vaginal administration are merely exemplary and are in no way limiting. The compounds of the invention, e.g., high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonist, alone or in combination with other suitable components, can be made into aerosol formulations to be administered via inhalation. These aerosol formulations can be placed into pressurized acceptable propellants, such as dichlorodifluoromethane, propane, nitrogen, and the like. They also may be formulated as pharmaceuticals for non-pressured preparations, such as in a nebulizer or an atomizer.
6.5 CHARACTERIZATION AND DEMONSTRATION OF THERAPEUTIC/PROPHYLACTIC UTILITY
Several aspects of the pharmaceutical compositions, prophylactic or therapeutic agents of the invention are preferably tested in vitro, e.g., in a cell culture system, and then in vivo, e.g., in an animal model organism, such as a rodent animal model system, for the desired therapeutic activity prior to use in humans. For example, assays which can be used to determine whether administration of a specific pharmaceutical composition is indicated, include cell culture assays in which a patient tissue sample is grown in culture, and exposed to or otherwise contacted with a pharmaceutical composition, and the effect of such composition upon the tissue sample is observed, e.g., inhibition of or decrease in growth and/or colony formation in soft agar or tubular network formation in three-dimensional basement membrane or extracellular matrix preparation. The tissue sample can be obtained by biopsy from the patient. This test allows the identification of the therapeutically most effective prophylactic or therapeutic molecule(s) for each individual patient. Alternatively, instead of culturing cells from a patient, therapeutic agents and methods may be screened using cells of a tumor or malignant cell line. In various specific embodiments, in vitro assays can be carried out with representative cells of cell types involved in an autoimmune or inflammatory disorder (e.g., T cells), to determine if a pharmaceutical composition of the invention has a desired effect upon such cell types. Many assays standard in the art can be used to assess such survival and/or growth; for example, cell proliferation can be assayed by measuring 3H-thymidine incorporation, by direct cell count, by detecting changes in transcriptional activity of known genes such as proto-oncogenes (e.g., fos, myc) or cell cycle markers; cell viability can be assessed by trypan blue staining, differentiation can be assessed visually based on changes in morphology, decreased growth and/or colony formation in soft agar or tubular network formation in three-dimensional basement membrane or extracellular matrix preparation. Combinations of prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents can be tested in suitable animal model systems prior to use in humans. Such animal model systems include, but are not limited to, rats, mice, chicken, cows, monkeys, pigs, dogs, rabbits, etc. Any animal system well-known in the art may be used. In a specific embodiment of the invention, combinations of prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents are tested in a mouse model system. Such model systems are widely used and well-known to the skilled artisan. - Prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents can be administered repeatedly. Several aspects of the procedure may vary such as the temporal regime of administering the prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents, and whether such agents are administered separately or as an admixture.
Once the prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents of the invention have been tested in an animal model they can be tested in clinical trials to establish their efficacy. Establishing clinical trials will be done in accordance with common methodologies known to one skilled in the art, and the optimal dosages and routes of administration as well as toxicity profiles of the compositions of the invention can be established using routine experimentation. Toxicity and efficacy of the prophylactic and/or therapeutic protocols of the instant invention can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population). The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50. Prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents that exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred. While prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents that exhibit toxic side effects may be used, care should be taken to design a delivery system that targets such agents to the site of affected tissue in order to minimize potential damage to uninfected cells and, thereby, reduce side effects. The data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage of the prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents for use in humans. The dosage of such agents lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity. The dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized. For any agent used in the method of the invention, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays. A dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC50 (i.e., the concentration of the test compound that achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture. Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans. Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.
The anti-cancer activity of the therapies used in accordance with the present invention also can be determined by using various experimental animal models for the study of cancer such as the SCID mouse model or transgenic mice or nude mice with human xenografts, animal models, such as hamsters, rabbits, etc. known in the art and described in Relevance of Tumor Models for Anticancer Drug Development (1999, eds. Fiebig and Burger); Contributions to Oncology (1999, Karger); The Nude Mouse in Oncology Research (1991, eds. Boven and Winograd); and Anticancer Drug Development Guide (1997 ed. Teicher), herein incorporated by reference in their entireties. The protocols and compositions of the invention are preferably tested in vitro, and then in vivo, for the desired therapeutic or prophylactic activity, prior to use in humans. Therapeutic agents and methods may be screened using cells of a tumor or malignant cell line. Many assays standard in the art can be used to assess such survival and/or growth; for example, cell proliferation can be assayed by measuring 3H-thymidine incorporation, by direct cell count, by detecting changes in transcriptional activity of known genes such as proto-oncogenes (e.g., fos, myc) or cell cycle markers; cell viability can be assessed by trypan blue staining, differentiation can be assessed visually based on changes in morphology, decreased growth and/or colony formation in soft agar or tubular network formation in three-dimensional basement membrane or extracellular matrix preparation, etc.
Compounds for use in therapy can be tested in suitable animal model systems prior to testing in humans, including but not limited to in rats, mice, chicken, cows, monkeys, rabbits, hamsters, etc., for example, the animal models described above. The compounds can then be used in the appropriate clinical trials. 6.5.1 ANTI-PROLIFERATIVE ASSAYS
The antiproliferative activity of compounds of the invention can be readily determined using no more than routine experimentation using cell growth inhibitory assays. Selection of cell lines for such assays is based upon desired future pharmaceutical use. Numerous cell lines are available for study from American Type Culture Collection, Manassas, VA. Cell lines suitable for assays include, but are not limited to, HL-60 human leukemia, A375 human melanoma, SKMES human lung carcinoma, HT29 human colon carcinoma and Panc-1 human pancreatic carcinoma. Cell lines can be maintained in RPMI- 1640 medium supplemented with 100 units/ml penicillin G sodium, 100 μg/ml streptomycin sulfate, 0.25 μg/ml amphotericin B (fungizone), 2 mM glutamine, 10 mM HEPES, 25 μg/ml gentamycin, and 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum. Such maintained cells can be cultured in a T25 Falcon Tissue Culture flask in a humidified incubator at 37°C with 5% CO2-95% air. For example, such maintained cells can be sub-cultured twice a week with approximate doubling times of 22 hours for A375 human melanoma, 46 hours for SKMES human lung carcinoma, 48 hours for HT29 human colon carcinoma and 60 hours for Panc-1 human pancreatic carcinoma.
One of the growth inhibitory assays that can be used in accordance with the methods of the invention is the MTT assay. An exemplary assay may comprise the following steps: Cells (1000-1500 cells/well) are seeded in a 96-well micro culture plate in a total volume of 100 μl/well. After overnight incubation in a humidified incubator at 37°C with 5% CO2 - 95% air, chemotherapeutic drug solutions diluted with culture medium at various concentrations are added in the amount of 100 μl to each well. The plates are placed in a humidified incubator at 370C with 5% CO2 - 95% air for 7-10 days. The plates are then centrifuged briefly and 100 μl of the growth medium is removed. Cell cultures are incubated with 50 μl of MTT [3-(4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl)-2,5-diphenyl-tetrazolium bromide] reagent (1 mg/ml in Dulbecco's phosphate-buffered saline) for 4 hr at 37°C. The resultant purple formazan precipitate is solubilized with 200 μl of 0.04 N HCl in isopropanol. Absorbance is measured at a wavelength of 595 nm and at a reference wavelength of 655 nm using a Bio-Rad Model 3550 Microplate Reader. Preferably, all tests are run in duplicate for each dose level. Bio-Rad brands Microplate Readers, when properly equipped, transmit measured test results to a personal computer for interpretation via computer programs such as the EZED50 program. The EZED50 computer program estimates the concentration of agent that inhibits cell growth by 50% as compared to the control cells. This is termed the IC50 and is determined by curve fitting test data using the following four logistic equation.
Y = A max - A min + Amin
1 + (X / IC50)n where Amax is the absorbance of the control cells, Amjn is the absorbance of the cells in the presence of the highest agent concentration, Y is the observed absorbance, X is the agent concentration, IC50 is the concentration of agent that inhibits the cell growth by 50% compared to the control cells, and n is the slope of the curve. If testing concentrations are properly selected (i.e., no or little growth inhibition at low concentrations and complete inhibition at high concentrations), EZED50 program fits the data extremely well and estimates the IC50 value accurately. If the testing agent was too potent and inhibits cell growth by more than 50% at all of the concentrations tested, EZED50 cannot estimate the IC50 value accurately (as indicated by an erroneously fitted Amax value). In these instances, the data could be re-analyzed by fixing the Amax value.
On the other hand, if the compound being tested produces incomplete inhibition at the highest agent concentration, EZED50 will overestimate the potency of the testing agent (the fitted ICsovalue is lower than the "actual" IC50 value). In this case, the IC5O could be estimated more accurately if both the Amax and Amjn values are fixed.
Although it may be feasible to estimate IC50 value by fixing Amax and/or Amax and Amjn without repeating the experiment, the best way to determine the IC50 accurately is to decrease or increase the concentrations of the test agent and repeat the test.
Inhibitory assay testing is also used to determine enhanced therapeutic effects from combining A3 receptor antagonists with other tumor inhibiting agents. The inhibitory cell growth assays are run with and without selected concentrations of A3 receptor antagonists. An enhanced therapeutic effect is present when the IC50 of the tumor inhibiting agent is lower with the A3 receptor antagonist.
Quantitatively, the enhancement factor (EF) is calculated by dividing the IC50 value of the tumor inhibiting agent for a tumor cell line by the IC50 value of the agent with A3 receptor antagonist for the same cell line:
IC50 of anti-tumor agent
Enhanced Factor (EF)= IC50 of anti-tumor agent with A3 receptor antagonist
Interpretation of the EF is dependent upon the concentrations of A3 receptor antagonist tested. For example, when using very low concentrations of A3 receptor antagonist, any EF above 1.0 is synergistic if the A3 receptor antagonist concentration is below the threshold of cell growth inhibition.
6.5.2 ADENOSINE RECEPTOR BASED ASSAYS
The activity and selectivity of the compounds of the invention as adenosine A3 antagonists can be readily determined using no more than routine experimentation using any of the assays disclosed herein or known to one skilled in the art. Since the A1 and A2a receptors express similar pharmacology between humans and rodents, endogenous receptors from the rat can be used for the A1 and A2a binding assays.
An exemplary rat A1 and A2A Adenosine receptor binding assay may comprise the following steps. Membrane preparations: Male Wistar rats (200-250 g) can be decapitated and the whole brain (minug brainstem, striatum and cerebellum) dissected on ice. The brain tissues can be disrupted in a Polytron (setting 5) in 20 vols of 50 mM Tris HCl, pH 7.4. The homogenate can then be centrifuged at 48,000 g for 10 min and the pellet resuspended in Tris-HCL containing 2 IU/ml adenosine deaminase, type VI (Sigma Chemical Company, St. Louis, Mo., USA). After 30 min incubation at 370C, the membranes can be centrifuged and the pellets stored at -70 0C. Striatal tissues can be homogenized with a Polytron in 25 vol of 50 mM Tris HCl buffer containing 10 mM MgCl2 pH 7.4. The homogenate can then be centrifuged at 48,000 g for 10 min at 4 0C. and resuspended in Tris HCl buffer containing 2 IU/ml adenosine deaminase. After 30 min incubation at 370C5 membranes can be centrifuged and the pellet stored at -70 0C. The radioligand binding assays may comprise the following: Binding of [3H]-DPCPX (1,3- dipropyl-8-cyclopentylxanthine) to rat brain membranes can be performed essentially according to the method previously described by Bruns et ah, 1980, Proc. Natl. Acad. Set. 11, 5547-5551, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Displacement experiments can be performed in 0.25 ml of buffer containing 1 nM [3H]-DPCPX, 100 ul of diluted membranes of rat brain (100 μg of protein/assay) and at least 6-8 different concentrations of examined compounds. Non specific binding can be determined in the presence of 10 uM of CHA (N6 cyclohexyladenosine) and this is always <10% of the total binding. Incubation times are typically 120 min at 25 0C.
Radioligand binding assays may comprise the following: Binding of [3H]- SCH 58261 (5-amino-7-(2-ρhenylethyl)-2-(2-furyl)-pyrazolo[4,3-e]-l,2,4-triazolo[l,5- c]pyrimidine) to rat striatal membranes (100 ug of protein/assay) can be performed according to methods described in Zocchi et ah, 1996, J. Pharm. andExper. Ther. 276:398- 404, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In competition studies, at least 6-8 different concentrations of examined compounds should be used. Non specific binding can be determined in the presence of 50 uM of NECA (5'-(N- ethylcarboxamido)adenosine). Incubation time is typically 60 min at 25 0C. Bound and free radioactivity can be separated by filtering the assay mixture through Whatman GF/B glass-fiber filters using a Brandel cell harvester (Gaithersburg, Md., USA). The incubation mixture can be diluted with 3 ml of ice-cold incubation buffer, rapidly vacuum filtered and the filter can be washed three times with 3 ml of incubation buffer. The filter bound radioactivity can be measured, for example, by liquid scintillation spectrometry. The protein concentration can be determined, for example, according to a Bio-Rad method (Bradford, 1976, Anal. Biochem. 72:248, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety) with bovine albumin as reference standard.
An exemplary assay for human cloned A3 Adenosine Receptor Binding Assay may comprise the following: Binding assays can be carried out according to methods described in Salvatore et al, 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sd. 90:10365-10369; which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In saturation studies, an aliquot of membranes (8 mg protein/ml) from HEK-293 cells transfected with the human recombinant A3 adenosine receptor (Research Biochemical International, Natick, Mass., USA) can be incubated with 10-12 different concentrations of [1251]AB-MECA ranging from 0.1 to 5 nM. Competition experiments can be carried out in duplicate in a final volume of 100 ul in test tubes containing 0.3 nM [1251]AB-MECA, 50 mM Tris HCl buffer, 10 mM MgCl2, pH 7.4 and 20 ul of diluted membranes (12.4 mg protein/ml) and at least 6-8 different concentrations of examined ligands. Incubation time was 60 min at 37 0C, according to the results of previous time-course experiments. Bound and free radioactivity were separated by filtering the assay mixture through Whatman GF/B glass-fiber filters using a Brandel cell harvester. Non-specific binding was defined as binding in the presence of 50 uM R-PIA and was about 30% of total binding. The incubation mixture was diluted with 3 ml of ice- cold incubation buffer, rapidly vacuum filtered and the filter was washed three times with 3 ml of incubation buffer. The filter bound radioactivity was counted in a Beckman gamma 5500B gamma counter. The protein concentration can be determined according to a Bio- Rad method with bovine albumin as reference standard.
Data Analysis may be carried out as follows: Inhibitory binding constant, Ki, values can be calculated from those of IC50 according to the Cheng & Prusoff equation (Cheng and Prusoff, 1973, Biochem. Pharmacol. 22:3099-3108), Ki =IC50/(l+[C*]/KD*), where [C*] is the concentration of the radioligand and KD * its dissociation constant. A weighted non linear least-squares curve fitting program LIGAND (Munson and Rodbard, 1990, Anal. Biochem. 107:220-239) can be used for computer analysis of saturation and inhibition experiments. Data are typically expressed as geometric mean, with 95% or 99% confidence limits in parentheses. hi some embodiments, the efficacy of the compounds can be tested in animal models. For example, the efficacy of the adenosine A3 antagonists alone or in combination with conventional anti-tumor agents such as cytotoxic/anti-neoplastic agents and anti- angiogenic agents can be compared to the conventional agents alone. Typically, a tumor of a given size is present in a rat or mouse. The mouse is treated with the agent and the size of the tumor is measured over time. The mean survival time of the animals can also be measured. The adenosine A3 antagonists which are used must actively bind the adenosine A3 receptor in the animal which is to be tested. Xenografts can be implanted into the animal to test the ability of species specific cytotoxic compounds. However, the effect of the anti- angiogenic therapy depends on how well the anti-angiogenetic compounds work on inhibiting the specific animal's vasculation.
Assay methods that have demonstrated the efficacy of endostatin and angiostatin in suppressing tumor growth can be applied to A1, A2a, and A3 antagonists. For example, Lewis lung carcinoma, T241 fibrosarcoma or Bl 6F10 melanoma can be grafted to mice (Boehm et al, 1977, Nature, 390:404-407; which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). Other tumors, such as PC-3 human prostate carcinoma, the CCLl 88 human colon carcinoma and the UBC urinary bladder carcinoma have been shown to release angiogenic agents (Chen et al, 1996, Cancer Res., 55:4230-4322; which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety), these tumors can also be grafted in mice for the evaluation of anti-tumor activities of adenosine antagonists. Adenosine antagonists can be administered to mice by the methods disclosed herein. This therapy can be used alone or in conjunction with anti-angiogenic therapy or conventional chemotherapy.
6.5.3 METHODS FOR DETERMINING AND MEASURING HIF-I ALPHALEVELS
The invention encompasses methods to assess quantitative and qualitative aspects of HIF-I α expression. In one example, the increased expression of an HIF- lot gene or gene product indicates a predisposition for the development of cancer or a disease or disorder associated with enhanced HIF- lα expression. Alternatively, enhanced expression levels of an HIF-I α gene or gene product can indicate the presence of cancer in a subject or the risk of metastasis of said cancer in said subject. Techniques well known in the art, e.g., quantitative or semi-quantitative RT PCR or Northern blot, can be used to measure expression levels of HIF-I α. Methods that describe both qualitative and quantitative aspects of HIF-I α gene or gene product expression are described in detail in the examples infra. The measurement of HIF-lα gene expression levels can include measuring naturally occurring HIF- lα transcripts and variants thereof as well as non-naturally occurring variants thereof, however for the diagnosis and/or prognosis of diseases or disorders in a subject the HIF-lα gene product is preferably a naturally occurring HIF-lα gene product or variant thereof. Thus, the invention relates to methods of measuring the expression of the HIF- 1 α gene or gene product in a subj ect.
Any method known in the art for detecting and/or quantitating an HIF- lα level may be used in the methods and kits of the invention, a number of which are exemplified herein. Particularly preferred are methods known in the art for detecting and/or quantitating an HIF-lα activity or an HIF-lα related activity, e.g., phosphorylation of downstream effector molecules in the HIF-lα pathway. In some embodiments, the invention encompasses measuring an HIF- lα activity or an HIF- lα related activity including but not limited to, measuring an activity of one or more downstream effectors of an HIF-lα signaling cascade. Measuring an HIF-lα activity or an HIF-lα related activity can be done using any of the methods disclosed herein or any standard method known to one skilled in the art.
In other embodiments, the invention encompasses quantitation of a nucleic acid encoding HIF- lot in a sample obtained from a subject using methods disclosed herein or any standard method known in the art.
In yet other embodiments, the invention encompasses quantitation of HIF-I α protein in a sample obtained from a subject with a disease or disorder, e.g., cancer. Any method known in the art for the detection and quantitation of a HIF- lα protein is encompassed within the present invention. 6.5.3.1 DETECTION OF NUCLEIC ACID MOLECULES
The methods and kits of the invention encompass detection and/or quantitation of a nucleic acid sequence encoding HIF- lα in a sample obtained from a subject. In certain embodiments, the invention provides methods for amplifying a specific HIF- lα nucleic acid sequence in a sample obtained from a subject with cancer, and detecting and/or quantitating the same. Nucleic acids encoding HIF- lα are well known in the art. See, for example, Wang et al, 1995, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA, 92: 5510-4; and WO 96/39426 each of which is incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
The methods and kits of the invention may use any nucleic acid amplification or detection method known to one skilled in the art, such as those described in U.S. Patent No.'s 5,525,462; 6,528,632; 6,344,317; 6,114,117; 6,127,120; 6,448,001; all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
In some embodiments, the nucleic acid encoding an HIF-I α is amplified by PCR amplification using methodologies known to one skilled in the art. One of skill in the art will recognize, however, that amplification of target sequences (i.e., nucleic acid sequences encoding HIF- lα) in a sample obtained from a subject with cancer can be accomplished by any known method, such as ligase chain reaction (LCR), QP-replicase amplification, transcription amplification, and self-sustained sequence replication, each of which provides sufficient amplification. The PCR process is well known in the art and is thus not described in detail herein. For a review of PCR methods and protocols, see, e.g., Innis et ah, eds., PCR Protocols, A Guide to Methods and Application. Academic Press,
Inc., San Diego, Calif. 1990; which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). Also see U.S. Patent No. 4,683,202; which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. PCR reagents and protocols are also available from commercial vendors, such as Roche Molecular Systems. The invention encompasses methods to determine quantitative and/or qualitative levels of expression of HIF-I α. Any technique known in the art for measuring the expression of an HIF-I α is within the scope of the invention, including but not limited, to quantitative and/or semi-quantitative RT PCR and Northern blot analysis. In some embodiments, the invention encompasses detecting and/or quantitating an HIF- lα nucleic acid using fluorescence in situ hybridization (FISH) in a sample, preferably a tissue sample, obtained from a subject with cancer in accordance with the methods of the invention. FISH is a common methodology used in the art, especially in the detection of specific chromosomal aberrations in tumor cells, for example, to aid in diagnosis and tumor staging. As applied in the methods of the invention, it can also be used as a method for detection and/or quantitation of an HIF-I α nucleic acid. For a review of FISH methodology, see, e.g., Weier etal, 2002, Expert Rev. MoI. Diagn. 2(2): 109-119; Trask et al, 1991, Trends Genet. 7(5): 149-154; and Tkachuk et al, 1991, Genet. Anal. Tech. Appl. 8: 676-74; all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. The invention encompasses measuring naturally occurring HIF- 1 α transcripts and variants thereof as well as non-naturally occurring variants thereof. For the prognosis of cancer in a subject using the methods of the invention, the HIF-I α transcript is preferably a naturally occurring HIF- lα transcript.
In some embodiments, the invention relates to methods of prognosis of a cancer in a subject by measuring the expression of an HIF- 1 α transcript in a subject. For example, the increased level of mRNA encoding an HIF- lα, as compared to a standard, e.g., a non-cancerous sample, would indicate the increased risk of developing cancer in said subject. In another embodiment, the increased level of mRNA encoding an HIF- lα as compared to a standard would indicate the risk of metastasis of the cancer in said subject or the likelihood of a poor prognosis in said subject.
In one embodiment, the invention encompasses isolating RNA from a sample obtained from a subject with cancer, and testing the RNA utilizing hybridization or PCR techniques as described above for determining the level of an HIF-I α. In another embodiment, the invention encompasses synthesizing cDNA from the isolated RNA by reverse transcription. All or part of the resulting cDNA is then used as the template for a nucleic acid amplification reaction, such as a PCR or the like. The nucleic acid reagents used as synthesis initiation reagents {e.g., primers) in the reverse transcription and nucleic acid amplification steps of this method are chosen from among the HIF- lα nucleic acid reagents described below. The preferred lengths of such nucleic acid reagents are at least 9- 30 nucleotides. For detection of the amplified product, the nucleic acid amplification may be performed using radioactively or non-radioactively labeled nucleotides. Alternatively, enough amplified product may be made such that the product may be visualized by standard ethidium bromide staining or by utilizing any other suitable nucleic acid staining method. In alternative embodiments, standard Northern analysis techniques known to one skilled in the art can be performed on a sample obtained from a subject with cancer. The preferred length of a probe used in Northern analysis is 9-50 nucleotides. Utilizing such techniques, quantitative as well as size related differences among HIF- lα transcripts can also be detected. In alternative embodiments, the invention encompasses gene expression assays in situ, i.e., directly upon tissue sections (fixed and/or frozen) of patient tissue obtained from biopsies or resections, such that no nucleic acid purification is necessary. Nucleic acid reagents such as those described below may be used as probes and/or primers for such in situ procedures (see, e.g., Nuovo, GJ., 1992, PCR In Situ Hybridization: Protocols And Applications. Raven Press, NY, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
The target HIF- lα nucleic acids of the invention can also be detected using other standard techniques well known to those of skill in the art. Although the detection step is typically preceded by an amplification step, amplification is not necessarily required in the methods of the invention. For instance, the HIF-I α nucleic acids can be identified by size fractionation (e.g., gel electrophoresis). The presence of different or additional bands in the sample as compared to the control is an indication of the presence of target nucleic acids of the invention. Alternatively, the target HIF-I α nucleic acids can be identified by sequencing according to well known techniques. In alternative embodiments, oligonucleotide probes specific to the target HIF- lα nucleic acids can be used to detect the presence of specific fragments.
Sequence-specific probe hybridization is a well known method of detecting desired nucleic acids in a sample comprising a biological fluid or tissue sample and is within the scope of the present invention. Briefly, under sufficiently stringent hybridization conditions, the probes hybridize specifically only to substantially complementary sequences. The stringency of the hybridization conditions can be relaxed to tolerate varying amounts of sequence mismatch. If the target is first amplified, detection of the amplified product utilizes this sequence-specific hybridization to insure detection of only the correct amplified target, thereby decreasing the chance of a false positive caused by the presence of homologous sequences from related organisms or other contaminating sequences.
A number of hybridization formats well known in the art, including but not limited to solution phase, solid phase, mixed phase, or in situ hybridization assays are encompassed within the nucleic acid detection methods of the invention. In solution (or liquid) phase hybridizations, both the target nucleic acid and the probe or primer are free to interact in the reaction mixture. In solid phase hybridization assays, either the target or probes are linked to a solid support where they are available for hybridization with complementary nucleic acids in solution. Exemplary solid phase formats include Southern hybridizations, dot blots, and the like. The following articles provide an overview of the various hybridization assay formats, all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety: Singer et al, 1986 Biotechniques 4: 230; Haase etal, 1984, Methods in Virology. YoI. VII, pp. 189-226; Wilkinson, In Situ Hybridization. D. G. Wilkinson ed., IRL Press, Oxford University Press, Oxford; and Nucleic Acid Hybridization: A Practical Approach, Hames, B. D. and Higgins, S. J., eds., IRL Press (1987).
The invention encompasses homogenous based hybridization assays as well as heterogeneous based assays for detection and/or quantitation of HIF-I α nucleic acid sequences in accordance with the methods of the invention. Heterogeneous based assays depend on the ability to separate hybridized from non-hybridized nucleic acids. One such assay involves immobilization of either the target or probe nucleic acid on a solid support so that non-hybridized nucleic acids which remain in the liquid phase can be easily separated after completion of the hybridization reaction {see, e.g., Southern, 1975, J. MoI Biol. 98: 503-517; which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). In comparison, homogeneous assays depend on other means for distinguishing between hybridized and non-hybridized nucleic acids. Because homogeneous assays do not require a separation step, they are generally considered to be more desirable. One such homogeneous assay relies on the use of a label attached to a probe nucleic acid that is only capable of generating a signal when the target is hybridized to the probe {see, e.g., Nelson, et al, 1992, Nonisotopic DNA Probe Techniques. Academic Press, New York, N.Y., pages 274-310; which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
The invention encompasses any method known in the art for enhancing the sensitivity of the detectable signal in such assays, including but not limited to the use of cyclic probe technology (Bakkaoui et al, 1996, BioTeckniques 20: 240-8, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety); and the use of branched probes (Urdea et al, 1993, Clin. Chem. 39: 725-6; which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
The hybridization complexes are detected according to well known techniques in the art. Nucleic acid probes capable of specifically hybridizing to a target can be labeled by any one of several methods typically used to detect the presence of hybridized nucleic acids. One common method of detection is the use of autoradiography, using probes labeled with 3H, 1251, 35S, 14C, or 32P, or the like. The choice of radioactive isotope depends on research preferences due to ease of synthesis, stability, and half lives of the selected isotopes. Other labels include compounds {e.g., biotin and digoxigenin), that bind to anti- ligands or antibodies labeled with fluorophores, chemiluminescent agents, or enzymes. Alternatively, probes can be conjugated directly to labels such as fluorophores, chemiluminescent agents or enzymes. The choice of label depends on sensitivity required, ease of conjugation with the probe, stability requirements, and available instrumentation. The probes and primers of the invention can be synthesized and labeled using techniques known to one skilled in the art. Oligonucleotides for use as probes and primers may be chemically synthesized according to the solid phase phosphoramidite triester method described by Beaucage, S. L. and Caruthers, M. H., 1981, Tetrahedron Lett. 22(20): 1859-1862, using an automated synthesizer, as described inNeedham-VanDevanter, D. R., et al. 1984, Nucleic Acids Res. 12: 6159-6168. Purification of oligonucleotides can be by either native acrylamide gel electrophoresis or by anion-exchange HPLC, as described in Pearson, J. D. and Regnier, F. E., 1983, J. Chrom. 255:137-149. All of the references cited supra are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
6.5.4 DETECTION OF PROTEINS
The methods and kits of the invention encompass detection and/or quantitation of HIF-I α in a sample obtained from a subject. Any method known to one skilled in the art for the detection and quantitation of an HIF-I α protein is encompassed within the present invention. HIF- lα protein sequences useful in the methods and kits of the invention are well known in the art. See, for example, Wang et al, 1995, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA, 92: 5510-4; Merighi et al, HIF-lα Expression in Cancer Cells in up- regulated by adeerrozine A3 receptors, paper submitted to Nature, 2004; and WO 96/39426 each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entireties.
HIF- lα proteins and anti- HIF- lα antibodies and immunospecific fragments thereof are suitable in the assays of the invention. Detection and quantitation of an HIF- lα gene product encompasses the detection of proteins exemplified herein. Detection of elevated levels of an HIF-lα gene product in a sample obtained from a subject in accordance with the methods of the invention is generally compared to a standard sample. In some embodiments, antibodies directed against naturally occurring HIF- lα proteins may be used in the methods of the invention. The invention encompasses the use of any standard immunoassay method known to one skilled in the art, including but not limited to Western blot, ELISA, and FACS .
In one embodiment, the invention encompasses use of an immunoassay comprising contacting a sample from a subject with an anti- HIF- lα antibody or an immunospecific fragment thereof under conditions such that immunospecific binding to the HIF- lα receptor in the sample can occur, thereby forming an immune complex, and detecting and/or measuring the amount of complex formed. In a specific embodiment, an antibody to an HIF-lα is used to assay a sample for the presence of the HIF-lα, wherein an increased level of the HIF-lα is detected relative to a standard sample.
In some embodiments, the biological sample may be brought in contact with and immobilized onto a solid phase support or a carrier such as nitrocellulose or other solid support capable of immobilizing cells, cell particles or soluble proteins. The support can be washed with suitable buffers followed by treatment with the antibody that selectively or specifically binds to an HIF- lα protein. The solid phase support can then be washed with buffer to remove unbound antibody. The amount of antibody bound to the solid support can then be detected by conventional means.
"Solid phase support or carrier" as used herein refers to any support capable of binding an antigen or an antibody. Well-known supports or carriers include glass, polystyrene, polypropylene, polyethylene, dextran, nylon, amylases, natural and modified celluloses, polyacrylamides, gabbros, and magnetite. The nature of the carrier can be either soluble to some extent or insoluble for the purposes of the present invention. The support material may have virtually any possible structural configuration so long as the coupled molecule is capable of binding to an antigen or antibody. Thus, the support configuration may be spherical, as in a bead, or cylindrical, as in the inside surface of a test tube, or the external surface of a rod. Alternatively, the surface may be flat such as a sheet, test strip, etc. Preferred supports include polystyrene beads. Those skilled in the art will know many other suitable carriers for binding antibody or antigen, or will be able to ascertain the same by use of routine experimentation.
In some embodiments, the anti- HIF-I α antibody or an immunospecific fragment thereof can be detectably labeled by linking the same to an enzyme and using the labeled antibody in an enzyme immunoassay (EIA) (Voller, A., "The1 Enzyme Linked Immunosorbent Assay (ELISA)", 1978, Diagnostic Horizons 2:1, Microbiological Associates Quarterly Publication, Walkersville, MD; Voller, A. et al, 1978, J Clin. Pathol. 31:507-520; Butler, J.E., 1981, Meth. Enzymol. 73:482; Maggio, E. ed., 1980, Enzyme Immunoassay, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL,; Ishikawa, E. et ah, eds., 1981, Enzyme
Immunoassay, Kgaku Shoin, Tokyo, all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety). The enzyme bound to the antibody will react with an appropriate substrate, preferably a chromogenic substrate, in such a manner as to produce a chemical moiety which can be detected, for example, by spectrophotometric, fluorimetric or visual means. Enzymes that can be used to detectably label the antibody include but are not limited to malate dehydrogenase, staphylococcal nuclease, delta-5-steroid isomerase, yeast alcohol dehydrogenase, alpha-glycerophosphate, dehydrogenase, triose phosphate isomerase, horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, asparaginase, glucose oxidase, beta- galactosidase, ribonuclease, urease, catalase, glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase, glucoamylase and acetylcholinesterase, among others. The detection can be accomplished by colorimetric methods that employ a chromogenic substrate for the enzyme. Detection can also be accomplished by visual comparison of the extent of enzymatic reaction of a substrate in comparison with similarly prepared standards.
Detection can also be accomplished using any other method known to one skilled in the art. For example, by radioactively labeling the antibodies or antibody fragments, it is possible to detect HIF-lα protein through the use of a radioimmunoassay (RIA) {see, for example, Weintraub, B., Principles of Radioimmunoassays, Seventh Training Course on Radioligand Assay Techniques, The Endocrine Society, March, 1986). The radioactive isotope can be detected by such means as the use of a gamma counter or a scintillation counter, or by autoradiography.
In other embodiments, the invention encompasses labeling the antibody with a fluorescent compound. When the fluorescently labeled antibody is exposed to light of the proper wave length, its presence can then be detected due to fluorescence. Among the most commonly used fluorescent labeling compounds are fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, phycoerythrin, phycocyanin, allophycocyanin, o-phthaldehyde and fluorescamine. In yet other embodiments, the antibody can also be detectably labeled using fluorescence emitting metals such as 152Eu, or others of the lanthanide series. These metals can be attached to the antibody using such metal chelating groups as diethylenetriaminepentacetic acid (DTPA) or ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA). The invention further encompasses detectably labeling the antibody by coupling it to a cheniiluminescent compound. The presence of the chemiluminescent- tagged antibody is then determined by detecting the presence of luminescence that arises during the course of a chemical reaction. Examples of particularly useful chemiluminescent labeling compounds are luminol, isoluminol, theromatic acridinium ester, imidazole, acridinium salt and oxalate ester. Likewise, a bioluminescent compound can be used to label the antibody of the present invention. Bioluminescence is a type of chemiluminescence found in biological systems in which a catalytic protein increases the efficiency of the chemiluminescent reaction. The presence of a bioluminescent protein is determined by detecting the presence of luminescence. Bioluminescent compounds for purposes of labeling include, e.g., luciferin, luciferase and aequorin.
The invention also encompasses methods for indirect detection of HIF-I α. In a specific embodiment, the invention encompasses use of an immunoassay comprising contacting a sample derived from a subject with cancer with an anti- HIF- lα antibody (primary antibody) or an immunospecific fragment thereof under conditions such that immunospecific binding to the HIF- lα protein in the sample can occur, thereby forming an immune complex, adding a secondary antibody that is labeled under conditions such that immunospecific binding to the primary antibody occurs and detecting and/or quantitating the amount of complex formed indirectly. Anti- HIF- lα antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof may be used quantitatively or qualitatively to detect an HIF- lα in a sample. In some embodiments, when the sample is a tissue, the anti- HIF- lα antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof may be used histologically, e.g., immunofluorescence or microscopic studies, using common techniques known to one skilled in the art, for in situ detection of an HIF-I α receptor. In situ detection may be accomplished by preparing a histological specimen from a subject, such as a paraffin embedded section of tissue, e.g., breast tissues, and applying thereto a labeled antibody of the present invention. The antibody (or fragment) is preferably applied by overlaying the labeled antibody (or fragment) onto the biological sample. Through the use of such a procedure, it is possible to determine not only the presence of an HIF- 1 α protein but also its distribution in the examined tissue. Using the methods of the present invention, those of ordinary skill will readily perceive that any of a wide variety of histological methods (such as staining procedures) can be modified in order to achieve such in situ detection.
6.6 NUCLEIC ACIDS ENCODING HIF-I ALPHA The methods of the invention may use any nucleic acid encoding HIF- lα, an analog, fragment or derivative thereof, as a proxy for determining a HIF-I a level. A nucleic acid is intended to include DNA molecules (e.g., cDNA, genomic DNA), RNA molecules (e.g., hnRNA, pre-mRNA, mRNA) and DNA or RNA analogs (e.g., peptide nucleic acids) generated using techniques known to one skilled in the art. The nucleic acid measured as a proxy for a HIF-I α level can be single-stranded or double stranded.
For example, but not by way of limitation, nucleotide sequences for use in the methods and kits of the invention may include all or a portion of any of the following: nucleotide sequences disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 6,455,674 (issued to Einat et al); 6,652,799 (issued to Semenza); 6,222,018(issued to Semenza); Wang et al. , 1995 PNAS USA, 92: 5510-4; and WO 96/39426. The invention encompasses all or a portion of the nucleotide sequence of human HIF-lα with GENBANK Accession Nos. NM_OO153O and NM_181054. All nucleotide sequences of the references cited supra are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. Generally, any HIF-I α nucleic acid known in the art may be useful in the methods and kits of the invention. Such nucleic acids generally encode at least a portion of HIF-I α, or have a sequence that hybridizes to a HIF- lα, -encoding nucleic acid under hybridizing conditions, as described herein.
In one embodiment, the methods of the invention may use a coding sequence or a 5' or 3' untranslated region of a nucleic acid encoding HIF- lα or a fragment thereof as a probe, including naturally occurring and non-naturally occurring variants. A non- naturally occurring variant is one that is engineered by man (e.g., a peptide nucleic acid probe). In the methods of the invention wherein HIF-lα, or an mRNA encoding HIF- lα, in a sample from a subject is detected or measured, naturally occurring gene products are detected, including but not limited to wild-type gene products as well as mutants, allelic variants, splice variants, polymorphic variants, etc. Li general, variants will be highly homologous to the wild-type gene product encoding HIF-I α, e.g., having at least 90%, 95%, 98% or 99% amino acid sequence identity (as determined by standard algorithms known in the art, see, e.g., Altschul, 1990 Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 87: 2264-2268; Altschul, 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL U.S.A. 90: 5873-5877; Altschul et al, 1990 J. MoI. Biol. 215: 403-410).
HIF-I α variants to be used as probes may be encoded by a nucleic acid which is hybridizable under stringent conditions to a nucleic acid encoding HIF-lα. Nucleic acid hybridization methods are well known in the art (see, e.g., Sambrook et al, 2001 Molecular Cloning. A Laboratory Manual. 3rd ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, New York; Ausubel et al, eds., 1994-1997, in the Current Protocols in Molecular Biology: Series of laboratory technique manuals, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.; Shilo and Weinberg, 1981, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 78, 6789-92; Dyson, 1991 Essential Molecular Biology: A Practical Approach, vol. 2, T. A. Brown, ed., 111-156, Press at Oxford University Press, Oxford, UK). The term "stringent conditions" refers to the ability of a first polynucleotide molecule to hybridize, and remain bound to a second filter-bound polynucleotide molecule in 0.5 M NaHPO4, 7% sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), 1 mM EDTA at 65°C, followed by washing in 0.2X SSC/0.1% SDS at 42°C {see Ausubel et al. (eds.), 1989, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol. I, Green Publishing Associates, Inc., and John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, at p. 2.10.3). In specific embodiments, the variants being detected or measured comprise (or, if nucleic acids, encode) not more than 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15 or 20 point mutations (substitutions) relative the wild-type sequence. An isolated nucleic acid probe encoding HIF- 1 a or a portion thereof, can be obtained by any method known in the art, e.g., from a deposited plasmid, by PCR amplification using synthetic primers hybridizable to the 3' and 5' ends of the sequence, and/or by cloning from a cDNA or genomic library using standard screening techniques, or by polynucleotide synthesis. Use of such probes for detection and quantitation of specific sequences is well known in the art. See e.g., Erlich, e.d, 1989, PCR Technology Principles and Applications for DNA Amplification. Macmillan Publishers Ltd., England; Sambrook et al, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 3rd ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY, 2001.
In some embodiments, the methods of the invention may use a gene coding sequence, e.g., cDNA, of HIF-I α, which preferably hybridizes under stringent conditions as described above to at least about 6, preferably about 12, most preferably about 18 or more consecutive nucleotides of the gene coding sequence of HIF-I α protein, useful for the detection of an HIF-I α protein
Using all or a portion of a nucleic acid sequence encoding HIF- lα protein, such as those exemplified herein as a hybridization probe, full length nucleic acid molecules encoding HIF-I α protein can be quantitated using standard hybridization techniques (see, e.g., Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 3rd ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY5 2001) for use in the methods of the invention, i.e., as a proxy for HIF- lα level. The HIF-lα sequences used in the methods of the invention are preferably human sequences. However, homologs of the human HIF-I a isolated from other animals can also be used in the methods of the invention as a proxy for HIF- lα level, particularly where the subject is a non-human animal. Thus, the invention also includes the use of HIF- lα homologs identified from non-human animals such as non-human primates, rats, mice, farm animals including but not limited to cattle, horses, goats, sheep, pigs, etc., household pets including but not limited to cats, dogs, etc. , in the methods of the invention.
The methods of the invention may use fragments of any of the nucleic acids disclosed herein in any of the methods of the invention. A fragment preferably comprises at least 10, 20, 50, 100, or 200 contiguous nucleotides of a sequence described herein.
Standard recombinant DNA techniques known in the art may be used to provide a HIF- lα protein or a nucleic acid encoding an HIF-I α protein, or a fragment thereof, for use in the methods and kits of the invention. In some embodiments, in order to provide a HIF- lα or nucleic acid as a standard, the corresponding nucleotide sequence encoding HIF- lα protein of interest can be cloned. For a review of PCR technology and cloning strategies which may be used in accordance with the invention, see, e.g., PCR Primer, 1995, Dieffenbach et ah, ed, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press; Sambrook et ah, 2001, supra which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. 6.7 HIF-I ALPHA PROTEINS
The present invention provides for the use of HIF-I α proteins, or fragments thereof, for the generation of antibodies for methods of the invention. HIF- lα polypeptides and fragments can also be used as protein abundance or activity standards in the methods of the invention.
For example, but not by way of limitation, the invention encompasses amino acid sequences of HIF-lα as dislcosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 6,455,674 (issued to Einat et al); 6,652,799 (issued to Semenza); 6,222,018(issued to Semenza); Wang et al, 1995 PNAS USA, 92: 5510-4; 6,436,654 (issued to Berkenstam); WO 96/39426. The amino acid sequences cited in the above-identified references are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. The invention encompasses the amino acid sequences of human HIF-Ia with GENBANK Accession No.s NP_001521 andNP_851397 each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
In some embodiments, the HIF-I α protein comprises an amino acid sequence that exhibits at least about 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99% sequence similarity to the amino acid sequence of any of HIF-I α proteins known in the art.
Il l Algorithms for determining percent identity between two protein sequences are well known in the art, see, e.g., Altschul, 1990 Proc. Natl. Acad. Sd. U.S.A. 87: 2264-2268; Altschul, 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScI U.S.A. 90: 5873-5877; Altschul et al, 1990 J MoI. Biol. 215: 403-410; each of which is incorporated herein by reference. In a specific embodiment, proteins are provided consisting of or comprising a fragment of HIF-I α protein consisting of at least ten contiguous amino acids. In another embodiment, the fragment consists of or comprises at least 20, 30, 40, or 50 contiguous amino acids from a HIF- lα protein for use, for example, in raising antibodies. Such fragments can also be useful, for example, as standards or controls in the methods and kits of the invention.
A variety of host-expression vector systems may be utilized to express HIF- lα proteins or fragments for use in the methods of the invention. Such host-expression systems are well known and provide the necessary means by which a protein of interest may be produced and subsequently purified. Examples of host-expression vector systems that may be used in accordance with the invention are: bacterial cells {e.g., E. coli, B. subtilis) transformed with recombinant bacteriophage DNA, plasmid DNA or cosmid DNA expression vectors containing a HIF-lα nucleic acid coding sequence, yeast cells {e.g., Saccharomyces, Pichia) transformed with a recombinant yeast expression vector containing the HIF-lα coding sequence; insect cells infected with a recombinant virus expression vector {e.g., baculovirus) containing the HIF-lα coding sequence; plant cells infected with a recombinant virus expression vector {e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or transformed with a recombinant plasmid expression vector {e.g., Ti plasmid) containing the HIF- lα coding sequence; or mammalian cells {e.g., COS, CHO, BHK, 293, 3T3) harboring recombinant expression constructs containing promoters derived from the genome of mammalian cells {e.g., metallothionein promoter) or from mammalian viruses {e.g., the adenovirus late promoter; the vaccinia virus 7.5K promoter).
In bacterial systems, a number of expression vectors may be advantageously selected depending upon the use intended for the HIF-I α being expressed. For example, when a large quantity of such a protein is to be produced for raising antibodies, vectors that direct the expression of high levels of protein products that are readily purified may be desirable. Such vectors include but are not limited to the E. coli expression vector pUR278 (Ruther et al, 1983, EMBO J. 2:1791), in which the HIF-lα coding sequence can be ligated into the vector in-frame with the lac Z coding region so that a fusion protein is produced; pIN vectors (Inouye & Inouye, 1985, Nucleic Acids Res. 13:3101; Van Heeke & Schuster, 1989, J. Biol. Chem. 264:5503); and the like. pGEX vectors can also be used to express foreign polypeptides as fusion proteins with glutathione S-transferase (GST). In general, such fusion proteins are soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsorption and binding to a column comprising of glutathione-agarose beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione. The pGEX vectors are designed to include, e.g., thrombin or factor Xa protease cleavage sites so that the cloned target gene product can be released from the GST moiety.
In an insect system, Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) can be used as a vector to express foreign genes. The virus grows in Spodoptera frugiper da cells. The HIF- lα coding sequence can be cloned individually into nonessential regions (for example the polyhedrin gene) of the virus and placed under control of an AcNPV promoter (for example the polyhedrin promoter). Successful insertion of a HIF- lα coding sequence will result in inactivation of the polyhedrin gene and production of non-occluded recombinant virus (i.e., virus lacking the proteinaceous coat coded for by the polyhedrin gene). These recombinant viruses can be used to infect Spodoptera frugiper da cells in which the inserted gene is expressed (e.g., see Smith et at, 1983, J. Virol. 46:584; Smith, U.S. Patent No. 4,215,051).
In mammalian host cells, a number of viral-based expression systems can be utilized. In cases where an adenovirus is used as an expression vector, the HIF- lα coding sequence of interest may be ligated to an adenovirus transcription/translation control complex, e.g., the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. This chimeric gene may then be inserted in the adenovirus genome by in vitro or in vivo recombination. Insertion in a non-essential region of the viral genome (e.g., region El or E3) will result in a recombinant virus that is viable and capable of expressing HIF- lα in infected hosts (see, e.g., Logan & Shenk, 1984, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA 81:3655). Specific initiation signals may also be required for efficient translation of inserted HIF- lα coding sequences. These signals include the ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. In cases where an entire HIF-I α gene, including its own initiation codon and adjacent sequences, is inserted into the appropriate expression vector, no additional translational control signals may be needed. However, in cases where only a portion of the HIF- lα coding sequence is inserted, exogenous translational control signals, including, if necessary, the ATG initiation codon, must be provided. These exogenous translational control signals and initiation codons can be of a variety of origins, both natural and synthetic. Furthermore, the initiation codon must be in phase with the reading frame of the desired coding sequence to ensure correct translation of the entire insert. The efficiency of expression may be enhanced by the inclusion of appropriate transcription enhancer elements, transcription terminators, etc. {see Bittner βt al, 1987. Methods in Enzvmol. 153: 516).
In addition, a host cell strain may be chosen that modulates the expression of the inserted sequences, or modifies and processes the gene product in the specific fashion desired. Such modifications {e.g., glycosylation) and processing {e.g., cleavage) of protein products may be important for the function of the protein. Different host cells have characteristic and specific mechanisms for the post-translational processing and modification of proteins and gene products. Appropriate cell lines or host systems can be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the foreign protein expressed. To this end, eukaryotic host cells that possess the cellular machinery for proper processing of the primary transcript, glycosylation, and phosphorylation of the gene product can be used. Such mammalian host cells include but are not limited to CHO5 VERO, BHK, HeLa, COS, MDCK, 293, 3T3, WI38, and in particular, breast cancer cell lines such as, for example, BT483, Hs578T, HTB26, BT20 and T47D, and normal mammary gland cell lines such as, for example, CRL7030 and Hs578Bst.
For long-term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins, stable expression is preferred. For example, cell lines that stably express the HIF- lα gene product can be engineered. Rather than using expression vectors that contain viral origins of replication, host cells can be transformed with DNA controlled by appropriate expression control elements {e.g., promoter, enhancer, sequences, transcription terminators, polyadenylation sites, etc.), and a selectable marker.
Following introduction of the foreign DNA, engineered cells can be allowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched media, and then can be switched to a selective media. A selectable marker in a recombinant construct, such as a plasmid, can confer resistance to the selective media, allow cells to stably integrate the plasmid into their chromosomes, and grow to form foci which, in turn, can be cloned and expanded into cell lines. This method can advantageously be used to engineer cell lines that stably express the HIF- lα gene product. Such engineered cell lines can be particularly useful in screening and evaluating compounds that affect the endogenous activity of the HIF- 1 α gene product.
A number of selection systems including but not limited to the herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase (Wigler etal, 1977, Cell 11: 223), hypoxanthine-guanine phosphoribosyltransferase (Szybalska & Szybalski, 1962, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA 48: 2026), and adenine phosphoribosyltransferase (Lowy et ah, 1980, Cell 22: 817) genes can be employed in tk", hgprf or aprt" cells, respectively. Also, anti-metabolite resistance can be used as the basis of selection for the following genes: dhfr, which confers resistance to methotrexate (Wigler et al, 1980, Proc Natl. Acad. ScL USA 77: 3567; O'Hare et al, 1981, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA 78:1527); gpt, which confers resistance to mycophenolic acid (Mulligan & Berg, 1981, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA 78:2072); neo, which confers resistance to the aminoglycoside G-418 (Colberre-Garapin et al, 1981, J. MoI. Biol. 150: 1); and hygro, which confers resistance to hygromycin (Santerre et al., 1984, Gene 30: 147).
6.8 ANTIBODIES TO HIF-I ALPHA
The methods and kits of the invention encompass use of anti- HIF- lα antibodies or fragments thereof that specifically recognize one or more epitopes of a HIF- lα protein. Accordingly, any HIF-I α protein, derivative, or fragment can be used as an immunogen to generate antibodies that immunospecifally bind a HIF- lα protein. Such antibodies and fragments can be used in the detection and quantitation of a HIF- lα in a sample to carry out any of the methods of the invention as disclosed herein. Such antibodies can include but are not limited to polyclonal antibodies, monoclonal antibodies (mAbs), humanized or chimeric antibodies, single chain antibodies, Fab fragments, F(ab')2 fragments, Fv fragments, fragments produced by a Fab expression library, anti-idiotypic (anti-Id) antibodies, and epitope-binding fragments of any of the above. In a specific embodiment, antibodies to human HIF- lα protein are used. Described herein are general methods for the production of antibodies or immunospecific fragments thereof. Any of such antibodies or fragments can be produced by standard immunological methods or by recombinant expression of nucleic acid molecules encoding the antibody or an immunospecific fragment thereof in an appropriate host organism. For the production of antibodies against HIF- lα , any of various host animals can be immunized by injection with a HIF- lα gene product, or a portion thereof. Such host animals can include but are not limited to rabbits, mice, and rats. Various adjuvants can be used to increase the immunological response depending on the host species, including but not limited to Freund's (complete or incomplete), mineral gels such as aluminum hydroxide, surface active substances such as lysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions, peptides, oil emulsions, keyhole limpet hemocyanin, dinitrophenol or potentially useful human adjuvants such as BCG (bacille Calmette-Guerin) and Corynebacterium parvum. Anti- HIF- lα monoclonal antibodies are preferred for use in the methods and kits of the invention. Monoclonal antibodies can be obtained by any technique that provides for the production of antibody molecules by continuous cell lines in culture. These include but are not limited to the hybridoma technique of Kohler and Milstein, (1975, Nature 256: 495; and U.S. Patent No. 4,376,110), the human B-cell hybridoma technique (Kosbor et al, 1983, Immunology Today 4: 72; Cole et al, 1983, Proa Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 80: 2026), and the EBV-hybridoma technique (Cole et al. , 1985, Monoclonal Antibodies And Cancer Therapy, Alan R. Liss, Inc., pp. 77). Such antibodies can be of any immunoglobulin class, including IgG, IgM, IgE, IgA, IgD, and any subclass thereof. The hybridoma producing the mAb of this invention can be cultivated in vitro or in vivo.
Techniques developed for the production of "chimeric antibodies" (Morrison et al, 1984, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 81, 6851-6855; Neuberger et al, 1984, Nature 312, 604- 608; Takeda et al , 1985, Nature 314, 452-454) by splicing the genes from a mouse antibody molecule of appropriate antigen specificity together with genes from a human antibody molecule of appropriate biological activity can be used in preparing antibodies useful in the present invention. A chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions are derived from different animal species, such as those having a variable region derived from a murine mAb and a human immunoglobulin constant region. (See, e.g., Cabilly et al, U.S. Patent No. 4,816,567; and Boss etal, U.S. Patent No. 5,816,397). The invention thus contemplates chimeric antibodies that are specific or selective for a HIF- lα protein. While often designed to be therapeutic, such chimeric antibodies can be useful to quantitate a HIF- lα level according to the methods of the invention.
Further, humanized antibodies can be used in the methods and kits of the invention. Briefly, humanized antibodies are antibody molecules from non-human species having one or more hypervariable regions or complementarity determining regions (CDRs) from the non-human species and framework regions from a human immunoglobulin molecule. The extent of the framework region and Cars have been precisely defined (see, "Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest", Kabat, E. et al, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (1983)). Examples of techniques that have been developed for the production of humanized antibodies are known in the art and useful within the scope of the present invention. (See, e.g., Queen, U.S. Patent No. 5,585,089 and Winter, U.S. Patent No. 5,225,539). Humanized antibodies are typically developed as therapeutic agents. However, such antibodies can also be used in the methods and kits of the present invention, as they can be used to quantitate a HIF- lα level in accordance with the instant invention. Phage display technology can be used to increase the affinity of an antibody to a HIF- lα gene product. This technique can be useful in obtaining higher affinity antibodies to an HIF- lα gene product, which could be used for the diagnosis and prognosis of a subject with cancer according to the present invention. The technology, referred to as affinity maturation, employs mutagenesis or CDR walking and re-selection using the HIF- lα gene product antigen to identify antibodies that bind with higher affinity to the antigen when compared with the initial or parental antibody (see, e.g.,G\aseτ et αl., 1992, J. Immunology 149:3903). Mutagenizing entire codons rather than single nucleotides results in a semi-randomized repertoire of amino acid mutations. Libraries can be constructed consisting of a pool of variant clones, each of which differs by a single amino acid alteration in a single CDR, and contain variants representing each possible amino acid substitution for each CDR residue. Mutants with increased binding affinity for the antigen can be screened by contacting the immobilized mutants with labeled antigen. Any screening method known in the art can be used to identify mutant antibodies having increased avidity to the antigen (e.g., ELISA) (see 'Ψu et αl, 1998, Proc Nαtl. Acαd ScL USA 95:6037; YύXon et αl, 1995, J Immunology 155:1994). CDR walking that randomizes the light chain may also be useful (see Schier etαl, 1996, J. MoI Bio. 263:551).
Alternatively, techniques described for the production of single chain antibodies (U.S. Patent No. 4,946,778; Bird, 1988, Science 242:423; Huston et αl., 1988, Proc. Nαtl. Acαd. ScL USA 85:5879; and Ward et αl., 1989, Nature 334: 544) can be adapted to produce single chain antibodies against HIF- lα gene products. Single chain antibodies are formed by linking the heavy and light chain fragments of the Fv region via an amino acid bridge, resulting in a single chain polypeptide. Techniques for the assembly of functional Fv fragments in E. coli can also be used (Skerra et al, 1988, Science 242: 1038). Antibody fragments that recognize specific epitopes can be generated by known techniques. Such fragments can be used for quantitating a HIF- lα gene product according to any available method known in the art. For example, such fragments include but are not limited to: F(ab')2 fragments, which can be produced by pepsin digestion of the antibody molecule; and Fab fragments, which can be generated by reducing the disulfide bridges of the F(ab')2 fragments; Fab fragments, which can be generated by treating the antibody molecule with papain and a reducing agent; and Fv fragments. Alternatively, Fab expression libraries can be constructed (Huse et al, 1989, Science 246:1275-1281) to allow rapid and easy identification of monoclonal Fab fragments having the desired specificity. A molecular clone of an antibody to an antigen of interest can be prepared by techniques known to one skilled in the art. Recombinant DNA methodology {see e.g., Maniatis et al., 1982, Molecular Cloning. A Laboratory Manual. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, New York) can be used to construct nucleic acid sequences that encode a monoclonal antibody molecule, or an immunospecific fragment thereof.
Antibody molecules can be purified by well-known techniques, e.g., immunoabsorption or immunoaffinity chromatography, chromatographic methods such as HPLC (high performance liquid chromatography), or a combination thereof. In the production of antibodies, screening for the desired antibody can be accomplished by techniques known in the art, e.g. , ELISA (enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay). For example, to select antibodies that recognize a specific domain of an HIF-I α , generated hybridomas can be assayed for a product that binds to a HIF- lα fragment containing such domain. The foregoing antibodies can be used to quantify a HIF- lα protein, e.g., to measure levels thereof in appropriate samples, in the methods and kits of the invention.
The methods of antibody production employed herein include those described in Harlow and Lane (Harlow, E. and Lane, D., 1988, and later editions, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, New York), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
Any antibody directed to one or more epitopes of an HIF-I α can be used in the methods and kits of the invention. Commercially available HIF-lα antibodies can be used in accordance with the instant invention, for example those available from Novus Biologicals, Inc. (Littleton, CO); Affinity BioReagents, (Golden, CO). 6.9 KITS
The invention provides a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more containers filled with compounds of the invention. Additionally, one or more other prophylactic or therapeutic agents useful for the treatment of a disease can also be included in the pharmaceutical pack or kit. The invention also provides a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more containers filled with one or more of the ingredients of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention. Optionally associated with such container(s) can be a notice in the form prescribed by a governmental agency regulating the manufacture, use or sale of pharmaceuticals or biological products, which notice reflects approval by the agency of manufacture, use or sale for human administration. The present invention provides kits that can be used in the above methods. In one embodiment, a kit comprises one or more compounds of the invention. In another embodiment, a kit further comprises one or more other prophylactic or therapeutic agents useful for the treatment of cancer, in one or more containers. In another embodiment, a kit further comprises one or more anti-cancer agents that bind one or more cancer antigens associated with cancer. In certain embodiments, the other prophylactic or therapeutic agent is a chemotherapeutic. In other embodiments, the prophylactic or therapeutic agent is a biological or hormonal therapeutic.
7. EXAMPLES The following examples illustrate aspects of this invention but should not be construed as limitations. The symbols and conventions used in these examples are intended to be consistent with those used in the contemporary, international, chemical literature, for example, the Journal of the American Chemical Society (J.Am.Chem.Soc.) and Tetrahedron. MATERIALS AND METHODS-Chemicals and Reagents
Human A375, SKMES, HT29, Panc-1, Jurkat, HeL023 and NCTC2544 cells were obtained from American Tissue Culture Collection (ATCC). Tissue culture media and growth supplements were obtained from BioWbittaker. Unless otherwise noted, all other chemicals were purchased from Sigma. MRE 3046F20, 5-N-(4-methylphenyl- carbamoyl)amino-8-methyl-2(2-furyl)-pyrazolo-[4,3e]-l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine; IL-10 salt, 5-N-(4-diethylamino-phenyl-carbamoyl)amino-8-methyl-(2(2furyl)-pyrazolo- μ^ejl^-triazolotl^-clpyrimidine); MRE 3008F20, 5-N-(4-methoxyphenyl- carbamoyl)amino-8-propyl-2(2furyl)-pyrazolo-[4,3e] 1 ,2,4-triazolo[ 1 ,5-c]pyrirnidine, MRE 3055F20, 5-N- (4-phenylcarbamoyl)amino- 8-propyl- 2 (2furyl) -pyrazolo[4,3e]-l,2,4- triazolo-[l,5c]pyrimidine and MRE 3062F20, 5-N-(4-phenyl-carbumoyl)amino-8-butyl- 2(2furyl)-pyrazolo-[4,3e]-l,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine were synthesized by Prof. P.G. Baraldi, University of Ferrara, Italy. CGS15943, 5-amino-9-chloro-2-(furyl)l,2,4- triazolo[l,5-c] quinazoline and ZM 241385, 4-(2-[7-amino-2-(2-furyl)- [l,2,4]triazolo[2,3-α][l,3,5]triazin-5-ylamino]ethyl)phenol were obtained from RBI [Zeneca Pharmaceuticals, Cheshire, UK]. PD 98059, 2-Amino-3-methoxyflavone, (a selective inhibitor of MAP kinase (MEK)) andrhodamine 123 were obtained from Calbiochem. U0126 (an inhibitor of MEK-I and MEK-2) and SB 203580 (an inhibitor of p38 MAP kinase) were from Promega. RNAse was purchased from Boehringer. Cell Culture: For chemotherapeutic enhancement testing, the human melanoma A375, human lung carcinoma SKMES, colon carcinoma HT29, and pancreatic cancer Panc-1 cell lines were originally obtained from the ATCC (American Type Culture Collection) and have been maintained at PRC. Cell lines are maintained in RPMI-1640 medium supplemented with 100 units/ml penicillin G sodium, 100 μg/ml streptomycin sulfate, 0.25 μg/ml amphotericin B (fungizone), 2 mM glutamine, 10 mM HEPES, 25 μg/ml gentamycin, and 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum. The cells are cultured in a T25 Falcon Tissue Culture flask in a humidified incubator at 37°C with 5% CO2-95% air. The cells are sub-cultured twice a week. The doubling times of A375, SKMES3 HT29, and Panc-1 cultures are approximately 22, 45, 48, and 60 hr, respectively.
For multi-drug resistance testing, A375 andNCTC2544 cells are grown adherently and maintained in DMEM and EMEM medium, respectively, containing 10% fetal calf serum, penicillin (100 U/ml), streptomycin (100 μg/ml), L-glutamine (2 mM) at 37°C in 5% CO2/95% air. HeL023 and Jurkat were grown in RPMI-1640 medium, containing 10% fetal calf serum, penicillin (100 U/ml), streptomycin (100 μg/ml), L- glutamine (2 mM) at 37°C in 5% CO2/95% air. Cells are passaged two or three times weekly at a ratio between 1 :5 and 1:10. Lymphocytes were isolated from buffy coats kindly provided by the Blood Bank of the University Hospital of Ferrara. Blood donated by healthy volunteers, after informed consent for research was obtained. Lymphocytes were isolated by density gradient centrifugation (Ficoll/Histopaque 1.077 g/ml). The cells are stimulated with purified phytohemoagglutinin (1 μg/ml) and expanded in RPMI medium added of interleukin 2 (20 Units/ml) and 10% fetal calf serum.
Colony Formation Assay: Exponentially growing A375 cells were seeded at 300 cells per well in six- well plates with 2 ml of fresh medium and treated with paclitaxel, vindesine and adenosine receptor agonists and antagonists dissolved in DMSO solution. Control plates received the same volume of DMSO alone. After 7 days of growth at 37°C in humidified atmosphere containing 5% CO2, the cells were fixed with absolute methanol for 5' and stained with 1/10 Giemsa/phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) staining solution for 10 minutes. Staining solution was removed and colonies of greater than 30 cells were scored as survivors. For each treatment, six individual wells were scored.
Flow Cytometry Analysis: A375 and NCTC2544 adherent cells were trypsinized, mixed with floating cells, washed with PBS and permeabilised in 70% (vol/vol) ethanol/PBS solution at 40C for at least 24 hours. Jurkat, HeL023 and PBMC cells were centrifuged for 10 minutes at 1000 x g. The cell pellet was then resuspended and permeabllised in 70% (vol/vol) ethanol/PBS solution at 4°C for at least 24 hours. The cells were washed with PBS and the DNA was stained with a PBS solution, containing 20 μg/ml of propidium iodide and 100 μg/ml of RNAse, at room temperature for 30 minutes. Cells were analysed by FACScan (Becton-Dickinson) and the content of DNA was evaluated by the CeIl-LISYS program (Becton-Dickinson). Cell distribution among cell cycle phases and apoptotic cells was evaluated as previously described (Secchiero et al., 2001). Briefly, the cell cycle distribution is shown as the percentage of cells containing 2n (G1 phase), 4n (G2 and M phases), 4n>x>2n. DNA amount (S phase) judged by propidium iodide staining. The apoptotic population is the percentage of cells with DNA content lower than 2n.
Rhodamine 123 Efflux Assay: 5x10s cells from each subline were loaded with 50 ng/ml of rhodamine 123 for 30 minutes at 37C in medium. The cells were washed and resuspended in dye-staining agent free medium for 3 hours at 37 C. to allow rhodamine 123 efflux. The cells were then washed twice and the fluorescence of intracellular rhodamine 123 were analysed with Flow cytometer (residual fluorescence FRES). The fluorescence was compared with loaded cells maintained at 4 C. to prevent drug export (maximal fluorescence FMAX). The cells were treated with adenosine receptor antagonists to evaluate the ability of adenosine receptors to interfere with P-gp drug efflux activity. Cells from each subline that were not being exposed to rhodamine 123 were used as negative controls.
Metabolic Inhibitors: Cells were treated for 30 minutes with metabolic inhibitors or with drug vehicle (DMSO) prior to being challenged with adenosine receptor antagonists and paclitaxel or vindesine. After 24 hours, cells were collected for flow cytometry analysis. PD 98059 was used at 20 uM as an inhibitor of MEK to prevent MEK- 1 activation. UOl 26 was used at 10 uM as inhibitor of MEK-I and MEK-2 to prevent extracellular signal-regulated kinase ERK-I and ERK-2 activation. SB 203580 was used at 1 uM as an inhibitor of p38MAP kinase (p38MAPK).
Statistical Analysis: All values in the figures and text are expressed as mean ±. standard deviation (SD) of n observation (with n>3). Data sets were examined by analysis of variance (ANOVA) and Dunnett's test (when required). A P value less than 0.05 was considered statistically significant. Representative images obtained by FACscan are reported, with similar results having been obtained in at least three different experiments.
Inventors have verified the concentration of adenosine A3 receptors in human cancer cells that is elevated in the cancerous tumors compared to non-cancerous tumors or normal tissue. Table 8 and FIG. 1 indicate elevated levels of adenosine A3 receptors found by the inventors in human A375 (human melanoma), Panc-1 (human pancreatic carcinoma), MX-I (human breast carcinoma), PC-I (human prostate carcinoma), HT29 (human colon carcinoma), and SKMES (human lung carcinoma) and A2780AD10 (human ovarian carcinoma).
Three A3 receptor antagonists have been tested for their Degree of Growth Inhibitory activity and enhancement of inhibitory growth function of known anti-neoplastic agents. Table 6 indicates receptor binding assay results for three A3 receptor antagonist compounds. Structures of the three compounds are as follow:
Figure imgf000124_0001
MRE3008F20: 5-[[(4-Methoxyphenyl)amino]carbonyl]amino-8-propyl-2-(2-furyl)- pyrazolo[4,3-e] 1 ,2,4-triazolo[l,5-c]pyrimidine
Figure imgf000124_0002
IL- 10: N- l-(4-diethylamino-phenyl)-N'-S-[8-methyl-2-(2-furyl)-pyrazolo[4,3-e] l,2,4-triazolo[ l,5-c]pyrimidine]-urea H
Figure imgf000125_0001
IL- 11 : N-l-(4-dimethylamino-phenyl)-N'-5-[8-methyl-2-(2-&ryl)-pyrazolo[4,3-e] ,2,4 -triazolofl ,5-c]pyrimidine]-urea
Table 6. Binding Affinity at rAi, rA2 and I1A3 Adenosine Receptors
Figure imgf000126_0001
Table 6 shows MRE3008F20, IL-IO and IL-11 to be potent, selective antagonists for the human adenosine A3 receptor.
In addition to binding affinity studies of these three compounds, growth inhibitory studies were also performed. Results of growth studies of the compounds, uncombined with other compounds, are shown in Table 7. Table 7 also indicates the growth inhibitory activity of common anti-neoplastic agents.
Table 7: Growth Inhibitory Activity of A3 Antagonists and Anti-Neoplastic Agents Used Separately
Figure imgf000126_0002
Compounds MRE3008F20, IL-10 and IL-11 were obtained from King Pharmaceutical, Inc. Irinotecan HCl (Camptosar®; 20 mg/ml) was obtained from Pharmacia & Upjohn Co. Paclitaxel (Taxol®, 6 mg/ml) was obtained from Bristol-Myers Squibb, Co. Docetaxel (Taxotere®) was obtained from Rhone-Poulenc Rorer. Vinblastine sulfate salt was obtained from Sigma Chemical Co., (V1377). Irinotecan was diluted with culture medium. All other agents were dissolved in 100% DMSO at appropriate concentrations. The DMSO stock solutions were diluted 100-fold with growth medium so that the final DMSO concentration was 1%. We have previously shown that DMSO has no effect on the growth of culture cells at concentrations up to 1%. MTT (3 -[4,5- Dimethylthiazol-2-yl]2,5-diphenyltetrazolium bromide) was obtained from Sigma Chemical Co. RPMI-1640 medium, antibiotic antimycotic 100 X consisting of 10,000 units/ml penicillin G sodium, 10,000 μg/ml streptomycin sulfate, 25 μg/ml Amphotericin B (fungizone), glutamine (20OmM), HEPES buffer (1 M), gentamicin (50 mg/ml), sodium bicarbonate (7.5%), and fetal bovine serum were obtained from GibcoBRL. The complement in fetal bovine serum was inactivated at 56°C for 30 min.
The human melanoma A375, human lung carcinoma SKMES, colon carcinoma HT29, and pancreatic cancer Panc-1 cell lines were originally obtained from the ATCC (American Type Culture Collection) and have been maintained in RPMI-1640 medium supplemented with 100 units/ml penicillin G sodium, 100 μg/ml streptomycin sulfate, 0.25 μg/ml amphotericin B (fungizone), 2 mM glutamine, 10 mM HEPES, 25 μg/ml gentamycin, and 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum.
Most of the agents showed a broad spectrum and equally potent growth inhibitory activity against these four histologically distinct human tumor cell lines (A375 melanoma, HT29 colon carcinoma, Panc-1 pancreatic carcinoma, and SKMES lung carcinoma). The IC50 values were approximately the same against all four cell lines. Interestingly, HT29 is approximately 30-fold more refractory than the A375 cell line to doxorubicin (IC50 value of 0.211 vs. 0.0064 μg/ml) and mitoxantrone (IC50 value of 0.1 vs. 0.0032 μg/ml), respectively. It is possible that the HT29 cell line has an altered form of topoisomerase II, and is therefore more refractory to doxorubicin and mitoxantrone, which mediate their growth inhibitory activity by trapping topoisomerase II, DNA, and drug in ternary complexes.
7.1 ABUNDANCE OF A3 RECEPTORS IN HUMAN SOLID TUMORS AND MELANOMA .
Inventors verified the concentration of adenosine A3 receptors in human cancer cells that is elevated in the cancerous tumors compared to non-cancerous tumors or normal tissue. Table 8 and Figure 1 indicate elevated levels of adenosine A3 receptors found by the inventors in human A375 (human melanoma), Panc-1 (human pancreatic carcinoma), MX-I (human breast carcinoma), PC-I (human prostate carcinoma), HT29 (human colon carcinoma), and SKMES (human lung carcinoma). Table 8 - Abundance of A3 receptors in human solid tumors and melanoma.
Data shown are equilibrium binding parameters at 40C expressed as dissociation constant, KD (nM), and BMAX (fmol/mg protein) for [3H]MRE 3008F20 derived from saturation experiments to human A3 adenosine receptors expressed in tumour tissues.
Tumor types Kn BMAX Figure
Human malignant 1.9 ± 0.2 256± 31 IA melanoma A375
Human colon DLDl 2.1 ± 0.3 434 ± 40 IB
Human pancreatic 2.6 ± 0.3 249 ± 34 1C
MiaPaCa
Human pancreatic 2.7 ± 0.1 441 ± 46 ID Panel
Human breast tumor 1.9 ± 0.2 435 ± 50 IE
MXl
Human lung squamour 2.4 ± 0.6 169 ± 20 IF carcinoma SKMES
Human pancreatic PC3 3.1 ± 0.1 379 ± 40 IG
Human colon HT29 3.3 ± 0.3 213 ± 23 IH
7.2 HUMAN MELANOMA A375
The growth inhibitory activity of paclitaxel against the human melanoma A375 cell line was determined in the absence or in the presence of 10 μg/ml of MRE3008F20 or 5 μg/ml each of IL-10 and IL-Il (Table 9). At these sub-cytotoxic concentrations, MRE3008F20, IL-10, and IL-Il (approximately 30-45% growth inhibition in the presence of A3 antagonists alone), enhanced the growth inhibitory activity of paclitaxel by 8-12-fold; IC50 values decreased from 0.0046μg/ml (paclitaxel alone) to 0.0004-0.00054 μg/ml (paclitaxel plus MRE3008F20, IL-10, and IL-11).
Table 9: Growth Inhibitory Activity of A3 Antagonists and Anti-Neoplastic Agents Used Jointly With A375 Cells
Figure imgf000128_0001
It was also determined that IL-10 and IL-11 enhance the growth inhibitory activity of paclitaxel in a concentration-dependent manner. Results of further testing of the enhancement effects with taxane family compounds is given in Table 10. Both of the common taxane compounds paclitaxel (taxol™) and docetaxel (taxotere™) are included. Table 10 illustrates concentration-dependencies for concentrations of 1, 3, and 10 μg/ml for MRE3008F20 and for concentrations of 0.5, 1.5, and 5 μg/ml for compounds IL- 10 and IL- 11. MRE3008F20 enhanced the growth inhibitory activity of paclitaxel in a concentration-independent manner (enhancement factor = 6.4-7 Λ at all three concentrations). On the other hand, IL-10 and IL-11 enhanced the growth inhibitory activity of paclitaxel in a concentration-dependent manner. This testing also indicated that compounds MRE3008F20, IL-10 and IL-Il have enhancement factors with docetaxel that are indicative of a synergistic effect.
Table 10: Growth Inhibitory Activity of Antagonists and Taxane Compounds used Jointly with A375 Cells
Figure imgf000129_0001
7.3 HUMAN LUNG CARCINOMA SKMES
In human lung carcinoma SKMES, all three A3 antagonists enhance the growth inhibitory activity of paclitaxel, docetaxel, irinotecan and vindesine (Table 11).
Table 11: Growth Inhibitory Activity of A3 Antagonists and Anti-Neoplastic Agents used Jointly with SKMES Cells
Figure imgf000129_0002
In comparing Table 11 with the results obtained with A375 human melanoma, the magnitude of enhancement for the taxane compounds in SICMES cells is less than that observed in A375 melanoma. These differences in absolute magnitude of synergism may be related to the activity of P-gp in the different tumors under the test conditions employed. However, the enhancement between A3 antagonists and taxane compounds is consistently observed. Enhancement in SKMES cells is also consistent with a mechanism of inhibiting P-gp, in the case of vinblastine, and inhibiting MRP, as in the case of irinotecan HCL.
7.4 HUMAN COLON CARCINOMA HT29
The growth inhibitory activity of paclitaxel and docetaxel against the human colon carcinoma HT29 cell line was determined in the absence or in the presence of 1 μg/ml of MRE3008F20 or 0.5 μg/ml each of IL-10 and IL-Il (Table 12). It was found that A3 antagonists enhance the growth inhibitory activity of paclitaxel, docetaxel, doxorubicin and irinotecan.
Table 12: Growth Inhibitory Activity of A3 Antagonists and Taxan Compounds Used Jointly With HT29 Cells
Figure imgf000130_0001
7.5 HUMAN PANCREATIC CANCER PANC-I
In human pancreatic cancer Panc-1, A3 antagonists potentiated the growth inhibitory activity of taxane family compounds paclitaxel and docetaxel (Table 13). However, the potentiation observed is of a smaller magnitude compared to that observed in A375 melanoma.
Table 13: Growth Inhibitory Activity of A3 Antagonists and Taxane Compounds Used Jointly With Panc-1 Cells
Figure imgf000130_0002
Figure imgf000131_0001
It is seen from the above data and tables that the use of high affinity adenosine A3 receptor antagonists in conjunction with chemotherapeutic cancer agents result in a notable enhancement effect for many of the agents. 7.6 MDR CANCER CELL TREATMENTS
Having noted that chemotherapeutic cancer agents can be selected for A3 antagonist enhancement from the form of MDR they are associated with, the inventors have further established that high affinity A3 adenosine receptor antagonists can be used to counter P-gp and MRP associated multi-drug resistance. At first, inventors evaluated whether A3 adenosine receptor could protect the cell by the toxic effect of conventional chemotherapeutic drug. Colony formation assay experiments were performed on A375 melanoma cells treated with increasing concentration of paclitaxel (0.25-75 μg/ml). A3 stimulation is achieved with the selective agonist CI-IB- MECA while A3 blockade is obtained with the selective antagonist MRE 3008F20. Colony formation of A375 cells is abolished when both paclitaxel (0.75 μg/ml) and MRE 3008F20 (10 μM) are applied whereas colony formation is only partly decreased when paclitaxel alone or MRE 3008F20 alone are applied. (Figure 2)
Colony formation of A375 cells is increased of about 30% when the adenosine A3 agonist CI-IB-MECA (10 μM) is applied. This is seen in the "C" bar of Figure 2 being 130% of the DMSO control bar "D" Figure 2 further shows that increased colony formation occurs when CI-IB-MECA is combined with the taxane family compound paclitaxel (0.75 μg/ml). When paclitaxel alone is added ("T" bar of Figure 2), colony formation is 64% of the control. Colony formation is increased 32% to 85% of control when the CI-IB-MECA is combined ("TC" bar of Figure 2). Using the adenosine A3 antagonist MRE 3008F20 (10 μM) alone decreases colony formation to 59% of control ("M" bar of Figure 2). Surprisingly, when the A3 antagonist is combined with the taxane compound, virtually all colony formation ceases ("TM" bar of Figure 2). This clearly identifies the synergistic nature of combining A3 antagonists with chemotherapeutic agents, hi comparison to the surprising result of 0.2% colony formation, a geometrical combination predicts a result of 38%. One explanation for these results is that A3 receptors trigger a pro-survival signal, not able to restore colony formation ability of A375 cells treated with the taxane paclitaxel, while the blockage of As increased paclitaxel mediated deleterious effects (p<0.01, "TM" bar versus "T" bar of Figure 2). Subsequent to colony formation experiments, the inventors also analysed the ability of A3 adenosine receptor antagonists to enhance chemotherapeutic effects by performing an acute treatment of A375 cells with the taxane family compound paclitaxel and the vinca alkaloid vindesine. Cell proliferation and apoptosis are quantified by flow cytometer analysis after propidium-iodide (PI) DNA staining. At 24 hours post-exposure, paclitaxel and vindesine induced a dose dependent cell accumulation into G2/M cell cycle phases and a parallel decrease of the G1 population.
To quantify the effect of paclitaxel and vindesine to alter cell proliferation the inventors determined the concentration exerting the 50% of the G2/M accumulation (EC50). When exposed to increasing concentrations of chemotherapeutic drugs, EC50 are 16.60+2.00 ng/ml and 1.90+0.20 nM for paclitaxel and vindesine, respectively (means of four experiments). Analyses further show that EC50 of paclitaxel and vindesine for decrease of Gi population are not significantly changed respect to EC50 of G2M. arrest. The S-phase population, representative of replicating DNA, is not appreciably changed.
Additional experiments quantified the sub-Gi population, representative of cells undergoing apoptosis. hi A375 cells, the percentage of apoptotic cells increases progressively with paclitaxel concentration, reaching the maximum value (ranging from 35 to 53% on different experiments) at 5 ng/ml. An increase of the paclitaxel concentration results in a decrease of A375 cells at SUb-G1. The concentration exerting the maximal apoptosis (ECMAX) is 6.00±0.63 ng/ml (mean of four experiments). Similarly, experiments performed with vindesine obtain an EC MAX value of 3.54 ± 0.42 nM (mean of four experiments).
A375 cells treated with paclitaxel or with vindesine with or without the A3 adenosine receptor selective A3 antagonist MRE 3008F20 demonstrate enhancement. Figures 3A and 3C show that MRE 3008F20 (10 μM) improved vindesine and paclitaxel ability to alter cell proliferation: MRE 3008F20 reduced paclitaxel and vindesine EC50 of 1.9 and 4.0 fold, respectively. Similar results were obtained analysing EC50 values calculated for the G1 population.
Furthermore, MRE 3008F20 (10 μM) reduced ECMAX of 2.0 and 2.1 fold, for paclitaxel and vindesine, respectively (Figure 3B and 3D). Representative flow cytometry profiles of DNA content in A375 cells (Apo (sub diploid cells), G1, S and G2/M phases) are shown in Figure 4. Figure 4C shows that, under both treatments (A3 antagonist MRE3008F20 plus vinca alkaloid vindesine), vindesine response increased as cells progressed from G1 to G2/M phases respect to vindesine-treated cells alone (Figure 4B). Similar results were obtained with the taxane compound paclitaxel (Figure 4E-F).
To verify whether this enhancement activity was not related to toxic contaminants present in the MRE3008F20 solution but due to A3 adenosine receptor specific blockade, inventors quantified the ability of other adenosine receptor antagonists to enhance A375 cell responses to vindesine and paclitaxel.
A375 cells were treated with vindesine (1 nM) with increasing concentrations of adenosine receptor antagonists (MRE3055F20, MRE3062F20, MRE3046F20, MRE3008F20, IL-IO, CGS 15943, ZM 241385). As illustrated in Figure 5A, the order of potency of adenosine antagonists to enhance Vindesine effect was: MRE3055F20 (highest) > MRE3062F20 > MRE 3046F20 > MRE3008F20 > IL-10 >
CGS 15943 > ZM241385 (lowest). The concentrations exerting the 50% of the enhancing activity (SEC50) are reported in Table 14 as the mean of four experiments. SEC50 values are in good agreement with inhibitory equilibrium binding constants (Ki) observed in binding experiments for the adenosine A3 receptor (Figure 5B).
Table 14 Adenosine receptor antagonist parameters of enhancing activity to vindesine and binding affinity to A3 adenosine receptor in A375 cells.
SEC50 Ki
(μM) (nM)
MRE 3055F20 0.31 + 0.03 1.4 + 0.2
MRE 3062F20 0.43 ± 0.04 2.3 ± 0.2
MRE 3046F20 0.57 ± 0.06 3.0 ± 0.3
MRE 3008F20 0.55 ± 0.06 3.1 ± 0.3
IL-10 0.97 ± 0.10 30.0 ± 2.5
CGS 15943 12.60 ± 1.41 118 ± 12
ZM 241385 25.00 ± 2.23 270 ± 25
SEC50: adenosine receptor antagonist dose that induces 50% of the enhancing activity to vindesine (1 nM), calculated on G2/M accumulation dose response curve. Ki equilibrium constant of binding affinity at human A3 adenosine receptor. Data represents the mean of four independent experiments.
To verify the role of A3 receptor antagonists on paclitaxel and vindesine mediated alteration of cell proliferation and apoptosis, testing was performed with additional cell lines. Cell lines were selected with a pattern of surface adenosine receptor expression similar to A375 cell line, namely HeL023, Jurkat, NCTC2544 and PBMC blasts. Experimental conditions are similar to those for the A375 cell testing. The effect upon EC50 values of vindesine and paclitaxel mediated cell cycle distribution alteration (G2/M accumulation) under treatment with the A3 antagonist MRE 3008F20 is given in Table 15. The variation in the level of apoptosis as reflected in EC50 values are also indicated.
In Table 15, the HeLa23 cell line has the lowest sensitivity to paclitaxel and vindesine alone. Interestingly, HeLa23 cells also show the greatest amount of enhancement by MRE3008F20 co-treatment.
Table 15. Induction of G2/M accumulation and apoptis of different cells by paclitaxel and vindesine with or without A3 receptor antagonist MRE3008F20 treatment
A375 HeLa23 Jurkat paclitaxel vindesine paclitaxel vindesine paclitaxel vindesine
EC50 EC50 EC50 EC50 EC30 EC50
DMSO 16.60±2.00 1.90±0.20 50.60±5.30 25.80±3.25 2.96±0.31 O.93±0.08 MRE 3008F20 8.60±0.81* 0.48±0.05* 4.10±0.40* 0.71±0.08* 2.52±0.30 0.37±0.04*
ECMAX EC[ViAx ECMAX ECMAX ECMAX ECMAX
DMSO 6.00±0.63 3.54±0.422 33.42±3.55 33.l ldb4.02 3.32±0.52 nd MRE 3008F20 3.04±0.32* 1.66±0.20 3.19±0.30* 1.05±0.09* 2.29±0.31 * nd
NCTC 2544 PBMC paclitaxel vindesine paclitaxel vindesine
EC50 EC50 EC50 EC50
DMSO 2.69±0.28 0.89±0.08 5.30±0.60 1.10±0.90
MRE 3008F20 2.41±0.30 0.51±0.06* 5.30±0.60 0.86±0.09
ECMAX ECMAX ECMAX ECMAX
DMSO 2.69±0.23 2.50±0.27 nd nd
MRE 3008F20 2.55±0.24 1.34±0.15* nd nd
Data represent the mean ± SE of four independent experiments. MRE3008F20 is 10 μM.
EC50 values were obtained by analysing G2/M accumulation dose response curve. ECMAX values were obtained by analysing SUb-G1 accumulation dose response curve. Paclitaxel values have units of ng/ml. Vindesine values have units of nM. nd: not done. * P<0.01 vs DMSO; analysis was by ANOVA followed by Dunnett's test. The greater relative enhancement in the HeL023 cell line may be related to a factor absent in other cell lines or related to the intracellular concentration of actives that is modulated by P-glycoprotein drug expulsion activity.
Rhodamine 123 (Rhl23) retention, a P-gp functional assay, was studied in all cell lines. This assay was performed by incubating cells with RhI 23 and determining Rhl23 accumulation by measuring its fluorescence. The maximum load of Rhl23 (FMAX) was quantified at the end of treatment harvesting the cells and storing them at 4°C to prevent any active Rhl23 efflux. The P-gp drug efflux was allowed incubating Rhl23- loaded cells in fresh new medium Rhl23-free for 3 hours at 37°C. After this incubation, residual fluorescence (FRES) was measured and compared to FMAX-
Results of the Rhl23 retention in A375 cells is shown in Figure 6A and Figure 6B. Figure 6A shows the flow chromatogram for RhI 23 accumulation by A375 cells when the adenosine A3 antagonist is not present. Two cell populations are found, characterised by an FRES having a mean fluorescence intensity lower than FMAX. The population with the lowest fluorescence, accounting for 26+5% of total cells, represents the cells expressing functional P-gp and having low intracellular level of Rh 123.
In contrast, Figure 6B shows the A375 cellular accumulation of Rhl23 in the presence of MRE3008F20 (10 μM). With the high affinity A3 antagonist present, the response yielded a FRES chromatogram comparable to FMAX, consistent with a completely blockade of P-gp mediated Rh 123 transport.
Results of the Rh 123 retention in human herithro-leukemia HeL023 cells is shown in Figure 6C and Figure 6D. Figure 6C shows that HeL023 cells have higher P-gp activity than A375 cells. FRES (dark shaded area) is similar to the chromatogram obtained with cells not treated with Rhl23 (autofluorescence). This is consistent with nearly all (100+1 %) the cells expressing high level of functional P-gp.
With the addition of the A3 antagonist MRE3008F20, HeL023 cells showed a P-gp inhibitor behaviour (Figure 6D). FRES in the presence of MRE 3008F20, is similar to FMAX- This is indicative of near total P-gp inhibition.
The Jurkat and NCTC2544 cells studied did not appear to have a significant change of Rhl23 fluorescence after 3 hours of incubation at 37°C (FRES was similar to FMAX) consistent with the absence or not detectable P-pg drug pumping activity in these cells.
To verify that the anti-P-gp activity of A3 antagonists is not related to toxic contaminants present in the MRE3008F20 solution, the ability of other adenosine receptor antagonists to interfere with P-gp mediated drug-efflux was quantified. HeL023 cells were treated with adenosine receptor antagonists (IL-IO, MRE3008F20, MRE3055F20, MRE3062F20, MRE3046F20, CGS15943 and ZM241385). Results are given in Table 16. Table 16 shows the percentage of cells expressing P-gp activity (% of RhI 23 negative cells) in the presence of adenosine receptor antagonists. The high affinity adenosine A3 antagonists IL-IO, MRE3008F20, MRE3055F20, MRE3062F20 and MRE3046F20 are strong inhibitors of P-gp activity. In contrast the low affinity antagonists, ZM241385 and CGS15943 had much lower effect on P-gp activity. This may be due to the higher A3 affinity or due to the existence of a structure-activity relationship for the inhibition of P-gp drug expulsion activity mediated by adenosine receptor antagonists.
TABLE 16
Treatment Concentration % of RhI 23 Negative
(μM) Cells
DMSO 99.7±1.2
ILlO
10 0.4±0.2
Figure imgf000136_0001
MRE 3008F20
10 0.5±0.3
Figure imgf000136_0002
MRE3055F20
10 0.8±0.2
Figure imgf000137_0001
MRE 3062F20
10 1.0±0.2
Figure imgf000137_0002
MRE 3046F20
10 22.0±1.0
Figure imgf000137_0003
CGS 15943
70 87.1±1.0
Figure imgf000137_0004
ZM 241385
70 93.0±l.l
Figure imgf000138_0001
Table 16 data represents the mean of four independent experiments.
To underline the molecular mechanisms sustaining the A3 antagonist
5 mediated response to vindesine and paclitaxel antiproliferative effects, signalling studies were performed.
Previous research has related paclitaxel and Vinca alkaloid derivatives lethality to activation of mitogen-activated protein kinase (MAPK) family (Lieu in Sequence-dependent potentiation mol. Pharmacol. 2001). Three MAPK family members It) have been characterised thus far: ERKs (or p42/44MAPK) JNK (or SAPK) and tf^^.
Signalling studies investigated the effect of ERKs and pSδ1^*1 on MRE 3008F20 mediated enhancement to vindesine and to paclitaxel. The JNK pathway was not studied due to the lack of commercially available JNK inhibitor. Results are shown in Figure 7A and Figure 7B.
15 PD98059, a selective inhibitor of MEK1/2 (dudley dt, PNAS 92:7686, 1995), was used to inhibit the MEK pathways. UO 126, an agent approximately 100-fold more potent than PD98059, was used as inhibitor of ERK activation. SB203580 selectively inhibits p38MAPK activity (Young PR JBC 272:12116 1997). A375 cells were pretreated with PD98059 (20 μM), U0126 (30 μM), SB203580 (1 μM] or with DMSO (as control) and 20 then challenged with vindesine (1 nM) or with paclitaxel (15 ng/ml). At 24 hours post treatment, cells were harvested and apoptosis and cell cycle were analysed.
The combination of PD98059, U0126 and SB203580 plus paclitaxel or vindesine did not alter the G2/M accumulation rate respect to paclitaxel or vindesine alone. PD98059 and SB203580 failed to inhibit MRE3008F20 (10 μM) improved susceptibility of 25 A375 cells to vindesine and paclitaxel. Results for PD98059 with paclitaxel is shown as bar "TP" of Figure 7A and with vindesine is bar "VP". The results for SB203580 plus paclitaxel is shown as bar "TS" of Figure 7A and with vindesine is bar "VS".
U0126 prevented MRE3008F20-induced accumulation in G2/M by 23±5% and by 48±5% in presence of paclitaxel (bar "TU" of Figure 7A) and vindesine (bar "VU" 30 of Figure 7A), respectively. This infers that the molecular mediator of enhancement activity was ERK.
The effects on selectively blocking the pathways is shown in Figure 7B. Noted is a significant reduction of apoptosis induced by paclitaxel25 ng/ml in cells treated with PD98059 (35+6%, Figure 7B, lane 5) and U0126 (73±10%, Figure 7B, lane 3), whereas SB203580 did not exert any effect Figure 7B, lane 7). However, PD98059 and SB203580 (Figure 7B, lanes 6 and 8, respectively) failed to enhance the protective effect of MRE3008F20 in apoptosis induced by paclitaxel, as observed in presence of UO 126 (Figure 7B5 lane 4).
These results provide confirmation that the MRE3008F20-induced reduction of apoptosis of paclitaxel is dependent on ERK activation. Additional testing demonstrated similar trends in HeL023, NCTC2544 and Jurkat cell lines (data not shown).
Further testing indicates that P-gp interference and ERK engagement can occur independently of each other. A375 cells were first treated with UO 126 (30 μM) for 30 minutes and subsequently incubated with MRE3008F20 (10 μM). The P-gp activity is compared which those of cells treated with MRE3008F20 alone (for example, cells of Figure 6B). UO 126 failed to prevent MRE 3008F20 blockade of P-gp. This confirms that P-gp interference and ERK engagement can occur independently of each other. Discussion: Results presented show that several adenosine receptor antagonists exert enhancing activity to chemotherapeutic agents. Noteworthy, this enhancing activity is A3 adenosine receptor dependent. This pharmacological specificity was determined by an accurate Spermean's rank correlation between the dose exerting physiological effect (SEC50 quantified on G2/M accumulation) and the binding ability to A3 adenosine receptors (Ki) of different adenosine receptor antagonists (r=0.96, Figure 5B). A known and clear explanation is not yet available as to the mechanism of this enhancement. However, the high statistically significant Spermean's rank correlation coefficient between SEC50 values in the G2/M accumulation and receptor affinity values showed a highly significant positive correlation. Results show that A3 adenosine receptor antagonists enhance chemotherapeutic agent anti-proliferative and apoptotic effects. The A3 adenosine receptor antagonists reduce EC50 doses of chemotherapeutic drugs (quantified by analysing G2/M accumulation rate) to 12.3, 1.9, 1.2-fold for paclitaxel and 36.3, 4.0, 2.5-fold for vindesine when challenged on HeL023, A375 and Jurkat cell lines, respectively. This enhancement activity was confirmed also when the apoptotic degree was evaluated: ECMAX dose of chemotherapeutic drugs are reduced to 10.5, 2.0, 1.5-fold for paclitaxel on HeL023, A375 and Jurkat cells, respectively, and 31.5, 2.0-fold for vindesine on HeL023 and A375 cells, respectively. The variable degree of EC50 (and ECMAX) value observed in different cell types suggest a cell type specific participation in drug-induced enhancement. Of note, the prerequisite of the drug activity is its delivery to the target site. However, efficiency of drug is limited by appearing resistance, i.e., lack of cell sensitivity to the administered drug. The tumor cells with multidrug resistance (MDR) phenotype are characterised by lowered intracellular accumulation of the compounds they are resistant to.
Moreover, most cell lines with MDR phenotype show the over-expression of 170 KDa membrane associated P-glycoprotein (P-gp) that acts as an energy-dependent efflux pump. It has been demonstrated that this protein plays an important role in the transport of toxic endogenous metabolites and it seems to be responsible for the decreased intracellular drug accumulation observed in resistant cells (Fojo A, Cancer Res 45:3002-7, 1985). Previous studies reported that melanoma and HeL heamopoietic cell line expressed functional P-gp
On the other hand, MRP and not P-gp transporter is expressed in Jurkat leukemia cells (T lymphocytic cell line). This is consistent with the results as HeL023 and A375 cells produced a P-gp efflux-activity whereas in Jurkat cells had low rhodamine 123 efflux. It is shown that adenosine A3 antagonists are useful for enhancement in both P-gp expressing and MRP expressing cell lines.
The much lower ability of CGS 15943 and ZM241385 to inhibit P-pg and MRP correlates with the lower adenosine A3 affinity of these compounds. The high affinity A3 antagonist compounds tested have greater potency in both enhancement and inhibiting P- gp and MRP drug resistance. This may be due to the higher affinity or to the molecular structure of such compounds. For example, the tested high affinity compounds have a phenyl-carbarnoyl-amino derivative in the N5 position of a 2-furylpyrazolo-triazolo- pyrimidine structure. CGS 15943 and ZM241385 in addition to having much lower A3 affinity, also have very different molecular structures.
7.7 EXAMPLE FORMULATIONS
The following examples illustrate aspects of this invention but should not be construed as limitations. The symbols and conventions used in these examples are indented to be consistent with those used in the contemporary, international, chemical literature, for example, the Journal of the American Chemical Society and Tetrahedron.
Example - Pharmaceutical Formulations
(A) Transdermal System - for 1000 patches Ingredients Amount
Active compound lOOg
Silicone fluid 45Og
Colloidal silicon dioxide 2g
The silicone fluid and active compound are mixed together and the colloidal silicone dioxide is added to increase viscosity. The material is then dosed into a subsequent heat sealed polymeric laminate comprised of the following: polyester release liner, skin contact adhesive composed of silicone or acrylic polymers, a control membrane which is a polyolefin, and an impermeable backing membrane made of a polyester multilaminate. The resulting laminated sheet is than cut into 10 sq. cm patches.
(B) Oral Tablet - For 1000 Tablets
Ingredients Amount
Active compound 5Og
Starch 50g
Magnesium Stearate 5g
The active compound and the starch are granulated with water and dried. Magnesium stearate is added to the dried granules and the mixture is thoroughly blended. The blended mixture is compressed into tablets.
(C) Injection - for 1000, 1 mL Ampules
Ingredients Amount
Active compound 1Og
Buffering Agents q.s.
Propylene glycol 400mg
Water for injection q.s. 100OmL
The active compound and buffering agents are dissolved in the propylene glycol at about 50°)C. The water for injection is then added with stirring and the resulting solution is filtered, filled into ampules, sealed and sterilized by autoclaving.
(D) Continuous Injection - for 1000 mL
Ingredients Amount
Active compound 1Og Buffering Agents q.s. Water for injection q.s. 100OmL
The active compound and buffering agents are dissolved in water at about 500C. The resulting solution is filtered, filled into appropriate administration container, sealed and sterilized. (E) Topical Ointment - for 1000, 1 g packs
Ingredients Amount
Active compound 1Og
White petroleum base q.s. 99Og The active compound is blended into the petrolatum base under sterile conditions and filled into 1 gram packs.
Although the present invention has been described in terms of specific embodiments, various substitutions of materials and conditions can be made as will be known to those skilled in the art. For example, other excipients may be utilized in preparing the pharmaceutical formulations, hi addition, many of the active adenosine A3 receptor antagonists contain one or more asymmetric centers and may therefore give rise to enantiomers and diastereomers as well as their racemic and resolved, enantiomerically pure or diastereomerically pure forms, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof. It is often desirable that the adenosine A3 receptor antagonists be given simultaneously with the cytotoxic agent. When this is the case, users of this invention may find it advantageous to combine the A3 receptor antagonists with the cytotoxin into a single dosage form. These and other variations will be apparent to those skilled in the art and are meant to be included herein. The scope of the invention is only to be limited by the following claims: 7.8 REGULATION OF HIF-lα BY ADENOSINE Chemicals and Reagents: A375 melanoma, NCTC 2544 keratinocytes,
U2OS osteosarcoma, U87MG glioblastoma human cells were obtained from American Tissue Culture Collection (ATCC). Tissue culture media and growth supplements were obtained from BioWhittaker. GasPak Pouch™ System was obtained from Becton Dickinson. Unless otherwise noted, all other chemicals were purchased from Sigma. Anti- HIF- 1 α and anti-HIF 1 β antibodies (mAb) were obtained from Transduction Laboratories (BD, Milano, Italy). U0126 (inhibitor of MEK-I and MEK-2), SB202190 (inhibitor of p38 MAP kinase), Anti-ACTIVE®MAPK and anti-ERK 1/2 (pAb) were from Promega. Phospho-p38 and p38 MAP Kinase antibodies were from Cell Signaling Technology. Anti- Adenosine A3 receptor (polyAb) was from Aviva Antibody Corporation. Cell culture and hypoxia treatment: Cells were maintained in DMEM
(A375), EMEM (NCTC 2544) or RPMI 1640 (U87MG, U2OS) medium containing 10% fetal calf serum, penicillin (100 U/ml), streptomycin (100 ug/ml), and L-glutamine (2 mM) at 37°C in 5% CO2/95% air. Cells were passaged two or three times weekly at a ratio between 1:5 and 1:10. Hypoxic exposure was in BBL™ GasPak pouch™ System (Becton Dickinson) that reduce oxygen concentration of less than 2% within 2 hours of incubation at 35°C.
[3Hl -Thymidine incorporation: cell proliferation test: Cells were seeded in fresh medium with 1 uCi/ml of [3H]-Thymidine in DMEM containing 10% fetal calf serum, penicillin (100 U/ml), streptomycin (100 ug/ml), L-glutamine (2 mM). After 24 hours of labelling, cells were trypsinised, dispensed in 4 wells of a 96 well plate, and filtered through Whatman GF/C glass-fiber filters using a Micro-Mate 196 cell harvester (Packard Instrument Company). The filter bound radioactivity was counted on Top Count Microplate Scintillation Counter (efficiency 57%) with Micro-Scint 20.
Flow Cytometry analysis: A375 adherent cells were trypsinized, mixed with floating cells, washed with PBS and permeabilized in 70% (vol/vol) ethanol/PBS solution at 40C for at least 24 hours. The cells were washed with PBS and the DNA was stained with a PBS solution, containing 20 ug/ml of propidium iodide and 100 ug/ml of RNAse, at room temperature for 30 minutes. Cells were analysed with an EPICS XL flow cytometer
(Beckman Coulter, Miami, FL) and the content of DNA was evaluated by the CeIl-LISYS program (Becton-Dickinson). Cell distribution among cell cycle phases and the percentage of apoptotic cells were evaluated as previously described (Merighi 2002). Briefly, the cell cycle distribution is shown as the percentage of cells containing 2n (GOZG1 phases), 4n (G2 and M phases), 4n>x>2n DNA amount (S phase) judged by propidium iodide staining. The apoptotic population is the percentage of cells with DNA content lower than 2n.
Small interfering RNA (siRNA) design: To generate a small interfering RNA that targets A3 receptor mRNA (SΪRNAA3), eight oligonucleotides consisting of ribonucleosides, except for the presence of 2'-deoxyribonucleosides at the 3' end, were synthesized and annealed, according to the recommendations of Elbashir (ref), to the manufacturer's instructions (Silencer™ siRNA Construction Kit, Ambion) and as previously described (Mirandola, 2004). For oligo-1, sense sequence: 5'-GCU UAC CGU CAG AUA CAA GUU-3' (SEQ ID NO:1) and antisense 5'-CUU GUA UCU GAC GGU AAG CUU-3' (SEQ ID NO:2). For oligo-2, sense sequence: 5'-GAC GGC UAA GUC CUU GUU UUU-3' (SEQ ID NO:3) and antisense 5'-AAA CAA GGA CUU AGC CGU CUU-3' (SEQ ID NO:4). For oligo-3, sense sequence: 5'-ACA CUU GAG GGC CUG UAU GUU-3' (SEQ ID NO:5) and antisense 5'-CAU ACA GGC CCU CAA GUG UUU-3' (SEQ ID NO:6). For oligo-4, sense sequence 5'-CCU GCU CUC GGA GGA UGC CUU- 3' (SEQ ID NO:7) and antisense 5'-GGC AUC CUC CGA GAG CAG GUU-3' (SEQ ID NO:8). Target sequences were aligned to the human genome database in a BLAST search to ensure sequences without significant homology to other genes. The target sequences for oligo-1, oligo-2, oligo-3 and oligo-4 are localized at position 337, 679, 1009 and 1356 bases downstream of the start codon of A3 receptor mRNA sequence (L20463), respectively.
Treatment of cells with siRNA: A375 cells were plated in six- well plates and grown to 50-70% confluence before transfection. Transfection of siRNA was performed at a concentration of 100 nM using RNAiFect™ Transfection Kit (Qiagen). Cells were cultured in complete media and at 24, 48 and 72 hours total RNA was isolated for Real- Time RT-PCR analysis of A3 receptor mRNA and for Western blot analysis of A3 receptor protein. At 48 hours from the transfection, A375 cells were serum starved for another 24 hours and then exposed to increasing concentrations of the A3 adenosine receptor agonist Cl-IB-MECA for 4 hours in hypoxia. Total protein were then harvested for Western blot analysis. As control, cells were exposed to RNAiFect™ Transfection reagent without SiRNAA3. To quantify cell transfection efficiency we used siRNA-FITC labelled (Qiagen). After 24 hours of transfection, cells were tripsinized and resuspended in PBS for flow cytometry analysis. Fluorescence obtained from FITC-siRNA transfected cells was compared to autofluorescence generated by untransfected control.
Real-Time RT-PCR experiments: Total cytoplasmic RNA was extracted by the acid guanidinium thiocyanate phenol method (Chomczynski & Sacchi, 1987). Quantitative real-time RT-PCR assay (Higuchi, 1993) of HIF-I α and A3 mRNA transcripts was carried out using gene-specific double fluorescently labelled TaqMan MGB probe (minor groove binder) in a ABI Prism 7700 Sequence Detection System (Applied Biosystems, Warrington Cheshire, UK). The following primer and probe sequences were used for real-time RT-PCR: A3 forward primer, 5'-ATG CCT TTG GCC ATT GTT G-3' (SEQ ID NO:9); A3 reverse primer, 5'-ACA ATC CAC TTC TAC AGC TGC CT-3' (SEQ ID NO: 10); A3 MGB probe, 5'-FAM-TCA GCC TGG GCA TC-TAMRA-3' (SEQ ID NO:11); for the real-time RT-PCR of the HIF-lα gene the assays-on-demand™ Gene expression Product Accession No. NM 019058 was used (Applied Biosystems, Monza, Italy). The fluorescent reporter FAM and the quencher TAMRA are 6-carboxy fluorescein and 6-carboxy-N,N,N',N'-tetramethylrhodamme, respectively. For the real-time RT-PCR of the reference gene the endogenous control human β-actin kit was used, and the probe was fluorescent-labeled with VIC™ (Applied Biosystems, Monza, Italy).
Western blottinz: A375, NCTC 2544, U2OS and U87MG cells were treated with adenosine or adenosine analogues and exposed to normoxia and hypoxia for different times (2-24 hours). Cells were harvested and washed with ice-cold PBS containing 1 mM sodium orthovanadate, AEBSF 104 mM, aprotinin 0.08 mM, leupeptin 2 mM, bestatin 4 mM, pepstatin A 1.5 mM, E-64 1.4 mM. Cells were then lysed in Triton lysis buffer. The protein concentration was determined using BCA protein assay kit (Pierce). Equivalent amounts of protein (35 ug) were subjected to electrophoresis on 7.5% sodium dodecyl sulfate-acrylamide gel. The gel was then electroblotted onto a nitrocellulose membrane. Membranes were blocked with 5% nonfat dry milk in PBS containing 0.1% Tween-20 and incubated with antibodies against HIF- lα (1 :250 dilution) and HIF-I β (1 : 1000 dilution) in 5% nonfat dry milk in PBS/0.1% Tween-20 overnight at 40C. Aliquots of total protein sample (50 ug) were analyzed using antibodies specific for phosphorylated (Thrl83/Tyrl85) or total p44/p42 MAPK (1:5000 dilution), phosphorylated (Thr 180/Tyr 182) or total p38 MAPK (1 : 1000 dilution) and for A3 receptor ( 1 D g/ml dilution). Filters were washed and incubated for 1 hour at room temperature with peroxidase-conjugated secondary antibodies against mouse and rabbit IgG (1:2000 dilution). Specific reactions were revealed with the Enhanced Chemiluminescence Western blotting detection reagent (Amersham Corp., Arlington Heights, 111.). The membranes were then stripped and reprobed with tubulin (1 :250) to ensure equal protein loading.
Metabolic inhibitors: Cells were treated for 30 minutes with metabolic inhibitors or with drug vehicle (DMSO) prior to being challenged with adenosine or adenosine analogues. U0126 was used at 10 and 30 uM as inhibitor of MEK-I and MEK-2 to prevent p44 and p42 MAPK activation. SB202190 was used at 1 and 10 uM as inhibitor of p38 MAPK.
Densitometry analysis: The intensity of each band in immunoblot assay was quantified using molecular analyst/PC densitometry software (Bio-Rad). Mean densitometry data from independent experiments were normalized to result in cells in the control. The data were presented as the mean ± S. E., and analyzed by the Student's test. Statistical analysis: AU values in the figures and text are expressed as mean
+ standard error (S .E.) of n observation (with n>3). Data sets were examined by analysis of variance (ANOVA) and Dunnett's test (when required). A P value less than 0.05 was considered statistically significant.
Results: Adenosine induces HIF- lα protein accumulation in hypoxia. We have evaluated the biological effect produced by a prolonged oxygen deprivation in the human A375 melanoma cell line. Viability and proliferation of A375 cells exposed to hypoxia for 24 hours were assessed analyzing the percentage of apoptotic cells and the distribution among the different phases of the cell cycle. We employed flow cytometry and DNA staining by propidium iodide for discrimination of cells in apoptosis, in Go/Gl5 S and G2/M phases. The results indicate that hypoxia did not promote significant cell death while interfered with proliferation arresting melanoma cells in Go/Gt and S phases and reducing the number of cells in G2/M (Fig. 8). These data were confirmed by using trypan blue exclusion, cell counts and [3H] -thymidine incorporation assay (data not shown).
Exposure of A375 cells to hypoxia induced HIF-lα protein expression (Fig. 9). The hypoxic induction of HIF-I α was rapid, and an increase could be seen over the first 2 to 3 hours following hypoxic incubation. Maximal stimulation was obtained between 4-8 hours of incubation in oxygen-deprived conditions, while the levels of HIF-I α protein were somewhat lower with prolonged hypoxia. On the contrary, the levels of HIF-I β were not altered. To study the effect of adenosine on the transcription factor HIF- 1 , A375 melanoma cells were treated for 4 hours with increasing concentrations of the nucleoside in hypoxic conditions. As observed in Fig. 1OA, adenosine up-regulated HIF-I α protein expression in hypoxic melanoma cells. In particular, adenosine induced HIF-I α protein accumulation in a dose-dependent manner, with an EC50 = 2.1±0.2 μM and a maximal increase of 2.6±0.2 fold at 100 μM (Fig. 10B). We did not observe any modulation of HIF- lβ protein.
The family of adenosine receptors consists of four subtypes of G protein- coupled receptors, designed A1, A2A, A2B and A3. We have previously demonstrated that all four adenosine receptors are expressed in human melanoma A375 cells. To evaluate the functional role of adenosine receptor subtypes on HIF- 1 α protein expression under hypoxic conditions, we tested the effect of adenosine in combination with DPCPX (an Ai receptor antagonist), SCH 58261 (a selective A2A receptor antagonist), MRE 2029F20 (a selective A2B receptor antagonist), and MRE 3008F20 (a selective A3 receptor antagonist) (Baraldi 2004; Merighi 2001; Varani 2000). While the A1, A2A and A2B receptor antagonists were not able to prevent adenosine-induced HIF- lα protein expression, the A3 receptor antagonist MRE 3008F20 abrogated the adenosine-induced increase of HIF-lα protein expression (Fig. lOC-D). Furthermore, HIF-I β expression was unaffected by adenosine or by synthetic adenosine receptor antagonists. These results indicate that adenosine may increase HIF-lα protein expression via A3 receptors. A3 adenosine receptor induces HIF-lα protein accumulation in hypoxia.
To investigate the involvement of A3 receptors in the modulation of HIF-lα protein expression, we treated A375 cells with the selective A3 receptor agonist Cl-IB-MECA. We performed a time-course experiment in which A375 cells were exposed to Cl-IB-MECA 100 nM for 2-24 hours. A3 adenosine receptor stimulation did not promote HIF-lα protein accumulation in normoxia, while under hypoxic conditions HIF- lα protein expression was increased in a time-dependent manner (Fig. 11). In particular, HIF-I α increased from 2 hours and maximum peak levels were observed 4 hours after the addition of Cl-IB-MECA to the culture media. The prolonged A3 receptor stimulation in hypoxia resulted in a minor effect in HIF- lα protein level modulation. As already observed with adenosine, also Cl-IB- MECA did not modify HIF-I β expression in normoxia and in hypoxia.
To characterize in more detail the induction of HIF-I α expression by A3 receptor stimulation, A375 cells were treated with various concentrations of A3 agonist for 4 hours. As expected, in normoxia the activation of A3 receptors did not induce detectable levels of HIF-lα. On the contrary, in hypoxia Cl-IB-MECA induced HIF-lα protein accumulation in a dose-dependent manner (Fig. 12A), reproducing the effect produced by adenosine (Fig. 10). The maximum expression of HIF-I α protein was induced by Cl-IB- MECA at a concentration of 100 nM, with an EC50= 10.6±1.2 nM (Fig. 12B). In contrast, A3 receptor stimulation did not affect the expression of HIF-I β protein, either in normoxia or in hypoxia.
To better characterize the ability of A3 receptor to significantly increase HIF- lα protein expression in hypoxia, we performed a series of experiments to evaluate the ability of A3 selective receptor antagonists (MRE 3008F20 and MRE 3005F20) (Baraldi 2004) to prevent this effect. A375 cells were treated with increasing concentrations of MRE 3008F20 and MRE 3005F20 for 30 minutes with or without Cl-IB-MECA (10 and 100 nM) treatment. Both MRE 3008F20 and MRE 3005F20 (10 and 100 nM) were able to abrogate the effect of Cl-IB-MECA in HIF-lα modulation. As expected, neither MRE 3008F20 nor MRE 3005F20 had any effect on HIF- lβ expression. Figure 13 A-B shows the results obtained with MRE 3008F20. Similar results were obtained with the antagonist MRE 3005F20 (data not shown).
We next investigated the effect of increasing concentrations of MRE 3008F20 on HIF-lα protein increase induced by a submaximal dose of Cl-IB-MECA. HIF- lα protein increase, induced by 10 nM Cl-IB-MECA, was inhibited by increasing concentrations of MRE 3008F20 (0.3-30 nM) with an IC50 of 0.90±0.08 nM (Fig. 13C-D). Finally, to further demonstrate that A3 receptor is required for HIF-lα protein accumulation in response to adenosine, A375 cells were mock transfected or transfected with small interfering RNAs that target A3 receptor mRNA (siRNAA3) for degradation. To evaluate transfection efficiency A375 cells were also transfected with a siRNA control labeled with fluorescein. By flow cytometry we oberved a transfection efficiency of 85±5% (Fig. 7A). After transfection, the cells were cultured in complete media and at 24, 48 and 72 hours total RNA was isolated for Real-Time RT-PCR analysis ofA3 receptor mRNA and for Western blot analysis of A3 receptor protein. As expected, A3 receptor mRNA levels were significantly reduced in cells transfected with SIRNAA3 (Fig. 14B). Furthermore, A3 receptor protein expression was strongly reduced in siRNA^-treated cells (Fig. 14C-D). Neither mock transfection nor transfection with an siRNA targeted to an irrelevant mRNA inhibited A3 receptor mRNA or protein expression. Therefore, at 72 hours from the SIRNAA3 transfection, A375 cells were exposed to increasing concentrations of the A3 adenosine receptor agonist Cl-IB-MECA (1-100 nM) for 4 hours in hypoxia. Total protein were then harvested for Western blot analysis. As control, A375 cells were exposed to RNAiFect™ Transfection reagent without SIRNAA3. We found that the inhibition of A3 receptor expression is sufficient to block Cl-IB-MECA-induced HIF-lα accumulation (Fig. 14E).
To determine whether the effect of A3 receptor stimulation on HIF- lα expression was a general phenomenon, we assessed the ability of Cl-IB-MECA to induce HIF- lα levels in a variety of cell lines expressing A3 adenosine receptors . After 4 hours of hypoxia under Cl-IB-MECA treatment, we were able to detect a significant increase in HIF- lα protein expression, both in human keratinocytes NCTC 2544 and in different human tumor U87MG glioblastoma and U2OS osteosarcoma cells (Figure 15). A3 receptor mediates HIF-lα accumulation through a transcription- independent and translation-dependent pathway. To obtain a better understanding of the processes involved in HIF- lα accumulation in response to A3 receptor stimulation in hypoxia, we investigated the effect of Cl-IB-MECA on the HIF- lα mRNA accumulation. After a treatment of A375 cells for 4 hours in hypoxia, RNA was extracted, and Real-Time RT-PCR analysis was performed. Activation of melanoma cells with 10 nM, 100 nM and 1 μM Cl-IB-MECA produced, respectively, a 1.13±0.10, 1.25±0.15 and 1.19±0.13 fold increase of HIF-I α mRNA accumulation with respect to the corresponding untreated cells, suggesting that A3 receptor stimulation does not regulate HIF- lα mRNA transcription. To confirm this hypothesis, A375 cells were pretreated with 10 μg/ml actinomycin D (Act-D) to inhibit de novo gene transcription. Then, A375 cells were cultured for 4 hours in hypoxia in the presence of increasing concentrations of Cl-IB-MECA (100 nM). We found that A3 receptor stimulation was able to increase HIF-lα protein expression also in the presence of Act-D (Fig. 16). HIF- lα has been shown to be degraded through the proteasome pathway during normoxia. The enzymatic hydroxylation of proline 564 of HIF-I α controls the turnover of the protein by tagging it for interaction with the von Hippel Lindau protein (Ivan 2001; Jaakkola, 2001; Yu 2001; Maxwell 1999). When cells are hypoxic, the proline residue is not hydroxylated and HIF- lα protein accumulates. The effect of hypoxia on Pro- 564 hydroxylation can be mimicked by transition metals like cobalt, iron chelators and by inhibitors of the prolyl hydroxylase enzymes (Ivan et al, 2001; Jaakkola et al., 2001).
We tested the ability of A3 adenosine receptor to modulate HIF- lα accumulation in the presence of the prolyl hydroxylase enzymes inhibitor, cobalt chloride (CoCl2). We observed that A3 receptor stimulation was able to increase the levels of HIF- lα protein also in CoCl2-treated cells (Fig. 17A). To determine if A3 receptor induces HIF- lα expression through a translation-dependent pathway, we determined HIF- lα protein modulation in the presence of the protein translation inhibitor, cycloheximide (CHX). To do this, A375 cells were cultured in normoxia for 4 hours in the presence of 100 μM CoCl2, preventing oxygen-dependent HIF-I α protein degradation, and then A375 cells were treated with 100 nM Cl-IB-MECA in the presence or absence of CHX (1 μM). In cells exposed to CHX5 Cl-IB-MECA failed to increase HIF-I α levels within 6 hours, as observed in the absence of CHX (Fig. 17B). Together, these results suggest that A3 receptor activation increases HIF- lα protein levels through a translation-dependent pathway. After return of hypoxic A375 cultures to normoxia the levels of HIF-lα protein decreased very rapidly and were abrogated after 15 minutes (Fig. 18A). Therefore, to study the effect of A3 receptor activation on HIF-I α degradation, A375 cells were incubated in hypoxia in the absence and in the presence of Cl-IB-MECA 100 nM. After 4 hours, melanoma cells were exposed to normoxia and a time-course of HIF-I α disappearance was performed. Within 15 minutes after the removal of hypoxic conditions, a decrease in HIF- lα protein could be seen, in the absence and in the presence of Cl-IB- MECA with unchanged degradation rate (Fig. 18B). These results indicate that A3 receptor activation is not able to prevent HIF- lα degradation in normoxic conditions.
The main intracellular signaling pathways sustained by A3 receptors during HIF-lα accumulation in hypoxia. It has been demonstrated that MAPK are involved in HIF- lα activation. To determine whether MAPK pathway was required for HIF-lα protein increase induced by A3 receptor activation, A375 cells were pretreated with U0126, which is a potent inhibitor of MEK1/2, an upstream regulator of the phosphorylation of p44/p42 (Favata 1998), or with the inhibitor of p38 MAPK, SB202190 (Kramer 1996). Cells were then exposed to Cl-IB-MECA 100 nM for 4 hours in hypoxia, and total cellular protein extracts were prepared for immunoblot assay of HIF-I α and tubulin protein levels. As shown in Fig. 19A, both MEK inhibitor, U0126 (10 and 30 μM), and p38 MAPK inhibitor, SB202190 (1 and 10 μM), were able to inhibit Cl-IB-MEC A- induced increase of HIF- 1 α protein expression. These results suggest that p44/p42 and p38 MAPK activity were required for the HIF- lα expression increase induced by A3 receptor activation.
Furthermore, to confirm that p44/p42 and p38 MAPK belong to the signaling pathways fired by A3 receptor stimulation, we also investigated endogenous p44/p42 and p38 MAPK activation levels in response to A3 receptor agonist treatment. A375 cells were incubated with increasing concentrations of Cl-IB-MECA (1-1000 nM) for 4 hours in hypoxia, and the total cellular protein extracts were used to determine levels of phospho- p44, phospho-p42, andphospho-p38.
As shown in Fig. 19B, phosphorylation of p44 and p42 was induced in response to nanomolar concentrations of Cl-IB-MECA and the induction of p44/p42 kinases phosphorylation status was maximum by the treatment of A3 receptor agonist 100 nM (Fig. 19C). Furthermore, we have monitored the activation levels of p38 MAPK upon A3 receptor stimulation by the detection of its phosphorylated form on Western blot. As can be seen in Fig. 19D, a strong increase in the phosphorylation of p38 MAPK was observed after 4 hours of A3 receptor stimulation in hypoxia. In particular, exposure of A375 cells to various concentrations of Cl-IB-MECA increased the phosphorylation of p38 MAPK in a dose-dependent manner (Fig. 19E). Phospho-p44, phospho-p42 and phospho-p38 blots were then stripped and reblotted with an antibody that equally recognizes total p44, p42 and p38 MAPKs. We found that the observed changes in phosphorylation level of p44, p42 and p38 MAPKs were not accompanied by a significative modulation in the expression levels of total proteins (Fig. 19 B-D).
DISCUSSION: To our knowledge, this is the first report which describes the role of adenosine in modulating the cellular response during hypoxia in an O2-sensitive cell.
Hypoxia represents one of the first events in the growth of the cancer; this process creates conditions that, on one hand, are conducive to the accumulation of extracellular adenosine and, on the other hand, stabilize hypoxia-inducible factors, such as HIF-lα (Winn, 1981; Decking 1997; Ledoux 2003).
The results of the present study indicate a new way by which hypoxia may contribute to cancer development, based on the natural pathways of adenosine receptor- mediated signaling. For the first time, here we demonstrate that adenosine is able to increase HIF- lα protein expression in response to hypoxia in a dose- and time-dependent manner in A375 human melanoma cells, whereas HIF-I β protein levels are not affected.
We have previously demonstrated that all four adenosine receptors are expressed in human melanoma A375 cells (Merighi, 2001). Here, we report that A3 receptor subtype mediates the observed adenosine effects on HIF- lα regulation in this cell line.
The effects of adenosine on HIF- lα protein accumulation are not mediated by A1, A2A or A2B receptors. In support of this conclusion, DPCPX, SCH 58261 and MRE 2029F20, adenosine receptor antagonists highly selective for A1, A2A and A2B receptors, respectively, did not block the stimulatory effect of adenosine on HIF- lα protein increase.
The conclusion that the effects of adenosine on HIF- lα accumulation are mediated via A3 receptors is supported by the observation that the stimulatory effects of this nucleoside on HIF- lα protein are mimicked by the A3 receptor agonist Cl-IB-MECA and inhibited by A3 receptor antagonists, MRE 3008F20 and MRE 3005F20. In particular, the potencies of these drugs are in agreement with their inhibitory equilibrium binding constant (Ki) observed in binding experiments for the adenosine A3 receptor (Merighi 2001).
Furthermore, the inhibition of A3 receptor expression at the mRNA and protein level is sufficient to block A3 receptor-induced HIF- loc protein accumulation. Therefore, our results indicate that the cell surface A3 adenosine receptor transduces extracellular hypoxic signals into the cell interior. A3 receptors are present in melanoma cells and their expression appears to be a bridge between the hypoxic insult and HIF- lα accumulation, regulating the cellular response to hypoxia, like an oxygen-sensing receptor. The extent to which A3 receptor influences the ability of tumor cells to respond to hypoxia will require further investigation.
Similar results obtained in different cells (keratinocytes, melanoma, osteosarcoma, glioblastoma) raised the concern that the A3 receptor stimulation effect on HIF- lα protein expression in hypoxia may be indiscriminate between normal and cancer cells, thereby demonstrating that this may be a general signaling pathway shared by many, if not all, cell types.
A3 adenosine receptor stimulation had no effect on HIF- lα mRNA accumulation, as observed by Real-Time RT-PCR experiments. Accordingly, Act-D experiments indicate that A3 receptor does not regulate HIF- lα protein expression through a transcription-dependent mechanism. The lack of adenosine effect on HIF-I α at transcriptional level is not surprising in view of the fact that hypoxic regulation of HIF-I α is primarily determined by stabilization of HIF-lα protein (Huang, 1998). In addition, we have obtained evidences that A3 adenosine receptors modulate HIF- lot protein levels through a translation-dependent pathway while did not affect HIF- lα oxygen-dependent degradation. Our data suggest that A3 adenosine receptors does not increase the half-life of HIF-lα protein while may increase the rate of HIF-lα protein synthesis, in a manner similar to the effect of various growth factors (Zhong 2000; Fukuda, 2002). Nevertheless, we cannot exclude the possibility that A3 adenosine receptor regulates the translation of a protein, which inhibits HIF- lα degradation. Phosphorylation and dephosphorylation activities have been suggested to be critical in the signaling pathway leading to HIF-I activation. Several reports demonstrated that hypoxia induces the phosphorylation of HIF-I α by p44/p42 and p38 MAPKs, which increases both HIF- lα nuclear localization and transcriptional activity (Semenza 2001CurrOpCB; Richard 1999BBRC; Berra2000; Richard 1999JBC; Conrad 1999; Sodhi 2000; Mottet D, 2003; Semenza 2002). In addition, adenosine has been shown to directly enhance MAPK activity in A375 human melanoma cells (Merighi et al., 2002) but also in non human cell lines stably transfected with the human A3 receptor (Hammarberg 2004; Schulte 2000-2002-2003). In the present study, we observed that p44/p42 and p38 MAPKs are necessary to increase HIF-I α levels but also that these kinases are included in the molecular signaling pathways generated by A3 receptor engagement. In conclusion, the present study demonstrates that adenosine, via A3 receptors, is able to increase the levels of HIF- lα through p44/p42 and p38 MAPK pathways. Actually, further studies are needed to evaluate the role of p44/p42 and p38 MAPK in the reduced turnover, increased life and transduction of HIF-I α protein in hypoxia. HIF- lα is overexpressed in tumors as a result of hypoxia and is involved in key aspects of tumor biology, such as angiogenesis, invasion and altered energy metabolism (Ratcliffe 2000). It is recognized that the inhibition of HIF-I activity represents a novel therapeutic approach to cancer therapy, especially in combination with angiogenesis inhibitors, which would further increase intratumoral hypoxia and thus provide an even greater therapeutic window for use of an HIF-inhibitor. Recent studies indicate that pharmacologic inhibition of HIF-lα and particularly of HIF -regulated genes that are important for cancer cell survival may be more advantageous than HIF-gene inactivation therapeutic approaches (Mabjeesh et al., 2003). Many normal tissues function at pθ2 values sufficient to activate HIF, and the system has important functions under normal physiological conditions (Hopfl, 2004). This will need to be considered in the development of pharmacological inhibitors for clinical use.
Given the ability of A3 adenosine receptor antagonists to block HIF- lα protein expression accumulation induced by adenosine, our data imply that A3 adenosine receptor antagonists may be useful in cancer therapy. In particular, we remark that in in vivo system the extracellular fluid of solid tumors contains increased levels of adenosine (Blay et al., 1997), the endogenous agonist responsible for adenosine receptor functions. Therefore, with A3 receptor antagonists in cancer therapy it may be possible to achieve tissue selectivity, such that a biological effect would only be observed in tumoral hypoxic cells, where high adenosine concentration increases HIF- lα accumulation.
Additional studies are warranted to determine whether A3 receptor antagonists can block the survival of hypoxic solid tumors.

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A method of treating cancer in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering an effective amount of an adenosine A3 receptor antagonist, wherein the cancer is a HIF- lot expressing cancer.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of cervical cancer, lung cancer, breast cancer, oligodendroglioma, orpharyngeal squamous cell carcinoma, ovarian cancer, oesophageal cancer, endometrial cancer, head and neck cancer, human lung carcinoma, human colon carcinoma, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer and gastrointestinal stromal tumor of the stomach.
3. The method of claim 1, wherein the cancer is further an A3 receptor expressing cancer.
4. The method of claim 1 , further comprising the administration of one or more additional cancer therapies.
5. The method of claim 4, wherein said additional cancer therapy is selected from the group consisting of chemotherapy, immunotherapy, radiation therapy, hormonal therapy, or surgery.
6. The method of claim 1, further comprising administering one or more anticancer agents.
7. The method of claim 6, wherein the anti-cancer agent is selected from the group consisting of a chemotherapeutic agent, an anti-angiogenic agent, a cytotoxic agent and a cancer therapeutic antibody.
8. The method of claim 1, wherein the A3 receptor antagonist is a compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound having the following general formulas:
Figure imgf000155_0001
Figure imgf000156_0001
wherein:
A is imidazole, pyrazole, or triazole;
R is -C(X)R1, -C(X)-N(R^2, -C(X)OR1, -C(X)SR1, -SObR1, — SObOR1, — SObSR1, or SOb- N(RJ)2 ;
R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, lower alkenyl, lower alkanoyl, or, if linked to a nitrogen atom, then taken together with the nitrogen atom, forms an azetidine ring or a 5-6 membered heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatoms such as N, O, S;
R2 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, aralkyl, substituted aralkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl;
R3 is furan, pyrrole, thiophene, benzofuran, indole, benzothiophene, optionally substituted with one or more substituents as described herein for substituted heteroaryl rings;
X iS O5 S5 Or NR1; and b is 1 or 2; or, the A3 receptor antagonist is a compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound having the following general formula:
Figure imgf000156_0002
wherein:
R is -C(X)R1, -C(X)-N(R^2, -C(X)OR1, -C(X)SR1, -SObR1, — SObOR1, — SObSR1, Or-SObN(R1);-;
R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, lower alkenyl, lower alkanoyl, or, if linked to a nitrogen atom, then taken together with the nitrogen atom, forms an azetidine ring or a 5-6 membered heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatoms such as N, O, S;
R2 is hydrogen, halogen, preferably chloro, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, aralkyl, substituted aralkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or substituted heteroaryl;
R3 is furan, pyrrole, thiophene, benzofuran, indole, benzothiophene, optionally substituted with one or more substituents as described herein for substituted heteroaryl rings;
X iS O5 S5 OrNR1J aUd b is 1 or 2.
9. The method of claim 8, wherein the A3 receptor antagonist is a compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound having the general formula HA: wherein:
A is imidazole, pyrazole, or triazole;
R is -C(X)R1, -C(X)-N(R^2, -C(X)OR1, -C(X)SR1, -SO6R1, -SO5OR1, — SObSR1, or SOb- N(R^2 ;
R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, lower alkenyl, lower alkanoyl, or, if linked to a nitrogen atom, then taken together with the nitrogen atom, forms an azetidine ring or a 5-6 membered heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatoms such as N, O, S;
R2 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, aralkyl, substituted aralkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl;
R3 is furan, pyrrole, thiophene, benzofuran, indole, benzothiophene, optionally substituted with one or more substituents as described herein for substituted heteroaryl rings;
Figure imgf000157_0001
and b is 1 or 2.
10. The method of claim 9, wherein the A3 receptor antagonist is a compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound wherein:
A is pyrazole; R is -C(X)R1, -C(X)-N(R1);., -C(X)OR1, -C(X)SR1, -SObR1, — SObOR1, — SObSR1, or SOb-N(R^2;
R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, lower alkenyl, lower alkanoyl, or, if linked to a nitrogen atom, then taken together with the nitrogen atom, forms an azetidine ring or a 5-6 membered heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatoms such as N, O, S;
R2 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, aralkyl, substituted aralkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl;
R3 is furan;
Figure imgf000158_0001
aUd b is 1 or 2.
11. The method of claim 105 wherein the A3 receptor antagonist is a compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound wherein:
A is pyrazole;
R is -C(O)R1, — C(O)- N(R1^5 -C(O)OR1, or -C(O)SR1;
R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, lower alkenyl, lower alkanoyl, or, if linked to a nitrogen atom, then taken together with the nitrogen atom, forms an azetidine ring or a 5-6 membered heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatoms such as N, O, S;
R2 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, aralkyl, substituted aralkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl; and
R3 is furan.
12. The method of claim 11 , wherein the A3 receptor antagonist is a compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound having the general formula HE
Figure imgf000159_0001
wherein R2 is alkyl and
R6 is aryl. substituted aryl , heteroaryl or substituted heteroaryl.
13. The method of claim 12, wherein the A3 receptor antagonist is the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt having one of the following structural formulas:
Figure imgf000159_0002
MRE-3005
Figure imgf000159_0003
MRE-3042
Figure imgf000159_0004
IL-11
Figure imgf000159_0005
IL-10 or
Figure imgf000160_0001
MRE-3008
14. A method of inhibiting the growth of a solid hypoxic tumor in a subject, comprising administering an effective amount of an adenosine A3 receptor antagonist.
15. The method of claim 14, wherein the growth of the solid hypoxic tumor is reduced by at least 10%.
16. The method of claim 14, wherein the growth of the solid hypoxic tumor is reduced by at least 30%.
17. The method of claim 14, wherein the growth of the solid hypoxic tumor is reduced by at least 60%.
18. A method for treating an HIF- 1 -mediated disorder in a subj ect comprising administering an effective amount of an adenosine A3 receptor antagonist.
19. The method of claim 18, wherein the adenosine A3 receptor antagonist reduces the level of expression of HIF-I α.
20. The method of claim 18, wherein the level of expression of HIF- 1 α is reduced by at least 10%.
21. The method of claim 18, wherein the HIF-I mediated disorder is selected from the group consisting of cancer, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, and asthma.
22. The method of claim 1, 14 or 18, further comprising the steps of (a) removing a tissue sample from the subject; and (b) measuring a HIF-I α level using a HIF- 1 α probe.
23. The method of claim 22, wherein the HIF-I α probe is selected from the group consisting of an antibody, an antigen, a nucleic acid, a protein, and a small molecule.
24. The method of claim 23, wherein the antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
25. The method of claim 24, wherein the antibody immunospecifically binds HIF-I α or a fragment or derivative thereof.
26. The method of claim 22, wherein the step of measuring a level of HIF-I α comprises testing at least one aliquot, said step of testing comprising:
(a) contacting the aliquot with an antibody that is immunospecific for HIF- 1 α, and
(b) detecting whether binding has occurred between the antibody and at least one species in the aliquot.
27. The method of claim 22, wherein the step of measuring a level of HIF-I α comprises testing at least one aliquot, said step of testing comprising:
(a) contacting the aliquots with an isolated nucleic acid that is hybridizable to the nucleic acid that encode HIF-I α, and
(b) detecting whether hybridization has occurred between the nucleic acid probe and at least one species in the aliquot.
28. A method for inhibiting the progression of cancer, in a subject, by administering a prophylactically effective amount of an A3 receptor antagonist, wherein the cancer is characterized by an overexpression of HIF-I α.
PCT/US2005/042551 2004-11-22 2005-11-22 Enhancing treatment of cancer and hif-1 mediated disoders with adenosine a3 receptor antagonists WO2007040565A2 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP05858564A EP1827445A2 (en) 2004-11-22 2005-11-22 Enhancing treatment of cancer and hif-1 mediated disoders with adenosine a3 receptor antagonists
CA002586420A CA2586420A1 (en) 2004-11-22 2005-11-22 Enhancing treatment of cancer and hif-1 mediated disoders with adenosine a3 receptor antagonists
JP2007543474A JP2008520746A (en) 2004-11-22 2005-11-22 Accelerated treatment of cancer and HIF-1 mediated diseases using an adenosine A3 receptor antagonist
AU2005336924A AU2005336924A1 (en) 2004-11-22 2005-11-22 Enhancing treatment of cancer and HIF-1 mediated disoders with adenosine A3 receptor antagonists
IL183307A IL183307A0 (en) 2004-11-22 2007-05-17 Enhancing treatment of cancer and hif-1 mediated disorders with adenosine a3 receptor antagonists

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US63055704P 2004-11-22 2004-11-22
US60/630,557 2004-11-22

Publications (3)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2007040565A2 true WO2007040565A2 (en) 2007-04-12
WO2007040565A9 WO2007040565A9 (en) 2007-07-05
WO2007040565A3 WO2007040565A3 (en) 2009-04-16

Family

ID=37906593

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2005/042551 WO2007040565A2 (en) 2004-11-22 2005-11-22 Enhancing treatment of cancer and hif-1 mediated disoders with adenosine a3 receptor antagonists

Country Status (6)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1827445A2 (en)
JP (1) JP2008520746A (en)
AU (1) AU2005336924A1 (en)
CA (1) CA2586420A1 (en)
IL (1) IL183307A0 (en)
WO (1) WO2007040565A2 (en)

Cited By (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009096377A1 (en) * 2008-01-29 2009-08-06 Eisai R & D Management Co., Ltd. Combined use of angiogenesis inhibitor and taxane
US7973160B2 (en) 2000-10-20 2011-07-05 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Nitrogen-containing aromatic derivatives
US8058474B2 (en) 2003-11-11 2011-11-15 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Urea derivative and process for preparing the same
JP2012508703A (en) * 2008-11-14 2012-04-12 バイエル・ファルマ・アクチェンゲゼルシャフト Aryl compounds having heterocyclic substituents and uses thereof
WO2014153363A1 (en) * 2013-03-18 2014-09-25 Northeastern University Method for generation of broadly neutralizing anti-pathogen antibodies
US8969379B2 (en) 2004-09-17 2015-03-03 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Pharmaceutical compositions of 4-(3-chloro-4-(cyclopropylaminocarbonyl)aminophenoxy)-7=methoxy-6-quinolinecarboxide
US9945862B2 (en) 2011-06-03 2018-04-17 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Biomarkers for predicting and assessing responsiveness of thyroid and kidney cancer subjects to lenvatinib compounds
US10259791B2 (en) 2014-08-28 2019-04-16 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. High-purity quinoline derivative and method for manufacturing same
US10517861B2 (en) 2013-05-14 2019-12-31 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Biomarkers for predicting and assessing responsiveness of endometrial cancer subjects to lenvatinib compounds
WO2021028382A1 (en) 2019-08-12 2021-02-18 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft [1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-c]quinazolin-5-amines
US11090386B2 (en) 2015-02-25 2021-08-17 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Method for suppressing bitterness of quinoline derivative
WO2022029063A1 (en) 2020-08-04 2022-02-10 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Pyrido[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-c]pyrimidin-5-amines
CN114574580A (en) * 2022-02-14 2022-06-03 山东大学 Application of targeted A2BR combined chemotherapy in treatment of triple negative breast cancer
US11369623B2 (en) 2015-06-16 2022-06-28 Prism Pharma Co., Ltd. Anticancer combination of a CBP/catenin inhibitor and an immune checkpoint inhibitor
US11547705B2 (en) 2015-03-04 2023-01-10 Merck Sharp & Dohme Llc Combination of a PD-1 antagonist and a VEGF-R/FGFR/RET tyrosine kinase inhibitor for treating cancer
US12220398B2 (en) 2015-08-20 2025-02-11 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Tumor therapeutic agent
US12226409B2 (en) 2017-05-16 2025-02-18 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Treatment of hepatocellular carcinoma

Families Citing this family (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2004080462A1 (en) 2003-03-10 2004-09-23 Eisai Co., Ltd. c-Kit KINASE INHIBITOR
EP1925676A4 (en) 2005-08-02 2010-11-10 Eisai R&D Man Co Ltd Method for assay on the effect of vascularization inhibitor
CN101443009A (en) 2006-05-18 2009-05-27 卫材R&D管理有限公司 Antitumor agent for thyroid cancer
CN101511793B (en) 2006-08-28 2011-08-03 卫材R&D管理有限公司 Antineoplastic agents against undifferentiated gastric cancer
AU2008211952B2 (en) 2007-01-29 2012-07-19 Eisai R & D Management Co., Ltd. Composition for treatment of undifferentiated-type of gastric cancer
WO2009060945A1 (en) 2007-11-09 2009-05-14 Eisai R & D Management Co., Ltd. Combination of anti-angiogenic substance and anti-tumor platinum complex
CN102958523B (en) 2010-06-25 2014-11-19 卫材R&D管理有限公司 Antitumor agent using compounds having kinase inhibitory effect in combination
MX2013009931A (en) 2011-04-18 2013-10-01 Eisai R&D Man Co Ltd Therapeutic agent for tumor.
US9334239B2 (en) 2012-12-21 2016-05-10 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Amorphous form of quinoline derivative, and method for producing same

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2001019360A2 (en) * 1999-09-10 2001-03-22 Can-Fite Biopharma Ltd. Pharmaceutical compositions comprising an adenosine receptor agonist or antagonist
US6326390B1 (en) * 1998-08-25 2001-12-04 King Pharmaceuticals Reseach And Development, Inc. Use of adenosine A3 receptor antagonists to inhibit tumor growth
US6407236B1 (en) * 1998-09-16 2002-06-18 Medco Research, Inc. Adenosine A3 receptor modulators
US20030144266A1 (en) * 1998-09-16 2003-07-31 Baraldi Pier Giovanni Adenosine A3 receptor modulators

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6326390B1 (en) * 1998-08-25 2001-12-04 King Pharmaceuticals Reseach And Development, Inc. Use of adenosine A3 receptor antagonists to inhibit tumor growth
US6407236B1 (en) * 1998-09-16 2002-06-18 Medco Research, Inc. Adenosine A3 receptor modulators
US20030144266A1 (en) * 1998-09-16 2003-07-31 Baraldi Pier Giovanni Adenosine A3 receptor modulators
WO2001019360A2 (en) * 1999-09-10 2001-03-22 Can-Fite Biopharma Ltd. Pharmaceutical compositions comprising an adenosine receptor agonist or antagonist

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
VAUPEL, P. ET AL.: 'The Role of Hypoxia-Induced Factors in Tumor Progression' THE ONCOLOGIST vol. 9, no. SUP.5, September 2004, pages 10 - 17 *

Cited By (25)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7973160B2 (en) 2000-10-20 2011-07-05 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Nitrogen-containing aromatic derivatives
US8372981B2 (en) 2000-10-20 2013-02-12 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Nitrogen-containing aromatic derivatives
US8058474B2 (en) 2003-11-11 2011-11-15 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Urea derivative and process for preparing the same
US8969379B2 (en) 2004-09-17 2015-03-03 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Pharmaceutical compositions of 4-(3-chloro-4-(cyclopropylaminocarbonyl)aminophenoxy)-7=methoxy-6-quinolinecarboxide
WO2009096377A1 (en) * 2008-01-29 2009-08-06 Eisai R & D Management Co., Ltd. Combined use of angiogenesis inhibitor and taxane
JP2012508703A (en) * 2008-11-14 2012-04-12 バイエル・ファルマ・アクチェンゲゼルシャフト Aryl compounds having heterocyclic substituents and uses thereof
US9945862B2 (en) 2011-06-03 2018-04-17 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Biomarkers for predicting and assessing responsiveness of thyroid and kidney cancer subjects to lenvatinib compounds
US11598776B2 (en) 2011-06-03 2023-03-07 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Biomarkers for predicting and assessing responsiveness of thyroid and kidney cancer subjects to lenvatinib compounds
WO2014153363A1 (en) * 2013-03-18 2014-09-25 Northeastern University Method for generation of broadly neutralizing anti-pathogen antibodies
US9782428B2 (en) 2013-03-18 2017-10-10 Northeastern University Method for generation of broadly neutralizing anti-pathogen antibodies
US10517861B2 (en) 2013-05-14 2019-12-31 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Biomarkers for predicting and assessing responsiveness of endometrial cancer subjects to lenvatinib compounds
US10822307B2 (en) 2014-08-28 2020-11-03 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. High-purity quinoline derivative and method for manufacturing same
US10259791B2 (en) 2014-08-28 2019-04-16 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. High-purity quinoline derivative and method for manufacturing same
US10407393B2 (en) 2014-08-28 2019-09-10 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. High-purity quinoline derivative and method for manufacturing same
US11186547B2 (en) 2014-08-28 2021-11-30 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. High-purity quinoline derivative and method for manufacturing same
US11090386B2 (en) 2015-02-25 2021-08-17 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Method for suppressing bitterness of quinoline derivative
US11547705B2 (en) 2015-03-04 2023-01-10 Merck Sharp & Dohme Llc Combination of a PD-1 antagonist and a VEGF-R/FGFR/RET tyrosine kinase inhibitor for treating cancer
US12083112B2 (en) 2015-03-04 2024-09-10 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Combination of a PD-1 antagonist and a VEGFR/FGFR/RET tyrosine kinase inhibitor for treating cancer
US11369623B2 (en) 2015-06-16 2022-06-28 Prism Pharma Co., Ltd. Anticancer combination of a CBP/catenin inhibitor and an immune checkpoint inhibitor
US12220398B2 (en) 2015-08-20 2025-02-11 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Tumor therapeutic agent
US12226409B2 (en) 2017-05-16 2025-02-18 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Treatment of hepatocellular carcinoma
CN114466850A (en) * 2019-08-12 2022-05-10 拜耳股份有限公司 [1,2,4]Triazolo[1,5-C]quinazolin-5-amine
WO2021028382A1 (en) 2019-08-12 2021-02-18 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft [1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-c]quinazolin-5-amines
WO2022029063A1 (en) 2020-08-04 2022-02-10 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Pyrido[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-c]pyrimidin-5-amines
CN114574580A (en) * 2022-02-14 2022-06-03 山东大学 Application of targeted A2BR combined chemotherapy in treatment of triple negative breast cancer

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CA2586420A1 (en) 2007-04-12
AU2005336924A1 (en) 2007-04-12
JP2008520746A (en) 2008-06-19
WO2007040565A9 (en) 2007-07-05
IL183307A0 (en) 2008-04-13
EP1827445A2 (en) 2007-09-05
WO2007040565A3 (en) 2009-04-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2007040565A2 (en) Enhancing treatment of cancer and hif-1 mediated disoders with adenosine a3 receptor antagonists
KR102676705B1 (en) How to Treat Cancer
JP7365381B2 (en) 1-[4-Bromo-5-[1-ethyl-7-(methylamino)-2-oxo-1,2-] for the treatment of cancers associated with genetic abnormalities of platelet-derived growth factor receptor alpha. Use of dihydro-1,6-naphthyridin-3-yl]-2-fluorophenyl]-3-phenylurea and analogs
AU2017241837B2 (en) Substituted aminopurine compounds, compositions thereof, and methods of treatment therewith
US20060204502A1 (en) Enhancing treatment of cancer and HIF-1 mediated disorders with adenosine A3 receptor antagonists
Lee et al. Suppression of inflammation response by a novel A3 adenosine receptor agonist thio-Cl-IB-MECA through inhibition of Akt and NF-κB signaling
CN114727996A (en) Azacitidine in combination with vinpocetine, Girestinib, midostaurin or other compounds for the treatment of leukemia or myelodysplastic syndrome
AU2013202305A1 (en) Methods for treating cancer using TOR kinase inhibitor combination therapy
WO2009011897A1 (en) Combinations for the treatment of b-cell proliferative disorders
CN113194752A (en) Combination therapy for PI3K related diseases or disorders
CN112512527A (en) Combinations of enzastaurin and BTK inhibitors and uses thereof
EP3493847A2 (en) Combination of glucagon receptor antagonists and pi3k pathway inhibitors for the treatment of cancer
JP2023080357A (en) Methods for treating lymphoid malignancies
CN113164415A (en) Combined use of epratuzole and Abelix in women suffering from breast cancer
US20110151020A1 (en) Active substance combination with gemcitabine for the treatment of epithelial cancer
Pasquini et al. Anxiety levels and related pharmacological drug treatment: a memorandum for the third millennium
Rochlitz et al. Combination of bevacizumab and 2-weekly pegylated liposomal doxorubicin as first-line therapy for locally recurrent or metastatic breast cancer. A multicenter, single-arm phase II trial (SAKK 24/06)
CN110996955A (en) Treatment of hepatocellular carcinoma characterized by hepatitis B virus infection
JP2022524047A (en) Method for determining efficacy
KR102795129B1 (en) Treatment of hepatocellular carcinoma characterized by hepatitis B virus infection
EA046722B1 (en) DOSE OF BRUTON&#39;S TYROSINE KINASE INHIBITOR

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2586420

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 183307

Country of ref document: IL

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2007543474

Country of ref document: JP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2005336924

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2005858564

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2005336924

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20051122

Kind code of ref document: A

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2005336924

Country of ref document: AU

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2005858564

Country of ref document: EP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 2005858564

Country of ref document: EP